3000+ readings in Psychology

Here, we have listed 3000+ books and articles which will be useful for Psychology Learners across the spectrum. We will gradually refine the list, categorize it and add to it. But, for now, here's the list, in order of relevance for Bachelors and Masters students:

  • Sarason, I.G., Sarason, B.R. (2005). Abnormal Psychology: The Problem of Maladaptive Behaviour. Prentice-Hall of India: New Delhi.
  • American Psychiatric Association (2000). Diagnostic and statistical manual of mental disorders, Fourth Edition, Text Revision: DSM-IV-TR. Washington, DC: American Psychiatric Publishing
  • Baron, R.A. and Byrne, D. (2006) Social Psychology, Prentice Hall of India (10 th Edition), New Delhi.
  • Hurlock, Elizabeth B. (1980). Developmental Psychology: A Life-Span Approach, Prentice Hall, New Delhi.
  • Kerlinger, F.N. (2007), Foundation of Behavioural Research (10th reprint), Delhi, Surjeet publications.
  • Singh, AK. (2009). Test Measurements and Research Methods in Behavioural Sciences (5 th edition). Bharti Bhawan Publishers & Distributors.
  • Garret, H. E. (2005). Statistics in Psychology and Education. Jain publishing, India.
  • Gibson, R.L. & Mitchell, M. H.(2008). Introduction to Counseling and Guidance. New Delhi: Pearson Prentice Hall.
  • Myers, David G. (2010) Social Psychology (10th ed.). New York: McGraw-Hill.
  • Veeraraghavan, Vimala (Ed) (2009). Handbook of Forensic Psychology. Select Scientific Publishers, New Delhi.
  • Sternberg, R.J. (2009). Applied Cognitive Psychology: Perceiving, Learning, and Remembering. London: Cengage.
  • Robbins, S.P. (2005). Organisational behaviour (11th Ed.). New Jersey: Pearson Education.
  • Anastasi, A. (2003). Psychological Testing (5th ed.). Macmillan: New York.
  • Luthans, F. (2007). Organisational Behaviour, 11th Ed. New York: McGraw Hill.
  • Cassidy, T. ( 1997). Environmental Psychology: Behaviour and Experience in Context, Psychology Press, U.K.
  • Solso, R.L. (2006). Cognitive Psychology. New Delhi: Pearson Education.
  • Morgan, C. T., King, R. A., Weisz, J. R. & Schopler, J. (1997). Introduction to Psychology (7 th edition). New Delhi: Tata McGraw-Hill
  • Parameswaran, E.G. & Beena, C. (2002) An Invitation to Psychology (2nd edition), Hyderabad, (India): Neelkamal Publications Pvt. Ltd.
  • Baron, R.A. and Greenberg, J. & (2003). Behaviour in Organisations: Understanding and managing the human side of work, 8th Ed. New Delhi: Prentice Hall of India
  • Groth-Marnat, Gary. (2003). Handbook of Psychological Assessment (4th ed.). New Jersey: John Wiley & Sons, Inc.
  • Newstorm, J.W., & Davis, K. (2002).Organisational Behaviour: Human Behaviour at Work. New Delhi: Tata McGraw-Hill.
  • Hunt, R. R., & Ellis, H.C. (2006). Fundamentals of Cognitive Psychology. New Delhi: Tata McGraw Hill.
  • Baron, R.A., Branscombe, N. R., & Byrne, D. (2009). Social Psychology (12th ed.). Boston, MA: Pearson/Allyn and Bacon.
  • Bonnes, M. Secchiaroli, G (1995). Environmental Psychology - A psychosocial introduction, London: Sage Publication
  • Guilford, J.P. (1973). Fundamental Statistics in Psychology and Education. McGraw Hill Book company Inc. New York.
  • Carson, R., Butcher, J.N., & Mineka, S. (2005). Abnormal Psychology and Modern Life (3rd Indian reprint). Pearson Education (Singapore).
  • Bell. P.A., Greene, T.C., Fisher, J.D. and Baum, A. (2001). Environmental Psychology, Fifth Edition, Harcourt College Publishers.
  • Schultz, D.P. and Schultz, S.E.(1990). Psychology and Industry today, An introduction to industrial and organizational psychology, 5th edition, NY. McMillon.
  • French, W.L., Bell, C. H., & Vohra, V. (2006) Organisational Development. 6th Ed. New Delhi. Dorling Kindersley (India) Pvt. Ltd.
  • Durand, V. K. & Barlow, D. H. (2000). Abnormal Psychology: An Introduction. Stamford: Thomson Learning.
  • Morgan, C.T. and King, R.A. (2010). (11th edition). Introduction to Psychology. McGraw Hill Book Company, New Delhi.
  • Gladding, Samuel T. (2003). Counselling: A Comprehensive Profession (5th ed.). Prentice Hall, Englewood Cliffs: NJ.
  • Lezak, M.D. (1995). Neuropsychological Assessment (3rd ed.). New York: Oxford University Press.
  • Trull, T.J. (2005). Clinical Psychology (7'" Ed.). USA: Thomson Learning, Inc.
  • Gabbard, Glen O., Beck, Judith S. and Holmes, Jeremy (2005). Oxford Textbook of Psychotherapy, 1st Edition. Oxford: Oxford University Press.
  • Hjelle, L.A., Zieglar, D.J.(1992). Personality theories. Basic assumptions, research, and applications.3 rd ed.McGraw Hill.
  • Kuppuswamy, B (1980), An Introduction to Social Psychology, 2nd Revised edition, (reprinted, 2004), Asia Publishing House, Mumbai.
  • American Psychological Association. Publication Manual of the American Psychological Association (Sixth Edition, 2009). Washington, DC.
  • Davison, G.C., Neale, J.M., Kring, A.M. Abnormal Psychology, 9th edition. Wiley & Sons:USA.
  • Carson, R. C., Butcher, J. N., & Mineka, S. (2003) Abnormal Psychology and Modern Life. Pearson Education: New Delhi.
  • Kolb Bryan and Ian Q.Whishaw (2008). Fundamental of Human Neuropsychology. Worth publishers, NY
  • Baron, R.A. (2001). Psychology. New Delhi: Prentice Hall of India.
  • Asthana, H. S. and Bhushan, B. (2007). Statistics for Social Sciences (with SPSS application). Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi.
  • Kumar. R (2006) Research Methodology. New Delhi: Dorling Kingsley
  • Minium, E. W., King, B. M., & Bear, G. (2001). Statistical Reasoning in Psychology and Education. Singapore: John-Wiley.
  • Robbins, S.P., Judge, T.A., & Sanghi, S. (2009). Organisational Behaviour, 13th Ed. New Delhi: Pearson-Prentice Hall.
  • American Psychiatric Association (1994). Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorder (4th ed.) (DSM-IV), Washington DC: American Psychiatric Association.
  • Reed, S.K. (2010). Cognition: Theories and Applications. London: Cengage.
  • Dixon-Woods M, Booth A, Sutton AJ. Synthesizing qualitative research: a review of published reports. Qualitative Research 2007; 7(3): 375-422.
  • Kaplan, Harold I., M.D., and Sadock, Benjamin J. M.D. Kaplan and Sadock’s Synopsis of Psychiatry: Behavioral Sciences, Clinical Psychiatry. 8th edition. Baltimore: Williams and Wilkins, 2002.
  • Rao, Narayana S. (2008): Counseling and Guidance. New Delhi: Tata Mc-Graw Hill.
  • Bell, P.A., Fisher, J.D., Baum, and Greene, T.C. (Eds.). Environmental Psychology (latest edition), New York: Holt, Rinehart and Winston.
  • French, Wendell L., Bell, Cecil. (2006) Organisation development: behavioural science interventions for organisation improvement. Englewood Cliffs, N.J.: Prentice-Hall. 
  • Plante, T. G. (2005). Contemporary Clinical Psychology (2nd Ed.). New Jersey: John Wiley & Sons, Inc.
  • Levinthal, Charles F. (2007). Introduction to Physiological Psychology. PHI Learning Private Limited, India.
  • Barlow, D.H., & Durand, V.M. 2007. Abnormal Psychology: An Integrative Approach. Thomson Learning Inc., New Delhi.
  • Moorhead. G and Griffin.R.W (2004) Organisation Behaviour: Managing People and Organisations 7th edition New York, Houghton Mifflin Company.
  • Wilcox, R. R. (1996). Statistics for Social Sciences. San Diego: Academic Press.
  • Aron, A., Aron, E. N., Coups, E.J. (2007). Statistics for Psychology. Delhi: Pearson Education.
  • Guilford, J. P., & Fructore, B. (1978). Fundamental Statistics for Psychology and Education. N.Y.: McGraw-Hill.
  • Coffey, R. R., Cook, C.W., & Hunsaker, P.L. (1997). Management and Organisational Behaviour, 2nd Ed. New Delhi. McGraw- Hill Companies.
  • Rogers, C. R. (1951). Client-centered therapy: Its current practice, implications and theory. London: Constable.
  • Corey, G. (2008). Theory and Practice of Counseling and Psychotherapy. USA: The Thompson Brooks.
  • Anastasi, A. & Urbina, S. (2003). Psychological Testing (7th edi). Delhi: Pearson Education.
  • Lorraine Bell, (2003) . Managing Intense Emotions and Overcoming SelfDestructive Habits. Hove: New York.
  • Hurlock, Elizabeth B. (2004) Child Development. Tata Mcgraw- Hill, New Delhi.
  • Proshansky, H.M., lttleson, W.H. and Rivlin, L.G. (Eds.). Environmental Psychology (latest edition), New York: Holt, Rinehart & Winston.
  • Baron, R.A. (2010). Introduction to Psychology, Wadsworth publishing Co., NJ
  • Klerman, G.L., Weissman, M.M., Rounsaville, B.J. & Chevron, E.S. (1984). Interpersonal Psychotherapy of depression. New York: Academic Press.
  • Tonu Malim & Ann Birch (1998). Introductory Psychology. Macmillan Press, London.
  • Sharma, R., 2006. Abnormal Psychology. Atlantic Publishers & Distributors: New Delhi.
  • Sandura K. Ciccarelli & Glenn E. Meyer (2007). Psychology. Pashupati Printers.
  • Bartol, C.R. and Bartol, A.M. (2008). Introduction to Forensic Psychology: Research and Applications. (2nd edition) Sage Publications, New Delhi
  • Lewis, M. & Haviland-Jones. J.M (2000). Handbook of Emotions. (2nd ed). NewYork: Guildford.
  • Gleitman, L. R., Liberman, M., & Osherson, D. N. (Eds.) (2000). An Invitation to Cognitive Science, 2nd Ed. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.
  • Norman L.Munn, L. Dodge Fernald. JR., Peter S. Fernald. (1967). Introduction to Psychology. Oxford & IBH Publishing co.,
  • Gladding, Samuel T. (2009). Counseling: A Comprehensive Profession. Pearson Education.
  • E.G Parameswaran, C.Beena (2002). An Invitation to Psychology. Neelkamal Publications.
  • Bennett, Paul. 2005. Abnormal and Clinical Psychology: An Introductory Textbook, 2nd Ed. Open University Press, McGraw-Hill Education: England.
  • Kaplan, R. M., & Saccuzzo, D. (2001). Psychological Testing: Principles, Applications, and Issues (5th Ed.). Pacific Grove, CA: Wadsworth.
  • Elhance, D. N., and Elhance, V. (1988). Fundamentals of Statistics. Kitab Mahal, Allahabad.
  • Coon, D. & Mitterer, J.O.(2008). Psychology: A Journey. (3rd edition) Delhi (India): Thomson Wadsworth.
  • Meichenbaum, D. (1977). Cognitive Behavioural Modification: An Integrative Approach. New York: Plenum Press.
  • Sherif, M. (1936). The Psychology of Social Norms. New York: Harper and Row.
  • Semple, D., Smyth, R. Burns, J., DArjee, R. & McIntosh, A. (2005) Oxford Handbook of Psychiatry. London: OUP.
  • Hall, C.S., Lindzey, G., Campbell, J. B. (1997) Theories of Personality. New York: Wiley.
  • Murphy, K.R., Davidshofer, C.O. (2005). Psychological Testing: Principles and Applications (6'"ed.). New Jersey: Pearson Education International.
  • Nagar, A. L., and Das, R. K. (1983). Basic Statistics. Oxford University Press, Delhi.
  • Baron, R.A.(1999). Essentials of Psychology (2 nd edition). USA: Allyn and Bacon.
  • Sommers-Flanagan, John., Sommers-Flanagan, Rita. (2004). Counseling and Psychotherapy Theories in Context and Practice: Skills, Strategies, and Techniques. Hoboken, New Jersey: John Wiley & Sons, Inc.
  • Barlow, D. H., & Durand, V. M. (2005). Abnormal Psychology: An Integrative Approach (4th ed). Belmont, CA: Thomson-Wadsworth.
  • B.L. Aggrawal (2009). Basic Statistics. New Age International Publisher, Delhi.
  • Aggarwal, Y.P. (1990). Statistical Methods – Concept, Applications, and Computation. New Delhi : Sterling Publishers Pvt. Ltd.
  • Siegel S. and Castellan N.J. (1988) Non-parametric Statistics for the Behavioral Sciences (2nd edition). New York: McGraw Hill.
  • Mussen, P. H, Conger, J.J & et.al (1984) Child Development and Personality (6 th edition) Harper & Row, Publishers, New York
  • McBurney D.H. & Whitle T.L. (2007), Research Methods, 7, New Delhi, Thomson Wadsworth.
  • Yale, G. U., and M.G. Kendall (1991). An Introduction to the Theory of Statistics. Universal Books, Delhi.
  • Mischel, Walter. 1968. Personality and Assessment. New York: Wiley.
  • Wampold BE & Drew CJ. (1990) Theory and Application of Statistics. New York: McGraw-Hill.
  • Feldman, R . S. (2008). Essentials of Understanding Psychology. New Delhi: Tata McGraw Hill.
  • Galotti , K.M. (2008). Cognitive Psychology In and Out of the Laboratory. Canada: Nelson Education.
  • Galotti, K.M. (2008). Cognitive Psychology: Perception, Attention, and Memory. London: Cengage.
  • Gardner, H. (1983). Frames of mind: The Theory of Multiple Intelligence. New York: Basic Book Inc.
  • Hall, C. S., Lindzey, G. & Campbell, J. B. (2009). Theories of Personality. Delhi: Wiley- India.
  • Hall, C.S., Lindzey, G. and Campbell, J.B. (2004).Theories of Personality (Fourth Edition). New York: Wiley
  • Gabbard, Glen O. (2009). Textbook of Psychotherapeutic Treatments. U.S.A: American Psychiatric Publishing, Inc.
  • Carson, R. C., Butcher, J. N., & Mineka, S. (2002). Clinical assessment and treatment. In Fundamentals of Abnormal Psychology and Modern Life. New York: Allyn & Bacon.
  • Luria, A. R. (1973). The working brain. Harmondsworth, England:Penguin.
  • Fred Luthans, (1998). Organizational Behaviour, International Eighth edition, Irwin McGraw Hill.
  • Maddi, S. R. (1996). Personality theories: A comparative analysis (6 th ed.). Pacific Grove, Calif: Brooks/Cole.
  • Mangal, S.K. 2006. Abnormal Psychology. Sterling Publishers: New Delhi.
  • Agarwal, Rita (2001) Stress in Life and Work New Delhi, Response Books, Sage Publications.
  • Beck, Judith S. (1995). Cognitive Therapy: basics and beyond. New York, Guilford
  • Filskov, S. B., & Bold, T. J (1981). Handbook of Clinical Neuropsychology. New York: Wiley-Interscience.
  • De, Lenzo.D.A.& Robins.S.P(1993) Personnel / Human Resource Management; 3rd Ed. New Delhi, Prentice Hall of India Pvt.India.
  • Wikipedia, The free encyclopedia.
  • Bales. R. F. (1950). Interaction process analysis: A method for the study of small groups. Cambridge, Mass: Addison – Wesley.
  • Daniel Goleman (1995) . Emotional Intelligence. Bantom Books.
  • Northcraft, Gregory B., and Margaret A. Neale. (1990). Organisational Behaviour: A Management Challenge. Chicago: The Dryden Press,.
  • Moos, R.H. (1976). The Human Context: Environmental Determinants of Behavior, John Wiley & Sons, Inc.
  • Nelson-Jones, R. (2009). Introduction to Counselling Skills. Third Edition, Sage Publications
  • Suman (2008). Emotional competency and teaching competency of teacher and its effects on the students academic achievement. Unpublished thesis.
  • Coleman, J.C. (2000). Abnormal Psychology and Modern Life. Allyn & Bacon, New Delhi.
  • Rathus, S.A. (2008). Psychology: Concepts & Connections. (9th ed). Canada: Wadsworth.
  • Howard AF, Balneaves LG, Bottorff JL(2007). Ethnocultural women’s experiences of breast cancer: a qualitative meta-study. Cancer nursing 30(4): E27-35.
  • Goode, W J & Hatt P K (1981). Methods in Social Research. Singapore: McGraw- Hill.
  • Srivastava, A.B.L. & Sharma, K.K. (1974). Elementary Statistics in Psychology and Education. New Delhi : Sterling Publishers Pvt. Ltd.
  • Lippitt, Gordon L., Peter Longseth, and Jack Mossop. (1985) Implementing Organisational Change. San Francisco: Jossey-Bass,.
  • Gupta, S.C.(1990) Fundamentals of Statistics. Himalaya Publishing House, Mumbai
  • MacEachen, E et al. (2006). Systematic review of the qualitative literature on return to work after injury. Scandinavian Journal of Work Environment & Health; 32(4): 257-269.
  • Sims, A. (2002). Symptoms in the mind: An Introduction to Descriptive Psychopathology (3rd edition). Edinburgh
  • McGuigan, F.J. (1990): Experimental Psychology: A Methodological Approach. New York : Printice Hall.
  • Kaufman, A. S., & Kaufman, N. L. (2004). Kaufinan Assessment Battery for Children, Second Edition. Circle Pines, MN: Pearson (AGS).
  • Ivancevich, John M., and Michael T. Matteson. (1990) Organisational Behaviour and Management. Homewood, IL: Richard D. Irwin, Inc.,.
  • Korchin, S.J. (2004). Modem Clinical Psychology: Principles of Intervention in the Clinic and Community. New Delhi: CBS Publishers & Distributers.
  • Recardo, Ronald J. (2000) “Best Practices in Organisations Experiencing Extensive and Rapid Change.” National Productivity Review. Summer.
  • Sani, F., and Todman, J. (2006). Experimental Design and Statistics for Psychology. A first course book. Blackwell Publishing.
  • Sanders, Diana & Wills, Frank (2005). Cognitive Therapy: An Introduction, 2nd edition. London: Sage publications.
  • Liebert, R. M. & Spiegler, M. D. (1987) Personality: Strategies and Issues. Homewood, IL: The Dorsey Press.
  • Shaffer, Rima. (2000) Principles of Organisation Development. American Society for Training and Development,
  • Eysenck, M. W. (2004). Psychology: An International Perspective. New York: Psychology Press.
  • Dyer, William G. (1989) “Team Building: A Microcosm of the Past, Present, and Future of O.D.” Academy of Management OD Newsletter. Winter.
  • Asthana, H. S. and Bhushan, B. (2007). Statistics for Social Sciences ( with SPSS Application). Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi.
  • U.S. Department of Labor. Bureau of Labor Statistics. “Lost-Worktime Injuries and Illnesses, Characteristics and Resulting Time Away from Work.” News Press Release. 13 December 2005.
  • Meyer, Pat. “Preventing Workplace Violence Starts with Recognising Warning Signs and Taking Action.” Nation’s Restaurant News. 28 February 2000.
  • de Shazer, Steve. (1985). Keys to solution in brief therapy. New York: Norton.
  • Neville, Haig. “Workplace Violence Prevention Strategies.” Memphis Business Journal. 8 September 2000.
  • Garret, H.E. & Woodwarth, R.S. (1969). Statistics in Psychology and Education. Bombay : Vakils, Feffer & Simons Pvt. Ltd.
  • Pareek, U. (2008). Understanding Organisational Behaviour, 2nd Ed. New Delhi. Oxford University Press.
  • Guilford, J.P. & Benjamin, F. (1973). Fundamental Statistics in Psychology and Education. New York : McGraw Hill Book Co.
  • Pervin,L.A.(1989).Personality:Theory and research(5 th edition).New York:Wiley.
  • McDavid, J. M. & Harari, H. (1994) Social Psychology: Individuals, Groups & Societies. CBS Publishers: New Delhi
  • Rausch, E., Sherman, H., & Washbush, J. B. (2002). Defining and assessing competencies for competency-based, outcome-focused management development. The Journal of Management Development, 21, 184-200
  • Dove, Rick. (1997) “The Principles of Change.” Automotive Manufacturing and Production. March.
  • Rogers, C. R. (1961). On Becoming a Person: A Therapist’s View of Psychotherapy. London: Constable.
  • Ferguson, G.A. (1974). Statistical Analysis in Psychology and Education. New York : McGraw Hill Book Co.
  • Sanchez, J. I., &. Levine, E. L. (2009). What is (or should be) the difference between competency modeling and traditional job analysis? Human Resource Management Review, 19, 53–63
  • Golden, C. J., Hammeke, T. A., &Purisch, A. D. (1980). The Luria-Nebraska Neuropsychological Battery. Los Angeles: Western Psychological Services.
  • Schmidt, F.L., & Hunter, J.E. (1998). The validity and utility of selection methods in personnel psychology: Practice and theoretical implications of research findings. Psychological Bulletin, 124, 262-274
  • Ulrich, D. and Brockbank, W. (2005) The HR Value Proposition. Boston: Harvard Business School Press
  • Secord, P.F. and Backman, C.W. (1974). Social Psychology. McGraw Hill , New York
  • Wood. R., & Payne, T. (1998). Competency-Based Recruitment and Selection. Wiley
  • Shandler, D. (2000). Competency and the Learning Organisation. Crisp Learning.
  • Cherrington, David J. (1994) Organisational Behaviour: The Management of Individual and Organisational Performance. Boston: Allyn and Bacon,
  • Sim J & Madden S. Illness experience in fibromyalgia syndrome: A metasynthesis of qualitative studies.” Social Science & Medicine 2008; 67(1): 57-67.
  • D’ Amato, M. R. (1970). Experimental Psychology: Methodology, Psychophysics and Learning. Tokyo: McGraw-Hill Kogakusha, Ltd.
  • Skinner, B. F. (1938). The behaviour of organisms: An experimental analysis. New York: Appleton-Century-Crofts.
  • Desimone, R.L., Werner, J.M. & Harris, D.M., Human Resource Development, Thomson: Singapore.
  • Skinner, B. F. (1953). Science and Human Behaviour. New York: Free Press.
  • Dwivedi,R.S, Human Relations And Organisational Behaviour: A Global Perspective, Macmillan: ND
  • Spencer, L M. in Cherniss, C. and D. Goleman, eds. (2001) “The economic value of emotional intelligence competencies and EIC-based HR programs”, in The Emotionally Intelligent Workplace: How to Select for, Measure, and Improve Emotional Intelligence in Individuals, Groups and Organisations. San Francisco, CA: Jossey-Bass/Wiley
  • Exner, J. E. (1993). The Rorschach: A comprehensive system: Vol. 1. Basic foundations (3rd ed.). New York: Wiley.
  • Spencer, L., & Spencer, S. (1993). Competence at Work: Models for Superior Performance. Wiley
  • McDonald, Jane. “Murder at Work.” Risk Management. March 2001.
  • Torrance, E.P. (1974). Torrance tests of creative thinking. Ginn & Company (Xerox Corporation), Lexington: MA.
  • Gibson, James L., John M. Ivancevich, and James H. Donnelly Jr. (1994) Organisations: Behaviour, Structure, Processes. 8th ed. Boston: Richard D. Irwin,
  • Townsend, J. C. (1953). Introduction to Experimental Methods. New York: McGraw-Hill.
  • Goodstein, Leonard D., and W. Warner Burke. (1991)”Creating Successful Organisation Change.” Organisational Dynamics. Spring.
  • U.S. Department of Justice. Bureau of Justice Statistics. “Crime and Victims Statistics.” Available from http://www.ojp.usdoj.gov/bjs/cvict.htm. Retrieved on 11 May 2006.
  • McEvoy , G., Hayton, J., Wrnick, A., Mumford, T., Hanks, S., & Blahna, M. (2005). A competency-based model for developing human resource professionals. Journal of Management Education, 29, 383- 402
  • Homer, M. (2001). Skills and competency management. Industrial and Commercial training, 33/2, 59-62
  • Gurchiek, Kathy. “Workplace Violence on the Upswing.” HR Magazine. July 2005.
  • Coleman, J. C. (1976). Abnormal Psychology and Modern Life. Scott Foresman and Company.
  • Cronbach, L.J. (1970). Essentials of Psychological Testing (3rd ed.). harper & Row: New York.
  • Hammersley, Martyn, & Atkinson, Paul (1995). Ethnography: Principles in Practice, Second Ed. . London: Routledge.
  • Daniel, W. W. (1990) Applied Non-parametric Statistics, 2d ed. Boston: PWSKent.
  • Jex, S.M. (2002). Organisational psychology: A scientist-practitioner approach. New York: John Wiley.
  • Armstrong M.(2006); A Handbook of Human Resource Management, Practices 10th Edition; Kogan Page, London.
  • Goldstein, E. H. (2008). Cognitive Psychology: Connecting Mind, Research and Everyday Experience. London: Thomson Learning.
  • Dixon-Woods M, Shaw RL, Agarwal S, Smith JA. The problem of appraising qualitative research. QSHC 2004;13: 223-225.
  • Catano, V., Darr, M., & Campbell, C. (2007). Performance appraisal of behaviourbased competencies: A reliable and valid procedure. Personnel Psychology, 60, 201-230
  • Draganidis, F., & Mentzas, G. (2006). Competency-based management: A review of systems and approaches. Information Management &Computer Security, 14, 51-64
  • Hersen, M. (2004). Comprehensive Handbook of Psychological Assessment. John Wiley and Sons: New York.
  • Aronson, E., Wilson, T. D., & Akert, R. M. (2010). Social Psychology (7th ed.). Upper Saddle River, NJ: Prentice Hall.
  • Humes, G.W. and Hohenshil, T.H. (1987). Elementary counselors. school psychologists, school social workers: Who does what? Elemental) School Guidance and Counseling, 22,37-45.
  • Bandura, A. (1986). Social foundations of thought and action: A social cognitive theory. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice- Hall, Inc.
  • Johnson, Morrell, and Schick (1992), Two-Sample Non-parametric Estimation and Confidence Intervals Under Truncation, Biometrics, 48, 1043-1056.
  • Feldman, R. S. (1985) Social Psychology: Theories, Research and Applications. McGrawhill Book Company : New York
  • Andreyeva, Galina (1990) Social Psychology. Progress Publication: Moscow
  • Bartram, D. (2005) The Great Eight competencies: A criterion-centric approach to validation. Journal of Applied Psychology, 90, 1185–1203
  • Guilford, J.P. (1967). The Nature of Human Intelligence. New York: McGraw- Hill.
  • Martin, Garry & Pear, Joseph (1996). Behaviour Modification: What it is and How to do it, 5th edition. New Jersey: Prentice-Hall.
  • Gysbers, N., and Henderson, P. (1988). Developing and Managing Your School Guidance Program. Alexandria, V A: American Association for Counseling and Development.
  • Berkowitz, L. (1986) A Survey of Social Psychology. CBS Publishing: New York
  • Cheng, M. I., &. Dainty, R. I. J. (2005). Toward a multidimensional competencybased managerial performance framework: A hybrid approach. Journal of Managerial Psychology, 20, 380-396
  • Freeman, F.S.(1962). Theory and practice of psychological testing.New York: Holt, Rinehart and Winston (Indian Edition).
  • Hare, Robert and Babiak, Paul(2006). Snakes in Suits: When Psychopaths Go to Work. Harper Collins, NY
  • Bhatnagar, A. (1993). A Survey of Guidance Services in Selected Schools of Delhi, DEPC&G, NCERT, New Delhi (Mimeo).
  • Ciccarelli, S.K., & Meyer, G.E.(2009). Psychology. South Asian Edition. Pearson, New Delhi.
  • French, Wendell L & Bell, Cecill H Jr.: Organisational Development: Behavioural Science Interventions For Organisational Improvement, Pearson ND (LDA)
  • Horton, S. (2000). Introduction- the competency-based movement: Its origins and impact on the public sector. The International Journal of Public Sector Management, 13, 306-318
  • Blaxter, M. Criteria for evaluation of qualitative research. Medical Sociology News 1996; 22: 68-71.
  • Cohen DJ & Crabtree BF. Evaluative criteria for qualitative research in health care; controversies and recommendations. Annals of Fam. Med 2008; 6 (4): 331- 39.
  • Booth A. Cochrane or cock-eyed? How should we conduct systematic reviews of qualitative research? Qual EBP conference, Coventry university, may 14-16, 2001.
  • Johnson, Kari R. “Workplace Violence: Is Your Business at Risk?” Business North Carolina. September 2000.
  • Carroll, M.R. (1980). Standards for guidance and counseling programs. The School Counselor, Nov., pp. 81-86.
  • Kochanski, J. T.,& Ruse, D. H. (1996). Designing a competency-based human resources organisation. Human Resource Management, 35, 19-34
  • Ainsworth, M. D. S., Blehar, M. C., Waters, E., and Wall, S. (1978). Patterns of attachment: the psychological study of the strange situation. Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum.
  • Kuppuswamy, B. (2002). Elements of Social Psychology, 7th Revised Edition, Konark Publishers Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi.
  • Carson, R.C. Butcher, J.N. & Mineka, S. (2000). Abnormal Psychology and Modern Life. Pearson Education, India.
  • Gips, Michael A. “Transitioning Problem Employees.” Security Management. November 2000.
  • Flynn, Gillian. “Employers Can’t Look Away from Workplace Violence.” Workforce. July 2000.
  • Fogleman, Dannie B. “Minimising the Risk of Violence in the Workplace.” Employment Relations Today. Spring 2000.
  • Ahuja , Ram (2000). Criminology. Rawat Publications, New Delhi
  • Levin, H. S., Benton, A. L., & Grossman, R. G. (1982).neurobehavioural consequences of closed head injury. New York Oxford university press.
  • Johnson, Richard Arvid. Management, Systems, and Society : An Introduction. Pacific Palisades, Calif.: Goodyear Pub. Co.
  • Burden, R. L. (2000). Psychology in education and instruction. In Kurt Pawlik and Mark R. Rosenzweig (Eds.), International Handbook of Psychology, London: Sage Publications.
  • Sherrill, R. E. jr. (1987). options for shortening Halstead’s category test for adults. I Archives of clinical neuropsychology,2,343-352.
  • Jimerson, S. R., Skokut, M., Cardenas, S., Malone, H., and Stewart, K. (2008). Where in the world is school psychology? School Psychology International, 29(2), 131 – 144, p. 137.
  • Ciccarelli, S.K.& Meyer, G.E. (2006). Psychology. New Delhi (India): Pearson Education, Inc.
  • Lichenstein, P. & Annas, P. (2000). Heritability and prevalence of specific fears and phobias in childhood. Journal of Child Psychology and Psychiatry. 41, 927937.
  • Goldstein, G., & Watson, J. R (1989). Test-retest reliability of the Halstead-Reitan battery and the WAIS in a neuropsychiatric population. The clinical neuropsychologist,3,265-273.
  • Bandura, A., Ross, D., & Ross, S. A. (1963) Imitattion of film-mediated aggressive models, Journal of Abnormal and Social Psychology, 66, 3-11.
  • Reitan, R. M., & Wolfson, D. (1993). The Halstead-Reitan neuropsychological test battery: theory and clinical interpretation (2nd ed.).Tucson, AZ: Neuropsychology Press.
  • Landreth, G. L. (2002). Play therapy: The art of the relationship (2nd ed.). New York: Brunner-Routledge.
  • Restack, Richard (19096). Brainscapes: An Introduction to what neuroscience has Learned about the Structure, Function and Abilities of the Brain. Discover books, NY.
  • O’Neil, Harold F. (ed) (1994). Motivation Theory and Research, Lawrence Elbaum Associates Publishers, Hillsdale, NJ
  • Penrod, S. & Cutler, B. (1995). Witness confidence and witness accuracy: Assessing their forensic relation. Psychology, Public Policy & Law & , 1, 817845.
  • Fowler, H (2008). Curiosity and Exploratory Behaviour. Open library, New York.
  • Dennis Howitt, (2002). Forensic and Criminal Psychology. Prentice Hall, USA.
  • Harold F. Oneil and Michael Drillings (Eds).(1994). Motivation: Theory and Research. Laurence Erlbaum Associates, New Jersey
  • Golden, C. J., Hemmeke, T. & Purisch, A(1985) Luria-Nebraska neuropsychological battery manual form I & II. Los Angeles: Western psychological services.
  • Kumar, A. (2004). Encyclopedia of experimental psychology. New Delhi: Anmol Publications Pvt. Ltd.
  • Heaton, R. K, Pendleton, M. G. (1981). Use of neuropsychological test to predict adult patients everyday functioning. Journal of consulting and clinical psychology,49, 807-821.
  • Reid, R. (1999). Related Services for Vermont’s Students with Disabilities. Retrieved from http://www.uvm.edu/~cdci/rsrp/rsrpbook.pdf on Dec. 17, 2010.
  • Reitan, R. M (1958).Qualitative versus quantitative mental changes following brain damage. journal of psychology,46,339-346.
  • Comer, R.J. 2010. Abnormal Psychology, 7th edition. Worth Publishers. New York.
  • Selz, M., & Reitan, R. M. (1979).Rules for neuropsychological diagnosis: classification of brain function in older children. Journal of consulting and clinical psychology,47 ,258-264.
  • Halgin, R.P., & Whitbourne, S.K. 1997. Abnormal Psychology: The Human Experience of Psychological Disorders. Brown & Benchmark Publishers: London.
  • Kapur. M, Hinsave. U, Oommen A (2002). Psychological Assessment of Children in the Clinical Setting. NIMHANS publications Bangalore.
  • Carson, R. C., Butcher, J. N., Mineka, S., Hooley, J.M. 2007. Abnormal Psychology. Pearson Education: New Delhi.
  • Dutt, V. (2006). School psychology in India. In S. R. Jimerson, T. D. Oakland, and P. T. Farrell (Eds.), The handbook of school psychology, Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage Publications.
  • Wilmshurst, Linda. 2008. Abnormal Child Psychology: A Developmental Perspective. Taylor & Francis Group: New York.
  • George J. Dudycha, Psychology for Law Enforcement Officers (1976), Charles C Thomas, USA.
  • Crick, N. R., & Dodge, K. A. (1996). Social information–processing mechanisms in reactive and proactive aggression. Child Development, 67, 993–1002.
  • Campbell, D.T. & Stanley, J.C. (1966) Experimental and Quasi-experimental Designs for Research. Chicago: Rand McNally. College Pub. Co.
  • Henggeler, S. W., Schoenwald, S. K., Borduin, C. M., Rowland, M. D., & Cunningham, P. B. (1998). Multisystemic treatment of antisocial behaviour in youth. New York: Guilford.
  • Cullum.C.M (1998). Neuropsychological assessment of adults. In Bellack A.S, Herson M, Reynolds. C.R (eds) Comprehensive clinical psychology: 4 328-333.
  • Barlow, D. H. (2002). Anxiety and its disorders: The nature and treatment of anxiety and panic (2nd ed.). New York: Guilford Press.
  • Beckhard, Richard (1969). Organisation development: strategies and models. Reading, Mass.: Addison-Wesley. p. 114. ISBN 0876205406 9780876205402. OCLC 39328. 
  • Williams, A., Dodson, P., & Walters, M. (1993). Changing Culture, New Organisational Approaches (2nd Ed.). London: Institute of Personnel Management.
  • Golden, C. J(1981). A standardised version of Luria’s neuropsychological tests;a quantitative and qualitative approach to neuropsychological evaluation. In Filskov, S. B., & Bold, T. J (Eds.),handbook of clinical neuropsychology(pp.608 to 642). New York: Wiley-Interscience.
  • Janis, I. L. (1972). Victims of Groupthink. Boston. Houghton Mifflin Company.
  • Goldstein, G. (1982). Overview: clinical application of Halstead-Reitan and Lurianebraska batteries. Paper presented at NE-RMEC conference, Northport, NY.
  • Pattanayak, B. (2005). Human Resource Management, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi.
  • Heaton, R. K, Grant, I., & Matthews, C. G.(1991).comprehensive norms for an expanded Halstead-Reitan battery. Odessa, FL: psychological assessment resources.
  • Miner, J.P. (1992). Industrial Organisational Psychology, N.Y.: McGraw Hill.
  • Jastak, S.,& Wilkinson, G. S (1984).wide range achievement test-revised. Wilmington, DE: Jastak Associates, Inc.
  • Freeman, Frank, S. (1953). Theory and Practice of Psychological Testing. London. Pitman.
  • Meier, M.J.(1974).some challenges for clinical neuropsychology. In R. M. Reitan & L. A. Davison(Eds), clinical neuropsychology. Reed, J.C, & H.B.C(1997), Halstead-Reitan neuropsychological battery. In G. Golstein & T. M. Incagnoli (Eds) ,Contemporary approaches to neuropsychological assessments(pp.93129),New York: Plenum Press.
  • Pareek, U. & Rao, T.V. (2006). Designing and Managing Human Resource System (3rd Ed.), Oxford & I.B.H. Publishing Co. Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi
  • Reitan, R. M (1964). Psychological deficits resulting from cerebral lesion in man. In J. M. Warren & K. Akert (Eds.), the frontal granular cortex and behaviour (pp.295-312). New York: McGraw Hill.
  • Millward Lynne (2005) Understanding Occupational and Organisational Psychology, New Delhi, Sage Publications.
  • Russell, E. W., & Starkey, R. I (1993). Halstead-Russell neuropsychological evaluation system: manual and computer program. Los Angeles; Western Psychological Services.
  • Taylor, S.E, Health Psychology (2006) Health Psychology, New Delhi – Tata McGraw Hall Edition.
  • Shelly, C., & Goldstein, G. (1983). Discrimination of chronic schizophrenia and brain damage with the Luria-Nebraska battery: A partially successful replication. clinical neuropsychology,5,82-85
  • Sutton, S, Baum,A, & Johnston, Maries (2004) (editors) The Sage Handbook of Health Psychology, New Delhi, Sage Publications.
  • Wechsler, D. (1955). Wechsler adult intelligence scale manual. San Antonio, TX: The psychological corporation.
  • Reynolds, C. R. and Gutkin, T. B. (Eds.). (1999). Handbook of School Psychology (3rd ed.). New York: Wiley.
  • Mark E. Bear, Barry W. Connors & Michael A.Paradiso (2001) (2nd edition). Neuroscience. Exploring the Brain. Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, New York.
  • Roes, N. A (2002). Solutions for the Treatment Resistant Addicted Client, USA: Haworth Press
  • Santrock, J.W. (2006). Psychology Essentials. Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi
  • Mc Cormick, E.J and Ilgen D. (1984) Industrial Psychology, 7th Edition New Delhi, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd.
  • Gifford, R. (1997). Environmental Psychology : Principles and Practices (2nd Ed), Boston : Allyn & Bacon.
  • Ackerman, N.W. (1958). The Psychodynamics of Family Life. New York: Basic Books.
  • Sharma, Rajender Kumar (1999) Criminology and Penology. H B Books, New Delhi.
  • Ackerman, N.W. (1966 b). Treating the Troubled Family. New York: Basic Books.
  • Wells, G. L. & Bradfield, A. L. (1998). “Good, you identified the suspect:” Feedback to eyewitnesses distorts their reports of the witnessing experience. Journal of Applied Psychology, in press.
  • Rao,S.L.,Subbakrishna,D.K.,Gopukumar,K.(2004). Nimhans Neuropsychology Battery. Nimhans Publication. Bangalore.
  • Asch, S. E. (1956). Studies of independence and conformity: A minority of one against a unanimous majority. Psychological Monographs: General and Applied, 70
  • Snyder,P.J.,Nussbaum,P.D.,Robins,D.L.(2006). Clinical Neuropsychology A Pocket Handbook for Assessment. American Psychological Association , Washington.
  • Merrell, K., Ervin, R., & Gimpel, G. (2006). School Psychology for the 21st Century, Foundation and Practice. New York: The Guilford Press.
  • Spreen,O. & Strauss,E.(1991). A Compendium of Neuropsychological Tests. Oxford University Press. New York.
  • Corey,G. (2001). Theory and Practice of Counseling and Psychotherapy. Sixth edition. Thomson Brooks.
  • Walsh K.(1994). Neuropsychology: A Clinical Approach (3rd ed). B.I Churchill Livingstone Pvt. Ltd. New Delhi.
  • Das, J.P., Nagliery, J.A., & Kirby, J.R. (1994). Assessment of cognitive processes: The PASStheory of intelligence. New York: Allyn& Bacon.
  • G. Golstein & T. M. Incagnoli (Eds) (1974). Contemporary Approaches to Neuropsychological Assessments. ,New York: Plenum Press.
  • Harden, A. Critical Appraisal and Qualitative Research: Exploring sensitivity analysis. ESRC Research Methods Festival, St. Catherine’s College Oxford, 30th June-3rd July, 2008.
  • Christensen, A.L. (1975a). Luria’s neuropsychological investigation. New York spectrum.
  • Johnson, Richard Arvid (1976). Management, systems, and society : an introduction. Pacific Palisades, Calif.: Goodyear Pub. Co.. pp. 223–229. ISBN 0876205406 9780876205402. OCLC 2299496. 
  • Christensen, A.L. (1975b). Luria’s neuropsychological investigation: manual. New York spectrum.
  • Davis, K.(1983,october). Potential neurochemical and neuroendocrine validators of assessment instruments. paper presented at conference on clinical memory Assessment of older adults, Wakefield, M.A.
  • Maslow, Abraham (1954). Motivation and Personality. New York: Harper.
  • Kuhn, T.S. (1970). The Structure of Scientific Revolutions (2nd edition) Chicago : University of Chicago Press.
  • Lindzey C and Aronson E (1992). The Handbook of Social Psychology, Vol-I Addison Wesley Publishing Company, California.
  • Dan, P. McAdams (2008). The Person: An Introduction to the Science of Personality Psychology. John Wiley and Sons, New Jersey.
  • http://www.ehow.com/about_5465954_methods-hrd.html
  • Louis Cohen, Lawrence Manion & Keith Morrison, (2007). Research Methods in Education, Sixth Edition, Routledge 2 Park Square, Milton Park, Abingdon, Oxon OX14 4RN.
  • Sidney Siegel, & N. John Castetellan, Jr. (1958) Non-parametric Statistics for the Behavioural Science. McGraw Hill Books company, New Delhi
  • Hall and Lindzey (2003). Theories of Personality. Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi.
  • Hubble, M. A., Duncan, B. L., & Miller, S. D. (1999). The heart and soul of change: What works in therapy. Washington, DC: American Psychological Association.
  • http://www.articlesbase.com/human-resources-articles/new-techniques-inhuman-resource-management-1649403.html
  • Smith, A. (1998), Training and Development in Australia. 2nd ed. 261. Sydney: Butterworths.
  • Kantor, Martin (2004). Understanding Paranoia: A Guide for Professionals, Families, and Sufferers. Westport: Praeger Press.
  • Murphy, John J. (2008). Solution-Focused Counseling in Schools. USA: American Counseling Association.
  • Plomin, R., De Fries, J. C., McClearn, G. E. &Rutter, M. (1997). Behaviour Genetics (3rd ed.) New York: W. H. Freeman
  • Taylor, J. A. (1953). A personality scale of manifest anxiety. Joumal of Abnonnal and Social Psychology, 48, 285-290.
  • English, H.B. & English, A.C (1958). A Comprehensive Dictionary of Psychological and Psycho Analytical Terms , New York :Longmans Green
  • UNESCO (1999). Guidance and Counselling Programme Development- Module 8, France (Co-coordinator: Winsome Gordon; and Editors: Wilma Guez and John Allen).
  • Singh, A.K. (2007). The Psychology of Personality. Motilal Banarsidas, New Delhi.
  • Yin, R.K. (1984). Case Study Research: Design and Methods. Beverly Hills, CA, USA.: Sage Publications.
  • McShane, S.L., Glinow, M.A.N., & Sharma, R.R. (2008). Organisational Behaviour (4th Ed.). New Delhi: Tata McGraw-Hill, Inc.
  • Baumeister, R.F. & Bushman, B. (2008). Social Psychology and Human Nature (1st Edition). Belmont, CA: Wadsworth.
  • Crisp, R.J and Rhiannon N., Turner Essential Social Psychology, Sage Publications, New Delhi.
  • Aggrawal, J.C. (1991). Educational and Vocational Guidance and Counselling. Doaba House, Booksellers and publishers, Nai sadak, Delhi - 06.
  • Turner R.N and Richard J.Crisp (2007) Essential Social Psychology, Sage Publications, New Delhi, Pg-39-71.
  • Arkowitz, H. (1997). Integrative theories of therapy. In P. L. Wachtel & S. B. Messer (Eds.), Theories of Psychotherapy: Origins and Evolution (pp. 227288). Washington, DC: American Psychological Association.
  • Jablensky A, Sartorius N, Ernberg G, et al. Schizophrenia: manifestations, incidence and course in different cultures. A World Health Organisation ten-country study. Psychol Med Monogr Suppl. 1992;20:1-97. [Medline].
  • Hill, A & Spittlehouse C. What is critical appraisal? Evidence-Based Medicine 2003; 3 (2): 1-8.
  • Kazdin, A. E. (1982). Single-case Research Designs: Methods for Clinical and Applied Settings. New York: Oxford Press.
  • Kiesler, C. A. and Kiesler, S. A. (1969). Conformity. Reading, Mass.: Addison- Wesley.
  • Preston, J. (1998). Integrative Brief therapy: Cognitive, Psychodynamic, Humanistic and Neurobehavioral Approaches. San Luis Obispo, CA: Impact.
  • McClelland, D. C. (1971). Assessing Human Motivation. New York: General Lcaming Press.
  • Ram Nath Sharma (2004) Guidance and Counselling, Subjeet Publications, Delhi, India.
  • Coon, D. & Mitterer, J.O. (2007). Introduction to Psychology: Gateways to Mind and Behaviour (11 th edition). Delhi (India): Thomson Wadsworth.
  • Malpass, A., Shaw, A., Sharp, D., Walter, F., Feder, G., Ridd, M., and Kessler D. (2009). ‘Medication career” or “Moral career”? The two sides of managing antidepressants: A meta-ethnography of patients’ experience of antidepressants. Social Science Medicine 68(1):154-68.
  • Bem, D. J. (1972). Self-Perception Theory. In L. Berkowitz (Ed.), Advances in Experimental Social Psychology (Vol. 6, pp.1-62). New York: Academic Press
  • Manikkam, Raja (2005). General Psychology. Vinod Pustak Mandir, Agra (U.P.)
  • Allport, F.H. (1924). Social Psychology. Boston: Houghton Mifflin.
  • Srivastav, D.N (2008). General Psychology. Vinod Pustak Mandir, Agra (U.P.)
  • Lincoln, YS, Guba EG. Naturalistic Inquiry, Sage, Newbury Park, CA, 1985 .
  • Hall, Calvin S. and Lindzey, A (1978). Theories of Personality. John Wiley and Sons, New Jersey.
  • Asch, S. E. (1955). Opinions and social pressure. Scientific American, 193, 31- 35
  • Pervin, L. A. & John, O. P. (1997) Personality: Theory and Research. New York: John Wiley & Sons.
  • Postmes, T., Spears, R. and Cihangir, S. (2001). Quality of decision making and group norms. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 80(6), 918 – 930.
  • Hjelle, L. A. & Zeigler, D. J. (1981) Personality Theories: Basic Assumptions, Research and Applications. Auckland: McGraw Hill.
  • Halpern, D. F. and Desrochers, S. (2005). Social psychology in the classroom: Applying what we teach as we teach it. Journal of Social and Clinical Psychology, 24(1), 51 – 61.
  • Aronson E, Wilson T. D, and Akert R.M (1998). Social Psychology (third edition), Longman Inc.
  • Bowlby, J (1969) Attachment and Loss, Vol. 1 Attachment, New York Basic Books.
  • Taylor S.E. Peplay L.A, Sears D.O (2006) Social Psychology, Pearson Education Pg-2-96.
  • Baumrind, D. (1991). The influence of parenting style on adolescent competence and substance use. Journal of Early Adolescence, 11(1), 56-95
  • Chaube S.P Social Psychology (1986), Lakshmi Navayan Agarwal, Educational Publishers, Agra. Pg-21-24.
  • Grinnell, Richard Jr (ed.) 1988, Social Work Research and Evaluation (3 rd ed.,) Itasca, Illinois, F.E. Peacock Publishers.
  • Shaywitz, S.E. (1996) : Dyslexia. Scientific American, 275 (5) 98-104.
  • Hechter, M. and Opp, K. D. (2001). Social Norms. New York: Russell Sage Foundation.
  • Lewin, Kurt. (1951). Field Theory in Social Science, edited by Dorwin Cartwright. New York: Harper and Brothers.
  • Asch, S. (1952). Social Psychology. (Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice Hall)
  • Rutter, M. and Rutter, M. (1992). Developing Minds. Challenge and Continuity Across the Life Span, London: Penguin.
  • Deutsch, M. and Gerard, H. B. (1955). A study of normative and informational social influences upon individual judgment. Journal of Abnormal and Social Psychology, 51, 629 – 636.
  • Smith, M. (2009). Life Span Development and Lifelong Learning.
  • Hogg, M. A. and Reid, S. A. (2006). Social identity, self-categorisation, and the communication of group norms. Communication Theory, 16, 7 – 30.
  • WGBH Educational Foundation (2001). Life Span Development Our Amazing Capacity for Change.
  • Lindzey, G. (1959). On the classification of projective techniques. Psychological Bulletin, 56, 158-168.
  • Maslow, Abraham (1971). The Further Reaches of Human Nature. New York: Harper.
  • Asch, S.E. (1951). Effects of group pressure upon the modifications and distortion of judgments. In H. Guetzkow (Ed.), Groups, leadership, and men. Pittsburgh, PA: Carnegie Press.
  • Taylor, S. E., Peplau, A. L., & Sears, D. O. (2006) Social Psychology (12th ed.). Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice Hall.
  • Attree, P. Low-income mothers, nutrition and health: a systematic review of qualitative evidence. Maternal and Child Nutrition 2005 1(4): 227-240.
  • Woolfe. R., Dryden. W., Strawbridge.S (2003). Handbook of Counselling Psychology (2nd edn). London: Sage.
  • Mossoff, A. ‘Rethinking the Development of Patents: An Intellectual History, 1550-1800,’ Hastings Law Journal, Vol. 52, p. 1255, 2001
  • deKler, M. (2007). Healing emotional trauma in organisations: An O.D. Framework and case study. Organisational Development Journal, 25(2), 49-56.
  • Mowday, R. T., Porter, L. W., & Steers, R. M. (1982). Employee organisation linkages. New York: Academic Press.
  • McGregor, D. (1960). The human side of enterprise. New York: McGraw-Hill.
  • Mufson, L., Moreau, D., Weissman, M., and Klerman, G. (1993). Interpersonal Psychotherapy For Depressed Adolescents. New York: Guilford Press.
  • Yu D et al. Living with chronic heart failure: a review of qualitative Humphreys A et al. A systematic review and meta-synthesis: evaluating the effectiveness of nurse, midwife/allied health professional consultants. Journal of Clinical Nursing 2007; 16(10): 1792-1808.
  • Myers, A. (1980). Experimental Psychology., New York: D. Van Nostrand Co.
  • Butcher, J.N., & Rouse, S.V. (1996). Personality: Individual differences and clinical assessment. Annual Review of Psychology, 47, 87-111.
  • Nil
  • Exner, J. E. (1974). The Rorschach: A comprehensive system. New York: Wiley.
  • Norcross, J. C., & Newman, C. (1992). Psychotherapy integration: Setting the context. In J. C. Norcross & M. R. Goldfried (Eds.), Handbook of psychotherapy integration (pp. 3-46). New York: Basic.
  • Thyer, B.A. (1993), Single-System research design in R.M. Grinnell (ed.), “Social Work, Research and Evaluation” (4th ed.), Itasca Illinois, F.E. Peacock Publishers.
  • Norcross, J.C., Hedges, M., & Prochaska, J. O. (2002). The face of 2010: A Delphi poll on the future of psychotherapy. Professional Psychology: Research and Practice, 33, 316-322.
  • Walker, H.M. & Lev. J. (1965). Statistical Inference. Calcutta : Oxford & I.B.H. Publishing Co.
  • Noyes J & Popay J. Directly observed therapy and tuberculosis: how can a systematic review of qualitative research contribute to improving services?
  • Yang, C. (2009)(Ed.). Language Acquisition. London: Routledge.
  • Oade, Aryanne (2009). Managing Workplace Bullying: How to Identify, Respond to and Manage Bullying Behaviour in the Workplace”. Palgrave Macmillan,
  • McCrae, R. R., & Costa, P. T., Jr. (2003). Personality in adulthood: A Five- Factor Theory perspective (2nd ed.). New York: Guilford.
  • Oxman, AD., Guyatt GH. The science of reviewing research. Annals of the New York Academy of Sciences 1993; 703: 125-133.
  • Beckhard (1969) Organisational Development: Strategies and Models, Reading, MA: Addison-Wesley, p. 9.
  • Popay J, Rogers A, Williams G. Rationale and Standards for the Systematic Review of Qualitative Literature in Health Care. Qual Health Research 1998; 8: 341-51.
  • Cattell, R. B., Cattell, A. K., &Cattell, H. E. P. (1993). Sixteen Personality Factors Questionnaire (5th ed.). Champaign, IL: Institute for Personality and Ability Testing.
  • Popay, J.,& Williams, G. (1998). Qualitative research and evidence based healthcare. Journal of Research in Social Medicine,91(Suppl 35), 32–37.
  • Donovan, J.(2003). Evaluating meta-ethnography: a synthesis of qualitative research on lay experiences of diabetes and diabetes care. Social Science and Medicine. 56: 671-84.
  • Rao, S. Narayana (1999). Counselling and Guidance, 2nd Ed. Tata McGrawHill:New Delhi.
  • Fisher, Cynthia. D, Schoenfeldt , Lyle .F and Shaw .J, B., (2004) Human Resource Management. 5th Edition, Indian Adaptation, New Delhi, Biztantra
  • Rao, V.S.P. (2005) Human Resource Management, Text and Cases. 2nd Edition; New Delhi, Excel Books.
  • Tehrani, N. (2004). Bullying: A source of chronic post traumatic stress? British Journal of Guidance & Counselling, 32, 357-366.
  • Matthiesen, S.B., & Einarsen, S. (2004). Psychiatric distress and symptoms of PTSD among victims of bullying at work. British Journal of Guidance & Counselling, 32, 335-356.
  • Tomasello, M. (2003). Constructing a Language. Cambridge: Harvard University Press.
  • Rimmer, S.M. and Burt, M.A. (1980). Needs assessment: A step-by-step approach. The School Counselor, pp. 59-62.
  • Vroom, V. H. (1964). Work and motivation. New York: Wiley.
  • Mattice, C.M., & Garman, K. (2010, June). Proactive Solutions for Workplace Bullying: Looking at the Benefits of Positive Psychology. Paper to be presented at the International Association for Workplace Bullying & Harassment, Cardiff, Wales.
  • Moorhead, G. & Griffin, R. W (2004) Organisational Behaviour, 7th edition New York, Houghton Mifflin Company.
  • Robinson, S. L., & Bennett, R. J. (1995). A typology of deviant workplace behaviours: A multidimensional scaling study. Academy of Management Journal, 38(2), 555-572.
  • World Health Organisation (1992). ICD- 10 classification of mental and behaviour disorders: Clinical descriptions and diagnostic guidelines. Geneva.
  • Rogers, C. R. (1957). The necessary and sufficient conditions of therapeutic personality change. Journal of Consulting Psychology, 21, 95–103.
  • Yildirim, A., & Yildirim, D. (2007). Mobbing in the workplace by peers and managers: mobbing experienced by nurses working in healthcare facilities in Turkey and its effect on nurses. Journal of Clinical Nursing, 16, 1444-1453.
  • Rollinson, D. & Broadfield, D. (2002). Organisational behaviour and analysis: An integrated approach, 2nd Ed. New York: Prentice-Hall.
  • Sparrow, S. S., Balla, D. A. & Cuccheti, D. V. (1984). Vineland adaptive behaviour scales: Interview edition, survey form manual. Circle Pines, MN: American Guidance Service.
  • Saraswat, R.K. and Gaur, J. S. 1994. Manual for Guidance Counsellors, New Delhi: National Council of Educational Research and Training.
  • American Psychological Association. (2002). Ethical principles of psychologists and code of conduct. American Psychologist, 57(12), 1060-1073.
  • Schultz, D.P., & Schultz, S.E. (2002). Psychology and Work Today: An Introduction to Industrial and Organisational Psychology (8th ed.). Delhi: Pearson Education
  • Aylward, E.H., Richards, T.L., Berwinger, V.W., Nagy, W.E., Field, K.M., Grimme, A.C., Richard, A.L., Thomson, J.B. & Cramer, S.C. (2003). Instructional Treatment Associated with Changes in Brain Activities in Children with Dyslexia. Neurology, 61, 212-219.
  • Shippmann, J. S., Ash, R. A., Battista, M., Carr, L., Eyde, L. D., Hesketh, B., Kehoe, J., Pearlman, K., & Sanchez, J. I. (2000). The practice of competency modeling, Personnel Psychology, 53, 703-740.
  • Bradford, D.L. & Burke, W.W. (Editors) (2005). Organisation Development. San Francisco: Pfeiffer.
  • Siegel, S. (1956): Non-parametric Statistics for Behavioural Sciences. Tokyo: McGraw Hill Hoga Kunsa Ltd.
  • Carlsen, B. Glenton C, Pope C. Thou shalt versus thou shalt not: a metasynthesis of GPs’ attitudes to clinical practice guidelines. Br J Gen.Pract 2007;57:971-8. 14
  • Sinha, J.B.P. (2008). Culture and organisational behaviour. New Delhi: Sage.
  • Cummings, T.G. &Worley, C.G., Organisational Development and Change, Thomson: Singapore.
  • Spearmen, C. (1904). General intelligence objectively determined and measured. American Journal of Psychology, 15,, 201-292
  • Devi, Laxmi (1998) Organisational development, Institute for Sustainable Development, Lucknow and Anmol Publications Pvt. Ltd.
  • Spencer, L. M. (2004). Competency Model Statistical Validation and Business Case Development, HR Technologies White Paper http://www.hrcompass.com/ validation.html
  • Edwards, A. Elwyn G, Hood K, Rollnick S. Judging the ‘weight of evidence’ in systematic reviews: introducing rigour into the qualitative overview stage by assessing Signal and Noise. J Eval Clin Pract. 2000 May;6(2):177-84.
  • Sternberg, R. J. (1985). Beyond IQ: A triarchic theory of human intelligence. New York: Cambridge University Press.
  • Exner, J. E. (1986). The Rorschach: A comprehensive system: Vol. 1. Basic foundations (2nd ed.). New York: Wiley.
  • Stuart-Hamilton, Ian (2006). The Psychology of Ageing: An Introduction. London: Jessica Kingsley Publishers
  • Guba, EG. & Lincoln YS. Fourth Generation evaluation. Newbury Park. CA: Sage. 1989.
  • Tajfel, H. and Turner, J.C. (1986). The social identity theory of inter-group behaviour. In S. Worchel and L.W. Austin (eds.) Psychology of Intergroup Relatuions, Chigago : Nelson-Hall.
  • White, M. and Epston, D. (1990). Narrative means to therapeutic ends. New York: Norton.
  • Locke, E. A. (1976). The nature and causes of job satisfaction. In M. D. Dunnette (Ed.), Handbook of industrial and organisational psychology (pp. 1297-1343). Chicago: Rand McNally.
  • Hofstede, G. (1980). Culture’s consequences: International differences in work related values. Beverly Hills, CA: Sage.
  • A qualitative meta-synthesis. Journal of Advanced Nursing 2007; 57(3), 227– 243.
  • Baharoglu, B.L. (1989). Developing and upgrading an elementary and middle school guidance program: A case study. The School Counselor, Vol. 37, Sept., pp. 23-30
  • Jensen, A.R. (1998). The G factor: The science of mental ability. Westport: Praeger.
  • Bandura, A. (1997). Self-efficacy: The exercise of control. New York: Freeman.
  • Ferris, P.A. (2009). The role of the consulting psychologist in the prevention, detection, and correction of bullying and mobbing in the workplace. Consulting Psychology Journal, 61(3), 169-189.
  • Beale, D. (2001). Monitoring bullying in the workplace. In N. Tehrani (Ed.), Building a culture of respect, managing bullying at work.
  • Guilford, J.P. (1954). Psychometric Methods. New Delhi: Tata McGraw Hill.
  • Beck, A. T. (1967). Depression: clinical, experimental and theoretical aspects. New York: Harper and Row.
  • http://www.businessihub.com/human-resource-development-hrd/
  • Belkin, G.S. (1986). Introduction to Counseling. Brown Publishers U.S.A.
  • Kubler-Ross, E. (1969). On Death and Dying. New York: Macmillan. Ogden, J. (2000). Health Psychology: A Textbook. Buckingham: Open University Press.
  • Bhatnagar, A. and Gupta, N. (Eds.) (1999). Guidance and Counselling;. A Practical Approach. (VoL. l). Vikas Publishing House. New Delhi.
  • Eysenck, H. J. (1972). Abilities. In H. J. Eysemck, W. J. Arnold, & R. Meili (Eds.) Encyclopedia of psychology. (Volume 1). Bungay, Suffolk: The Search Press (pp. 1-5)
  • Board, B.J. & Fritzon, Katarina, F. (2005). Disordered personalities at work. Psychology, Crime and Law, 11, 17-32
  • Amborn S.R. (1975) Child Development, Rinehart Press/Holt, Rinehart and Winson, San Fransico.
  • Boyd, D. and Bee, H. (2006). Lifespan Development (4th ed.). Upper Saddle River, NJ: Pearson.
  • Gerald Corey (2009): Theory and Practice of Counseling and Psychotherapy. Publisher: Thompson Brooks.
  • Bransford, J. (1979). Human Cognition: Learning, Understanding, and Remembering. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth.
  • Hackman, J. R., & Oldham, G. R. (1976). Motivation through the design of work: Test of a theory. Organisational Behaviour and Human Performance, 16, 250–279.
  • Camara,W.J.,Nathan,J.S.,& Puente,A.E. (2000). Psychological test usage: Implications in professional psychology. Professional Psychology: Research and Practice, 31(2), 141-154.
  • http://definitions.uslegal.com/w/workplace-violence/
  • Catherine Mattice, MA & Brian Spitzberg, Ph.D. Bullies in Business: Self-Reports of Tactics and Motives San Diego State University, 2007.
  • http://www.strategic-human-resource.com/human-resources-current-issues.html
  • Chadha, N.K. (1996). Theory and Practice of Psychometry. New Age International Limited: New Delhi.
  • Kaufman, A. S., & Kaufman, N. L. (2004). Kaufman Assessment Battery for Children: Technical manual (2nd ed.). Circle Pines, MN: American Guidance Service.
  • Clark, H., & Clark, E. (1977). Psychology and Language: An Introduction to Psycholinguistics. New York: Harcourt Brace Jovanovich.
  • Lareau, Annette & Schultz, Jeffrey, eds. (1996). Journeys Through Ethnography: Realistic Accounts of Field Work. Boulder, CO: Westview Press.
  • Clifford, J. (1999). On ethnographic authority. Ch. 11 in Alan Bryman and Robert Burgess, eds., Methods of qualitative research, Vol. III. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage Publications.
  • Elkind, D. & Weiner, I. B. (1978) Development of the Child. New York: John Wiley & Sons, Inc.
  • Collins, R. (1988). The Micro Contribution to Macro Sociology. Sociological Theory 6(2), 242-253.
  • Eysenck, M. W. (1990). Intelligence. In M. W. Eysenck (Ed.). The Blackwell dictionary of cognitive psychology. Oxford, U. K.: Blackwell Reference
  • Collison, B.B. (1982). Needs assessment for guidance programme planning: A procedure. The School Counselor, Nov., pp. 115-121.
  • Amborn S.R. (1975) Child Development, Rinehart Press/Holt, Rinehart and Winson, San Fransico
  • Cook, T.D. and Campbell, D.T. (1979), Quasi Experimentation : Design and Analysis Issues for Field Setting, Chicago : Rand McNally College Pub. Co.
  • Marty Sapp (2009): Psychodynamic, Affective, and Behavioural Theories to Psychotherapy. Charles C Thomas – Publisher LTD.
  • Coren, Alex. (2001). Short-Term Psychotherapy. London: Palgrave.
  • American School Counselor Association (2003). The ASCA national model: A framework for school counseling programs. Professional School Counselling. 6 (3), 165-168.
  • Corsini, Raymond J., Wedding, Danny. (2008). Current Psychotherapies. USA: Brooks/Cole.
  • Gold, Raymond L. (1997) The ethnographic method in sociology. Qualitative Inquiry, Vol. 3, No. 4 (December): 388-402. Gold writes this summary near the end of his 50-year career in ethnographic research. The article discusses the requirements of ethnographic research, validity, reliability, sampling, and systematic data collection.
  • Crisp, R. J., & Turner, R. N. (2010). Essential Social Psychology (2nd ed.). Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage Publications.
  • Arizona Department of Education (2007). Handbook of the Arizona Model: A Framework for School Counselling Programs. Phoenix, AZ.
  • Das, J. P. (1998). The working mind: An introduction to psychology. New Delhi: Sage
  • Harris, C. A. (1993) Child Development. 2 nd Edition. Minneapolis/St.paul: West Publishing Co.
  • Dash, B. N. (2003). Guidance Services in School, Dominant Publishers & Distributors, New Delhi
  • Hofstede, G. (2001). Culture’s consequences: Comparing values, behaviours, institutions, and organisations across nations (2nd ed.). Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage.
  • David Pruitt, M.D (2000). Your Adolescent: Emotional, Behavioural, and Cognitive Development from Early Adolescence Through the Teen Years, Imprint: Harper Paperbacks, NY
  • http://www.authorstream.com/Presentation/baraldp123-129363-human-resourceplanning-hrm-education-ppt-powerpoint/
  • Davis, K. D. & Newstrom, J. W. (1989). Human behaviour at work: Organisational Behaviour, 8th Ed. New Delhi: McGraw-Hill.
  • http://www.idrc.ca/cp/ev-56451-201-1-DO_TOPIC.html
  • Devadas, Rajamal P. & N Jaya (1984) A Textbook on Child Development. Delhi: McMillan India Ltd.
  • http://www.thetimes100.co.uk/theory/theory—human-resources-planning— 417.php#ixzz1TqARB3sP
  • Dewan, Mantosh J., Steenbarger, Brett N., Greenberg, Roger P. (2004). The Art and Science of Brief Psychotherapies: A Practitioner’s Guide. London: American Psychiatric Publishing, Inc.
  • Atkinson, R., & Shiffrin, R. (1968). Human memory: A proposed system and its control processes. In K Spence & J Spence (Eds.). The Psychology of Learning and Motivation: Advances in Research and Theory (Vol. 2). New York: Academic Press.
  • Diane F. Gilmer; Aldwin, Carolyn M. (2003). Health, illness, and optimal ageing: biological and psychosocial perspectives. Thousand Oaks: Sage Publications
  • Krech, Crutchfield and Ballachy (1962). Individual and Society, McGraw Hill, New York.
  • Dixon-Woods M, Sutton AF, Shaw RL, Miller T, Smith J, Young B, Bonas S, Booth A, Jones DR. Appraising qualitative research for inclusion in systematic reviews: a quantitative and qualitative comparison of three methods. Journal of Health Service Research and Policy 2007; 12: 42-7.
  • Lanyado, Monica., Horne, Ann. (1999). The Handbook of Child and Adolescent Psychotherapy. New York: Routledge.
  • Dubois, D., & Rothwell, W. (2000). The Competency Toolkit (Volumes 1 & 2). HRD Press.
  • Lefrancois, G. R. (2001) Of Children: An Introduction to Child and Adolescent Development. 9 th Edition. Wadsworth
  • Dubois, D., & Rothwell, W. (2004). Competency-Based Human Resource Management. Davies-Black Publishing
  • Lucia, A., & Lepsinger, R. (1999). The Art and Science of Competency Models: Pinpointing Critical Success Factors in Organisations. Pfeiffer
  • Eisenberg, N., Fabes, R. A., & Spinrad, T. L. (2006). Prosocial development. In N. Eisenberg (Vol. Ed.), W. Damon & R. M. Lerner (Series Eds.), Handbook of child psychology: Social, emotional, and personality development (Vol. 3, pp. 646–718). New York: Wiley.
  • American School Counselor Association (2004). The Role of the Professional School Counsellor. Alexandria.
  • Myers, J. K., and L. L. Bean. 1968. A Decade Later: A Follow-up of Social Class and Mental Illness. New York: John Wiley. 250 p.
  • Action and Disability News- 1994, vol.5. No-1.
  • Ralph Slovenko, Psychiatry and Law (1973), Little Brown and Company, USA.
  • Webb, P. (2001). Play therapy with traumatized children: A crisis response. In G.L. Landreth (Ed.), Innovations in play therapy: Issues, process, and special populations. Philadelphia, PA: Brunner-Routledge.
  • Cook, M. (1970). Experiments on orientations and proxemics, Human Relations, 23, 115-149.
  • Morgan, A. (2000). What is Narrative Therapy? An Easy to-read Introduction. Adelaide: Dulwich.
  • Plack, J.J. & Shick, J. (1974). The effects of colour on human behaviour. Journal of the Association for the Study of Perception, Vo/.9, 4-16.
  • Payne, M. (2006). Narrative Therapy: An Introduction for Counsellors. London, England: Sage.
  • Rao, T.S.S. and Krishna, V.S.T. (2008). Wake up call from ‘Stars on the Ground’. Indian Journal of Psychiatry, 50(1), 2 – 4.
  • Freedman, J., & Combs, G. (1996). Narrative therapy: The social construction of preferred realities. New York: W. W. Norton.
  • Neil R. Carlson (1995). Foundations of Physiological Psychology (6th edition). Allyn and Bacon, NY
  • White, M. (2001). Narrative practice and the unpacking of identity conclusions. Gecko: A Journal of Deconstruction and Narrative Practice 1, 1-17.
  • Baum, A. and Paul us, P. ( 1987): Crowding, In D. Stokols and I. Altman (Eds. ), Handbook of Environmental Psychology, New York: Wiley.
  • White, M. (1995). Re-authoring lives. Adelaide, AU: Dulwich Centre Publications.
  • O'Neil, M.J. ( 1994). Workplace adjustability, storage and enclosure as predictors of employee reactions and performance. Environment and Behavior, 26, 504-526.
  • White, M. (1992). Deconstruction and therapy: In D. Epston, & M. White (Eds.), Experience, contridiction, narrative and imagination (pp. 109-47). South Australia, Dulwhich Centre Publications.
  • Fagan, T. K. (1987). Gesell: The first school psychologist. Part 1. The road to Connecticut, School Psychology Review, 16 (1), 103 – 107.
  • Bannink.F.P. (2007) Solution-Focused Brief Therapy Journal of Contemporary Psychotherapy 37:87–94
  • Keppel, G., & Underwood, B. J. (1962). Proactive inhibition in shortterm retention of single items. Journal of Verbal Learning & Verbal Behaviour, 1, 153-161.
  • McDonald.A.J.(2007). Solution Focused Therapy: Theory Research & Practice. Sage Publications. New Delhi
  • Goldenberg, I., & Goldenberg, H., (2004). Family Therapy: An Overview. (7th ed.). Pacific Grove, CA: Brooks/ Cole.
  • Nichols.M.P., & Schwartz. R. C. (2001). The Essentials of Family Therapy. A Pearson Education Company.U.S.A. 221-233.
  • Merikangas, K. R., Dierker,L. C., & Szatamari, P. (1998) Psychopathology among offsprings of parentswith substance abuse and/or anxiety disorders: A high-risk study. Journal of Child Psychology and Psychiatry, 39, 711-720.
  • O’ Connell.B., Palmer. S.(2003). Handbook of Solution Focused Therapy. Sage Publications. New Delhi
  • Perry, E., Ashton. H., & Young, A. (2001) Neurochemistry of Consciousness John Benjamins Publishing Company, Amsterdam, Philadelphia
  • O ’Hanlon.B., & Davis. M.W. (2003). In search of Solutions: A new direction in Psychotherapy W.W.Norton & Company. New York
  • Malekar, C.R. ( 1985). Urban growth in India-An overview, Paper presented at the International Conference on Families in the Face of Urbanization, New Delhi, December, 2-5.
  • Edwards, M. (1987). Jungian Analytic Art Therapy. In Rubin (Ed.). Approaches to Art Therapy: Theory and Technique. New York: Bruner/Mazel
  • Valins, S. & Baum, A. (1973). Residential group size, social interaction and crowding. Environment and Behaviour, 5 : 421 - 439.
  • Case, C. & Dalley, T. (1992). The Handbook of Art Therapy. London: Routledge
  • Day, L. L. ( 1992) Place making by design: Fitting a large new building in a historic district. Environment and Behavioz,tr, 26, 742-765
  • Killick, Katherine; Schaverien, Joy (1997). Art, Psychotherapy and Psychosis. London and New York: Routledge.
  • Lee, T. ( 1968). Urban neighbourhood as a socio-spatial schema. Human Relations, Vol.2I, 241-267.
  • Malchiodi, Cathy A. (2006). The Art Therapy Sourcebook (2nd ed.). New York: McGraw-Hill.
  • Demick, J. & Andreoletti, C. ( 1995). Some relations between clinical and environmental psychology. Environment and Behaviour, Vol. 27(1), 56-72.
  • Malchiodi, Cathy A. (2003). Handbook of Art Therapy. New York: Guilford.
  • Jena, S. P. K. (2009) Training parents in managing children with autism: A review, Indian Journal of Clinical Psychology, 36, 60-69.
  • Erikson Erik (1993). Childhood and Society New York, W.W.Norton & Co.
  • Strack, S. (ed.)(2006), Differentiating Normal and Abnormal Personality, Springer, New York.
  • Franken, R (2001). Human Motivation (5th edition) Pacific Grove, CA., Brooks/ Cole
  • Dutta, R. and Mehta, M. (2006). Child-centered play therapy in management of somatoform disorders. J. Indian Assoc. Child Adolesc. Ment. Health, 2(3), 85 – 88.
  • Gorman, Phil (2004). Motivation and Emotion Routledge, East Sussex.
  • Ray, D., Schottelkorb, A., and Tsai, M-H. (2007). Play therapy with children exhibiting symptoms of Attention Deficit Hyperactivity Disorder. International Journal of Play Therapy, 16, 95 – 111.
  • McClelland, D(1985). Human Motivation New York, Scott Forseman
  • John A.Kiernan (2008). 9th edition. Barr’s The Human Nervous System: An Anatomical Viewpoint, Lippincott Williams Wilkins.
  • Edwards, David C. (1998). Motivation and Emotion: Evolutionary, Physiological, Cognitive, and Social Influences . Sage Publications, NY.
  • Edelbrock, C (1988). Informant Reports. In E.S.Shapio and T.R.Kratchowill (Eds.) Behavioural Assessment in Schools. Conceptual Foundations and Practical Applications (PP.351-383) New York: Guilford Press.
  • Reeve, Johnmarshall (2005). Understanding Motivation and emotion. Wiley, John Wiley and Sons, Inc. NJ
  • Torgesen, J. K. (1980). Conceptual and educational implications of the use of efficient task strategies by learning disabled children. Journal of Learning Disabilities, 13, 1, 364-371.
  • Ames, C. & Ames, R. (1989). Research in Motivation in Education, Vol 3. San Diego: Academic Press.
  • Carlson, N.R. 6th ed., 2005. Foundations of Physiological Psychology, Pearson Education Inc: India
  • Atkinson, J. & Raynor, O. (1974). Motivation and Achievement. Washington: Winston.
  • Garling, T. and R. Golledge [Eds.] (1993). Behavior and Environment: Psychological and Geographical Approaches. Amsterdam: North Holland.
  • Dennis Coon and John Mitterer (2010). Introduction to psychology. Gateway to mind and behaviour. Wadsworth Belmont, USA.
  • Goudy, W. (1990). Community attachment in rural regions, Rural Sociology, 55, 178-198.
  • Keller, J. (1983). Motivational design of instruction. In C. Riegeluth (ed.), Instructional Design Theories and Models. Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum.
  • Ryden, M.B., Bossenmaier, M. and McLachlan, C. (1991). Aggressive behaviour in cognitively impaired nursing home residents, Research in Nursing and Health, 14, 87-95.
  • Reiss, Steven (2000), Who am I: The 16 basic desires that motivate our actions and define our personalities, New York: Tarcher/Putnam. References:
  • Montana, D. and Adamopoulos, J. (1984): The perception of crowding in interpersonal situations: Affective and behavioural response'3. Environment and Behaviour, 16, 643-666.
  • Evans, Dylan and Pierre Cruse (2004). Emotion, Evolution and Rationality. Oxford University Press; Oxford
  • Christian, J. J. 1961. Phenomena associated with population density. Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci.
  • Michael Lewis, Jeannette, M. Haviland Jones (Eds) (2000). Handbook of Emotions, Second Edition. Guilford Press, NY
  • B.K., and F. B. Bang, eds., Biology of Populations (Chap. 20). New York: American
  • K. Floyd,(2006). Communicating Affection: Interpersonal Behaviour and Social Context, Cambridge University Press, UK
  • www.urbandesign.org
  • Rubin, Zick (1973). Liking and Loving: An Invitation to Social Psychology. New York: Holt, Rinehart & Winston.
  • Amerigo, M. (1990). Satisfaction Residential, Una Aproximaci6n Psicosocial a los £studios de Calidad de Vida, Madrid : Universidad Complutense.
  • American Psychological Association Zero Tolerance Task Force (2008). Are Zero Tolerance Policies Effective in the Schools? An Evidentiary Review and Recommendations, American Psychologist, 63 (9), 852-862.
  • Farrenkopf, T. ( 1979). Physical dimensions of college classroom environmeut. Paper presented at the Annual Meeting of the American Educational Research Association, San Francisco, CA.
  • American Psychological Association (1993). Delivery of Comprehensive School Psychological Services: An Educator’s Guide. Washington, DC:Author.
  • Edmunds, L. (1987). Sick buildings, Johns Hopkins Magazine, 22-25.
  • Flanagan, D. P., & Oritz, S. O., Alfonso,V., & Dynda, A. M. (2008). Best practices in cognitive assessment. In A. Thomas and J. Grimes (Eds.), Best Practices in School Psychology V (p. 633-659). Bethesda, MD: NASP.
  • Reizenstein, J.F. (1976). Social research and design Cambridge hospital social service offices. Springfield, VA, National Technical Information Service.
  • Gutkin, T. B., & Curtis, M. J. (2009). School-based consultation: The science and practice of indirect service delivery. In C. R. Reynolds and T. B. Gutkin (Eds.), Handbook of School Psychology, 4th Ed. (p. 591-635). New York: John Wiley.
  • Wrigthsman, L. S. (2001). Forensic Psychology Bekmont, CA : Wardsworth.
  • G. Andrews et. al. (1994). Treatment of Anxiety Disorders, UK: Cambridge University Press.
  • Jenkins, R. L. (1966) Psychiatric syndromes in children and their relation to family background. American Journal of Orthopsychiatry, 36, 450-457.
  • Johnstone, Freeman & Zealey (1998) (eds). Companion to Psychiatric Studies, Edinburgh: Churchill Livingstone.
  • Wootton, Barbara, Crime and Criminal Law, (London, 1981), 2nd edition.
  • Herzberg, Frederick (19820. The Managerial Choice. Routledge, London
  • Cutler, B. and Penrod, S. (1995) Mistaken Identity. Cambridge University Press: Cambridge UK.
  • Harold F. O’Neil, Jr., Michael Drillings and Harold F. O’Neil. (1994) (Ed). Motivation: Theory and Research, Routledge, London
  • Ronald Jay Cohen and Mark E. Swerdlik (2009). (6th edition). Psychological Testing and Assessment: An Introduction to Tests and Measurement. McGraw Hill & Co., NY
  • Maslow, H. (1950). Social Theory of Motivation. In M. Shore (Ed.), Twentieth Century Mental Hygiene (New York: Social Science Publishers.
  • Marvasti, J. A. (1988). Play therapy with sexually abused children. In S. M. Sgroi (Ed.),Vulnerable populations, Volume 2 (pp. 1-41). New York, NY: Lexington Books.
  • Seligman, Martin E.P. (1990), Learned Optimism, New York: Alfred A. Knopf, Inc. 
  • http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=lpG_NM88fjY
  • Baumeister, R.F.; Vohs, K.D. (2004), Handbook of Self-regulation: Research, Theory, and Applications, New York: Guilford Press.
  • http://www.multitheoretical.com
  • Carver, C.S.; Scheier, M.F. (2001), On the Self-regulation of Behaviour, New York: Cambridge University Press.
  • Jacobson, N.S. & Gurman, A.S. (ed.) (1986). Clinical Handbook of Marital Therapy. Guilford press, New York.
  • Gendolla, Guido H.E. & Wright Rex, A. (2004). Motivation in Social Setting. Cambrige, London
  • M. W. Eysenck, and M. T. Keane (2005). Cognitive Psychology: A Student’s Handbook (5th ed.). Hove, UK: Psychology Press.
  • Forges, Joseph, P. (2004). Social Motivation. Conscious and Unconscious Process. Univ. South Wales, Sydney.
  • Reid, D.H, Wilson, P.G. and Faw, G.D. (1991). Teaching self help skills. In J.L.Matson and J.A.Mulick (Eds), Hand Book of Mental Retardation (2nd) New York: Pergamon Press.
  • Joe Akande (2011). Words of Encouragement (Mutual arousal). Strategic insight Publishing, NY
  • Reynolds, Cecil R.; Goldstein, Sam (1999). Handbook of Neurodevelopmental and Genetic Disorders in Children. New York: The Guilford Press.
  • Canadian Psychological Association (CPA). Professional Practice Guidelines for School Psychologists in Canada. Retrieved from http://www.cpa.ca/cpasite/ userfiles/Documents/publications/CPA%20Guideline%20Practice.pdf on Dec. 18, 2010.
  • Achenbach, T. M., & Edelbrock, C. S. (1983) Manual for the Child Behviour Checklist and Revised Child Behaviour Profile, Burlington, University of Vermont, Department of Psychiatry.
  • Fagan, T. K. (2003). School Psychology. In Donald K. Freedheim and Irving B. Weiner (eds.). Handbook of Psychology: Volume 1, History of Psychology, New Jersey: John Wiley & Sons, Inc.
  • Schaefer, Charles, E., Briesmeister, James, M., and Fitton, Maureen, E.(2008). Family therapy techniques for problem behaviours of children and teenagers. The Jossey-Bass Social and Behavioural Science Services. San Francisco.
  • Fagan, T. K. (2005). Literary origins of the term “School Psychologist” revisited, School Psychology Review, 34 (3), 432 – 434.
  • Pearce, Evelyn (2008)(16th edition). Anatomy and Physiology for Nurses. Faber Publications, London.
  • ISPA, A Definition of School Psychology. Retrieved from http:// www.ispaweb.org/Documents/definition_fulldoc.html on Nov. 16, 2010.
  • Descartes, R. 1641/1996. Meditations on First Philosophy. J. Cottingham, trans.ed. Cambridge, England: Cambridge University Press.
  • National Association of School Psychologists (2000). Guidelines for the Provision of School Psychological Services. Bethesda, MD: Author.
  • WHO (2007). WHO Neurological Disorders: Public Health Challenges. WHO Press, 1211 Geneva 27, Switzerland.
  • Mahndiratta, M. (1997). Encyclopedia dictionary of education, 3rd Volume (P – Z), New Delhi: Sarup and Sons.
  • Altman, I. and Low, S. (1992). Place attachment, New York: Plenum Press.
  • National Association of School Psychologists, What Is A School Psychologist. Retrieved from http://www.nasponline.org/about_sp/whatis.aspx on Dec. 18, 2010.
  • Gifford, R. (1982). Projected interpersonal distance and orientation choice : Personality, sex and social situation, Social Psychology Quarterly, 45, 145-152.
  • The Times of India (July 29, 2010). Muslim girls top national average in school enrolment, p. 09.
  • Hewitt, J.P. (1991 ). Self and Society : A Symbolic inter-actionist social psychology, 5th Edition, Beston : Allyn and Becon.
  • Gutkin, T. B. and Conoley, J. C. (1990). Reconceptualising school psychology from a service delivery perspective: Implications for practice, training and research. Journal of School Psychology, 15, 203 – 223.
  • Proshansky, H.M. (1978). The city and self-identity, Environment and Behaviour, 10, 14 7-169.
  • Asch, S. E. (1987). Social psychology. New York: Oxford University Press. (Original work published, 1952).
  • Vaske, J.J. and Kobrin, K.C. (2001). Place attachment and environmentally responsible behaviour, The Journal of Environmental Education, 32 (4), 16-21.
  • Reynolds, W. M. and Miller, G. E. (2003). Current Perspectives in Educational Psychology. In William M. Reynolds and Gloria E. Miller (eds.). Handbook of Psychology: Volume 7, Educational Psychology (pp. 3-22), New Jersey: John Wiley & Sons, Inc.
  • Gurkaynak, M. R. and Lecompte, W. A. ( 1979): Human consequences of crowding, New York: Plenum.
  • Carson, R. C., Butcher, J. N., & Mineka, S. 2002. Abnormal Psychology and Modern Life. Allyn & Bacon: New York.
  • Kruse, L. (1985). Conceptions of crowds and crowdings. In Graumann, C. F. & Moscovici, S . (Eds. ). Changing Conceptions of Crowd Mind and Behaviour. New York: Springer.
  • The Times of India (Chennai, Oct 20, 2010). Psychologists to work with schools to help correct behavioural issues early. Retrieved on Nov. 04, 2010.
  • Brown, R. Z. 1953. Social behaviour, reproduction, and population changes in the house mouse (Mus musculus L.). Ecol. Mongr. 23: 217-240.
  • Wikipedia, the free encyclopedia. Clinical psychology. Retrieved from http:// en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Clinical_psychology on Nov. 22, 1010.
  • Levine, S. 1961. The psychophysiological effects of early stimulation. In Bliss, E., ed., Roots of Behaviour. New York: Harper, p. 246-253.
  • Wikipedia, the free encyclopedia. Educational psychology. Retrieved from http:/ /en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Educational_psychology on Nov. 22, 1010.
  • 1955. Stress and disease. Science 122: 625-631.
  • Constantino, M. J., & Spofford, C.M. 2008 Encyclopedia of Counseling. Sage Publications. (http://www.sage-ereference.com/counseling/Article_n182.html).
  • Bell A. B, Greene C.T., Fisher D. J ; Baum A., (2001) The City in Environmental Psychology, 5th ;Edition, Harcourt College Publisher
  • Hosp, J. L. and Reschly,D. J. (2002). Regional differences in school psychology practice. School Psychology Review, 31, 11 – 29.
  • Lewis, C. A. (1973). People plant interaction: A new horticultural perspective. American Horticulturalist, 52, 18-25.
  • Hecker, J.E., & Thorpe, G.L. 2005. Introduction to Clinical Psychology: Science, Practice, and Ethics. Pearson Education: New Delhi.
  • Lang, J. (1987) Creating Architectural Theory: the Role of the Behavioral Sciences in Environmental Design. New York: Van Norstrand Reinhold
  • Kenneth, S., & Trull, T. 2007. The International Handbook of Psychology. SAGE Publications. .
  • Leyens, J-P. and Corneille, O. (1999). Asch’s social psychology: Not as social as you may think. Personality and Social Psychology Review, 3(4), 345 – 357.
  • Pichot, P. 2003. Encyclopedia of Psychological Assessment. Sage Publications. (http://www.sage-ereference.com/psychassessment/Article_n71.html).
  • Dasgupta, S.K. (2003). Impact of high-rise living on housewives, Journal of Applied Psychology Issues, Vol. 9(2), 23-28.
  • The Times of India (March 27, 2011). Peer pressure? Relax, your teen can resist it, p. 17.
  • Sommer, R. (1969). Man's proximate environment. Journal o.f Social Issue, Vol. 22, 59-70.
  • National Association of School Psychologists. (2010). Necessary use of the title “School Psychologist” (Position Statement). Bethesda, MD: Author.
  • Kjellberg, A., Muhr, P. & Sk6ldstr6m, B. (1998). Fatigue after work in noisean epidemiological survey study and three quasi-experimen'.al field studies. Noise & Health, Vol.1, 47-55.
  • Barkley, R. A., Fischer, M., Edelbrock, C. S., & Smallish, L. (1990). The adolescent outcome of hyperactive children diagnosed by research criteria: 1. An 8 year perspective follow-up study. Journal of the American Academy of Child and Adolescent Psychiatry, 32, 233–256.
  • Wollin, D.D. & Montagne, M. (1981). College classroom environment: Effects of sterility versus amiability on student and teacher performance. Environment and Behaviour, Vol.13, 707-716.
  • Bettelheim, B. (1973). Bringing up children. Ladies Home Journal, 90, 28.
  • Zalesny, M.D. & Farace, R.V. (1988). Job function, sex and environment as correlates of work perceptions and attitudes. Journals of Applied Social Psychology, Vol. 18(9), 179-202.
  • Biederman, J., Faraone, S., Mick, E., Wozniak, J., Chen, L., Oullette, C., et al. (1996). Attention deficit hyperactivity disorder and juvenile mania: An overlooked comorbidity? Journal of the American Academy of Child and Adolescent Psychiatry, 35, 997–1008.
  • Ittleson, W.H., Pronshansky, H.M. & Rivlin, L.G. (1970). The environmental psychology of psychiatric ward. In H. Proshansky, W. Ittleson & L. Rivlin (Eds.). Environmental Psychology : Man and his physical setting, Holt, Rinehart & Winston, New York.
  • Birmaher, B., Axelson, D., Strober, M., Gill, M. K., Valeri, S., Chiappetta, L., et al. (2003). Clinical course of children and adolescents with bipolar spectrum disorders. Archives of General Psychiatry, 63, 175–183.
  • Trites, D., Galbraith, F.D., Sturdavent, M. & Leckwart, J.F. (1970). Influence of nursing unit design on the activities and subjective feelings of nursing personnel. Environment and Behavior, Vol.2, 303-334.
  • Brent, D.A., Holder, D., Kolko, D., Birmaher, B., Baugher, M., Roth, C., Iyengar, S., & Johnson, B.A. (1997). A clinical psychotherapy trial for adolescent depression comparing cognitive, family and supportive. Archives of General Psychology., 54,877-85.
  • Ainsworth, P. B. (2000). Psychology and Crime: Myths and Reality. Harlow, Essex : Longman.
  • Christakis, S. A., Zimmerman, F. J., DiGiuseppe, D. L., & McCarty, C. A. (2004). Early television exposure and subsequent attentional problems in children. Pediatrics, 113, 708–713.
  • Elaine Cassel, (2007) [2nd Edition]. How Can We Reduce Criminal Behaviour? Douglas A Bernstein, NY
  • Claude, D., & Firestone, P. (1995). The development of ADHD boys: A 12-year follow-up. Canadian Journal of Behavioural Science. 27, 226-249.
  • Bennett, Paul (2006). Abnormal and Clinical Psychology – An Introductory Text Book. (2nd edition). Open University Books, Philadelphia.
  • Cole, D.A., Martin, J.M., Peeke, L. G., Seroczynski, A., & Hoffman, K. (1998). Are cognitive errors of underestimation predictive or reflective of depressive symptoms in children: A longitudinal study. Journal of Abnormal Psychology. 107(3), 481-96.
  • John M. Macdonald, Charles C Thomas, Psychiatry and the Criminal (1976), USA. (2002), , Prentice Hall, UK/USA.
  • National Association of School Psychologists. (1992). Standards for the provision of school psychology services. Bethesda, MD: Author.
  • Kebbell, M. R. and Hatton, C. (1999), People with Mental Retardation as witness in court: a review. Mental Retardation, 37(3), 179-87.
  • Reschly, D. J. and Wilson, M.S. (1995). School psychology faculty and practitioners: 1986 to 1991 trends in demographic characteristics, roles, satisfaction, and system reform. School Psychology Review, 24, 62 – 80.
  • D. K. Kagehiro and W. S. Laufer, Hand book of Psychology and Law (1992), Springer-Verlog, New York, USA.
  • Hinshaw, S.P. (1994). Conduct disorder in childhood: conceptualisation, diagnosis, comorbidity, and risk status for antisocial functioning in adulthood. In D.C. Fowles, P. Sutker, & S. H. Goodman (Eds.), Progress in experimental personality and psychopathology research. New York: Springer.
  • Narcoanalysis, Brain Mapping, Hypnosis & Lie Detector test (2009), Satyendra K. Kaul and mohd. H. Zaidi, Alia Law Agency, Allahabad.
  • Klin, A., Volkmar, F. R. 1997. Asperger’s syndrome. In Cohen DJ, Volkmar FR, eds., Handbook of Autism and Pervasive Developmental Disorders (2nd Ed.) (pp. 94–122). New York, NY: John Wiley & Sons.
  • Puranik, D.A., Joseph, S.K., Daundkar, B.B., Garad, M.V. (2009). Brain Signature profiling in India. It’s status as an aid in investigation and as corroborative evidence – as seen from judgments. Proceedings of XX All India Forensic Science Conference, 815 – 822.
  • Kramer, R.A., Warner, V., Olfson, M., & Weissman, M. M. (1998). General medical problems among the offspring of depressed parents: A 10-year followup. Journal of the American Academy of Child and Adolescent Psychiatry. 37(6), 602-11.
  • Landreth, G. L., Joiner, K., & Solt, M. D. (2003). Play Therapy Training Directory (5th ed.). Denton, TX: Center for Play Therapy.
  • Lyons, M. J., True, W.S., Eisen, A., Meyer, J. M., et al. (1995). Differential heritability of adult and juvenile antisocial traits. Archives of General Psychiatry. 52, 906-915.
  • Scheufele, D. A. and Moy, P. (2000). Twenty-five years of the spiral of silence: A conceptual review and empirical outlook. International Journal of Public Opinion Research, 12(1), 3 – 28.
  • Milberger, S., Biederman, J., Faraone, S., & Chen, L. (1996). Is maternal smoking during pregnancy a risk factor for ADHD in children? American Journal of Psychiatry. 153, 1138-1142.
  • Hebert, B. & Ballard, B. (2007). Children and trauma: A post Katrina and Rita response. Professional School Counseling, 11(2), 140-144.
  • Moffitt, T. E (1993). The neuropsychology of conduct disorder. Development and Psychopathology, 5(1–2), 135–151.
  • Eysenck, H. J. (1972). Encyclopedia of psychology. (Volume 1). Bungay, Suffolk: The Search Press (pp. 1-5)
  • Moffitt, T. E., & Henry, B. (1989). Neuropsychological assessment of executive functions in self-reported delinquents. Development and Psychopathology, 1,105– 118.
  • Hale, Judith. The Performance Consultant’s Fieldbook: Tool and Technique for Improving Organisations and People, Jossey Bass Publication. explorehr.org/articles/ .../Types_of_OD_ Intervention.html
  • National Institute of Mental Health (NIMH) Fact Sheet. (2000). Depression in children and adolescents: A fact sheet for physicians. Retrieved from http:// www.mental-healthmatters.com/articles/article.php?artID=320
  • Medway, F. J. and Cafferty, T. P. (1992). School psychology: A social psychological perspective. Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum, p. xvii.
  • Patterson, G. R., Capaldi, D., & Bank, L. (1991). An early starter model for predicting delinquency. In D. Pepler & K. H. Rubin (Eds.), The development and treatment of childhood aggression (pp. 139–168). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum.
  • French, Wendell L., Cecil H.Bell, Jr., and Robert A. Zawacki (2006). Organisational Development and Transformation: Managing Effective Change. Sixth Edition. Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Limited. New Delhi.
  • Sieg, K.G., Gaffney, G. R., Preston, D. F., & Hellings, J. A. (1995). SPECT brain imaging abnormalities in attention deficit hyperactivity disorder. Clinical Nuclear Medicine. 20, 55-60.
  • Kaufman, A.S. & Kaufman, N.L. (1993). Manual for Kaufman Adolescent & Adult Intelligence Test ( KAIT). Circle Pines, MN: American Guidance Service, Inc.
  • Slutske, W. S., Heath, A. C., Dinwiddie, S. H., & Martin, N. G. (1997). Modelling genetic and environmental influences in the etiology of conduct disorder: A study of 2,682 adult twin pairs. Journal of Abnormal Psychology. 106, 266-279.
  • Wright, J.H., Beck, A.T., Thase, M.E. (2003). Cognitive therapy, in Textbook of Clinical Psychiatry, 4th ed. Edited by Hales RE, Yudofsky SC, Talbott JA. Washington, DC, American Psychiatric Publishing, 1245–1284.
  • Spencer, T. J., Biederman, J., & Harding, M. (1996). Pharmacotherapy of attention deficit-hyperactivity disorder across the life cycle. Journal of the American Academy of Child and Adolescent Psychiatry, 35, 409–432.
  • Murphy, J. J., & Duncan, B. L. (2007). Brief Intervention for School Problems (2nd ed.): Outcome-informed Strategies. New York: Guilford.
  • Swanson, J., McBurnett, K., & Wigal, T. (1995). Stimulant medications and the treatment of the children with ADHD. In T.H. Ollendick & R.J. Prinz (Eds.), Advances in Clinical Child Psychology (Vol 17, pp. 265-322). New York: Plenum.
  • Todd E. Feinberg and Martha J.Farah (2003). (2nd edition). Behavioural Neurology and Neuropsychology. McGraw Hill Medical Publishing Division, New York.
  • Weiss, G., & Hechtman, L. (1993). Hyperactive children grow up (2nd Ed.). New York: Guilford.
  • B. Kolb and I. Q. Whishaw, I. Q. (1996). Fundamentals of Human Neuropsychology (4th ed.). New York, NY: W. H. Freeman.
  • Weissman, M. M., Fendrich, M., & Wickramaratne, P. (1992). Incidence of psychiatric disorder in offspring at high and low risk for depression. Journal of the American Academy of Child and Adolescent Psychiatry. 31, 640-48.
  • Davis, K. (1983). Potential neurochemical and neuroendocrine validators of assessment instruments. Paper presented at conference on clinical memory Assessment of older adults, Wakefield, M.A.
  • Barlow.H.David(2008) Abnormal Psychology :An Integrative Approach, Canada, Wadsworth Cenanage Learning(Pub).
  • Aiken, L.R and Marnot G.G(2009) Psychological Testing and Assessment (12th Ed.) Pearson Education Inc.
  • Barlow &Durand(2005) Essentials of Abnormal Psychology,New York, Thomson Wadsworth(Pub).
  • Wolff, W.T and Mersens, M.R.(1974) Behavioural Assessment. A review of clinical methods. Journal of Personality Assessment, 38, 3-16.
  • Davison C .Gerald (2005) Abnormal Psychology, John Wiley&Sons(Pub).
  • Eaves, L. J., Silberg, J. L., Meyer., Maes, H. H., Simonoff, E., Pickles, A., Rutter, M.,Neale, M.C., Reynolds, C. A., Erikson, M. T., Health, A. C., Loeber, R., Truett, K. R., & Hwitt, J. K. (1997) Genetics and developmental psychopathology: 2 the main effects of genes and environment on behavioural problems in the Virginia twin study of adolescent behavioural development. Journal of Child Psychology and Psychiatry, 38, 965-980.
  • Abramowitz, J. S., Franklin, M. E., & Foa, E. B. (2002). Empirical status of cognitive-behavioural therapy for obsessive-compulsive disorder: A meta-analytic review. Romanian Journal of Cognitive and Behavioural Psychotherapies, 2, 89-104.
  • J. D. McKinney & L. Feagans, (Eds.) Current Topics in Learning Disabilities (Vol.1, pp. 245-283). Norwood, NJ: Ablex.
  • Altrocchi John(1985).Abnormal Behaviour,New York,Harcourt Brace Jovanovich.
  • Brown, P. & Elliot, R. (1965) Control of aggression in a nursery school class. Journal of Experimental Child Psychology, 2, 103-107.
  • Baer, L., & Jenike, M. A. (1992). Personality disorders in obsessive compulsive disorder. Psychiatric Clinics of North America, 15, 803-812.
  • Alderman N and Ward A. Behavioural treatment of the dysexecutive syndrome: Reduction of repetitive speech using response cost and cognitive over learning. Neuropsychological Rehabilitation. 1991;3:63-76. As in : Hanlon R. Neuropsychological rehabilitation. In: Zaidel DW (ed). Neuropsychology. Academic Press: New York; 1994: 317-333.
  • Barlow, D. H., Craske, M. G., Cerny, J. A., & Klosko, J. S. (1989). Behavioural treatment of panic disorder. Behaviour Therapy, 20, 261-282.
  • Rao.T.A.S (1992); Manual on developing communication skills in mentally retarded persons, Shree Ramana Process, Secundrabad.
  • Barlow, D. H. (2000). Unraveling the mysteries of anxiety and its disorders from the perspective of emotion theory. American Psychologist, 1247-1263.
  • Dalal, A. K. and Misra, G. (2010). The core and context of Indian psychology. Psychology and Developing Societies, 22(1), 121 – 155.
  • Smith, D. K. (1984). Practicing school psychologists: Their characteristics, activities, and populations served. Professional Psychology: Research and Practice, 15, 789 – 810.
  • The Tribune (March 23, 2011). Editorial: A legend and a gentleman: Only Sachin could walk off without being given out, p. 10.
  • Hales RE, Yudofsky SC, Talbott JA(1999) eds. APA Textbook of Psychiatry. 3rd ed. Washington, DC: American Psychiatric Press; .
  • Chalmers, D.J. (ed.) 2002. Philosophy of Mind. Oxford: Oxford University Press
  • Huppert, J. D. (2009). Anxiety disorders and depression comorbidity. In: Oxford handbook of anxiety and related disorders (pp. 576-586). Antony, Martin M. (Ed.); Stein, Murray B. (Ed.); New York, NY, US: Oxford University Press.
  • Gazaaniga, M. S. 1984. Handbook of Cognitive Neuroscience, Plenum Press: NY
  • Lazarus, R. S. (1977). Cognitive and coping processes in emotion. In A.Monat & R. S. Lazarus (Eds.) Stress and coping: An anthology (pp 145-158). New York, NY: Columbia University Press.
  • Neil R.Carlson (2007). Foundation of Physiological Psychology. Pearson Education, Inc., India.
  • Lazarus, R. S. & Folkman, S. (1984). Stress, appraisal, and coping. New York, NY: Springer Publishing Company.
  • Jeffrey L. Cummings and Michael S. Mega, (2003). Neuropsychiatry and Behavioral Neuroscience, Oxford University Press.
  • Ledley, D. R., Marx, B. P., & Heimberg, R.G. (2005). Making cognitivebehavioural therapy work: Clinical process for new practitioners. New York, NY: The Guilford Press.
  • Stokols, D. and I. Altman [Eds.] (1987). Handbook of Environmental Psychology. New York: Wiley.
  • McLaughlin, K. A., & Hatzenbuehler. M. L. (2009). Stressful life events, anxiety sensitivity, and internalising symptoms in adolescents. Journal of Abnormal Psychology, 118(3), 659-669.
  • Brown, B. and Perkins, D. (1992). Disruptions in place attachment, In I. Altman and S. Low (Eds.) Place attachment, Human Behaviour and Environment New York, Plenum Press, 12, 279-304.
  • National Institute of mental health (2008). The numbers count: Mental disorders in America
  • Fisher, J.D. and Byrne, D. ( 1975). Too close for comfort: Sex differences in response to invasions of personal space, Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 32 (1), 15-21.
  • Neziroglu, F., Bubrick, J., & Yaryura-Tobias, J. (2004). Overcoming compulsive hoarding: Why you save & how you can stop. Oakland, CA: New Harbinger Publications.
  • Gist, N.P. and Fava, S.F. (1964). Urban Society, 5th Edition, New York : Thomas Y. Crowell Company.
  • Norton, P. J., & Price, E. C. (2007). A meta-analytic review of adult cognitivebehavioural treatment outcome across the anxiety disorders. The Journal of
  • Hall, E.T. (1959). The silent language, New York : Doubleday.
  • Nervous and Mental Disease, 195, 521-531.
  • Little, K.B. ( 1965). Personal space, Journal of Experimental Social Psychology, 237-247.
  • Pfeiffer PN, Ganoczy D, Ilgen M, Zivin K, Valenstein M. (2009) Comorbid anxiety as a suicide risk factor among depressed veterans.
  • Osgood, C.C. Suci, GJ. and Tannenbaum, P.H. (1957). The measurement of meaning, Urbana, IL : University of Illinois Press.
  • Pollack MH, Simon NM, Worthington JJ, et al. Combined paroxetine and clonazepam treatment strategies compared to paroxetine monotherapy for panic disorder. J Psychopharmacol. Sep 2003.
  • Rath, R. Dash, A.S. and Dash, U.N. (1978). Cognitive abilities and school achievement of socially disadvantaged in primary school, New Delhi : Allied Publishers.
  • Johnston, J. E. (2006). The complete idiot’s guide to controlling anxiety. New York: Penguin Group.
  • Smith, P.B. and Bond, M.H. (1993). Social psychology across cultures : Analysis and perspectives. London : Harvester/ Wheatsheaf.
  • Anxiety disorders Association of America
  • Taylor, R. B. (1988): Human territorial functioning: An empirical, evolutionary perspective on individual and small group territorial cognitions, behaviours, and consequences, New York Cambridge University Press.
  • Association for Behavioural and Cognitive Therapies
  • Evans, G W. and Lepore, S. J. (1993): Household crowding and social support: A quasi-experimental analysis. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 65, 308-316.
  • Butcher, James, N. and Mineka, Susan & Hooley, Jill, M. (2006). Abnormal Psychology My Psych Lab, MI.
  • Kuentzel, W. F. and Heberlein, T. A. ( 1992): Cognitive and behavioural adaptations to perceived crowding: A panel study of coping and displacement. Journal of Leisure Research, 24, 377-393.
  • Sharpe, M., and A. C. D. C. Williams. 2002. Treating patients with somatoform pain disorder and hypochondriasis. In Psychological Approaches to Pain Management: A Practitioner’s Handbook, edited by D. C. Turk and R. J. Gatchel. New York: Guilford Press.
  • Desor, J. A. ( 1972). Towards a Psychological Theory of Crowding. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 21: 79 - 83.
  • Arnow, B. A., E. M. Hunkeler, C. M. Blasey, J. Lee, M. J. Constantino, B. Fireman, et al. 2006. Comorbid depression, chronic pain, and disability in primary care. Psychosomatic Medicine 68: 262-268.
  • Berlonghi, A. E. (1995). Understanding and planning for different spectator crowds. Safety Science, 18: 239 - 247.
  • Becker, N., A. Bondegaard Thomsen, A. K. Olsen, P. Sjogren, P. Bech, and J. Eriksen. 1997. Pain epidemiology and health related quality of life in chronic non-malignant pain patients referred to a Danish multidisciplinary pain center. Pain 73: 393-400.
  • Bamett, S. A 1964. Social Stress. In Carthy, J. D., and C. L. Duddington, ed., Viewpoints in Biology (Chap. 5). Butterworths: Kingsway, London, p. 170218.
  • Brinkhaus, B., C. M. Witt, S. Jena, K. Linde, A. Streng, S. Wagenpfeil, et al. 2006. Acupuncture in patients with chronic low back pain: A randomized controlled trial. Archives of Internal Medicine 166: 450-457.
  • 1962b. A behavioural sink. In Bliss, E. L., ed., Roots of Behaviour. New York:
  • Clark, D. M., P. M. Salkovskis, A. Hackmann, A. Wells, M. Fennell, J. Ludgate, et al. 1998. Two psychological treatments for hypochondriasis. British Journal of Psychiatry 173: 218-225.
  • Denenberg, V. 1962. The effects of early experience. In Hafez, E. S. E., ed., The Behaviour of Domestic Animals (Chap. 6). London: Balliere, Tindall and Cox. p. 109-138.
  • Dahl, J., and T. Lundgren. 2006. Living Beyond Your Pain: Using Acceptance and Commitment Therapy to Ease Chronic Pain. Oakland, CA: New Harbinger Publications.
  • Milgram, S. 1970. The experience of living in cities. Science 167: 1461-1468.
  • Elliott, A. M., B. H. Smith, K. I. Penny, W. C. Smith, and W. A. Chambers. 1999. The epidemiology of chronic pain in the community. Lancet 354: 1248-1252.
  • 1967. The development of social motivation. In Nebraska Symposium on Motivation, University of Nebraska, p. 111-132.
  • Fallon, B. A. 2004. Pharmacotherapy of somatoform disorders. Journal of Psychosomatic Research 56: 455-460.
  • 1966. Population characteristics of Murid Rodents. In Parrack, D. W., ed., Indian Rodent Symposium. Calcutta, p. 152-176.
  • Fink, P., M. S. Hansen, and M.-L. Oxhoj. 2004. The prevalence of somatoform disorders among internal medical inpatients. Journal of Psychosomatic Research 56: 413-418.
  • Carr, S. Francis, M. Rivlin, L. and Stone, A. (1999J-Public Space; eambridge University Press
  • Fishbain, D. A., M. Goldbery, T. M. Khalil, S. S. Asfour, E. Abdel-Moty, R. Meagher, et al. 1988. The utility of electromyographic biofeedback in the treatment of conversion paralysis. American Journal of Psychiatry 145: 15721575.
  • Ash Amin (2008) Collective Culture and Urban Public Space City, Vol. 12, (1). April. Routledge
  • Grabe, H. J., C. Meyer, U. Hapke, H.-J. Rumpf, H. J. Freyberger, H. Dilling, et al. 2003. Specific somatoform disorder in the general population. Psychosomatics: Journal of Consultation Liaison Psychiatry 44: 304-311.
  • lltus, S., & Hart, R, (1994) Participatory planning and design of recreational spaces with children. Architecture & Comportment/Architecture & Behaviour, 10, 361-370
  • Hiller, W., M. M. Fichter, and W. Rief. 2003. A controlled treatment study of somatoform disorders including analysis of healthcare utilisation and costeffectiveness. Journal of Psychosomatic Research 54: 369-380.
  • Oppewal, H., & Timmermans, H. ( 1999) Mode ling consumer perception of public space in shopping centers. Environment and Behaviour, 31, 45-65
  • Kabat-Zinn, J., L. Lipworth, and R. Burney. 1985. The clinical use of mindfulness meditation for the self-regulation of chronic pain. Journal of Behavioural Medicine 8: 163-190.
  • Clay, R. A. (2002). An indigenised psychology. Psychologists in India blend Indian traditions and Western psychology. Retrieved from http://www.apa.org/ monitor/may02/india.aspx on April 16, 2011.
  • Kabat-Zinn, J., L. Lipworth, R. Burney, and W. Sellers. 1987. Four-year followup of a meditation-based program for the self-regulation of chronic pain: Treatment outcomes and compliance. Clinical Journal of Pain 2: 159-173.
  • Kupritz, V. W. ( 1998). Privacy in the work place: The impact of building design. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 18,341-356
  • Kashner, T. M., K. Rost, B. Cohen, M. Anderson, and G. R. Smith. 1995. Enhancing the health of somatisation disorder patients: Effectiveness of shortterm group therapy. Psychosomatics 36: 462-470.
  • Ziesel, J. (1975). Sociology and Architectural Design (Russell Sage Social Science Frontiers Series No.6). New York: Free Press
  • Lidbeck, J. 1997. Group therapy for somatisation disorders in general practice: Effectiveness of a short cognitive-behavioural treatment model. Acta Psychiatrica Scandinavica 96: 14-24.
  • Altman, I. (1975). The environment and social behaviour: Privacy, personal space, territory, crowding, Monterey, CA : Brooks/Cole.
  • Liddle, S. D., G. D. Baxter, and J. H. Gracey. 2004. Exercise and chronic low back pain: What works? Pain 107: 176-190.
  • Bechtel, R., Marans, R. & Michelson, W. (Eds.) ( 1987). Methods in environmental and behavioural research. New York: Van Nostrand Reinhold.
  • Looper, K. J., and L. J. Kirmayer. 2002. Behavioural medicine approaches to somatoform disorders. Journal of Consulting and Clinical Psychology 70: 810827.
  • Hall, E. ( 1966). The hidden dim ens ions, Garden City, NY : Doub1eday.
  • Manheimer, E., A. White, B. Berman, K. Forys, and E. Ernst. 2005. Meta-analysis: Acupuncture for low back pain. Annals of Internal Medicine 142: 651-663.
  • Rappoport, A. (1977). Human aspects of urban form. Oxford : Pergammon Press.
  • Marcus, D. A. 2002. Pharmacoeconomics of opioid therapy for chronic nonmalignant pain. Expert Opinion on Pharmacotherapy 3: 229-235.
  • Ahrentzen, S., Jue, GM., Skorpanich, M.A. & Evans, G.W. (1982). School environments and stress, In G.W. Evans (Ed.) Environmental Stress, pp. 224255, New York: Cambridge University Press.
  • Masheb, R. M., and R. D. Kerns. 2000. Pain disorder. In Effective Brief Therapies: A Clinician’s Guide, edited by M. Hersen and M. Biaggio. San Diego, CA: Academic Press.
  • Greene, T.C., Bell, P.A. & Boyer, W.N. (1983). Colouring the environment: Hue, arousal, and boredom. Bulletin of the Psychonomic Society, Vol.21, 253254.
  • Moene, F. C., K. E. L. Hoogduin, and R. Van Dyck. 1998. The inpatient treatment of patients suffering from (motor) conversion symptoms: A description of eight cases. International Journal of Clinical and Experimental Hypnosis 46: 171-190.
  • Srivastava, R. K. (1990) Frustration aggression patterns of mothers of retarded children. Disabilities and Impairments, 4, 1, 51-56.
  • Newton-John, T. R., S. H. Spence, and D. Schotte. 1995. Cognitive-behavioural therapy versus EMG biofeedback in the treatment of chronic low back pain. Behaviour Research and Therapy 33: 691-697.
  • Stone, N.J. (2001). Designing Effective Study Environments, Vol.21, 179190.
  • Nicholas, M. K., A. R. Molloy, and C. Brooker. 2006. Using opioids with persisting noncancer pain: A biopsychosocial perspective. Clinical Journal of Pain 22: 137-146.
  • Becker, F. & Sims, W. (2000). Managing uncertainty : Integrating portfolio strategies for dynamic organizations (Rep. of International Workplace Studies Program), Cornell University.
  • Patterson, D. R. 2004. Treating pain with hypnosis. Current Directions in Psychological Science 13: 252-255.
  • Schneider, F., Lesko, W. & Garrett, W. (1980). Helping behaviour in hot, comfortable cold temperatures, Environment and Behavior, Vol.12(2), 231240.
  • Patterson, D. R., and M. P. Jensen. 2003. Hypnosis and clinical pain. Psychological Bulletin 129: 495-521.
  • Anthony, K.H. & Watkins, N.J. (2002). Exploring Pathology : Relationships between clinical and environmental psychology. In R.B. Bechtel and A Churchman (Eds.) Handbook of Environmental Psychology, 129-146.
  • Rooijmans. 1995. Cognitive behavioural therapy for medically unexplained physical symptoms: A randomised controlled trial. British Medical Journal 311: 1328-1332.
  • Gump, P.V. & James, E.V. (1970). Patient behavior in wards of traditional and modern design, Midwest Psychological Field Station, University of Kansas, Lawrence.
  • Scharff, L. 1997. Recurrent abdominal pain in children: A review of psychological factors and treatment. Clinical Psychology Review 17: 145-166.
  • Olsen, R. (1978). The effect of the hospital environment. Unpublished doctoral dissertation, City University ofNew York.
  • Skapinakis, P., G. Lewis, and V. Mavreas. 2003. Cross-cultural differences in the epidemiology of unexplained fatigue syndromes in primary care. British Journal of Psychiatry 184: 205-209.
  • Spivack, M. (1967). Sensory distortions in tunnels and corridors. Hospital and Community Psychiatry, Vo/.18, 12-18.
  • Smith, B. H., A. M. Elliott, W. A. Chambers, W. C. Smith, P. C. Hannaford, and K. Penny. 2001. The impact of chronic pain in the community. Family Practice 18: 292-299.
  • Wolfe, M. (1975). Room size and density: Behavior patterns in a children's psychiatric facility. Environment and Behavior, Vol. 7, 199-225.
  • Speckens, A. E. M., A. M. van Hemert, P. Spinhoven, K. E. Hawton, J. H. Bolk, and H. G. M.
  • Alder, J. R. (Ed.). (2004). Forensic Psychology: Concepts, Debates and Practice. Cullompton: William.
  • Speed, J. 1996. Behavioural management of conversion disorder: Retrospective study. Archives of Physical Medicine and Rehabilitation 77: 147-154.
  • Gudjonsson, G. H. and Haward, L. R. C. (1998). Forensic Psychology: A guide to practice. London : Routledge.
  • Stewart, W. F., R. B. Lipton, D. D. Celentano, and M. L. Reed. 1992. Prevalence of migraine headache in the United States. Relation to age, income, race, and other sociodemographic factors. Journal of the American Medical Association 267: 64-69.
  • Mike Maguire, Rod Morgan and Robert Reiner (eds) (2007). The Oxford Handbook of Criminology - fourth edition, Oxford University Press (March 2007)
  • Thomas, K. J., H. MacPherson, J. Ratcliffe, L. Thorpe, J. Brazier, M. Campbell, et al. 2005. Longer term clinical and economic benefits of offering acupuncture care to patients with chronic low back pain. Health Technology Assessment 9: iii-iv, ix-x, 1-109.
  • Siegel, Larry A\(2001). Criminology: Theories, Patterns, and Typologies. Wadsworth Publishing Company, NY
  • Turk, D. C. 1994. Perspectives on chronic pain: The role of psychological factors. Current Directions in Psychological Science 3: 45-48.
  • Indian Penal Code 1860
  • Volz, H. P., H. Murck, S. Kasper, and H. J. Moller. 2002. St. John’s wort extract (LI 160) in somatoform disorders: Results of a placebo-controlled trial. Psychopharmacology 164: 294-300.
  • Zapf, Patricia and Roesch, Ronald (2009). Evaluation of Competence to Stand Trial. Oxford University Press, Oxford.
  • Wallis, C. 2005. The right (and wrong) way to treat pain. Time, Feb. 28, 47-57.
  • Arrigo, Bruce A. (2000). Introduction to Forensic Psychology. Academic Press, USA.
  • Warwick, H. M., D. M. Clark, M. Cobb, and P. M. Salkovskis. 1996. A controlled trial of cognitive-behavioural treatment of hypochondriasis. British Journal of Psychiatry 169: 189-195.
  • Harold V. Hall and Joseph G. Poirier, Detecting Malingering and Deception (2001), CRC Press, USA.
  • Waxman, R., A. Tennant, and P. Helliwell. 2000. A prospective follow-up study of low back pain in the community. Spine 25: 2085-2090.
  • Robert L. Sadoff, Charles C. Thomas, Forensic Psychiatry (1975), USA.
  • Barlow, David H. and Durand, Mark V. (2002). Abnormal Psychology An Intergative Approach Wadsworth Cengage publisher. NY
  • Melton, G.; Petrila, J.; Poythress, N.; and Slobogin, C. (1997), Psychological evaluations for the courts: A handbook for mental health practitioners and lawyers, Guilford Press: New York.
  • Cave, Susan, (2005). Classification and Diagnosis of Psychological Abnormality. Rutledge , NY.
  • Lipman, F. D. (1962), Malingering in Personal Injury Cases, Temp. L. Q. 35: 141.
  • American Psychiatric Association (APA). Let’s Talk Facts About Eating Disorders. 2005.
  • Butcher J.N. and Miller, K.B. (2006), Personality assessment in personal injury litigation, in Handbook of Forensic Psychology, 3rd edition, A.K. Hess and I. B. Weiner, eds. John Wiley, New York.
  • American Psychiatric Association Work Group on Eating Disorders. Practice guideline for the treatment of patients with eating disorders (revision). American Journal of Psychiatry, 2000; 157(1 Suppl): 1-39.
  • Lawrence Earlbaum, Mahwah.
  • Andersen AE. Eating disorders in males. In: Brownell KD, Fairburn CG, eds. Eating disorders and obesity: a comprehensive handbook. New York: Guilford Press, 1995; 177-187.
  • Kitaeff, Jack (2011). Handbook of Police Psychology. Routledge Academic, LA
  • Anderson AE. Eating disorders in males: Critical questions. In R Lemberg (ed), Controlling Eating Disorders with Facts, Advice and Resources. Phoenix, AZ: Oryx Press, 1992, pp.20-28.
  • Loftus, E.F. (1979). Eyewitness Testimony. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.
  • Arnold LM, McElroy SL, Hudson JI, Wegele JA, Bennet AJ, Kreck PE Jr. A placebo-controlled randomized trial of fluoxetine in the treatment of binge-eating disorder. Journal of Clinical Psychiatry, 2002; 63:1028-1033.
  • Wells GL. 1993. What do we know about eyewitness identification? Am. Psychol. 48, 553–71
  • Becker AE, Grinspoon SK, Klibanski A, Herzog DB. Eating Disorders. New England Journal of Medicine, 1999; 340(14): 1092-1098.
  • Loftus, E. F., Miller, D. G. & Burns, H. J. (1978). Semantic integration of verbal information into a visual memory. Human Learning and Memory, 4, 19-31.
  • Birmingham CL, Su J, Hlynsky JA, Goldner EM, Gao M. The mortality rate of anorexia nervosa. International Journal of Eating Disorders. 2005 Sep; 38(2):143-146.
  • Geiselman, R. E., Fisher, R. P., Firstenberg, I., Hutton, L. A., Sullivan, S. J., Avetissian, I. V, & Prosk, A. L. (1984). Enhancement of eyewitness memory: An empirical evaluation of the Cognitive Interview. Journal of Police Science and Administration, 12, 130-138.
  • Bridge JA, Iyengar S, Salary CB, Barbe RP, Birmaher B, Pincus HA, Ren L, Brent DA. Clinical response and risk for reported suicidal ideation and suicide attempts in pediatric antidepressant treatment, a meta-analysis of randomized controlled trials. Journal of the American Medical Association, 2007; 297(15): 1683-1696.
  • Axline, V. M. (1947). Play therapy: The inner dynamics of childhood. Cambridge, MA: Houghton Mifflin. Drewes, A. (2001). The possibilities and challenges in using play therapy in schools. In A.A. Dawes, L.J. Carey, & C.E. Shaefer (Eds.), School-based play therapy. New York: John Wiley & Sons.
  • Bryant-Waugh R, Lask B. Childhood-onset eating disorders. In CG Fairburn, KD Brownell (eds.), Eating disorders and obesity: A comprehensive handbook, 2nd ed. New York: Guilford Press, 2002, pp. 210-214.
  • Bertelson, A,. Harvald, B,. & Hauge, M. (1977). A Danish twin study of manicdepressive disorders. British Journal of psychiatry, 130, 330-351.
  • Bulik CM, Sullivan PF, Kendler KS. Medical and psychiatric comorbidity in obese women with and without binge eating disorder. International Journal of Eating Disorders, 2002; 32: 72-78.
  • Frank, J. (1988). “What is Psychotherapy?”. In Bloch, Sidney (ed.). An Introduction to the Psychotherapies. Oxford: Oxford University Press.
  • Eisler I, Dare C, Hodes M, Russel G, Dodge, and Le Grange D. Family therapy for adolescent anorexia nervosa: The results of a controlled comparison of two family interventions. Journal of Child Psychology and Psychiatry, 2000; 1: 727736.
  • Josefi, O., and Ryan, Y. (2004). Non-directive play therapy for young children with autism: A case study. Clinical Child Psychology and Psychiatry, 9, 533 – 551.
  • Fitzgerald KD, Welsh RC, Gehring WJ, Abelson JL, Himle JA, Liberzon I, Taylor SF. Error-related hyperactivity of the anterior cingulated cortex in obsessivecompulsive disorder. Biological Psychiatry, February 1, 2005; 57 (3): 287-294.
  • Dainik Bhaskar (Nov. 09, 2010). Facebook mamle mein High Court ka dakhal se inkar (English translation: Refusal of High Court from intervening in Facebook matter), p. 04.
  • Halmi CA, Agras WS, Crow S, Mitchell J, Wilson GT, Bryson S, Kraemer HC. Predictors of treatment acceptance and completion in anorexia nervosa: implications for future study designs. Archives of General Psychiatry; 2005; 62: 776-781.
  • Hindustan Times (July 30, 2010). Boy shoots at junior with pellet gun in school, p. 04.
  • Insel TR and Quirion R. Psychiatry as a clinical neuroscience discipline. Journal of the American Medical Association, November 2, 2005; 294 (17): 2221-2224.
  • Times of India (August 20, 2010). Punished for ‘smoking’ TN teen immolates self, p. 09.
  • Lasater L, Mehler P. Medical complications of bulimia nervosa. Eating Behaviour, 2001; 2:279-292.
  • http:// www. Youtube.com/watch? v=CpolxEN54ho& feature=related
  • Lock J, Agras WS, Bryson S, Kraemer, HC. A comparison of short-and longterm family therapy for adolescent anorexia nervosa, Journal of the American Academy of Child and Adolescent Psychiatry, 2005; 44: 632-639.
  • Times of India (August 21, 2010). Girl loses vision after being beaten by teacher, p. 05.
  • Lock J, Couturier J, Agras WS. Comparison of long-term outcomes in adolescents with anorexia nervosa treated with family therapy. Journal of the American Academy of Child and Adolescent Psychiatry, 2006; 45: 666-672.
  • Rubin, Judith A. (2001): Approaches to Art Therapy: Theory and Technique. Publisher: Bruner- Routledge
  • Lock J, Le Grange D, Agras WS, Dare C. Treatment Manual for Anorexia Nervosa: A Family-based Approach. New York: Guilford Press, 2001.
  • Buss, D. M., & Barnes, M. (1986). Pin human mate selection. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology , 50(3), 559-570.
  • McIntosh VW, Jordan J, Carter FA, Luty SE, et al. Three psychotherapies for anorexia nervosa: a randomized controlled trial. The American Journal of Psychiatry, Apr. 2005; 162: 741-747.
  • NCERT Admission Notice, IDGC 2011. Retrieved from http://www.ncert.nic.in/ announcements/oth_announcements/pdf_files/depfe_idgc_adm_notice..pdf on April 12, 2011.
  • Meyer-Lindenberg AS, Olsen RK, Kohn PD, Brown T, Egan MF, Weinberger DR, et al. Regionally specific disturbance of dorsolateral prefrontal-hippocampal functional connectivity in schizophrenia. Archives of General Psychiatry, April 2005; 62(4).
  • Van Dyke, A., & Wiedis, D. (2001). Sandplay and assessment techniques with preschool –age children. In G.L. Landreth (Ed.), Innovations in play therapy: Issues, process, and special populations. Philadelphia, PA: Brunner-Rutledge.
  • National Institute for Clinical Excellence (NICE). Core interventions in the treatment and management of anorexia nervosa, bulimia nervosa, and binge eating disorder, 2004: London: British Psychological Society.
  • VanFleet, R, Sywulak, A. E., Sniscak, C. C., and Guerney, L. F. (2010). ChildCentered Play Therapy, New York: Guilford.
  • Pezawas L, Meyer-Lindenberg A, Drabant EM, Verchinski BA, Munoz KE, Kolachana BS, et al. 5-HTTLPR polymorphism impacts human cingulatedamygdala interactions: a genetic susceptibility mechanism for depression. Nature Neuroscience, June 2005; 8 (6): 828-834.
  • Scharf, R. S. (2001). Theories of Psychotherapy & Counseling: Concepts and Cases. (3rd ed.). Thomson, Brooks/Cole.
  • Pope HG, Gruber AJ, Choi P, Olivardi R, Phillips KA. Muscle dysmorphia: an underrecognised form of body dysmorphic disorder. Psychosomatics, 1997; 38: 548-557.
  • Stuart, R.B. (1980). Helping Couples Change: A Social Learning Approach to Marital Therapy. Guildford press, New York.
  • Romano SJ, Halmi KJ, Sarkar NP, Koke SC, Lee JS. A placebo-controlled study of fluoxetine in continued treatment of bulimia nervosa after successful acute fluoxetine treatment. American Journal of Psychiatry, Jan. 2002; 151(9): 96102.
  • Ladany, N. & Inman, A. (2008) Handbook of Counseling Psychology, (4th ed.). John Wiley & Sons: New York.
  • Russell GF, Szmuckler GI, Dare C, Eisler I. An evaluation of family therapy in anorexia nervosa and bulimia nervosa. Archives of General Psychiatry, 1987; 44: 1047-1056.
  • Whiston, S.C. and Rahardja, D. (2008). Vocational Counseling Process and Outcome. In S. Brown and R. Lent (Eds.), Handbook of Counseling Psychology, (4th ed). NY: Wiley.
  • Spitzer RL, Yanovski S, Wadden T, Wing R, Marcus MD, Stunkard A, Devlin M, Mitchell J, Hasin D, Horne RL. Binge eating disorder: its further validation in a multisite study. International Journal of Eating Disorders, 1993; 13(2): 137-153.
  • Cronbach, L. J. (1946). Response sets and test validity. Educational and Psychological Measurement, 6, 475-494.
  • Steiner H, Lock J. Anorexia nervosa and bulimia nervosa in children and adolescents: a review of the past ten years. Journal of the American Academy of Child and Adolescent Psychiatry, 1998; 37: 352-359.
  • Warren H Lewis (editor) (2000). (2oth edition) Gray’s Anatomy of the Human Body Anatomy of the Human Body New York: Bartleby.com
  • Streigel-Moore RH, Franko DL. Epidemiology of Binge Eating Disorder. International Journal of Eating Disorders, 2003; 21: 11-27.
  • E. E. Smith and S. M. Kosslyn (2007). Cognitive Psychology: Mind and Brain (1st ed.). Upper Saddle River, NJ: Pearson/Prentice Hall.
  • Taylor CB, Bryson S, Luce KH, Cunning D, Doyle AC, Abascal LB, Rockwell R, Dev P, Winzelberg AJ, Wilfley DE. Prevention of Eating Disorders in At-risk College-age Women. Archives of General Psychiatry; 2006 Aug; 63(8):881-888.
  • Jayanthi Narayan – Special Education in India
  • Walsh et al. Fluoxetine after weight restoration in anorexia nervosa: a randomized controlled trial. Journal of the American Medical Association. 2006 Jun 14; 295(22): 2605-2612.
  • Lyon, G.R. (1996) Learning Disabilities. In E.J.Mashr R.A. Barkley (Eds). Child Psychopathology, N.Y. Guilford Press.
  • Wilson GT and Shafran R. Eating disorders guidelines from NICE. Lancet, 2005; 365: 79-81.
  • Benjamin Jr., L. T., DeLeon, P. H., Freedheim, D. K. and Vandenbos, G. R. (2003). Psychology as a profession. In J. R. Graham and J. A. Naglieri (Eds.), Assessment Psychology, New Jersey: John Wiley & Sons, Inc.
  • Wonderlich SA, Lilenfield LR, Riso LP, Engel S, Mitchell JE. Personality and anorexia nervosa. International Journal of Eating Disorders, 2005; 37: S68S71
  • United Nations, Educational, Scientific and cultural organisation (1996) Legislation Pertaining to special Needs Education. UNESCO, Paris.
  • Bennett, Paul.(2003). Abnormal & Clinical Psychology : An Introductory Text Book. Open University publisher, NY.
  • Comer, Ronald.J (1998) Fundamentals of Abnormal Psychology. M.Y, Freeman Company.
  • David H Barlow &V Mark Durand by Abnormal Psychology An Intergative Approach (Wadsworth Cengage publisher).
  • Haynes, S.N and Heiby.E.M. (2004). Comprehensive Handbook of Psychological Assessment, vol.3, Behavioural Assessment. Hoboken N.J. EWiley.
  • Charles E Dodgan & W .Michael Shea (2000). Substance use Disorders: Assessment & Treatment Academic Press, London.
  • Phares, V. (2003). Understanding Abnormal Child Psychology, John Wiley & Sons Inc. NJ.
  • Johnston LD, O’Malley PM, Bachman JG: National Survey Results of Drug Use From the Monitoring the Future Study, 1975–1994, vol 1: Secondary School Students: NIH Publication 95-4026. Rockville, Md, National Institute on Drug Abuse, 1995
  • Kendall, Philips and Comer, Jonathan S. (2010). Childhood Disorders (second Edition). Psychology Press, NY
  • Kandel DB, Yamaguchi K, Chen K: Stages of progression in drug involvement from adolescence to adulthood: further evidence for the gateway theory. J Stud Alcohol 1992; 53:447–457
  • The Times of India (April 07, 2011). 13-year-old held for bullying Muslim Schoolmate in NY, p. 15.
  • Oetting ER, Beauvais F: Adolescent drug use: findings of national and local surveys. J Consult Clin Psychol 1990; 58:385–394
  • Patterson, G. R. ( 1976a)The aggressive child: Victim and architect of a cohesive system. In E. J. Mash, L. A. Hamerlinck, & N. C. Handy (Eds.) Behaviour modification and families (pp.267-316). New York: Brunner/Mazel.
  • Maisto SA, McKay JR: Diagnosis, in Assessing Alcohol Problems: A Guide for Clinicians and Researchers: National Institute on Alcohol Abuse and Alcoholism Treatment Handbook Series 4: NIH Publication 95-3745. Edited by Allen JP, Columbus M. Bethesda, Md, National Institutes of Health, 1995
  • Patterson, G. R., Reid, J. B., Jones, R. R., & Conger,R. E. (1975) A Social Parenting Approach to Family Intervention. Vol. 1 Families with aggressive children, Eugene, OR: Castalia.\
  • National Household Survey on Drug Abuse: Population Estimates 1994: DHHS Publication 94-3063. Rockville, Md, Department of Health and Human Services, 1994
  • Becker, W. C., Madsen, C. H., Arnold, C. R. & Thomas, D. R. (1967) The contingent use of teacher attention and praising in reducing classroom problems. Journal of Special Education, 1, 287-307.
  • Patrick, D. Dual diagnosis: substance-related and psychiatric disorders. The Nursing Clinics of North America. 2003; 38: 67-73.
  • Deshler, D. D., Warner, M. M., Schumaker, J. B., & Alley, G. R., (1983). Learning strategies intervention model: Key components and current status. In Hallahan, D. P., Lloyd, J., Kosiewiex, M. M., Kauffman, J. M. & Graves, A. W. (1979) Self monitoring of attention as a treatment for learning disabledboy’s off-task behaviour, Learning Disability Quarterly, 2, 24-32.
  • Windle M: Alcohol use and abuse: some findings from the National Adolescent Student Health Survey. Alcohol Health Res World 1991; 15:5–10
  • Wagner,R. K., & Torgesen, J. K. (1987). The nature of phonological processing and its causal role in the acquisition of reading skills. Psychological Bulletin, 101, 2, 192-212.
  • Spitzer RL: Psychiatric diagnosis: are clinicians still necessary? Compr Psychiatry 1983; 24:399–411
  • brainfitnessresources.com
  • Nelson-Gray RO: DSM-IV: empirical guidelines from psychometrics. J Abnorm Psychol 1991; 100:308–315
  • Hanlon RE, Clontz B et al. Management of severe behavioural dyscontrol following subarachnoid haemorrhage. Neuropsychological Rehabilitation. 1993;3:63-76. As in : Hanlon R. Neuropsychological rehabilitation. In: Zaidel DW (ed). Neuropsychology. Academic Press: New York; 1994: 317-333.
  • Rinaldi RC, Steindler EM, Wilford BB, Goodwin D: Clarification and standardisation of substance abuse terminology. JAMA 1988; 259:555–557
  • Woods RL. Rehabilitation of patients with disorders of attention. Journal of head trauma rehabilitation; 1986; 43-53. As cited in : Hanlon R. Neuropsychological rehabilitation. In: Zaidel DW (ed). Neuropsychology. Academic Press: New York; 1994: 317-333.
  • Rounsaville BJ, Bryant K, Babor T, Kranzler H, Kadder R: Cross system agreement for substance use disorders: DSM-III-R, DSM-IV and ICD-10. Addiction 1993; 88:337–348
  • Thompson, R.E. (1975). Introduction to Physiological Psychology. Harper and Row Publishers, NY.
  • Regier DA, Boyd JH, Burke JD Jr, Rae DS, Myers JK, Kramer M, Robins LN, George LK, Karno M, Locke BZ: One-month prevalence of mental disorders in the United States: based on five Epidemiologic Catchment Area sites. Arch Gen Psychiatry 1988; 45:977–986
  • Singh, Inderbir (2008) (2nd edition). Anatomy and Physiology for Nurses. Anshan Ltd., New Delhi
  • Kessler RC, McGonagle KA, Zhao S, Nelson CB, Hughes M, Eshleman S, Wittchen H-U, Kendler KS: Lifetime and 12-month prevalence of DSM-III-R psychiatric disorders in the United States: results from the National Comorbidity Survey. Arch Gen Psychiatry 1994; 51:8–19
  • Lucyshyn, Joseph, M., Dunlap, Glen and Albin, Richard, W. (Eds)(2002). Families and positive behaviour support. Addressing problem behaviour in family contexts. MD Paul H Brookes Publishing, Baltimore.
  • Grant BF, Harford TC, Dawson DA, Chou SP, Pickering RP: Prevalence of DSMIV alcohol abuse and dependence: United States, 1992. Alcohol Health Res World 1994; 18:243–248
  • Block, N. 2002. Concepts of Consciousness. In Chalmers 2002
  • Caetano R: Two versions of dependence: DSM-III and the alcohol dependence syndrome. Drug Alcohol Depend 1985; 15:81–103
  • Gazzaniga, M.S. ed. 2004. The Cognitive Neurosciences III. Cambridge, Mass.: MIT Press.
  • Grant BF, Towle LH: A comparison of diagnostic criteria: DSM-III-R, proposed DSM-IV, and proposed ICD-10. Alcohol Health Res World 1991; 15:284–292
  • Chalmers, D. J. 1996. The Conscious Mind. Oxford: Oxford University Press.
  • Grant BF, Chou SP, Pickering RP, Hasin DS: Empirical subtypes of DSM-III-R alcohol dependence: United States, 1988. Drug Alcohol Depend 1992; 30:75– 84
  • Engel, A., and Singer, W. 2001. Temporal binding and the neural correlates of sensory awareness. Trends Cogn. Sci. 5, 16–25.
  • Martin CS, Kaczynski NA, Maisto SA, Bukstein OM, Moss HB: Patterns of DSM-IV alcohol abuse and dependence symptoms in adolescent drinkers. J Stud Alcohol 1995; 56:672–680
  • Kalat, J.W. (2001). Biological Psychology. Thomson Learning. Canada.
  • Rounsaville BJ, Spitzer RL, Williams JBW: Proposed changes in DSM-III substance use disorders: description and rationale. Am J Psychiatry 1986; 143:463–468
  • Pershad, D., Kaushal, P. Verma, S. K. (1973) Neuroticism scores of mother of families of mentally retarded and neurotic children. Indian Journal of Mental Retardation, 6, 24-27.
  • Harrison PA, Fulkerson JA, Beebe TJ: Multiple substance use among adolescent physical and sexual abuse victims. Child Abuse Negl 1997; 21:529–539
  • Robert S. Feldman (2004). Understanding Psychology. Tata McGraw Hill Education Private Limited, New Delhi, India-110008.
  • Widiger TA, Trull TJ: Diagnosis and clinical assessment. Annu Rev Psychol 1991; 42:109–133
  • Merck Veterinary Manual (2008). Nervous System. Merck & Co., Inc. Whitehouse Station, NJ USA.
  • Winters K, Stinchfield R, Fulkerson J, Henly G: Measuring alcohol and cannabis use disorders in an adolescent clinical sample. Psychol of Addictive Behaviours 1993; 7:185–196
  • Friend, R., Refferty, Y., and Bramel, D. (1990). A puzzling misinterpretation of the Asch ‘conformity’ study. European Journal of Social Psychology, 20, 29 – 44
  • Martin CS, Langenbucher JW, Kaczynski NA, Chung T: Staging in the onset of DSM-IV alcohol symptoms in adolescents: survival/hazard analyses. J Stud Alcohol 1996; 57:549–558
  • Kaplan, S. and R. Kaplan (1982). Cognition and Environment. NY: Praeger.
  • Harrison PA: Adolescent alcohol and drug problems: who is at risk? (University Microfilms number 9117615). Dissertation Abstracts International 1991; 52(1B):518
  • BelL P.A., Greene, T.C., Fisher, J.D. and Baum. A. (2001). Environmental Psychology, Fifth Edition, Harcourt College Publishers, London.
  • Saunders JB, Conigrave KM: Early identification of alcohol problems. Can Med Assoc J 1990; 143:1060–1069
  • Brandenburg, A.M. and Carroll, M.S. (1995). Your place or mine? The effect of place creation on environmental values and landscape meaning, Society and Natural Resources, 8, 381-398.
  • Edwards G, Gross MM: Alcohol dependence: provisional description of a clinical syndrome. Br J Addict 1976; 1:1058–1061.
  • Burke, P.J. (1980). The self: Measurement requirements from interaction perspectives, Social Psychology Bulletin, 28 (12), 1679-1686.
  • Green, Michael, Foster. (2003). Schizophrenia Revealed: From Neurons to Social Interaction. Skylane Publishing, NY
  • Environmental Encyclopaedia (1999). Jaico Publishing House, 121, M.G Road, Murnbai.
  • Keefe, Richard S.E. & Harvey, Phillip D. (2005). Understanding Schizophrenia: A Guide to the New Research on Causes and Treatment , NAMI, Texas.
  • Fried, M. (2000). Continuities and discontinuities of place, Journal of Environmental Psychology, 20, 193-205.
  • Torrey, Fuller,E. (2005). Surviving Schizophrenia: A Manual for Families, Patients, and Providers . Robert W. Wance, NY
  • Gerson, K., Stueve, C.A. and Fisher, C.S. (1979). Attachment to place, In C.S. Fisher, R.M. Jackson, C.A. Stueve, K. Gerson, L.M. Jones and Baldassare, (Eds.) Networks and Places : Social Relations in the Urban Setting, New York : Free Press.
  • Sadock BJ, Sadock VA (2007). Schizophrenia. In Kaplan and Sadock’s Synopsis of Psychiatry. 10th ed., pp. 467-497. Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams and Wilkins.
  • Greder, T. and Garkovich, L. (1994). Landscape: The social construction of nature and the environment, Rural Sociology, 59(1), 1-24.
  • Ho BC, et al. (2003). Schizophrenia and other Psychotic disorders. In R E Hales, SC Yudofsky, eds., Textbook of Clinical Psychiatry, 4th ed., pp. 379-438. Washington, DC: American Psychiatric Publishing.
  • Guardo, C.J. and Meisels, M. (1971). Child-parent spatial patterns under praise and reproof, Developmental Psychology, 5, 365.
  • Buchanan RW, Carpenter WT Jr (2005). Schizophrenia. In BJ Sadock, VA Sadock, eds., Kaplan and Sadock’s Textbook of General Psychiatry, 8th ed., vol. 1, pp. 1329-1558. Philadelphia: Lippincott Williams and Wilkins.
  • Hauser, P.M. and Schnore, L.F. (1965). The study of urbanization, New York . : John Wiley And Sons, Inc.
  • Sørensen HJ, et al. (2003). Do hypertension and diuretic treatment in pregnancy increase the risk of schizophrenia in offspring? American Journal of Psychiatry, 160(3): 464-468.
  • King, M.G (1966). Interpersonal relations in preschool children and average approach distance, Journal of Genetic Psychology, 109, 109-116.
  • Bustillo JR, et al. (2001). The psychosocial treatment of schizophrenia: An update. American Journal of Psychiatry, 158(2): 163-175.
  • Lynch; K. ( 1960). The image of the city, Cambridge, M.A. MIT Press.
  • Lehman AF, et al. (2004). Practice guideline for the treatment of patients with schizophrenia, second edition. American Journal of Psychiatry, 161(2, Suppl): 1-56.
  • Meining, D. W. (1979). Symbolic landscape : Models of American Community. In D. Meining (Ed.) The interpretation of ordinary landscape, New York: Oxford University Press.
  • Drake RE, et al. (2000). Evidence-based treatment of schizophrenia. Current Psychiatry Reports, 2(5): 393-397.
  • O'Neal, E.C., Brunault, M.S. Carifio, M.S., Troutwine, R. and Epstein, J. (1980). Effect of insult upon personal space preferences, Journal of Nonverbal Behaviour, 5, 56-62.
  • Buchner DM (2008). Physical activity. In L Goldman, D Ausiello, eds., Cecil Textbook of Medicine, 23rd ed., pp. 64-67. Philadelphia: Saunders. Tamminga CA, Holcomb HH. Phenotype of schizophrenia: a review and formulation. Mol Psych 2005;10:27–39.
  • Pushpa, M. (1980). Social deprivation and cognitive development of primary school children, Journal of Social Psychology, 10 (1 &2), 31-35.
  • Picchioni MM, Murray RM. Schizophrenia. BMJ 2007;335:91–95.
  • Relph, E. (1976). Place and Placelessness, London : Pion.
  • Kane JM, Honigfeld G, Singer J, et al. Clozapine for the treatment-resistant schizophrenic. Arch Gen Psychiatry 1988;45:789–796.
  • Sinha, D. (1977). Some social disadvantages and development of certain perceptual skills, Indian Journal of Psychology, 53 (4), 160-171.
  • McGrath JJ. Variations in the incidence of schizophrenia: data versus dogma. Schizophr Bull. 2006;32:195–197.
  • Somrner, R. (1959). Studies in personal space, Sociometry, 22, 247-260.
  • Aleman A, Kahn RS, Selten JP. Sex differences in the risk of schizophrenia. Evidence from meta-analysis. Arch Gen Psychiatry 2003;60:565–571.
  • Brown, B. B. (1987): Territoriality, In D. Stokols & I. Altman (Eds.), Handbook of environmental psychology. New York: Wiley.
  • Hegarty JD, Baldessarini RJ, Tohen M, et al. One hundred years of schizophrenia: a meta-analysis of the outcome literature. Am J Psychiatry 1994;151:1409–1416.
  • Aiello, J. R. and Baum, A. (Eds.) (1979): Residential Crowding and Design, New York: Plenum.
  • Johnstone EC. Schizophrenia: problems in clinical practice. Lancet 1993;341:536–538.
  • Epstein, Y. M. (1982): Crowding Stress and Human Behaviour, In G. W. Evans (Ed.), Environmental stress. New York: Cambridge University Press.
  • Thornley B, Adams C. Content and quality of 2000 controlled trials in schizophrenia over 50 years. BMJ 1998;317:1181–1184. Search date 1997; primary sources hand searches of conference proceedings, Biological Abstracts, Cinahl, The Cochrane Library, Embase, Lilacs, Psychlit, Psyindex, Medline, and Sociofile.
  • Gove, W. R. and Hughes, M. ( 1983): Overcrowding in the household, New York: Academic Press.
  • Millon, Theodore and Seth, Grossman. (2002). Personality Disorders In Modern Life ,John Wiley and Sons, NY
  • Hui, M. K. and Bateson, J. E. (1991): Perceived control and the effects of crowding and consumer choice on the service experience. Journal of Consumer Research, 18, 174-184.
  • Dobbert, Duanne (2004). Understanding Personality Disorders: An Introduction Praeger publisher Westport.
  • Levine, R. V., Martinez, T. S., Brase, G. and Sorenson, K. (I 994): Helping in 36 U.S. cities. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 67, 69�82.
  • Allen, J.G., Fonagy, P. (Eds.). (2006). The Handbook of Mentalisation Based Treatment. Chicester: Wiley and Sons.
  • Paulus, P. B. ( 1988): Prison crowding: A psychological perspective, New York: Springer-Verlag.
  • Alden, L. E., Laposa, J.M., Taylor, C.T., Ryder, A.G. (2002). Avoidant Personality Disorder: Current Status and Future Directions. Journal of Personality Disorders, 16(1):1-29.
  • Knowles, E. S. ( 1978). The gravity of crowding: Application of social physics to the effects of others. In Baum, A. & Epstein, Y. (Eds.). Human Response to Crowding. New Jersey : Lawrence Erlbaum Associates Publishers.
  • Bartz, J., Kaplan, A., Hollander, E. (2007). Obesessive Compulsive Personality Disorder. In O’Donohue, W.T., Fowler, K.A., Lilienfeld, S.O. (Eds.). Personality Disorders: Toward the DSM V. Thousand Oaks: Sage Publications.
  • Le Bon, G. ( 1895). La Psychologie des joules. Translated : The Crowd. London: Unwin, 1903.
  • Hickey , Eric, W. (2005). Sex Crimes and Paraphilia Sage Publicartion, NY.
  • Stokols, D. (1972). On the distinction between density and crowding: Some implications for further research. Psychological Review, 79: 275 - 277.
  • Holmes, R.M. (2007). Sex Crimes and Paraphilia. Prentice Hall, London.
  • Allee, W. C. 1931. Animal Aggregations, A Study in General Sociology. University of Altmann, S. A. 1967. Social Communication among Primates. University of Chicago Press.
  • Medline World Health Organisation. The International Statistical Classification of Diseases and Health Related Problems, Tenth Revision. 2nd ed. World Health Organisation; 2004.
  • CHARLES H. SOUTHWICK
  • Sartorius A, Ruf M, Kief C, Demirakca T, Bailer J, Ende G. Abnormal amygdala activation profile in pedophilia. Eur Arch Psychiatry Clin Neurosci. Aug 2008;258(5):271-7.
  • Calhoun, J. B .. 1962a. Population density and social pathology. Sci. Amer. 206: 139-148.
  • Andersen ML, Poyares D, Alves RS, Skomro R, Tufik S. Sexsomnia: abnormal sexual behaviour during sleep. Brain Res Rev. Dec 2007;56(2):271-82.
  • Chitty, D. 1960. Population processes in the vole and their relevance to general theory. Canad.
  • Cowell DD. Autoerotic asphyxiation: secret pleasure—lethal outcome?. Pediatrics. Nov 2009;124(5):1319-24.
  • Christian, J. J., and D. E. Davis. 1964. Endocrines, behaviour and population. Science 146:
  • Abdo CH, Hounie A, de Tubino Scanavino M, Miguel EC. OCD and transvestism: is there a relationship?. Acta Psychiatr Scand. Jun 2001;103(6):471-3; discussion 473.
  • Faris, R. E. L., and W. H. Dunham. 1939. Mental Disorders in Urban Areas: An Ecological Study of Schizophrenia and Other Psychoses. University of Chicago Press. 270 p.
  • Abouesh A, Clayton A. Compulsive voyeurism and exhibitionism: a clinical response to paroxetine. Arch Sex Behav. Feb 1999;28(1):23-30.
  • McHarg, Ian. 1969. Design With Nature. Garden City, New York: The Natural History
  • Allgeier AR, Allgeier ER. Atypical sexual activity. In: Miller J, Brooks CL, Rachlin H, O’Dea M, Michaels T, Roll M. Sexual Interactions. 2nd ed. Canada: D.C. Heath & Company; 1988:619-641/ 21.
  • Myers, K. 1965. The effects of density on sociality and health in mammals. Proc. Ecol.
  • Allnutt SH, Bradford JM, Greenberg DM, Curry S. Co-morbidity of alcoholism and the paraphilias. J Forensic Sci. Mar 1996.
  • Scott, J. P. 1962. Critical periods in behavioural development. Science 138: 949-958.
  • Miller, Laura J. (2008). Post Partum Mood Disorder. American Psychiatry Press
  • Selye, H. 1950. The physiology and pathology of exposure to Stress: a treatise based on the General-Adaptation Syndrome and the diseases of adaptation. Montreal: Acta Inc. 822 p.
  • Parker, Gordon, Straton,David (2007). Dealing with Depression. Mc Phersons Printing Group
  • Southwick, C.H. 1955. Regulatory mechanisms of house mouse populations: social behaviour affecting litter survival. Ecology 36: 627-634.
  • Sloman, Leon (2002). Subordination and Defeat: An Evolutionary Approach to Mood Disorders and Their Therapy. Lawrence Erlbaum Associates
  • 1969. Population dynamics and social behaviour of domestic rodents. In Sladen,
  • Dunner DL, Gershon ES, Goodwin FK: Heritable factors in the severity of affective illness. Biological Psychiatry 11:31-42, 1976
  • Srole, L., T. S. Langner, S. T. Michael, M. K. Opler, and T. A. C. Rennie. 1962. Mental Health in the Metropolis. New York: McGraw Hill. Vol. 1. 428 p.
  • Cassano GB, Dell’Osso L, Frank E, et al: The bipolar spectrum: a clinical reality in search of diagnostic criteria and an assessment methodology. Journal of Affective Disorders 54:319-328, 1999
  • Cranz, G (1982). The Politics of Park Design: A Histo;y of Urban Parks in America. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press
  • Altshuler LL, Curran JG, Hauser P, et al: T2 hyperintensities in bipolar disorder: magnetic resonance imaging comparison and literature meta-analysis. American Journal of Psychiatry 152:1139-1144, 1995
  • Kostof, S. (1987) America by DesignjNew York: Oxford University Press
  • Kato T, Kunugi H, Nanko S, et al: Association of bipolar disorder with the 5178 polymorphism in mitochondrial DNA. American Journal of Medical Genetics 96:182-186, 2000
  • Cunningham P.W., Cooper H.T. Gorham. E., Hepworth T.M, (1999) Urban Design and Planning, Environmental Encyclopedia, A Jaico Book
  • Akiskal HS, Maser JD, Zeller PJ, et al: Switching from “unipolar” to bipolar II: an 11-year prospective study of clinical and temperamental predictors in 559 patients. Archives of General Psychiatry 52:114-123, 1995
  • Glover J.W. Constructing Urban Space: The University of Michigan JPS: 14 211-224
  • Benazzi F: Depression with DSM-IV atypical features: a marker for bipolar II disorder. European Archives of Psychiatry and Clinical Neuroscience 250:5355, 2000
  • Lefebvre, M. (1991) The Production of Space. London, Blackwell
  • Benazzi F, Rihmer Z: Sensitivity and specificity of DSM-IV atypical features for bipolar II disorder diagnosis. Psychiatry Research 93:257-262, 2000
  • Moore, R. C. (1989). Playgrounds at the crossroads: Policy and action research needed to ensure a viable future for public spaces in the United States. In I. Altman & E. H. Zube (Eds), Public Spaces and Spaces (pp. 83-120). New York:Plenum
  • Coryell W, Endicott J, Reich T: A family study of bipolar II disorder. British Journal of Psychiatry 145:49-54, 1984
  • Porteus, J. ( 1997). Environment and Behaviour. Reading, MA: Addison-Wesley
  • Koukopoulos A, Reginaldi D, Laddomada P, et al: Course of the manic-depressive cycle and changes caused by treatments. Pharmacopsychiatry 13:156-167, 1980
  • www.kamataka.com
  • Benazzi F: A comparison of the age of onset of bipolar I and bipolar II outpatients. Journal of Affective Disorders 54:249-253, 1999
  • Bechtel, R.B. (1997) Environment & Behaviour: An Introduction. Thousand Oaks, CA:Sage
  • Endicott J, Nee J, Andreasen N, et al: Bipolar II: combine or keep separate? Journal of Affective Disorders 8:17-28, 1985
  • Evans, G. W., & McCoy, J. M. (1998). When buildings don't work: The role of architecture in human health. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 18,8594
  • Savino M, Perugi G, Simonini E, et al: Affective comorbidity in panic disorder: is there a bipolar connection? Journal of Affective Disorders 28:155-163, 1993
  • Lang, J. ( 1998). Understanding normative theories of architecture. Environment and Behavior, 20, 601-632
  • Pini S, Cassano GB, Simonini E, et al: Prevalence of anxiety disorders comorbidity in bipolar depression, unipolar depression, and dysthymia. Journal of Affective Disorders 42:145-153, 1997
  • Sundstrom,E, ( 1986) Work places: The psychology of the Physical Environment in Offices and Factories. New York: Cambridge University Press
  • Endicott N: Psychophysiological correlates of “bipolarity.” Journal of Affective Disorders 17:47-outpatients. Comprehensive Psychiatry 41:106-110, 2000
  • Ziesel, J. (1981). Inquiry by Design: Tools for Environment-behaviour Research. Monterey, CA: Brooks/Cole
  • Kupfer DJ, Carpenter DL, Frank E: Is bipolar II a unique disorder? Comprehensive Psychiatry 29:228-236, 1988
  • Dalal, A. K. (2011). A journey back to the roots: Psychology in India. In R. M. Matthijs Cornelisson, G. Misra & S. Verma (Eds.), Foundations of Indian Psychology: Concepts and Theories – Volume 1, Dorling Kindersley (India) Pvt. Ltd.: New Delhi, p. 27.
  • Cooke RG, Young LT, Levitt AJ, et al: Bipolar II: not so different when comorbidity is excluded. Depression 3:154-56, 1995
  • Amerigo, M. & Aragones, J.L. (1997). A theoretical and methodological approach to the study of residential satisfaction. Journal of Environmental Psychology, Vol.J 7, 41 -57.
  • Greil W, Kleindienst N: Lithium versus carbamazepine in the maintenance treatment of bipolar II disorder and bipolar disorder not otherwise specified. International Clinical Psychopharmacology 14:283-285, 1999
  • Amerigo, M. ( 1992). A model of residential satisfaction, In M. Aristides and K. Karaletson (Eds.), Socio Environmental Metamorphoses : Built-scape, Landscape, Ethnoscape, Aristotle University ofThessalonki, Vol. V, 411-417.
  • Greil W, Kleindienst N: The comparative prophylactic efficacy of lithium and carbamazepine in patients with bipolar I disorder. International Clinical Psychopharmacology 14:277-281, 1999.
  • Canter, D. ( 1977). The Psychology of Place, London : Architectural Press.
  • Gilmer, B.V.H. (1971). Industrial and Organisational Psychology. New Delhi: McGraw-Hill.
  • Dasgupta, S.K., Bhattacharyya, S. & Nandi, S. (2006). Consequences of living in high-density areas: An Experience of Kolkata. Journal of Applied Psychological Issues, Vol. I 2(1). 56-82.
  • Muchinsky, P.M. (2006). Psychology Applied to Work, 8th Ed. Belmont, CA: Thompson-Wadworth.
  • Lawrence, R.J. (2002). Health residential environments, In R.B. Bechtel, & A. Churchman (Eds.), Handbook ofEnvironmental Psychology, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., N.Y.
  • Blum, M.L. & Naylor, J. C. (1968). Industrial Psychology: Its Theoretical and Social Foundations. New York: Harper & Row.
  • Marans, R.W. & Rodgers, S.W. (1975). Toward an understanding of community satisfaction. In A. Hawlcy & V. Rock (Eds.), Metropolitan America in Contemporary Perspective, New York: Ha1sbead Press.
  • Berns, G.S., Chappelow, J.C., Zink, C.F., Pagnoni, G., Martin-Skurski, M.E., Richards, J., 2005. Neurobiological correlates of social conformity and independence during mental rotation. Biological Psychiatry, 58, 245–253.
  • Smith, S.G (1994). The essential qualities of a home. Journal of Environmental Psychology, Vol. I 4, 31-46.
  • Frey, B.S. & Stutzer, A. (2007) (Eds.). Economics and Psychology: A Promising New Cross-disciplinary Field. Cambridge; London: MIT Press.
  • Tagnoli, I. ( 1987). Residential environment. In D. Stokols & I. Altman (Eds. ), Handbook of Environmental Psychology, Vol.l, pp. 655-690, New York: WJ.ley.
  • The Australian Psychological Society Ltd. (2008). Guidelines for the delivery of effective services by school psychologists. Retrieved from http:// www.psychology.org.au/Assests/Files/Guidelines-school-psychology-Dec08.pdf on Nov. 22, 2010.
  • Dumesnil, C.D. (1987). Office case study: Social behaviour in relation to the design of the environment, Journal of Architectural and Planning Research, Vol.4, 7-13.
  • The Times of India (December 11, 2010). 3 girls jailed for ragging in Bengal, p. 7.
  • Getzels, J. (1974). Images of the classroom and visions of the learner. School Review, Vol.82, 527-540.
  • The Times of India (January 08, 2011). US student shoots principal, kills self, p. 16.
  • Jacobs, K.W. & Blandino, S.E. (1992). Effects of colour of paper on which the profile of mood states is printed on the psychological states it measure. Perceptual and Motor Skills, Vol. 75, 267-271.
  • Armstrong, M. (2003). Handbook of Strategic HRM, Crest Publishing.
  • Levy, B.l. (1984). Research into the psychological meanmg of colour. American Journal of Art Therapy, Vol.23, 58-62.
  • Beer, M., Spector, B., Lawrence, P.R. & Mills, D.Q. (1984). Managing Human Assets, MJ, The Free Press, NY.
  • Myrick, R. and Mars, B.S. (1968). An explanatory study of the relationship between high school building design and student learning. U.S. Department of Health, Education and Welfare, Office of Education, Bureau of Research, Washington, D.C.
  • Guest, D.E. (1991). Personnel management: the end of orthodoxy, British Journal of Industrial Psychology, 29, 2, 149-176.
  • Sommer, R. & Olsen, H. ( 1980). The soft classroom, Environment & Behaviour, Vol.12, 3-16.
  • Fombrum, C.J., Tichy, N.M. & Devanna, M.A. (1984). Strategic Human Resource Management, Wiley, New York.
  • Swedish National Board of Occupational Safety and Health (1997). Skolans arbetonilj6: Jamf6relsestudie, 1992-1997, Solna: Swedish National Board of Occupational Safety and Health (in Swedish).
  • Yeung, A.K. & Berman, B. (1997). Adding value through human resources: Reorienting human resource management to drive business performances, Human Resource Management, 36, (3) 321-335.
  • Wong, C.Y., Sommer, R. & Cook, E.J. (1992). The Soft Classroom 17 years later. Journal of Environmental Psychology, Vol.12, 337-343.
  • Kail, R and Cavanaugh.J (2003) Human Development: A Life Span View: Thomson & Wadsworth, U.S.A
  • Brill, M., Weidemann, S., Alard, L., Olson, J. & Keable, E. (2001). Disposing widespread myths about workplace design, Jasper, IN : Kimball International.
  • McCormick, E.J. & Tiffin, J. Industrial Psychology, Prentice Hall, Latest Edition.
  • Jena, S. P. K. (2001) Parent training, (p. 135-145). In Perspectives in mental retardation, Anu Books, New Delhi.
  • Ajzen, I. & Fishbein, M. (1980). Understanding Attitudes and Predicting Social Behaviour. Englewood Cliffs, N.J. : Prentice Hall.
  • Sundstorm, E. (1987). Work environments: Offices and factories. In D. Stokols & I. Altman (Eds.), Handbook of Environmental Psychology, New York : Wtley.
  • Ash, R.A., Levine, E.L. & Sistrunk, F. (1983). The role of jobs and job-based methods in personnel and human resources management. Research in Personnel and Human Resources Management, I, 45-84.
  • Psychology (latest edition), New York: Holt, Rinehart & Winston.
  • Colman, A.M. (2003). A Dictionary of Psychology, Oxford University Press.
  • Canter, D. (1972). Royal Hospital for sick children : A psychological analysis, Architects Journal, 525-564.
  • Costa, P.T. Jr. & McCrae, R.R. (1978). Objective personality assessment, In M. Storandt, I.C. Siegler, & M.F. Elias (Eds.) The Clinical Psychology of Ageing (pp. 119-143), New York: Plenum Press.
  • Good, L.R., Siegel, S.M. & Bay, A.P. (1965). Therapy in design: Implications of architecture for human behavior, Caries, C. Thomas, Springfield, Ill.
  • Eysenck, H.J. (1982). Quoted in Personality, Genetics and Behaviour, New York, Prager, 1.
  • Holahan, C.J. & Saegert, S. ( 1973). Behaavioral and attitudinal effects of largescale variation in the physical environment of psychiatric wards. Journal of Abnormal Psychology, Vol. 82. 454-462.
  • Grant, P. (1988). What use is a job description? Personnel Journal, 67(2), 45-53.
  • Noble, A. & Dixon, R. ( 1977). Ward evaluation : St. Thomas Hospital, London, Medical Architecture Research Unit, The Polytechnic of North London.
  • Hellrieget, D., Slocum, J.W. Jr. & Woodman, R.W. (2001). Organisational Behaviour, 9th Ed., South-Western College Publishing.
  • Osmond, H. (1957). Function as the basis of psychiatric ward design. Mental Hospitals, Vo/.8 (Arch. Suppl.) : 23-29.
  • Trevino, L.K. & Youngblood, S.A. (1990). Bad apples in lead barrels : A causal analysis of ethical decision making behaviour. Journal of Applied Psychology, 75, 378-385.
  • Sommer, R. & Ross, H. (1958). Social interaction on a geriatric ward. International Journal of Social Psychiatry, Vol.4, 128-133.
  • Smith.E, Sarason.G and Sarason.R (1992) Psychology the Frontiers Of Behaviour’ Harper & Row, New York.
  • Stokols, D. (1982). Editor's introduction : Theoretical directions of environment and behaviour research. Environment and Behavior, Vol.15, 259-272.
  • Baltes, P.B.Linderberge, U & Staudinger, U (1998) Life Span Theory In Developmental Psychology In R M.Lerner, Ed. Handbook of Child Psychology Vol.1. Theoretical Models of Human Development, Wiley, New York.
  • Ulrich, R.S. (1984). View through a window may influence recovery from surgery. Science, Vol. 224, 420-421.
  • Whiddett, S. & Hollyforde, S. (2004). Encyclopaedia of Human Resource Development, Vol.8, Jaico Publishing House, Mumbai
  • Zirnring, C., Carpman, J.R. & Michelson, W. (1987). Design for special populations : Mentally retarded persons, children, hospital visitors. In D. Stokols & I. Altman (Eds.) Handbook of Environmental Psychology (Vol.2, pp. 919-949). New York : Wilky Interscience.
  • Bond, R. and Smith, P. B. (1996). Culture and conformity: A meta-analysis of studies using Asch’s line judgement task. Psychological Bulletin, 119(1), 111 – 137
  • Rieber, R.W. and Vetter,Harold J (Eds) (1978). The Psychological Foundations of Criminal Justice: Historical Perspectives on Forensic Psychology. John Jay Pr. NY
  • Asch, S. E. (1957). An experimental investigation of group influence. In Symposium on Prentative and Social Psychiatry. Symposium conducted at the Walter Reed Army Institute of Research. Washington, DC: U.S. Government Printing Office.
  • Alison, L. (2005). The Forensic Psychologist’s Case Book : Psychological Profiling and Criminal Investigation. Cullompton, UK : William.
  • Miner. J. B (2002) Organisational Behaviour: Foundation, Theories and Analysis, New York, Oxford University Press.
  • Carson, D. and Bull, R. (2003). Handbook of Psychology in Legal Contexts, 2nd edn. Chichester : Wiley.
  • Wikipedia, the free encyclopedia. School Psychology. Retrieved from http:// en.wikipedia.org/wiki/School_psychology on Nov. 22, 1010.
  • Weiner, I. B. & Hess, A. K. (Eds.) (1987). Handbook of Forensic Psychology. New York : John Wiley & Sons.
  • Fagan, T. K. & Wise, P. S. (2007). School Psychology: Past, Present and Future (3rd ed.). Bethesda, MD: National Association of School Psychologists.
  • Ahuja Ram (1969). Female Offenders in India. Meerut. Meenakshi Publications.
  • Riley,M.W (1979) Aging from Birth to Death: Interdisciplinary Perspectives. West view press, NY
  • West, D.J.(1967). The Young Offender, London. Gerald Duckworth.
  • Bryan Tanis. H and Bryan James. H (1985) Understanding Learning Disabilities California, Mayfield Publishing Company.
  • Newburn, Tim (2007). Criminology. Willan Publishing. NJ.
  • Gearheart B.R. and Gearheart CJ (1989) Learning Disabilities, Educational Strategies, fifth edition, London, Merill Publishing Company.
  • Wasserman, David T.(2001). Genetics and Criminal Behaviour; Springer, NJ.
  • Surry.J (1968) Industrial Accident Research A Human Engineer’s Approaches. University of Town to Dept. of Individual Engineering.
  • Yarrow, L. J. (1965) Conceptual perspectives on the early environment. Journal of American Academy of Child Psychiatry, 4, 168-185.
  • Harvell.T.W (1949) Industrial Psychology Revised, New Delhi Mohan Primlani for Oxford & IBH Publishing Co. Pvt. Ltd.
  • Jennifer M Brown and Elisabeth A Campbell (Eds).(2010). The Cambridge Handbook of Forensic Psychology. Cambridge University Press, UK
  • Aamodt, M.G. (1999) Applied Industrial / Organisational Psychology 3rd Edition, New York, Brooks/core. Wadsworth.
  • Heilburn, Kirk, Grisso, Thomas and Goldstein, Thomas ( 2008). Foundations of Forensic Mental Health Assessment (Best practices in forensic mental health assessment). Oxford University Press, Oxford.
  • Harrel.T.W (1949) Industrial Psychology (Revised) New Delhi, Mohan Primlani for Oxford and IBH Publishing Co. Pvt. Ltd.
  • Bruce A. Arrigo, Introduction to Forensic Psychology (2000), Academic Press, USA.
  • Harris,O & Hartman Bandra.J (2003) Organisational Behaviour, Hyderabad, Jaico Publishing House.
  • John M. Macdonald, Psychiatry and the Criminal (1976), Charles C Thomas, USA.
  • http://www.ccohs.ca/oshanswers/psychosocial/stress.html
  • Rozin, P. (2001). Social psychology and science: Some lessons from Solomon Asch. Personality and Social Psychology Review, 5(1), 2 – 14.
  • http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pmc/articles/PMC1274227/bin/Westjmed00208-0086.th
  • Allan Jamieson and Andre Moenssens (Editor-in-Chief), Wiley Encyclopedia of Forensic Science , Vol.1-5 (2009), John Wiley and Sons Ltd., UK.
  • Baumeister, A.A and Baumeister, A.A. (1995). Mental Retardation in M.Hersen and
  • Colin Dale, Tony Thompson, Forensic Mental Health (2001), Phil Woods (Ed.), Balliere Tindall and RCN, USA.
  • Rogers, C. R. (1983): On Becoming a Person: a Therapist’s View of Psychotherapy. Boston: Houghton Mifflin.
  • Curt R. Bartol and Anne M. Bartol, Criminal Behavior (1986), Prentice Hall, USA.
  • Mc Shane, S.L & Von Glinow, Mary Ann: (2008) Organisational Behavioural 3rd Edition New Delhi Tata Mc-Graw Hill.
  • DCLP Training Committee (1994), the core knowledge and skills of chartered forensic Psychologists, Forensic Update, 38, 8-11.
  • O’Connell.B (2001) Solution focused stress counseling, New York.
  • Heilbrun, K.(1992), The role of psychological testing in forensic assessment, Law and Human Behavior, 16(3), 257-272.
  • Shelley E.Taylor – Health Psychology 2006 Tata Mc-Graw Hill 6th Edition.
  • Wootton, Barbara, Crime and Penal Policy (London, 1978).
  • Tosi.H.L & Mero N.P (2003) The fundamentals of organisational behaviour: What managers need to know, New Delhi, Blackwell Publishing.
  • Carey, K. B. (1989), Emerging treatment guidelines for mentally ill chemical abusers, Hospital and Community Psychiatry, 40(4), 341-342, 349.
  • A. E. Bergin & S. L. Garfield (Eds.), Handbook of Psychotherapy . New York: Wiley.
  • Norman Cameron, Personality Development and Psychopathology (1969), Vakil Feffer and Simons Pvt. Ltd., India.
  • O’Farrell, U. (Reprint 2001). First Steps in Counselling. Dublin: Veritas.
  • Butcher, J. N. ed. (1995), Clinical Personality Assessment, Oxford University Press, New York.
  • R.T.Ammerman (Eds), Advanced Abnormal Child Psychology, Hillsdale N.J. Erlbaum.
  • Goldstein, A. (ed.) (2007), Forensic Psychology: Emerging Topics and Expanding Roles, John Wiley, Hoboken.
  • M. Stallman, Richard . “Did You Say “Intellectual Property”? It’s a Seductive Mirage”. Free Software Foundation, Inc. http://www.gnu.org/philosophy/notipr.xhtml. Retrieved 2008-03-28.
  • Archer, R. P. (ed.) (2006), Forensic Use of Clinical Assessment Instruments,
  • Cipani.E (1991). Educational Classification and Placement in J.L.Matson 8 J.A.Mulick (Eds) Hand Book of Mental Retardation (2nd) New York: Pergamon Press.
  • Grisso, T. (2003), Evaluating Competencies: Forensic Assessments and Instruments, 2nd edition, Plenum, New York.
  • Times of India (Oct. 25, 2010). Community service to make students ‘mend’ ways, p. 03.
  • American Psychological Association (1991) Specialty Guidelines for Forensic Psychologists Committee on Ethical Guidelines for Forensic Psychologists Division.
  • Pandey, R. E. (1969). Psychology in India, American Psychologist, 24(10), 936939. Retrieved from http://psycnet.apa.org/journals/amp/24/10/936/ on April 16, 2011.
  • Miller, Laurence (2006). Charles C. Thomas Publisher, Springfield, Illinois, 2006.
  • Phillips, B. N. (1990). School psychology at a turning point: ensuring a bright future for the profession. San Francisco: Jossey-Bass Publishers, p. 07.
  • Fisher, R.P. & Geiselman, R.E. (1992). Memory enhancing techniques for investigative interviewing: The cognitive interview. Springfield:
  • Ramalingam, P. (ed.) (2010). Recent Studies in School Psychology, Delhi: Authorspress.
  • Sporer, S. L., Penrod, S, Read, D & Cutler, B. (1995). Choosing, Confidence, and Accuracy: A Meta-Analysis of the Confidence–Accuracy Relation in Eyewitness Identification Studies. Psychological Bulletin. 118(3), 315-327.
  • Orlinski, D. E., Grave, K., & Parks, B. K. (1994). Process and outcome in psychotherapy. In A. E. Bergin & S. L. Garfield (Eds.), Handbook of Psychotherapy (pp. 257310). New York: Wiley.
  • Carmichael, K. D. (2006). Play Therapy: An Introduction. Upper Saddle River, NJ: Pearson Merrill Prentice Hall.
  • Rogers, C. (1980). Way of Being. Boston: Houghton Mifflin.
  • Linsay, R. C. L. & Wells, G. L. (1985). Improving eyewitness identifications from lineups: simultaneous versus sequential lineup presentation. Journal of Applied Psychology, 70, 556 – 64.
  • Sanders, P. (2006). The Person Centred Counselling Primer. Trowbridge, UK: Cromwell Press.
  • Lindsay D. S., Allen B. P., Chan J. C. K., Dahl L. C. (2004). Eyewitness suggestibility and source similarity: Intrusions of details from one event into memory reports of another event. Journal of Memory & Language, 50, 96-111.
  • Schore, A. (1996). The experience dependent maturation of a regulatory system in the orbital prefrontal cortex and the origin of developmental psychopathology. Development and Psychopathology, 8, 59-87.
  • Schooler JW, Engstler-Schooler TY. 1990. Verbal overshadowing of visual memories: some things are better left unsaid. Cognitive Psychology 22: 36–71.
  • Wilson, R. A. (1994). Prometheus Rising. Arisona: Falcon
  • Sporer, S., Penrod, S.D., Read, D. & Cutler, B.L. (1995). Gaining confidence in confidence: A new meta-analysis on the confidence-accuracy relationship in eyewitness identification studies. Psychological Bulletin, 118, 315-327.
  • ACA Code of Ethics (2008). As approved by ACA Governing Council . www.counseling.org
  • Howitt, Dennis (2002). Correlates of Crime. Pearson Education, NY
  • Steven D. Brown and Robert W.Lent (Eds) (2008). Handbook of Counselling Psychology. 4th edition. Wiley International Chicago, IL
  • http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=mm5FGrQEyBY
  • Ray Woolfe, Shjeelagh Strawbridge , Barbara Douglas and Windy Dryden (2010) (Eds). Handbook of Counselling Psychology. Sage Publications, NY
  • Baron, R.A. & Richardson D.R. (1994). Human Aggression. 2nd ed. New York: Plenum.
  • Benjamin A. (1974). The Helping Interview (2nd ed.) Boston: Houghton Mifflin
  • Shaw, M. E. (1981). Group dynamics: The psychology of small group behaviour. New York: McGraw-Hill.
  • Brammer, I. & Shostrom, E (1977). Therapeutic Psychology: Fundamentals of Counseling and Psychotherapy. Englewood Cliffs, N.J.: Prentice Hall.
  • Turner, J. C. (1987). Rediscovering the social group: A self-categorisation theory. New York: Basil Blackwell.
  • Eisenberg, D. & Delaney, S. (1972). The Counseling Process. Chicago: Rand McNally.
  • Whiten, A., Horner, V., and de Waal, F. B. M. (2005). Conformity to cultural norms of tool use in chimpanzees. Nature, 437, 737 – 740.
  • Gazda, G.M., Asbury, F.R. Blazer, F.J. Childers, W.C. & Walters, R.P. (1977). Human Relations Development: A manual for Educators. Boston: Allyn & Bacon.
  • Chakravarty, A. (2009). Taare Zameen Par and dyslexia savants. Annals of Indian Academy of Neurology, 12(2), 99 – 103.
  • Rogers C.R. (1942). Counselling and Psychotherapy. Boston. Houghton Mifflin.
  • Fagan, T. K. (1990). A brief history of school psychology in the United States. In A. Thomas and J. Grimes (Eds.), Best practices in school psychology (pp. 913 – 929). Washington, DC: National Association of School Psychologists.
  • Lawrence H. Gerstein, P. Paul Hepner, Stephania Egisdottir, Seung-Ming Alven leung & Kathryn L. Norsworthy (2009). International Handbook of Crosscultural Counseling: Cultural Assumptions and Practices Worldwide. Sage Publications Inc. NY.
  • Wikipedia – School Psychology, Retrieved from http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ School_psychology on November 22, 2010.
  • Sharma, Ramnath and Sharma, Rachna (2010). Guidance and Counselling in India. Atlantic publishers, New Delhi.
  • Norton, C. C. and Norton, B. E. (1997). Reaching children through play therapy: An experiential approach. Denver, CO: Publishing Cooperative.
  • Nelson, Jones. R. (2009). Introduction to Counselling Skills. Third edition, Sage Publications .
  • Hildreth, G. H. (1930). Psychological services for school problems. Yonkers-onHudson, NY: World Book Co.
  • Welfel, E. R. & Patterson, L.E. (2005). The Counselling Process: A multitheoretical Integrative Approach. Sixth edition. ThomsonBrooks.
  • Dainik Jagran (August 28, 2010). Adhyapakoon ne school mein pi sharaab, gramin bhadke (English translation: Teachers took liquor in school, villagers enraged), p. 09.
  • Hall, Calvin,S and Lindzey, Gardner (1970) 2nd edition: Theories of Personality. Wiley NY..
  • Where in the world is school psychology? School Psychology International, 29(2), 131 – 144, p. 137.
  • Geldard, K. & Geldard, D. (2003) Counselling Skills in Everyday Life. Palgrave publications.
  • Times of India (August 14, 2010). Reprimanded student hangs himself, p. 01.
  • Geldard, K. & Geldard, D. (2005) Practical Counselling Skills: An Integrative Approach. Palgrave Publications.
  • Massey, A. (2009). School Psychology in India, World Go Round, 36 (1), 13 – 14.
  • MacLeod , J. (2005). An Introduction to Counselling. Sage Publications
  • Panicker, A.S.; Hirisave, U., and Srinath, S. (2004). Play therapy in mixed disorder of conduct and emotion. Indian Journal of Clinical Psychology, 31, 151 – 156.
  • Geldard,K. & Geldard,D.( 2008). Counselling Children – A Practical Introduction. 3rd edition, Sage Publications.
  • http://www.wisegeek.com/what-are-the-different-types-of-corporate-socialresponsibility-awards.htm
  • Geldard,K. & Geldard,D.( 2009). Relationship Counselling for Children, Young People and Families. 1st edition, Sage Publications.
  • http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=vdh7MngntnI
  • Geldard,K. & Geldard,D.( 2010). Counselling Adolescents: The Proactive Approach for Young People. 3rd edition, Sage Publications.
  • Times of India (Oct. 06, 2010). HC notice to Rajasthan govt, CBSE, p. 09.
  • Prever,M.(2010). Counselling and Supporting Children and Young People: A Person-centred Approach. 1st edition, Sage Publications.
  • Rubin, Judith A. (1998): Art Therapy: an Introduction. Publisher: Bruner- Routledge
  • Coppersmith, E. (1980). The Family Floor Plan: A Tool of Training, Assessment, and Intervention in Family Therapy. Journal of Marital & Family Therapy, 6, 141-145.
  • Times of India (Oct. 09, 2010). School suspends 16 for Facebook comment, p. 04.
  • Duhl, F. S., Kantor, D., & Duhl, B. S. (1973). Learning Space and Action in Family Therapy: A Primer of Sculpting. In D. Bloch (Ed.), Techniques of Family Psychotherapy: A Primer. New York: Grune & Stratton.
  • Berk, Laura E. (2003) Child Development. Pearson, Prentice Hall, New Delhi.
  • McColdrick, M., & Gerson, R. (1985). Genograms in Family Assessment. New York: Norton.
  • Times of India (Oct. 11, 2010). Teacher booked for slapping 3-yr-old, p. 03.
  • Minuchin, S., & Fishman, H. (1981). Techniques of Family Therapy. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.
  • Gladding, Samuel T. (2004): Counseling Theories: Essential Concepts and Applications. Publisher: Prentice Hall
  • Johanson, P. (2007). HIV and AIDS, The Rosen Publishing Group.
  • http://argull.epsb.Ca/freed/mathrs/str/and 4/central tendency.htm
  • Libman, H. &. Makadon, H.J. (2007) HIV. 3rd edition, American College of Physicians, ACP Press.
  • Ray, D.C., Armstrong, S.A., Warren, E.S., & Balkin, R.S. (2005). Play therapy practices among elementary school counselors. Professional School Counseling, 8, 360-365.
  • Sadock, B.J. & Kaplan, H. I. Sadock, V. A. (2007). Synopsis of Psychiatry: Behavioural Sciences/Clinical Psychiatry, 10th edition , Lippincott Williams & Wilkins.
  • Kapur, Malavika (1988). Mental Health of Indian Children. Sage Publications, New Delhi
  • Volberding, P. (2008). Global HIV/AIDS Medicine, Elsevier Health Sciences
  • Times of India (Oct. 14, 2010). Boy stabs classmate with a pair of scissors, p. 10.
  • Editorial Board (1996). Definition of Mental Retardation. In J.W.Jaconson and J.A. Mulick (Eds), Manual of Diagnosis and professional practice in Mental retardation. Washington, DC; American Psychological Association.
  • Feldhausen, J.F. (1996) Motivating academically able youth with enriched and accelerated learning experiences. In C.P.Benbow and D.J.Lubinski (Eds). Intellectual Talent: Psychometric and Social issues. Baltinmore, M.D; Johns Hopkins press.
  • Rogers, C. (2005). The Carl Rogers Reader Edited by Kirschenbaum & Henderson. London: Counstable & Robertson.
  • Mook, D. C. (2001) Psychological Research: The Ideas Behind the Methods.
  • Constaquay, L. G., Goldfried, M. R., Wiser, S., Raue, P.J., Hayes, A.M. (1996).
  • Times of India (Oct. 27, 2010). More than 50% Indian kids face sexual abuse, p. 06.
  • Predicting the effect of Cognitive therapy for depression: A study of unique and common factors. Journal of Consulting and Clinical Psychology, 65, 497-504.
  • Nelson-Jones, Richard (2008). Basic Counseling Skills: A helper’s manual, Sage Publications, New Delhi.
  • Horvath, A.O. & Symonds, B., D. (1991). Relation between a working alliance and outcome in psychotherapy: A Meta Analysis. Journal of Counseling Psychology, 38, 2,139-149.
  • Times of India (Oct. 31, 2010). Teacher booked for beating student, p. 10.
  • Heinlein, R. A. (1961). Stranger in a Strange Land. Berkley Publishing Group.
  • Short, R. J. and Palomares, R. S. (2003). The Future of School Psychology Conference 2002, The School Pschologist, 57(1), 6 – 7.
  • Lambert, M., J. & Barley, D., E. (2001). Research summary on the therapeutic relationship and psychotherapy outcome. Psychotherapy, 38, 4, 357-361.
  • Luthan.F (2005) Organisation Behaviour, 10th Edition New York Mc.Graw Hill.
  • APA (Division 16). Archival Description of the Specialty School Psychology. Retrieved from http://www.indiana.edu/~div16/goals.html#goals on Dec. 17, 2010.
  • Maslach,C. (1982) Burn-out – The cost of caring, New York, Prentice Hall Press.
  • Dunnett. M. D (1983) Handbook of Industrial Organisational Psychology, New York, John Wiley & Sons.
  • Berk L. (2005). Infants, Children, and Adolescents. Boston: Allyn & Bacons
  • Allport, G. W. (1985). The historical background of social psychology. In G. Lindzey & E. Aronson (Eds.), The handbook of social psychology (pp. 1 – 46). New York: Random House.
  • Carner and Glass 1978, quoted in Crisp, R.J, Rhianomon N Turner (2007) Essential Social Psychology, Sage Publications, New Delhi.
  • Kadden R, Carroll K, et al. Cognitive behavioural coping skills therapy manual: A clinical researchguide for therapists treating individuals with alcohol abuse and dependence National Institute on Alcohol Abuse and Alcoholism. Project MATCH Monograph Series. (Vol. 3. 1992).
  • Hastorf, A.H., Schneider, D.J., and Polefka, J. (1970) Person Perception. Reading Mass: Addison - Wesley.
  • Kalant, H. (1989). The nature of addiction : An analysis of the problem. In A. Godlstein (Ed.) Molecular and cellular aspects of drug addiction. New York: Springer-Verlag.
  • Katz & Katn: Research Methods, Sage Publication, New Delhi.
  • Kallman, F. J. (1958). The use of genetics in psychiatry. J. Ment. Sci. 104, 542549.
  • Heider, F. (1946). Attitudes and cognitive organisation. Journal of Psychology, 21, 107-112.
  • Kalus, O., Burnstein, D. O., & Siever, L. J. (1993). Schizoid personality disorder: A review of current status and implications for DSM-IV. Journal of Personality Disorders, 7, 43-52.
  • Tavris,C. & Warde,C. (1997). Psychology in Perspective (2 nd Ed). New York: Addison Wesley Longman, Inc.
  • Kaner, S., and L. Lind. Facilitator’s Guide to Participatory Decision-making. Gabriola Island, BC, Canada: New Society Publishers, 1996.
  • Spooner, A., and Kellogg, W. N. (1947). The backward conditioning curve. American Journal of Psychology, 60, 321-34.
  • Honig A, Romme MA, Ensink BJ, Escher SD, Pennings MH, deVries MW (October 1998). “Auditory hallucinations: a comparison between patients and nonpatients”. J. Nerv. Ment. Dis. 186 (10): 646–51
  • Baltes (1987). Theoretical Propositions of Life-Span Developmental Psychology. Craig: Developmental Psychology.
  • Kaplan, E., Fein, D., Kramer, J., Delis, D., & Morris, R. (2004). Wechsler Intelligence Scale for Children, 4th Edition Integrated. San Antonio, TX: Psychological Corporation.
  • Cooper, C. (2002). Individual Differences (2nd edition) New York: Oxford University Press.
  • Hoover, D. W., & Milich, R. (1994). Effects of sugar ingestion expectancies on mother-child interaction. Journal of Abnormal Child Psychology, 22, 501-515.
  • Tay Vank 1999 quoted in Taylor, E.S, Letitia Anne Peplau, David O.Sears (2006), Social Psychology (12 th edition), Pearson Education, India.
  • Karagianis JL, Dawe IC, Thakur A, et al. Rapid tranquilization with olanzapine in acute psychosis: a case series. J Clin Psychiatry. 2001;62 Suppl 2:12-6. 
  • Jorgensen P, Jensen J. An attempt to operationalise reactive delusional psychosis. Acta Psychiatr Scand. Nov 1988;78(5):627-31. 
  • Karasek, R. (1990). Lower health risk with increased job control among white collar workers.Journal of Organisational Behaviour, 11(3), 171-185.
  • http://www.nationalreview.com/comment/comment-littman011903.asp
  • Karno M, Jenkins JH. Cultural considerations in the diagnosis of schizophrenia and related disorders and psychotic disorders not otherwise classified. In: TA Widiger, ed. DSM-IV Source Book. Washington DC: American Psychiatric Press; 1994.
  • Deckro, G. R., Ballinger, K.M., Hoyt, M., Wilcher, M., et al. (20020. The valuation of a mind/body intervention to reduce psychological distress and perceived stress in college students. Journal of American College Health, 50(6), 281-287.
  • Kaslow, H. W. (Ed.) (2002): “Comprehensive Handbook of Psychotherapy (Vol. I, II, III, IV), John Wiley & Sons
  • Graham, C. H. and Hsia, Y. (1958), Colour diffect and Colour theory, Science, 127, 675-682.
  • Kato, T. (2007). “Molecular genetics of bipolar disorder and depression.” Psychiatry Clinical Neuroscience, 61, 3–19.
  • Hirshfeld, R. M. A., Shea, M. T., & Weise, R. (1995). Dependent personality disorder. In W. J. Livesley (Ed.), The DSM-IV personality disorders. New York: Guilford.
  • Katz, R. & McGuffin, P. (1993). The genetics of affective disorders. In L. J. Chapman, J. P. Chapman & D.C. Fowles (Eds.) Progress in experimental personality and psychopathology research (Vol. 16). New York: Springer.
  • Maccoby, E. E., & Martin, J. A. (1983). Socialisation in the context of the family: Parent–child interaction. In P. H. Mussen & E. M. Hetherington, Handbook of child psychology: Vol. 4. Socialisation, personality, and social development (4th ed.). New York: Wiley.
  • Kaufman, A. S., & Kaufman, N. L. (1993). Kaufman Adolescent and Adult Intelligence Test. Circle Pines, MN: American Guidance Service.
  • McIntire, S.A. and Miller, L.A.(2007). Foundations of Psychological Testing. A Practical Approach. New Delhi: SAGE Publications.
  • Horn, J.L. (1989). Cognitive diversity: a framework of learning. In Ackerman, P.L., Sternberg, R.J. & Glaser, R. (Eds.), Learning and Individual Difefrences (pp. 61-116). New York: Freeman.
  • International Statistical Classification of Diseases and Related Health Problems. Tenth Revision. Vol. 1: Tabular list. Vol. 2: Instruction manual. Vol. 3: Index. World Health Organisation: Geneva, 1992.
  • Kaufman, James C., Plucker, Jonathan A.,Baer, John.(2008). Essentials of Creativity Assessment. New Jersey: John Wiley & Sons, Inc.
  • HYDE, Maggie and McGuinness, Michael (19940. Jung for Beginners, New York, Totem Books.
  • Keef, L. “Generating Quality Interaction.” Occupational Health & Safety 73, no. 5 (2004): 30–31.
  • Kelley 1950 quoted in Crisp, R.J, Rhianomon N Turner (2007) Essential Social Psychology, Sage Publications, New Delhi.
  • Kempton, M.J., Geddes, J.R, Ettinger, U. (2008). Meta-analysis, database, and meta-regression of 98 structural imaging studies in bipolar disorder. Archives of General Psychiatry, 65, 1017–1032
  • Carver, C.S. & Scheier, M.F. (1981). Attention and self-regulation: A control theory approach to human behaviour. New York: Springer-Verlag.
  • Kendall, P. C. (1993). Cognitive-behavioural therapies with youth: Guiding theory, current status, and emerging developments. Journal of Consulting and Clinical Psychology, 61, 235-247.
  • Smith, M.B., Bruner, J.S., & White, R.W. (1956). Opinions and personality. New York: Wiley.
  • Kendler KS, Czajkowski N, Tambs K, et al (2006). Dimensional representations of DSM-IV cluster A personality disorders in a population-based sample of Norwegian twins: a multivariate study. Psychological Medicine, 36, 11.
  • Zitek, E. M. and Hebl, M. R. (2007). The role of social norm clarity in the influenced expression of prejudice over time. Journal of Experimental Social Psychology, 43, 867 – 876.
  • Kernberg, O. E. (1984). Severe personality disorders. New Haven, CT: Yale University Press.
  • Reicher, S. D. (2001). The psychology of crowd dynamics. In M. A. Hogg & R. S. Tindale (Eds.), Blackwell handbook of social psychology: Group processes (pp. 182 – 208). Oxford, UK: Blackwell.
  • Kessler, R. C., Blazer, D. G., & McGonagle, K. A. (1994). The prevalence and distribution of major depression in a national community sample: the National Comorbidity Survey. American Journal of Psychiatry, 151, 979-986.
  • Das,J.P.(19980. The Working Mind: An Introduction to Psychology, New Delhi, Sage Publication
  • Kessler, RC. The effects of stressful life events on depression. Annual revue of Psychology. 1997;48:191–214
  • Denmark, F. L (1998). Woman and Psychology: An International Perspective. American Psychologist, 53(4), 465-473.
  • Keys, A., Mickelsen, O., Miller, E. O. & Chapman, C. B. (1950). The relation in man between cholesterol levels in the diet and in the blood. Science, 112, 79–81.
  • Richardson, K (2000). Developmental Psychology. How nature and Nurture interact. Lawrence Erlbaum Associates, Publishers, Mahwah, New Jersey
  • Khan, S. A., & Faraone, S. V. (2006). The genetics of attention-deficit/hyperactivity disorder: A literature review of 2005. Current Psychiatry Reports, 8, 393-397.
  • Green, D.M., and Swets, J.A. (1966). Signal Detection Theory and Psychophysics. New York: Wiley.
  • Kieseppä, T., Partonen, T., Haukka, J., Kaprio, J., & Lönnqvist, J. (2004). High concordance of bipolar I disorder in a nationwide sample of twins. American Journal of Psychiatry 161, 1814–1821.
  • Nathans, J., Thomas, D. & Hogness, D.S. (1986). Molecular Genetics of Human Colour Vision: The Genes encoding Blue, Green and Red Pigments. Science, 232, 193-202.
  • Kleinbeck, 0., & Rutenfranz, J. (Ed.). (1987). Arbeitspsychologie [Psychology of work]. In En.zyklop ·adie der Psychologie(vol. DllJIIJ ). G""ottingen: Hogrefe.
  • S.S. Chouhan (1978), Advanced Educational Psychology, Vikas Publishing House Pvt. Ltd. Banglore (1997), Sixth Edition.
  • Klerman, Gerald L., M.D., and Myrna M. Weissman, Ph.D., eds. New Applications of Interpersonal Psychotherapy. Washington, DC: American Psychiatric Press, Inc., 1993.
  • Wahba, A and Bridgewell, L (1976). “Maslow reconsidered: A review of research on the need hierarchy theory”. Organisational Behaviour and Human Performance (15): 212–240.
  • Klopper, CH (1990) Referaat gelewer tydens ‘n vergadering van lede van die vereniging van SA Bourekenaars: Komitee van hoofde van bourekenaarsdepartemente by universiteite gehou op 29 September 1989. UPdosent, 11(2): 43 - 72.
  • Bell, R.Q. (1968). A reinterpretation in the direction of effects in the studies of socialisations. Psychological Review, 75, 81-95.
  • Kluft, Richard P. (1990). Incest-Related Syndromes of Adult Psychopathology. American Psychiatric Pub, Inc.. pp. 83, 89.
  • Cooper, P.R. (1994), Cultural Perspectives on Continuity and Change in Adolescent Years, Sage, New York.
  • Kochhar, S. K. (1984). Guidance and Counseling in Colleges and Universities. New Delhi: Sterling Publishing Pvt.Ltd.
  • Bean, K.L (1953). Construction and Educational and Personal Tests. New York: McGraw-Hill Company.
  • Koerner, K., Linehan, M. M. (2000). Research on dialectical behaviour therapy for patients with borderline personality disorder. Psychiatric Clinics of North America, 2000; 23(1): 151-67.
  • Katz, D (1953). Field Studies. In L Festinger and D Katz (Eds) Research methods in the Behavioural Sciences New York: Holt Rinehart and Winston.
  • Kohler, S. S., & Mathieu, J. E. (1993). An examination of the relationship between affective reactions, work perceptions, individual resource characteristics, and multiple absence criteria. Journal of Organisational Behaviour, 14, 515-530.
  • Adler, P.A. & Adler, P. (1994). Observational Technique. In N.K. Denzin & Y S. Lincoin (Eds.),
  • Kohn, A. (1999). Punished by rewards: The trouble with gold stars, incentive plans, A’s, praise, and other bribes. New York: Houghton Mifflin.
  • Aron A., Aron, E.N., & Coups, E..J. (2006), Statistical for Psychology (4 th ed), New Delhi. Pearson Prentice Hall.
  • Kohut, H. (1977). The restoration of the self. New York: International University Press.
  • Cloninger, S. C. (1996). Theories of Personality: Understanding Persons (3rd ed.). Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice Hall.
  • Koocher, G. P., & Keith-Spiegel, P. (1998). Ethics in psychology: Professional Standards·and Cases (2nd ed.). New York: Oxford University Press.
  • John McLeod (2003). Exploring the Interior of Therapy: Method and Strategy in Process Research. Doing Counselling Research. Sage Publication, New Delhi, 145-166.
  • Kopp, C. B., & Kaler, S. R. (1989). Risk in infancy: Origins and implications. American Psycholists, 44(2), 224-230.
  • Foriester and Liberman 2001 quoted in Taylor, E.S, Letitia Anne Peplau, David O.Sears (2006), Social Psychology (12 th edition), Pearson Education, India.
  • Korchin, S. 1., &Schuldberg, D. (1981). The future of clinical assessment. American Psychologist, 36, 1147-1158.
  • Rosenthal 1994 quoted in Crisp, R.J, Rhianomon N Turner (2007) Essential Social Psychology, Sage Publications, New Delhi.
  • Horney, K.(1939) New Ways in Psychoanalysis. New York: Norton.
  • Ajzen, I. (1991). The theory of planned behaviour. Organisational Behaviour and Human Decisions Processes, 50, 179-204.
  • Korkrnan, M., Kirk, U., & Kemp, S. (2007). NEPSY, Second Edition. San Antonio, TX: Psychological Corporation.
  • Fazio, R.H. (1990). Multiple processes by which attitudes guide behaviour: The MODE model as an integrative framework. In M.P. Zanna (Ed.), Advances in experimental social psychology (Vol 23, pp. 75-109). New York: Academic Press.
  • Kosslyn, S.M. & Koenig, 0. (1992). Wet Mind. The New Cognitive Neuroscience. New York: The Free Press.
  • LaPiere, R.T. (1934). Attitudes vs. actions. Social Forces, 13, 230-237.
  • KraeplinE. (1899). Psychiatrie. Ein Lehrbuch fur studiernde und aerzte (6th ed.) Leipzig: Barth.
  • Worcester, Mass: Clark University Press.
  • Kubiszyn, T.W., Meyer, G.J., Finn, S.E., Eyde, L.D., Kay, G. G., Moreland, K.L., Dies, R.R. &Eisman, EJ. (2000). Empirical support fOr psychological assessment in clinical health care settings. Professional Psychology, 31, 119-130.
  • Human Rights Watch (2001). Integration of the human rights of women and the gender perspective: Violence Against Women and “Honor” Crimes. Retrieved from http://www.hrw.org/en/news/2001/04/05/item-12-integration-human-rights- women-and-gender-perspective-violence-against-women, on October 25, 2010.
  • Hornstein, H. A., & Tichy, N. M. (1973). Organisation Diagnosis and Improvement Strategies. New York, Behavioural Science Associates.
  • Navarro, J. (2010). Benjamin Franklin & Nonverbal Communications: Lessons on nonverbal communications from America’s foremost entrepreneur. Retrieved from http://www.psychologytoday.com/blog/spycatcher/201010/benjamin- franklin-nonverbal-communications on Oct. 31, 2010.
  • Horton, D. 2002. Planning, implementation, and evaluating capacity development.Briefing Paper No. 50. The Hague: International Service for National Agricultural Research.
  • Hisama, T. (2000). Listen to Mozart, it will make you smarter. Journal of Inquiry and Research, 72, 101 – 116.
  • Kurt Lewin (1958). Group Decision and Social Change. New York: Holt, Rinehart and Winston. p. 201.
  • Yanovitzky, I. and Rimal, R. N. (2006). Communication and normative influence: An Introduction to the special issue. Communication Theory, 16, 1 – 6.
  • LaFond, A. and L. Brown. 2003. A guide to monitoring and evaluation of capacitybuilding interventions in the health sector in developing countries. MEASURE Evaluation Manual Series No. 7. Carolina Population Center, University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill.
  • Bolles,R.C. (1993). The Story of Psychology. Portland:Brooks/Cole Pub Co.
  • Lambert, M. J., & Ogles, B. (2004). The efficacy and effectiveness of psychotherapy. In M. J. Lambert (Ed.), Bergin and Garfield’s handbook of psychotherapy and behaviour change (5th ed., pp. 39-193). New York: Wiley.
  • Lahey, Benjamin B. (1998). Psychology: An Introduction. New Delhi; Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Limited.
  • Lambert, M. J., Whipple, J. L., Hawkins, E. J., Vermeersch, D. A., Nielsen, S. L., & Smart, D. W. (2003). Is it time for clinicians routinely to track patient outcome? A meta-analysis. Clinical Psychology, 10, 288-301.
  • Anderson, C. A., Berkowitz, L., Donnerstein, E., Huesmann, I. R., et al. (2003).The influence of media violence on youth . Psychological Science in the Public Interest, 4(3), 81-110.
  • Lamnek, Siegfried (2005) Qualitative Sozial forschung. Lehrbuch. Auflage. Beltz Verlag. Weihnhein, Basel.
  • Taft, D.R. (1956). Criminology. New York: The Macmillan Company.
  • Landman, WA (1988) Navorsingsmetodologiese Grondbegrippe. Pretoria: Serva.
  • Pinker, S. (1997). How the mind works. New York: Norton.
  • Lang, P.J. (1971). The application of psychophysiological methods to the study of psychotherapy and behaviour modification. In Bergin, A.E. & Garfield, S.L. (Eds.), Handbook of P:.ychotherapy and Behaviour Change. New York: Wiley.
  • Singh Arun K.( 2004) Cognitive Psychology. Motilal Banarsidas, New Delhi.
  • Larrain, J. (1994). Ideology and cultural identity: Modernity and the third world presence. Cambridge: Polity Press.
  • McClelland, D.C., and Atkinson, J.W. (1948) The effect of different intensities of hunger drive on perception. Journal of Psychology, 25, 205-222.
  • Larry, A Hjelle & Daniel J Ziegler (1992), Personality Theories, McGraw Hill, New York.
  • Coren, S. Ward, I.M., & Enns, J.T. (1999) Sensation and Perception (5th ed.) Fort Worth, TX: Harcourt Brace College.
  • Lasch, C. (1978). The culture of narcissism: American life in an age of diminishing expectations. New York: W. W. Norton.
  • Kaufman, L., and Rock, I. (1962) The Moon Illusion, Science, 136, 953-61.
  • Lattmann, C. (Ed.). (1989). Das Assessment-Center-Ve1jahren der Eignungsbeurteilung. SeinAujbau, seine Anwendung und seinAussagegehalt fThe assessment-center procedure of aptitude assessment. Its design, application and valiclityl. Heidelberg: Physica Verlag.
  • Weisenberg, M., Raz, T.A. & Hener, T. (1998) The influence of film induced mood on pain perception, Pain, 76, 365-375.
  • Laxenaire, M., Ganne-Vevonec, M. O., & Streiff, O. (1982). Les problems d’idendite chez les enfants des migrants. Annales Medico-Psychologiques, 140, 602-605.
  • Davidson Donald (1957), G.E.M. Anscombe Press Paperback Edition, Oxford: Blackwell.
  • Lazarus, A. A. (1996). The utility and futility of combining treatments in psychotherapy. Clinical Psychology: Science and Practice,)3(1), 59–68.
  • Matlin, M. W. (1999). Psychology, Third Edition, Harcourt Brace College Publishers, Orlando.
  • Lazarus, A. A. (1997). Brief but comprehensive psychotherapy: The multimodal way. New York: Springer.
  • Sigel, I. and Cocking, R. (1977). Cognitive Development from Childhood to Adolescence: A Constructivist Perspective. NY: Holt, Rinehart and Winston.
  • Lazarus, A.A. (1986). Multimodal therapy. In J.C. Norcross (Ed.), Handbook of Eclectic Psychotherapy (pp. 65-93). New York: Brunner/Mazel.
  • Gibson, J. J. (1979). The Ecological Approach to Visual Perception. Boston: Houghton-Mifflin.
  • Lazarus, A.A. (1997). Brief but Comprehensive Psychotherapy: The Multimodal Way. New York: Springer.
  • Saraswathi, T.S.(1999). Culture and Socialisation and Human Development: Theory Research Applications in India. New Delhi: Sage publications.
  • Lazarus, A.A., & Beutler, L.E. (1993). On technical eclecticism. Journal of Counseling and Development, 71(4), 381-385.
  • Kochanska, G., & Thompson, R.A.(1997).The emergence and development of conscience in childhood .In J.E. Grusec & L.Kuczynski (Eds.)Parenting and children’s internalisation of values: A handbook of contemporary theory.(pp. 53- 77). New York:Wiley.
  • Lazarus, A.A., Beutler, L.E., & Norcross, J.C. (1992). The future of technical eclecticism. Psychotherapy, 29 (1), 11-20.
  • Veeraraghavan, V. (2008). Children and Adolescents. Northern Book Center, New Delhi.
  • Le Bon (1895). The Crowd, Unwin, London.
  • Havighurst, R. J. (1952). Developmental tasks and education. New York: David McKay.
  • Leidner, R. (2006). Identity and work. In M. Korczynski, R. Hodson, and P. Edwards (Ed.), Social Theory at Work. Oxford: Oxford University Press.
  • William C. Crain (2005): Theories of Development: Concepts and Applications Publisher: Pearson/Prentice Hall.
  • Lessa, I. (2006). “Discoursive struggles within social welfare: Restaging teen motherhood”. British Journal of Social Work 36: 283–298. Doi:10.1093/bjsw/ bch256.
  • Felduesen, J.F (1965) “Teachers and children Perception of creativity in high and low Anxious Children” Journal of educational research, 58(11), 442-46.
  • Lesser JM, Hughes S (December 2006). “Psychosis-related disturbances. Psychosis, agitation, and disinhibition in Alzheimer’s disease: definitions and treatment options.
  • Hurt, S.W., Reznikoff, M. &Clarkin, J.F. (1991). Psychological Assessment, Psychiatric Diagnosis, & Treatment Planning. New York: Brurmcr/ Mazel.
  • Leweke FM, Koethe D (June 2008). “Cannabis and psychiatric disorders: it is not only addiction”. Addict Biol 13 (2): 264–75.
  • Kirk, R.E. (1968). Experimental Design: Procedures for the Behavioural Sciences. Belmont: Calif Brooks/Cole.
  • Lewy, A.J., Nurnberger, J.I., Wehr, T.A. ( 1985). Supersensitivity to light: Possible trait mark for manic-depressive illness. American Journal of Psychiatry 142, 725–727.
  • Barlow, D.H and Herson, M. (1984). Single case experimental designs New York: Pergamon Press.
  • Horton, D., R. Mackay, A. Andersen, and L. Dupleich. 2000. Evaluating capacity development in planning, monitoring, and evaluation: A case from agricultural research. Research Report No. 17. The Hague: International Service for National Agricultural Research.
  • Abramson, P.R. (1992). A Case for Case Studies: An Immigrant’s Journal. Newbury Park: Sage.
  • Lin KM. Cultural influences on the diagnosis of psychotic and organic disorders. In: Mezzich JE, Kleinman A, Horacio F, Parron DL, eds. Culture and Psychiatric Diagnosis: A DSM-IV Perspective. Washington DC: American Psychiatric Press; 1996.
  • Chaplin, J.P.(1975). Dictionary of Psychology, Alaurel original
  • House, R.J., & Mitchell, T.R. (1974). Path-goal theory of leadership. Journal of Contemporary Business, 3, l-97.
  • Beri G.C. (2007), Business Stastics, (2nd ed.) New Delhi, Tata MCgraw Hill.
  • Hilgard, E., & Bower, G. Theories of Learning. New York: Appleton-CenturyCrofts.
  • Jacobs, CD; Haasbroek, JB & Theron, SW (1992) Effektiewe Navorsing. Navorsingshandleiding vir tersi?re opleidingsinrigtings. Geesteswetenskaplike komponent. Pretoria: Universiteit van Pretoria.
  • Lippitt, G. L. &Lippitt, R. (1994). The consulting process in action (2nd ed.). New York: Wiley & Sons.
  • Rogers, Carl. (1959). A Theory of Therapy, Personality and Interpersonal Relationships as Developed in the Client-centered Framework. In (ed.) S. Koch, Psychology: A Study of a Science. Vol. 3: Formulations of the Person and the Social Context. New York: McGraw Hill.
  • Howard, A. (1994). Diagnostic perspectives in an era of organisational change. In A. Howard & Associates (Eds.), Diagnosis for Organisational Change: Methods and Models (pp. 3-17). New York: The Guilford Press.
  • Jauch, D. A.; William T. Carpenter, Jr. (February 1988). “Reactive psychosis. I. Does the pre-DSM-III concept define a third psychosis?”. Journal of Nervous and Mental Disease 176 (2): 72–81.
  • Littrell, John M. (1998). Brief Counseling in Action (Norton Professional Books). New York: W.W. Norton & Company.
  • Aarts and Dijksterhuis 2003 quoted in Taylor, E.S, Letitia Anne Peplau, David O.Sears (2006), “Social Psychology (12 th edition.), Pearson Education, India.
  • Lochman, J. E., Nelson, W. M., & Sims, J. P. (1981). A cognitive-behavioural program for use with aggressive children. Journal of Clinical Child Psychology, 10, 146-148.
  • Cooley 1922 quoted in Crisp, R.J, Rhianomon N Turner (2007) Essential Social Psychology, Sage Publications, New Delhi.
  • Louisa, D, Grandin, L. B., Alloy, L. Y. & Abramson (2007). Childhood stressful life events and bipolar spectrum disorder. Journal of Social and Clinical Psychology, 26, 460–478
  • Heider 1958 quoted in Crisp, R.J, Rhianomon N Turner (2007) Essential Social Psychology, Sage Publications, New Delhi.
  • Love, A. 1991. Internal Evaluation: Building Organisations from within. Newbury Park, CA: Sage.
  • Milgram 1963 quoted in Taylor, E.S, Letitia Anne Peplau, David O.Sears (2006), Social Psychology (12 th edition), Pearson Education, India.
  • Lozoff, B. (1989). Iron and learning potential in childhood. Academy of Medicine, 65, 1050-1066.
  • Schlenker 1980 quoted in Crisp, R.J, Rhianomon N Turner (2007) Essential Social Psychology, Sage Publications, New Delhi.
  • Ludwig, A.M. (1992). The Creative Achievement Scale. Creativity Research Journal, 5(2), 109-124.
  • Albarracin, D., Johnson, B.T., & Zanna, M.P. (2005). The Handbook of Attitudes. New Jersey: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.
  • Lusthaus, C., G. Anderson, and E. Murphy. 1995. Institutional assessment: A framework for strengthening organisational capacity for IDRC’s research partners. Ottawa: International Development Research Centre.
  • Aronson, E. (1969). The theory of cognitive dissonance: A current perspective. In L. Berkowitz (Ed.), Advances in Experimental Social Psychology (Vol. 4, pp. 1-34). New York: Academic Press.
  • Lusthaus, C., M.H. Adrien, and M. Perstinger. 1999a. Capacity development: Definitions, issues, and implications for planning, monitoring, and evaluation. Montreal: Universalia.
  • Eagly, A.H. & Chaiken, S. (1993). The psychology of attitudes. San Diego, CA: Harcourt Brace Jovanovich.
  • Lusthaus, C., M.H. Adrien, and M. Perstinger.1999b. Enhancing organisational performance. Ottawa: International Development Research Centre.
  • Fishbein, M. & Ajzen, I. (1975). Beliefs, attitude, intention, and behaviour: An introduction to theory and research. Reading, MA: Addison-Wesley.
  • Lusthaus, C., M.H. Adrien, G. Anderson, F. Carden, and G.P. Montalvan. 2002. Organisational assessment. A framework for improving performance. Ottawa/ Washington DC: International Development Research Centre and Inter-American Development Bank.
  • Katz, D. (1960). The functional approach to the study of attitudes. Public Opinion Quarterly, 24, 163–204.
  • Mabey, C.L., J.G. Salaman, and J. Storey (eds.). 1998. Strategic human resource management: A reader. London: Sage.
  • Schlenker, B. R. (1980). Impression management: The self-concept, social identity, and interpersonal relations. Monterey: Brooks/Cole.
  • MacCorquodale, K., & Meehl, P.E.(1948). On a distinction between hypothetical constructs and intervening variables. Psychological Review, 55, 95-107.
  • Tesser, A. (1993). The importance of heritability in psychological research: The case of attitudes. Psychological Review, 100, 129-142.
  • Howarth, D. (2000) Discourse. Philadelphia, Pa.: Open University Press.
  • Hare, A. P. (1962). Handbook of Small Group Research. New York: Macmillan Publishers.
  • MacFarlane, J.W., &Tuddenharn, R. D. (1951). Problems in the validation of projective techniques. In H. H. Anderson, & G. L. Anderson (Eds.), An Introduction to Projective Techniques (pp. 26-54). Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall.
  • Falomir-Pichastor, J. M., Munoz-Rojas, D., Invernisze, F., and Mugny, G. (2004). Perceived in-group threat as a factor moderating the influence of in-griup norms on discrimination against foreigners. European Journal of Social Psychology, 34, 135 – 153.
  • Mackay, R. and D. Horton. 2002. Capacity development in planning, monitoring, and evaluation: Results of an evaluation. Briefing Paper No. 51. The Hague: International Service for National Agricultural Research.
  • Judge, T. A., & Bono, J. E. (2001). Relationship of core self-evaluations traits— self-esteem, generalised self-efficacy, locus of control, and emotional stability— with job satisfaction and job performance: A meta-analysis. Journal of Applied Psychology, 86, 80-92.
  • Mackay, R. and D. Horton. 2003. Expanding the use of impact assessment and evaluation in agricultural research and development. Forthcoming in Agricultural Systems.
  • Festinger, L. (1954). A theory of social comparison processes. Human Relations, 7, 117 – 140.
  • Mackay, R., D. Horton, L. Dupleich, and A. Andersen. 2002. Evaluating organisational capacity development. The Canadian Journal of Program Evaluation, 17(2): 121–150.
  • Sherif, M., Harbey, O.J., White, B.J., Hood, W.R., and Sherif, C.W. (1961). Intergroup conflict and cooperation: The Robers’ cave experiment. Norma, Oklahoma: University of Oklahoma Book Exchange.
  • MacKinnon, D. W. (1944). The structure of personality. In J. McVicker Hunt (Ed.), Personality and the Behavior Disorders (Vol. 1, pp. 3- 48). New York: Ronald Press.
  • Friedkin, N. E. (2001). Norm formation in social influence networks. Social Networks, 23, 167 – 189.
  • Madhusudan, M. (1983). Educational and Vocational Guidance. Sambalpur: Saha Publishers & Distributors.
  • Lane, H. (1976). The wild boy of Aveyron. Cambridge: Harvard University Press.
  • Mahoney, M. J. (1974). Cognitive and behaviour modification. Cambridge, MA: Ballinger.
  • Siddiqi, H. A. (2006). Belief merging and revision under social influence: An explanation for the volatility clustering puzzle. MPRA Paper No. 657, Retrieved from http://mpra.ub.uni-muenchen.de/657/ on Oct. 09, 2010.
  • Malgady, R. G., Constantino, G., &Rogier, L. H. (1984). Development of a Thematic Apperception Test (TEMAS) for urban Hispanic children. Journal of Consulting and Clinical Psychology, 52(6), 986-996.
  • Bandura, A. (2001). Social cognitive theory: an agentic perspective. Annu. Rev. Psychol. 52:1–26
  • Maloney, M.P., & Ward, M. P. (1976). Psychological assessment: A conceptual approach. New York: Oxford University Press.
  • Bagga, Q. L. & Singh, A. (1990). Elemrnts of General Psychology. New Delhi: Arya Book Depot.
  • http://cogprints.soton.ac.uk/documents/disk0/00/00/16/39/index.html
  • http://www.phru.nhs.uk/Doc_Links/Qualitative%20Appraisal%20Tool.pdf
  • Margolis, R. D. & Zweben, J. E. (1998). Treating patients with alcohol and other drug problems: An integrated approach. Washington: American Psychological Association.
  • Hilgard, E. R., Atkinson, R. C., & Atkinson, R.L. (1975). Introduction to Psychology (6 th edition). New Delhi: Oxford & IBH Publishing Co.
  • Markham, S. & McKee (1995). Group absence behaviour and standards: A multilevel analysis. Academy of Management Journal, 38, 1174-1190.
  • Rush, Harold M.F.(1972).The world of work and the behavioural sciences: A perspective and an overview. In Fred Luthans (Ed.). Contemporary readings in organisational behaviour. New York. McGraw-Hill Book Company.
  • Marsepoil T, Petithory J, Faucher JM, Ho P, Viriot E, Benaiche F (1993). “[Encephalopathy and memory disorders during treatments with mefloquine]” (in French). Rev Med Interne 14 (8): 788–91.
  • Rush, Harold M.F.(1972).The world of work and the behavioural sciences: A perspective behaviour. New York. McGraw-Hill Book Company.
  • Massachusetts Department of Education. (2006). Massachusetts Model for Comprehensive School Counselling Programs. Amherst.
  • Hoeksema, Susan. (2000). Hilgard‘s Introduction to psychology, (13 th ed.) : New York: Harcourt Inc.
  • Matarazzo, J.D. (1992). Psychological testing and assessment in the 21st century. American Psychologist, 47, 1007-1018.
  • Maccoby,E.E. & Jacklin C.N. (1974). The psychology of sex differences. Stanford, CA: Stanford University Press.
  • Maxwell JC. Deaths related to the inhalation of volatile substances in Texas: 19881998. Am J Drug Alcohol Abuse. Nov 2001;27(4):689-97. 
  • Buss, D. M. (1999). Evolutionary psychology: The new science of the mind. Boston: Allyn & Bacon.
  • May, R. (1966). Sex differences in fantasy patterns. Journal of Projective Techniques and Personality Assessment, 30, 576-586.
  • Kirsch, I. & Lynn, S.J. (1999).Automaticity in clinical psychology. American Psychologist, 54(7), 504-515.
  • Mays, N. Pope C. Qualitative research in health care Assessing quality in
  • Seligman, M. E. P. (1970). On the generality of the laws of learning. Psychological Review, 77, 406-418.
  • Mc David, James, C and Hawthron, Laura R.L (2006) Programme Evaluation and Performance Measurement: An Introduction to Practice. New Delhi: Sage Publication Inc.
  • Marieb, Wilhelm (2010). Essentials of Human Anatomy & Physiology, Ninth Edition Companion Website Pearson Education. New York.
  • McArthur, D. S., & Roberts, G. E. (1982). Roberts Apperception Test for Children: Manual. Los Angeles: Western Psychological Services.
  • Francis Lieukel (1999) ) Introduction to Physiological Psychology. Tata Mcgraw- Hill, New Delhi.
  • http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Discourse
  • Burner, J.S., and Goodman, C.C. (1947) Value and Need as Organising Factors in Perception. Journal of Abnormal and Social Psychology, 42,33-44.
  • McClelland, D. C. (1999). How the test lives on: Extensions of the Thematic Apperception Test approach. In L. G. Gieser& M. I. Stein (Eds.). Evocative images: The Thematic Apperception Test and the Art of Projection. Washington, DC: American Psychological Association.
  • Wertheimer, M. (1923) Untersuchungen Zur Lhre Von der Gestalt, 11, Psychologische Forschung, 4: 301-350.
  • McClelland, D. C., Atkinson, J. W., Clark, R. A., & Lowell, E. L. (1953). The achievement motive. New York: Appleton-Century-Crofts.
  • Robert Sessions Woodworth (1999). Woodworth & Schlosberg’s Experimental Psychology, Holt Rinehart and Winsoton, New York,
  • McCoy, T.J. Creating an Open Book Organisation: Where Employees Think and Act Like Business Partners. New York: Amacom, 1996.
  • Dawson, L., and Arnold, P. (1981) Persistent Phantom limb pain. Perceptual and Motor Skills, 53, 135-138.
  • McCreary, W.H., & Miller, G. (1966). Elementary School Counselors in California. Personnel and Guidance Journal, 44, 494-498.
  • Hubel, D.H., and Wiesel, T.N. (1979), Brain Mechanisms of Vision, Scientific American, 241, 150-162
  • McCue, M. (1995). Ecologically valid assessment of problem: The American Multiple Errands Test (Abstract). Journal of the International" Neuropsychological Society, I, 149.
  • Matlin, M.W., and Foley, I. (1997) Sensation and Perception. Needham Heights, M.A.; Allyn and Bacon.
  • McDaniel JS, Musselman DL, Porter MR (1995). Depression in patients with cancer. Diagnosis, biology, and treatment. Archives of General Psychiatry,  52(2), 89-99
  • Rosenfeld, I. (1999). Is laser eye surgery for you? Parade, p.4-6
  • McGarvey EL, Clavet GJ, Mason W, Waite D. Adolescent inhalant abuse: environments of use. Am J Drug Alcohol Abuse. Nov 1999;25(4):731-41. 
  • Harrison, J.K. (1992). Individual and combined effects of behaviour modeling and cultural assimilator in cross-cultural management training. Journal of Applied Psychology, 77, 952-962. Baron,R.A.(2001) Psychology, Pearson Prentice Hall.
  • McGuffin, P; Rijsdijk, F; Andrew, M; Sham, P; Katz, R; & Cardno, A (2003). The heritability of bipolar affective disorder and the genetic relationship to unipolar depression. Archives of General Psychiatry, 60, 497–502.
  • Muzafer Sherif and Carolyn W. Sherif (1969), Social Psychology, Harper & Row, Publishers New York, Evanson.
  • http://hrcouncil.ca/hr-toolkit/planning-operational.cfm
  • http://www.southalabama.edu/coe/bset/johnson/lectures/lec12.htm
  • McHoul, A. & Grace, W. (1993). A Foucault primer: Discourse, power, and the subject. Melbourne: Melbourne University Press.
  • http://www.window2india.com/cms/admin/article.jsp?aid=993
  • McKeith, Ian G. (February 2002). “Dementia with Lewy bodies”. British Journal of Psychiatry 180:
  • Hall, Calvin, S. (1954). A Primer in Freudian Psychology. Meridian Book. ISBN 0452011833.
  • McLaren, N. (2007). Humanizing Madness. Ann Arbor, MI: Loving Healing Press.
  • Rogers, C.R. (1969). Freedom to Learn. Columbus, OH: Merrill.
  • Mclean, G. N., Rothwell, W. J., & Sullivan, R. S. (eds.). (2005). Practicing organisation development: A guide for consultants (2nd ed.). Hoboken, NJ: John Wiley & Sons.
  • Skinner, B.F. (1950). Are Theories of Learning Necessary? Psychological Review, 57(4), 193-216.
  • McReynolds, P. (1968). An introduction to Psychological assessment. In P. McReynolds (Ed.), Advances in Psychological Assessmellt (Vol. 1). Palo Alto, CA: Science and Behavior Books.
  • David R. Shaffer and Katherine Kipp: Developmental Psychology: Childhood and Adolescence, Holt, Rurehart and Watson New York.
  • http://news.bbc.co.uk/2/hi/science/nature/2856755.stm.
  • Havighurst, Robert, J. (1972). Developmental Tasks and Education, Third Edition. New York. Longman.
  • Meadows R, Verghese A. Medical complications of glue sniffing. South Med J. May 1996;89(5):455-62. 
  • Ainsworth, M.S. (1979) ‘Infant–Mother Attachment’, American Psychologist, vol. 34, pp. 932–7.
  • Mednick, S.A. (1962). The associative basis of the creative process. Psychological Review, 69(3), 220-232.
  • Baumrind, D. (1967). Child-care practices anteceding three patterns of preschool behaviour. Genetic Psychology Monographs, 75, 43-88.
  • http://salmon.psy.plym.ac.uk/ mscprm/Forms.htm http://salmon.psy.plym.ac.uk/mscprm/Forms2.htm. http://srcweb.berkeley.edu:4229/ http://trochim.human.cornell.edu/ tutorial/mugo/tutorial.htm
  • Darling, N., & Steinberg, L. (1993). Parenting style a context: An integrative model. Psychological Bulletin, 113, 487-496.
  • Messer, S. B. “A critical examination of belief structures in interpretive and eclectic psychotherapy.” In Handbook of Psychotherapy Integration,edited by J. C. Norcross and M. R. Goldfried. New York: Basic Books, 1992: 130-165.
  • Kaur, B., Menon, S., & Konantambigi, R. (2001).Child and Adolescent Development Research. In Pandey, J. (Eds), Psychology in India Revisited: Vol. 2 (pp.163-227). New Delhi: Sage.
  • Meyer, G J. (1999). Introduction to the special series on the utility of the Rorschach for clinical assessment. Psychological Assessment, 11, 235-239.
  • Pande, R, & Malhotra, A. (2006). Son’s preference and daughter’s neglect in India. What happens to living girls? International Center for Research on Women. Washington DC, USA.
  • Meyer, G. J. (1997a). Assessing reliability: Critical corrections for a critical examination of the Rorschach Comprehensive System. Psychological Assessment, 9, 480-489.
  • Hurlock, Elizabeth (2007) Child Growth and Development. Tata McGraw Hill & Co., New Delhi.
  • Meyer, G. J. (1997b). Thinking clearly about reliability: More critical corrections regarding the Rorschach Comprehensive System. Psychological Assessment, 9, 480-489.
  • Pashler, Hall (2002). Steven’s Handbook of Experimental Psychology.(2002). Third Edition. (3 rd Edition) , Wiley International . NY
  • Meyer, G.J., & Archer, R.P. (2001). The hard science of Rorschach research: What do we know and where do we go? Psychological Assessment, 13, 486502.
  • Berk L. (2009). Development Through the Lifespan. Publisher: Allyn & Bacon
  • Mezzich JE, Honda Y, Kastrup MC, eds. Psychiatric Diagnosis: A World Perspective. New York, NY: Springer Verlag; 1994.
  • Clifton D. Rryant (2003): Handbook of Death and Dying. Sage Publication, Inc.
  • Mezzich JE, Lin KM. Acute and transient psychotic disorders and culture-bound syndromes. In: Sadock BJ, Sadock VA, eds. Kaplan and Sadock’s Comprehensive Textbook of Psychiatry. 6th ed. Baltimore, Md: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins; 1995:1049.
  • Hunter, J. E. (1986). Cognitive ability, cognitive aptitudes, job knowledge, and job performance. Journal of Vocational Behavior, 29, 340-362.
  • Michael Gelder, Nancy Andreason, Juan Lopez-Ibor, and John Geddes (2009). New Oxford Textbook of Psychiatry. (2nd edition). Oxford University Press, London.
  • Edwards, A.L. (1972). Experimental Designs in psychological Research New York ‘Rineheart and Winston Inc (Indian Edition)’
  • Michael Gelder, Richard Mayou, and Philip Cowen. (2001). The Shorter Oxford Textbook of Psychiatry. 4th edition. Oxford University Press, New York.
  • Gregory, R (1994) ‘Seeing Intelligence’ in J.Khalfa (ed) what is intelligence, England: Cambridge University Press.
  • Miklowitz, D. J. and Kiki, D. C. (2008). Prevention of bipolar disorder in at-risk children: Theoretical assumptions and empirical foundations. Development of Psychopathology, 20, 881–897.
  • Fred N.Kerlinger (1994) (6 th edition). Foundations in Behavioural Research\h. Wiley International, New Delhi)
  • Milberg, W., Hebben, N., & Kaplan, E. (1986). The Boston process approach to neuropsychological assessment. In I. Grant & K. M. Adams (Eds.), Neuropsychological Assessment of Neuropsychiatric Disorders (pp. 65-86). New York: Oxford University Press.
  • Cambell, A.A & Katona, G.(1953). The sample survey: a technique for social science research. In L
  • Millon, T. (1996). Disorders of Personality: DSM-IV-TM and Beyond. New York: John Wiley and Sons. p. 393.
  • Winer, B.J.(1971). Statistical Principles in Experimental Design. New York: McGraw Hill.
  • http://socrates.acadiau.ca/COURSES/PSYC/McLeod/2023Research/ex-post.htm
  • Broota, K.D. (1997). Experimental Design. New Age International, New Delhi
  • Minshew, N.J., Siegel, D.J., Goldstein, G., &Weldy, S. (1994). Verbal problem solving in high functioning autistic individuals. Archives of Clinical Neuropsychology, 9, 31-40.
  • Kothari, C.R.(2006). Research Methodology, New Age International,(2 nd edition) New Delhi
  • Misra LK, Kofoed L, Fuller W. Treatment of inhalant abuse with risperidone. J Clin Psychiatry. Sep 1999; 60(9):620. 
  • McMillan, J. H. (2004). Educational Research: Fundamentals for the Consumer, 4th Edition. Allyn and Bacon: Boston.
  • Moldin, S. O., Scheftner, W. A.< Rice, J. P., Nelson, E., Knesevich, M. A. & Akiskal, H. (1993). Association between major depressive disorder and physical illness. Psychological Medicine, 23, 755-761.
  • Oaks, CA. Handbook of Qualitative Research (pp. 377-392). Sage Publications Thousand
  • Mooney R.L. and Gordon L.V. 1950. Problem Checklist. Psychological Corporation. New York.
  • Indu, D. (1983). The Basic Essentials of Counseling. New Delhi: Sterling Publishers Private Ltd.
  • Moore DP, Jefferson JW. Paranoid personality disorder. In: Moore DP, Jefferson JW, eds. Handbook of Medical Psychiatry. 2nd ed. Philadelphia, Pa: Mosby Elsevier; 2004: chap 134.
  • Irwin G. Saranson, Barbara R. Salanson. Abnormal Psychology The Problem Of Maladaptive Behaviour (10th ed) Pearson Education.
  • Moore TH, Zammit S, Lingford-Hughes A, et al. (July 2007). “Cannabis use and risk of psychotic or affective mental health outcomes: a systematic review”. Lancet 370 (9584): 319–28.
  • Histrionic personality disorder – International Statistical Classification of Diseases and Related Health Problems, 10th revision (ICD-10).
  • Morgan, P. 1998. Capacity and capacity development: Some strategies. Hull: Canadian International Development Agency.
  • Levin, and Fox, J.A. (2006), Elementary Statists in Social Research, New Delhi, Pearson education
  • Morgan, P. 1999. An update on the performance monitoring of capacity development programs: What are we learning? Hull: Canadian International Development Agency.
  • John Maltby, Liz Day, Ann Macaskill (2009). Personality, Individual Differences and Intelligence (2nd edition ) Pearson Education Europe, Middle East and Africa., Canada.
  • Morrow, P. C. (1983). Concept redundancy in organisational research: The case of work commitment. Academy of Management Review, 8, 486-500.
  • Mischel, W. (1999). Introduction to Personality. Sixth edition. Fort Worth, Texas: Harcourt Brace.
  • Morse, JM, Barett M, Mayan M, Olson K, Spiers J. Verification strategies for establishing reliability and validity in qualitative research. Int J of Qual Meth 2002; 1 (2):spring.
  • Jaffe, J. H. & Knapp, C. M. & Ciraulo, D. A. (1997). Opiates: Clinical aspects. In J.H. Lowinson, P. Ruiz, R. B. Millman, & J. G. Langrod (Eds.), Substance abuse: A comprehensive textbook. Baltimore: Williams & Wilkins.
  • Motion, J. & Leitch, S. (2007). “A toolbox for public relations: The oeuvre of Michel Foucault”. Public Relations Review 33 (3): 263–268. doi:10.1016/ j.pubrev.2007.05.004.
  • Ewen, Robert, B (1998). An Introduction to Theories of Personality (fifth edition). Lawrence Erlbaum Associates, Publishers Mahwah, New Jersey, London.
  • Muilenburg JL, Johnson WD. Inhalant use and risky behaviour correlates in a sample of rural middle school students. Subst Abus. Dec 2006;27(4):21-5. 
  • Jaspers, Karl (1997-11-27) [1963]. Allgemeine Psychopathologie (General Psychopathology). Translated by J. Hoenig & M.W. Hamilton from German (Reprint ed.). Baltimore, Maryland: Johns Hopkins University Press.
  • http://users.utu.fi/bredelli/cda.html
  • Jauch DA, Carpenter WT Jr. Reactive psychosis. I. Does the pre-DSM-III concept define a third psychosis?. J Nerv Ment Dis. Feb 1988;176(2):72-81. 
  • http://web.archive.org/web/20071222001646/http://www.echr.coe.int/ECHR/ EN/Header/The+Court/The+Court/History+of+the+Court/. Retrieved 2008-01-04. “About the European Committee for the Prevention of Torture”. European Committee for the Prevention of
  • John McLeod (2003). Does it work? Evaluating the Outcomes of Counsellling. Doing Counselling Research. Sage Publication, New Delhi, 117-144.
  • Nadler, D. A. (1977). Feedback and organisation development. Reading, Mass.: Addison-Wesley
  • John P. Kotter, (March- April 1995). Leading Change: Why Transformation Fails, Harvard Business Review, P.61
  • Nadler, D. A. (1981). Managing organisational change: An integrative perspective. The Journal of Applied Behavioural Science, 17(2), 191-211.
  • Anderson 1968 quoted in Crisp, R.J, Rhianomon N Turner (2007) Essential Social Psychology, Sage Publications, New Delhi.
  • Nadler, D. A., & Tushman, M. L. (1977). A diagnostic model for organisation behaviour. In J. R. Hackman, E. E. Lawler, & L. W. Porter (Eds.). Perspectives on Behaviour in Organisations. New York, Academic Press.
  • Johnson FA. African perspective on mental disorder. In: Mezzich JE, Honda Y, Kastrup MC, eds. Psychiatric Diagnosis: A World Perspective. New York, NY: Springer Verlag; 1994.
  • http://wilderdom.com/OEcourses/PROFLIT/Class6Qualitative1.htm
  • Depaulo 1992 quoted in Baron, R.A Donn Byrne (2006) Social Psychology (10 th edition) Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi.
  • Naglieri, J. A., & Das, J. P. (1997). Das Naglieri Cognitive Assessment System. Itasca, IL: Riverside Publishing.
  • Gross and Miller quoted in Crisp, R.J, Rhianomon N Turner (2007) Essential Social Psychology, Sage Publications, New Delhi.
  • Nair, S. R. (2004). Organisational Behaviour: Texts and Cases. Mumbai. Himalaya Publishing House.
  • Jones and Davis 1965 quoted in Crisp, R.J, Rhianomon N Turner (2007) Essential Social Psychology, Sage Publications, New Delhi.
  • Nathans-Barel, I.; P. Feldman, B. Berger, I. Modai and H. Silver (2005). “Animalassisted therapy ameliorates anhedonia in schizophrenia patients”. Psychotherapy and Psychosomatics 74 (1): 31–35.
  • Mathenson, Homes and Kristiansco 1991 quoted in Taylor, E.S, Letitia Anne Peplau, David O.Sears (2006), Social Psychology (12 th edition), Pearson Education, India.
  • National Epidemiologic Survey on Alcohol and Related Conditions - NESARC (2002) Journal of Clinical Psychiatry, 65.
  • Olson and Ross quoted in Crisp, R.J, Rhianomon N Turner (2007) Essential Social Psychology, Sage Publications, New Delhi.
  • National Institute of Neurological Disorders and Stroke. Parkinson’s disease backgrounder. July 1, 2001.
  • Sadker and Sadker 1994 quoted in Crisp, R.J, Rhianomon N Turner (2007) Essential Social Psychology, Sage Publications, New Delhi.
  • National Institute on Drug Abuse. Inhalant Abuse Research Report. 2005.
  • Sherif While and Harvey 1955 quoted in Crisp, R.J, Rhianomon N Turner (2007) Essential Social Psychology, Sage Publications, New Delhi.
  • NB: A major source of inspiration for writing this module was Miles and Huberman’s book. Section V of this module is a heavily abbreviated and adapted version of their chapter VII.
  • Zalenski and Larsen 2002 quoted in Taylor, E.S, Letitia Anne Peplau, David O.Sears (2006), Social Psychology (12 th edition.), Pearson Education, India.
  • Neilsen (1984) Becoming an OD Practitioner, Englewood Cliffs, CA: PrenticeHall, pp. 2-3.
  • Johnson, S. and J.D. Ludema. 1997. Partnering to build and measure organisational capacity: Lessons from NGOs around the world. Grand Rapids, MI: Christian Reformed World Relief Committee.
  • Neilsen, “Becoming an OD Practitioner”, Englewood Cliffs, CA: Prentice-Hall, 1984, pp. 2-3.
  • Johnson, Sharon & Johnson, Clarence D. (2003). “Results-based guidance: a systems approach to student support programs”, Professional School Counseling, p. 180-184
  • Neisser, U., Boodoo, G., Bouchard, T. J., Jr., Boykin, A. W., Brody, N., Ceci, S. J., et al. (1996). Intelligence: Knowns and unknowns. American Psychologist, 51, 77-101
  • Bem, D. (1967). Self-perception: An alternative interpretation of cognitive dissonance phenomena. Psychological Review, 74, 183-200.
  • Nelson-Jones, R. (2002). Basic Counselling Skills: A Helper’s Manual. Sage Publications Ltd.
  • Davidson, A.R. & Jaccard, J.J. (1979). Variables that moderate the attitude- behaviour relationship: Results of a longitudinal survey. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 37(8), 1364-1376.
  • Nemeroff CB, Musselman DL, Evans DL (1998). Depression and cardiac disease. Depression and Anxiety,  8(Suppl 1), 71-9.
  • Fazio, R. H. (2000). Accessible attitudes as tools for object appraisal: Their costs and benefits. In G. Maio J. Olson (Eds.), Why we evaluate: Functions of attitudes (pp. 1-36). Mahwah, NJ: Erlbaum.
  • Nevis, E. C. (1987). Organisational consulting: A gestalt approach. London: The Analytic Press.
  • Festinger, L. & Carlsmith, J.M. (1959). Cognitive consequences of forced compliance. Journal of Abnormal and Social Psychology, 47, 382-389.
  • Nezu, A. M., Nezu, C. M., Friedman, S. H., & Haynes, S. N. (1997). Case formulation in behavior therapy: Problem-solving and functional analytic strategies. In T. D. Eels (Ed.), Handbook of psychotherapy case formulation (pp. 368401). New York: Guilford Press.
  • Greene, D., Sternberg, B., & Lepper, M.R. (1976). Overjustification in a token economy. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 34, 1219-1234.
  • Nisbet, J. and Watt, J. (1984), Case study in J.Bell, T. Brush, a Fox, J. Goodley and s. Goulding (eds.) Conducting Small-scale Investigations in Educational Management, London : Harperpow.
  • Jung, C.G. [1921] (1971). Psychological Types, Collected Works, Volume 6. Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press.
  • Nyberg, L. &Tulving, E. (1996). Classifying human long-term memory: evidence from converging dissociations. The European Journal of Cognitive Psychology, 8, 163-183.
  • Kim, J, J S and Lim, and M Bhargava (1998). The role of affect in attitude formation: A classical conditioning approach. Journal of the Academy of Marketing Science, 26, 143-152.
  • O’Hanlon, W. and Weiner-Davis, M (1989). In Search of Solutions: A New Direction in Psychotherapy. New York: W. W. Norton & Company, Inc.
  • Powell, M. C., Fazio, R. H. (1984). Attitude accessibility as a function of repeated attitudinal expression. Personality and Social Psychology Bulletin, 10, 139-148.
  • Office of Science and Technology. (1967). Privacy and Behavioral Research. Washington, DC: U.S. Government Printing Office.
  • Shavitt, S., & Nelson, M. R. (2000). The social identity function in person perception: Communicated meanings of product preferences. In G. R. Maio & J.M. Olson (Eds.), Why we evaluate: Function of attitudes (pp. 37-58). Mahwah, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum.
  • Ohayon, M. M.; R. G. Priest, M. Caulet, and C. Guilleminault (October 1996). “Hypnagogic and hypnopompic hallucinations: pathological phenomena?”. British Journal of Psychiatry 169 (4): 459–67
  • Steele, C.M. (1988). The psychology of self affirmation: Sustaining the integrity of the self. In L. Berkowitz (Ed.), Advances in Experimental Social Psychology (Vol. 21, pp. 261-302). New York: Academic Press.
  • Olson, J.L., Goldstein, G., Neuringer, C. & Shelly, C.H. (1969). Relation between equivalence range and concept formation ability in brain-damaged patients. Perceptual and Motor Skills, 28, 743-749.
  • Waller, N.J.,., Kojetin, B.A., Bouchard, T.J., Jr., Lykken, D.T., & Tellegen, A. (1990). Genetic and environmental influences on religious interests, attitudes, and values: A study of twins reared apart and together. Psychological Science, 1, 138-142.
  • Online counseling. www.aifs.gov.au/afrc/pubs/briefing/b15pdf/bp15.pdf on 11 Jan 2011
  • Zimbardo, P.G. (1971). The psychological power and pathology of imprisonment. A statement prepared for the U.S. House of Representatives Committee on the Judiciary, Subcommittee No. 3; Hearings on Prison Reforms, San Francisco, October, 25 (p. 141).
  • Overholser, J. C. (1989). “Differentiation between schizoid and avoidant personalities: an empirical test”. Canadian Journal of Psychiatry 34 (8): 785–90.
  • Jorge MR, Mezzich JE. Latin American contributions to psychiatric nosology and classification. In: Mezzich JE, Honda Y, Kastrup MC, eds. Psychiatric Diagnosis: A World Perspective. New York, NY: Springer Verlag; 1994.
  • Palmer, Stephen & Woolfe, Ray (2000). Integrative and Eclectic Counseling and Psychotherapy. CA: Sage publications.
  • Critto, A. (1999) Choosing Models of Society and Social Norms: Improving Choices and Quality of Life. Lanham, MD: University Press of America.
  • Paranoid personality disorder – International Statistical Classification of Diseases and Related Health Problems 10th Revision (ICD- 10).
  • Granovetter, M. (2004). The Impact of Social Structure on Economic Outcomes. Journal of Economic Perspective, 19(1), 33 – 50.
  • Patton, M.Q. 1997. Utilisation-focused evaluation: The new century text. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage.
  • LIG Reporter (April 14, 2010). Widow remarriage under Hindu laws. Retrieved from http://www.lawisgreek.com/widow-remarriage-under-hindu-laws/, on 40476
  • Patton, M.Q. 1999. Organisational development and evaluation.The Canadian Journal of Program Evaluation. Special Issue: 93–113.
  • The Times of India (June 22, 2010). Honour Killings: SC demands answers. Retrieved from http://timesofindia.indiatimes.com/articleshow/6077004.cms? prtpage=1, on October 25, 2010.
  • Patton, MQ (1990) Qualitative Evaluation and Research Methods. 2nd ed. Newbury Park, CA: Sage Publications.
  • Birenbaum, A., and Sagarin, E. (1976). Norms and human behaviour. New York: Praeger.
  • Pawlik, K. (1998). The psychology of individual differences: The personality puzzle. In J. G. Adair, D. B'elanger, & K. L Dion, (Eds.), Advances in Psychological Science (vol. 1, pp. 1-30). Hove, UK: Psychology Press.
  • Judge, T. A., & Church, A. H. (2000). Job satisfaction: Research and practice. In C. L. Cooper & E. A. Locke (Eds.), Industrial and organisational psychology: Linking theory with practice (pp. 166-198). Oxford, UK: Blackwell.
  • Pawlik, K. (Ed.) (1996). Grundlagen und Methoden der DifferentiellenPsychologie [Found9tions and methods of differential psychology]. In Enzyklop ·adie der Psychologie(vol. CNIDJI). G"ottingen: Hogrefe.
  • O’Gorman, R., Wilson, D. S., and Miller, R. R. (2008). An evolved cognitive bias for social norms. Evolution and Human Behaviour, 29, 71 – 78.
  • Perrine, K. (1993). Differential aspects of conceptual processing in the Category Test and Wisconsin Card Sorting Test. Journal of Clinical and Experimental Psychology, 15, 461-473.
  • Aarts, H. and Dijksterhuis, A. (2003). The silence of the library: Environment, situational norm, and social behaviour. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 84(1), 18 – 28.
  • Perris, C. (1992). Bipolar-unipolar distinction. In E.S. Paykel (Ed.) Handbook of Affective disorders (2nd ed.), New York: Guilford.
  • Bamberg, S. and Möser, G. (2007). Twenty years after Hines, Hungerford, and Tomera: A new meta-analysis of psycho-social determinants of pro-environmental behaviour. Journal of Environmental Psychology, 27, 14 – 25.
  • Philip C. Kendall (2000). Childhood Disorders. Psychology Press. Ltd. New York.
  • Judge, T. A., & Watanabe, S. (1994). Individual differences in the nature of the relationship between job and life satisfaction. Journal of Occupational and Organisational Psychology, 67, 101-107.
  • Pinto A, Francis G. (1993). Cognitive correlates of depressive symptoms in hospitalised adolescents. Adolescence, 28, 661–72.
  • Kaðitçibaþi, Ç. (2006). Rediscovering Sherif: Sherif’s role in the formation of social psychology; his relevance for (Cross-) Cultural psychology; and his commitment to human well-being. Cross-Cultural Psychology Bulletin, 40(1- 2), 20 – 26.
  • Plomin, R. (1999). Genetics and general cognitive ability. Nature, 402, C25-C29.
  • Louis, W. R. and Taylor, D. M. (2005). Rights and duties as group norms: Implications of intergroup research for the study of rights and responsibilities. In N. J. Finkel & F. M. Moghaddam (Eds.), The psychology of rights and duties: Empirical contributions and normative commentaries (pp. 105 – 134). Washington, DC: APA Press.
  • http://www.africa-union.org/official_documents/Treaties_%20Conventions_% 20Protocols/Protocol%20to%20the%20African%20Court%20of%20Justice% 20-%20Maputo.pdf.
  • Sherif, M. (1937). An experimental approach to the study of attitudes. Sociometry, 1, 90 – 98.
  • portal.bibliotekivest.no/terminology.htm
  • Smith, M. B. (2005). “Personality and Social Psychology”: Retrospections and Aspirations. Personality and Social Psychology Review, 9(4), 334 – 340.
  • Postman , L. and Egan, J.P. (1949). Experimental Psychology. New York; Harper & Row
  • Bandura, A. (1998). Self-Efficacy. In: Friedman H. Encyclopedia of Mental Health. San Diego: Academic Press; 1998
  • Preskill, H. and R. T. Torres. 1999. Evaluative inquiry for learning organisations. London: Sage.
  • Binet, A., & Henri, V. (1896). Psychologieindividuelle. AnneePsychologie, 2, 4ll-465.
  • http://www.amnesty.org/en/alfresco_asset/dc501e2c-a5f9-11dc-bc7d3fb9ac69fcbb/ior630082004en.pdf.
  • http://www.odi.org.uk/resources/details.asp?id=1011&title=untangling-linkstrade-poverty-gender.
  • Psychology Education and Career in India. Retrieved on 11/1/2011 from www.indicareer.com
  • Beyer,B. K. (1995). Critical thinking. Bloomington, IN: Phi Delta Kappa Educational Foundation.
  • Quadrio, C. (2005). “Axis One/Axis Two: A disordered borderline”. Australian & New Zealand Journal of Psychiatry 39 (Suppl. 1): 141-156.
  • Clark, K. E. & Miller, G. A. (eds.) (1970). Psychology. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice Hall.
  • Qualman, A. and J. Bolger. 1996. Capacity development: A holistic approach to sustainable development. Development Express No. 8. Canada: International Development Information Centre.
  • Dandapani, S. (2004). General Psychology. Hyderabad (India): Neelkamal Publications Pvt. Ltd..
  • Quick Reference to the Diagnostic Criteria from DSM-IV-TR. Arlington, VA: American Psychiatric Association, 2000.
  • Feldman, R.S.(2004). Understanding Psychology (6 th edition), New Delhi (India): Tata McGraw Hill.
  • R.R. & Reynolds, C.R. (Eds.), Handbook of Creativity (pp. 53-75). New York: Plenum Press.
  • James, W. (1890). The Principles of Psychology. N.Y.:Holt.
  • Rabin, A. I. (1981). Projective methods: A historical introduction .In A. Rabin (Ed.), Assessment witb Projective Techniques: A Concise Introduction . New York: Springer.
  • Nairne, J.S. (2003). Psycho logy: The Adaptive Mind (3 rd edit ion). USA:Wadsworth.
  • Raines, S. (2006). Mediating in your pajamas: The benefits and challenges for ODR practitioners. Conflict Resolution Quarterly, 23(3), 359-369.
  • Schick, T. & Vaughn, L.(2001). How to think about weird things: Critical thinking for a new age. New York: McGraw-Hill.
  • Raja, A. P and Margulies, Newton (1979) Organisational change and development. In Sehgal, J.L. (1988) Organisational Development. Printwell Publishers, Jaipur.
  • Woodworth, R. S. (1948). Contemporary Schools of Psychology. New York: Ronald.
  • http://www.amnesty.org/en/death-penalty.
  • Allen. L. (1993). Integrating a sociocultural perspective into the psychology curriculum. G. Stanley Hall lecture presented to the American Psychological Association, Toronto, Canada.
  • Ramsay, M.C, Reynolds, CR., Kamphaus, R.W (2002). Essentials of Behavioural Assessment. New York:John Wiley & Sons, Inc.
  • Atkinson, Rita L.; Atkinson, Richard C.; Smith, Edward E.; Bem, Darvl J.;& Nolen-
  • Raven, J.C. (1982). Revised manual for Raven's Progressive Matrices and Vocabulary Scale. Windsor, U.K.: NFER Nelson.
  • Bushman, B. J., & Anderson, C. A. (2001). Media violence and the American public. American Psychologist, 56 (6/7), 477-489.
  • http://www.amnestyusa.org/lgbt-human-rights/ about-lgbt-human-rights/page.do?id=1106573.
  • Lewis-Fernandez, R. & Kleinman, A. (1994). Culture, Personality, and Psychopathology. Journal of Abnormal Psychology, 103, 67-71.
  • Reich, T., Clayton, P. J. and Winokur, G. (1969). Family history studies-V The genetics of Mania. American Journal of Psychiatry l25, l358–1369.
  • Reid, P.T. (1994). The real problem in the study of culture. American Psychologist, 49, 524-525.
  • Reich, W., Jesph, J., &Shayk, M.A. (1991). Diagnostic instmment for children and adolescents-revised: Child and Parent (Version 7.2). Seattle: University of Washington.
  • http://www.socialresearchmethods.net/kb/survaddi.php http://www.socialresearchmethods.net/kb
  • Reichenbach, H (1938). Experience and Prediction. Chicago: University of Chicago press.
  • Craik, K. H. (1970). Environmental psychology. In New directions in psychology, Vol. 4, New York: Holt, Rinehart & Winston.
  • Reichenbach, H (1947). Elements of Symbolic Logic, New York: Macmillan.
  • Holahan, Charles J. (1982). Environmental psychology. New York: Random House.
  • Reynolds, C. R., Chastain, R. L., Kaufman, A. S., & McLean, J. E. (1987). Demographic characteristics and IQ among adults: Analysis of the WAIS-R standardization sample as a function of the stratification variables. Journal of School Psychology, 25, 323-324
  • Moerman, D.E. (2002). The meaning response and the ethics of avoiding placebos. Evaluation & the Health Professions. Special Recent Advances in Placebo Research, 25(4), 399-409.
  • Richard, M. Ryckman (2004). Theories of Personality, Thompson, Wadsworth, United States.
  • Proshanky, H. M. & Altman, I. (1979). Overview of the field. In W. P. White (ed.) Resources in environment and behaviour. Washington D. C.: American Psychological Association.
  • Richards, R., Kinney, D.K., Lunde, I., Benet, M. &Merzel, A.P.C. (1988). Assessing everyday creativity: characteristics of the Lifetime Creativity Scales and validation with three large samples. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 54(3), 476-485.
  • http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Cognitive_science
  • Richardson-Klavehn, A. & Bjork, R.A. (1988). Measures of memory. Annual Review of Psychology, 39,475-543.
  • Inderbir Singh (2008). Anatomy and Physiology for Nurses. Jaypee Brothers, New Delhi
  • Robbins, S.P. Essentials of Organisational Behaviour. 8th ed. Upper Saddle River, NJ: Prentice Hall, 2005.
  • Frank S. Freeman (2001). Theory and Practice of Psychological Testing. Inter Science Publishers, NY.
  • Robinson, D. G. & Robinson, J. C. (1996). Performance consulting: Moving beyond training. San Francisco, CA: Berrett-Koehler.
  • Morgan C.T. (1989) Introduction to Physiological Psychology. Tata Mcgraw- Hill, New Delhi.
  • Robinson, L. & Spilsbury K. Systematic review of the perceptions and experiences of accessing health services by adult victims of domestic violence. Health Soc Care Community 2008; 16(1): 16-30.
  • Carlon, N.R. (1998) Physiology of Behaviour (6th ed.), Needham Heights, M.A. Allyn & Bacon.
  • Rode, J. C. (2004). Job satisfaction and life satisfaction revisited: A longitudinal test of an integrated model. Human Relations, 57, 1205-1229.
  • Munn, Norman. (1997). Introduction to Psychology. Holt Rinehart, New Delhi
  • Rogers C. R. (1977) Carl Rogers on Personal Power, Delacorte Press, Newyork
  • Leeper, R. (1935) The Role of Motivation in Learning: A Study of the Phenomenon of Differential motivation control on the Utilisation of Habits. Journal of Genetic Psychology, 46, 3-40.
  • Rohrachcr, H. (1969). Kleine Characterkunde(Brief characterology] (12th cd.). Vienna: Urban &Schwarzenberg.
  • Siipola, E.M. (1935) A Study of Some Effects of Preparatory Set. Psychological Monograph, 46, 210.
  • Roid, G. H. (2003). Stanford-Binet Intelligence Scales, Fifth Edition. Itasca, IL: Riverside Publishing.
  • Galanter, E. (1962), Contemporary Psychophysics. In R. Brown, E. Galanter, E.G. Hess & G. Mandler (Eds.), New Directions in Psychology. New York: Holt, Rinehart & Winston.
  • Roid, G. H., & Miller, L. J. (1998). Leiter International Performance ScaleRevised. Wood Dale, IL: Stoelting Company.
  • Woodworth, R.S. (1938), Experimental Psychology. New York: Holt.
  • Ross, P. H;Lipsey M.W and Freeman Howard. (2004). Evaluation: A Systematic Approach. New Delhi: Sage Publications Inc.
  • Coren, S. and Girgus, J.S. (1978) Seeing and Deceiving : The Psychology of Visual Illusion. NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum.
  • Rothwell, W. J., Sullivan, R., & McLean, G. N. (Eds.). (1995). Practicing organisation development: A guide for consultants. San Diego, CA: Pfeiffer.
  • Haber, R.N. and Fried A.H( 1975 ). An Introduction to Psychology. New York: Holt, Rinehart and Winston
  • Royse, David; Theyer, Bruce and Padgett Deborah. (2010). Programme Evaluation: An Introduction. USA: Wadsworth,Cengage Learning.
  • DeValois, R.L. (1965) Behavioural and Psycho-physiological studies on primate vision. In Neff, W.D. ed., Contributions of Sensory Physiology, Vol.1, New York: Academic Press.
  • Rozensky, R. H., Sweet, J. J., &Tovian, S.M. (1997). Psychological assessment in medical settings. New York: Plenum Press.
  • Gregory, R.L. 9168) Visual illusions. Scientific American,219,66-76
  • Rudd, M. D., & Joiner, T. (1998). The assessment, management, and treatment of suicidality: Toward clinically informed and balanced standards of care. Clinical Psychology, 5, 135-150.
  • Jensenn, T.S., and Rasmussen, P. (1994) Phanton Pain and other phenomena after amputation. In Wall. P.D. Melzack, R. (ed.) Textbook of pain, 3, London: Churchill Livingstone; 651-683.
  • Ruiz-Vargas, J.M. (1993). Disociaciones entre pruebasimply' citas y exply' citas de memoria: significado e implicacionesteo' ricas [Dissociations between implicit and explicit·memory tests: theoretical significance and implications]. Estudios de Psicology'a, 49,71-106.
  • Livingston, W.K. (1943) Pain mechanisms (a physiologic interpretation of causalgia and its related status). New York: Mcmillan.
  • Russ-Eft, D. and H. Preskill. 2001. Evaluation in organisations. A systematic approach to enhancing learning, performance, and change. Boston, MA: Perseus Books.
  • Melzack,R. (1973). How Acupuncture Works. Psychology Today. June
  • Rutter M. (1987). Parental mental disorder as a psychiatric risk factor. In: Hales R, Frances A, editors. American Psychiatric Association annual review. American Psychiatric Press, Inc.: Washington, DC, 647–663.
  • Parkes C.M.(1973) Factors determining the persistence of phantom pain in the amputee. Journal of Psuchosomatic Researches. 17: 97-108.
  • Rutter M. (1990). Psychosocial resilience and protective mechanisms. In: Rolf J, Masten AS, Cicchetti D, Nuechterlein KH, Weintraub S, editors. Risk and protective factors in the development of psychopathology. Cambridge: New York, 181– 214.
  • Sherman, R.A., Sherman, C.J., Bruno, G.M. (1987) Psychological factors influencing Phanton Limb pain (an analysis of the literature), Pain, 28, 285-295.
  • Salkovskis, P.M. (1989). Somatic problems. In K. Howton, P.M. Salkovskis, J.Kirk & D. M. Clark (eds.), Cognitive Behaviour Therapy for Psychiatric Problems: A Practical Guide (pp. 235-276). Oxford: Oxford University Press.
  • Zeki, S. (1992), The Visual image in mind and brain. Scientific American (Sep), 69-76.
  • Salkovskis, P.M.; Richards, H.C. & Forrester, E. (1995). The relationship between obsessional problems and intrusive thoughts. Behavioural and Cognitive Psychotherapy, 23, 281- 299.
  • Sperling, G. (1960). The information available in brief visual presentation, Psychological Monographs, 74.
  • Hinrichsen GA, Emery EE. (2006). Interpersonal factors and late-life depression. Clinical Psychology: Science and Practice, 12, 264–75.
  • Thorndike, E.L. (1898). Animal intelligence: An experimental study of the associative processes in animals. Psychological Monograph, 2 (whole No.8).
  • Santhiveeran, J. (2009). Compliance of social work e-therapy websites to the NASW Code of Ethics. Social Work in Health Care, 48, 1-13.
  • Stephen L. Franzoi (1996), Social Psychology, Times Mirror Higher Education Group. Inc. Brown & Benchmark Publisher, London.
  • Satterfield JM, Feldman MD. Paranoid personality disorder. In: Ferri FF, ed. Ferri’s Clinical Advisor 2008: Instant Diagnosis and Treatment. 1st ed. Philadelphia, Pa: Mosby Elsevier; 2008.
  • Rokeach, Milton. 1968, Beliefs, Attitudes and Values. San Francisco: Jossey Bass.
  • Schacter, D.L. & Tulving, E. (1994a). Memory Systems 1994. Cambridge, MA: The MIT Press.
  • Mey, Harald. (1972) Field Theory: A Study of Its Applications in the Social Sciences. New York: St. Martin’s Press.
  • Schacter, D.L. & Tulving, E. (1994b). What are the memory systems of 1994? In Schacter, D.L. &Tulving, E. (Eds.), Memory Systems 1994 (pp. 1-38). Cambridge, MA: The MIT Press.
  • http://www.window.state.tx.us/tpr/tspr/ mtplsnt/appendd.htm http://darkwing.uoregon.edu/~osrl/orsp/orsp.html
  • Schacter, D.L. (1987).lmplicit memory: history and current status. Journal of Experimental Psychology: Learning, Memory and Cognition, 13, 501-518.
  • http://www.xrml.org/
  • Schacter, D.L., Wagner, A.D. & Buckner, R.L. (2000). Memory systems of 1999. In Tulving, E. &Craik, F.I.M. (Eds.), The Oxford Handbook of Memory (pp. 627-643). New York: Oxford University Press.
  • Freud, Sigmund (1923). The Ego and the Id. Norton & Company.
  • Schaefer, C.E. &Anastasi, A. (1968). A biographical inventory for identifying creativity in adolescent boys. Journal of Applied Psychology, 58, 42-48.
  • Hofstede, G (1984). The Cultural Relativity of the Quality of Life Concept. Academy of Management Review 9 (3): 389–398.
  • Schaefer, C.E. (1970). Biographicallnventory -Creativity. San Diego, CA: Educational and Industrial Testing Service.
  • Piaget, J. (1972). To Understand Is To Invent. New York: The Viking Press, Inc.
  • Schein, E. (1987). Process consultation Volume II: Lessons for managers and consultants. Reading, MA: Addison-Wesley.
  • Rogers, C.R. and Freiberg, H.J. (1994). Freedom to Learn (3rd Ed). Columbus, OH: Merrill/Macmillan.
  • Schein, E. (1988). Process consultation Volume I: Its role in organisation development (2nd ed.). Reading, MA: Addison-Wesley.
  • Singer, D. and Revenson, T. (1978). A Piaget Primer: How a Child Thinks. NY: International Universities Press, Inc.
  • Schein, E. H. (1999). Process consultation revisited: Building the helping relationship. Reading, MA: Addison-Wesley.
  • Skinner, B.F. (1984). The Operational Analysis of Psychological Terms. Behavioural and Brain Science, 7 (4): 547–581.
  • Schizoid personality disorder, International Statistical Classification of Diseases and Related Health Problems- 10 Revision (ICD-10)
  • What is psychodynamics? - WebMD, Stedman’s Medical Dictionary 28th Edition, Copyright© 2006_Lippincott Williams & Wilkins.
  • Schmidt, F. L., & Hunter, J. E. (1998). The validity and utility of selection methods in personnel psychology: Practical and theoretical implications of 85 years of research findings. Psychological Bulletin, 124, 262-274.
  • John W. Santrock : Life-Span Development. Holt Rinehart, New York.
  • Schmidt, F. L., Ones, D. S., & Hunter, J. E. (1992). Personnel selection. Annual Review of Psychology, 43, 627-670.
  • Erikson, Erik H. Childhood and Society. New York: Norton, 1950.
  • Schuckit, M. A., Smith, T. L., Danko, G. P., (2007). A comparison of factors associated with substance-induced versus independent depressions. J Stud Alcohol Drugs, 68, 805–12.
  • Erikson, Erik H. Identity and the Life Cycle. New York: International Universities Press, 1959.
  • Sears, R. R. (1961). Relation of early socialisation experience to aggression in middle childhood. Journal of Abnormal and Social Psychology, 63, 466-493.
  • Cassidy J (1999). “The Nature of a Child’s Ties”. in Cassidy J, Shaver PR. Handbook of Attachment: Theory, Research and Clinical Applications. New York: Guilford Press. pp. 3–20
  • Seligman, L. (1990). Selecting effective treatments: A comprehensive systematic guide to treating adult mental disorders. San Francisco: Jossey-Bass.
  • Hubble, S. D. Miller, & B. L. Duncan (Eds.), The heart and soul of change: What works in therapy (pp. 33–55). Washington, DC: American Psychological Association.
  • Seligman, L. (2001): “Systems, Strategies and Skills of Counseling and Psychotherapy”, N. J. Merrill, Prentice Hall
  • Baumrind, D. (1971). Current Patterns of Parental Authority. Developmental Psychology Monographs, 4(1, pt.2), 101-102.
  • Seligman, M. E. P. (1974). Depression and learned helplessness. In R. J. Friedman & M. M. Katz (Eds.), The psychology of depression: Contemporary theory and research. Washington, DC: V.H. Winston.
  • Hughes, Jan N. & Hall Robert James (1989). Cognitive-behavioural Psychology in the Schools: A Comprehensive Handbook. New York:The Guilford Press.
  • Seligman, M. E. P. (1998). Positive social science. APA Monitor, 29(4), 2-5.
  • Belsky, J. (1984). The determinants of parenting. A process model. Child Development, 55, 83-96
  • http://www.articlesbase.com/human-resources-articles/new-techniques-inhuman-resource-management-1649403.html#ixzz1UPL2iQLK Under Creative Commons License: Attribution No Derivatives
  • Holden, G.W., & Miler, P.C. (1999).Enduring and Different: A Meta analyses of the similarities in parent’s child rearing. Psychological Bulletin, 125, 223-254.
  • Senge, P. 1990. The fifth discipline: The art and practice of the learning organisation. New York, NY: Doubleday Dell.
  • Kakar, S. (1999). Psychoanalytical study of Indian Childhood .New Delhi Oxford Press.
  • Serretti, A. & Mandelli, L. (2008). The genetics of bipolar disorder: genome ‘hot regions,’ genes, new potential candidates and future directions. Mol. Psychiatry, 13,742–771.
  • Konantambigi, R.M. (1996). Beliefs about child, childhood, and upbringing: A crucial component of the developmental niche (ERIC Document Reproduction Service No. ED 407 104).
  • Sethi NK, Robilotti E, Sadan Y (2005). “Neurological Manifestations Of Vitamin B12 Deficiency”. The Internet Journal of Nutrition and Wellness .
  • Maccoby, E.E. (1992). The role of parents in the socialisation of children: An historical overview. Developmental Psychology, 28, 1006-1017.
  • http://www.authorstream.com/Presentation/richadinker-85389-human-resourcedevelopment-strategies-hrd-strategy-design-types-business-finance-pptpowerpoint/
  • Sameroff, A.J.(1995).General systems theories and developmental psychopathology.InD.Ciccheti &D.J. Cohen (Eds.), Developmental psychopathology:Vol 1.Theory and Methods (pp.659-695). New York:Wiley.
  • Shallice, T. (1982). Specific impairments of planning. Philosophical Transactions of the Royal Society of London, 298, 199-209.
  • R.B. Verma (2006). Developmental Psychology and Human Development. Alfa Publications, New Delhi
  • Shapiro, D. (1965). Neurotic styles. New York: Basic Books.
  • Santrok, J.W., Life Span Development, Holt Renehart, New York.
  • Sharma, N. R. (1989). Educational and Vocational Guidance. Agra: Vinod Pustak Mandir.
  • Woodworth, R.S. (1972). (3 rd edition) Woodworth and Schlosberg’s Experimental Psychology. Holt, Rinehart and Winston, NY
  • Shaw, P., Gornick, M., Lerch, J., Addington, A., Seal, J., Greenstein, D., Sharp, W., Evans, A., Giedd, J. N., Castellanos, F. X., & Rapoport, J. L. (2007). Polymorphisms of the dopamine D4 receptor, clinical outcome and cortical structure in attentiondeficit/hyperactivity disorder. Archives of General Psychiatry, 64(8), 921-931.
  • Moshman: Theories of Development, Willey International, New York.
  • Shearsby, J. (2009). Facebook may lead to dual relationships [Letters to the editor]. InPsych, 31(2), 21.
  • Baltes (2003). Theoretical Propositions of Life-Span Developmental Psychology. John Wiley & Sons.
  • Sheldon J. Korchin (1986). Modern Clinical Psychology, CBS Publishers, New Delhi.
  • Rajpal K. (2006). Developmental Psychology: New Trends and Innovations. Publishers: Deep and Deep.
  • Sheslow, D., & Adams, W. (2004). Wide Range Assessment of Memory and Learning, Second Edition. Lutz, FL: Psychological Assessment Resources, Inc.
  • Harry R. Moody (2006): Aging: Concepts and Controversies. Pine Forge Press, An imprint of Sage Publication.
  • Sholevar, G. P. & Schwoeri,L.D. (2003). Textbook of Family and Couples Therapy: Clinical Applications. American Psychiatric Association. Washington, D.C
  • Death Attitudes and older Adults (2000): Theories, Concept and Application. Publisher: Brunner Routledge.
  • Siddiqui, M. H. (2009). Guidance and Counselling, APH Publishing Corporation, New Delhi, p238-242.
  • Hundleby, J. D., Pawlik, K., &Cattell, R. B. (1963). Personality Factors in Objectivt> Test Dnives. San Diego, CA: Knapp.
  • http://www.camden.rutgers.edu/dept-pages/sociology/early.html http://www.stat.ncsu.edu/info/srms/srms.html
  • Freeman, F.S (1955) Theory and Practice of Psychological Testing. USA Sir Issac Pitman & Sons Ltd (1962). Theory and Practice of Psychological testing. London: IBH Publishing Co.
  • http://www.cc.gatech.edu/gvu/user_surveys/survey-1998-10/#methodology http:/ /www.worldbank.org/nipr/data/envperf/”
  • Chapin, F.S. (1974). Experimental Designs in Sociological Research. Harper.
  • Skhiri, D., Annabi, S., Bi, S., & Allani, D. (1982). Enfants d’immigres: Facteurs deliens ou de rupture? Annales Medico-Psychologiques, 140, 597-602.
  • Efron, R.E and Efron, H.U. (1967). Measurement of Attitude towards the retarded and an application with educators, American Journal of Mental Deficiency.72, 100-07
  • http://www.cop-la.net/en/node/524.
  • Festinger, L. and Katz, D. (1953). Research method in behavioural sciences. New York: Holt Rineheart and Winston Inc.
  • Sonnichesen, R.C. 2000.High impact internal evaluation. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage.
  • Lemke, E. and Wiersma, W. (1976). Principles of Psychological Measurement. Chicago: Rand McNally College Publishing Company.
  • Spencer, D. G., & Steers, R. M. (1981). Performance as a moderator of the job satisfaction-turnover relationship. Journal of Applied Psychology, 66, 511-514
  • Raven J.C. and Court, J.H. (1998). Raven’s Progressive Matrices England: Oxford University Press.
  • Spencer, L. Ritchie J, Lewis J et al. et al. Quality in Qualitative Evaluation: a framework for assessing research evidence: a framework for assessing research evidence. Government chief social researcher’s office 2003.
  • Festinger and D Katz (Eds). Research Methods in Behaviour Sciences, New York: Holt Rinehart & Winston, Inc, Indian Edition 1970.
  • Spitzer, R. L., Williams, J. B. W., & Gibbon, M. (1987). Instruction Manual fbr the Structural Clinical Interview for DSM-Jll-R. New York: State Psychiatric Institute.
  • Best, J.W & Kahn, J.P (1975). Research in Education, New Delhi: Prentice-Hall of India .
  • Spradly, JP (1979) The Ethnographic Interview. New York, NY, USA.: Holt, Rinehart and Winston.
  • Festinger, L and Katz, D (1953). Research Methods in the Behavioural Sciences. New York: Holt Rinehart and Winston.
  • Squire, L.R. & Knowlton, B.J. (2000). The medial temporal lobe, the hippocampus, and the memory systems of the brain. In Gazzaniga, M.S. (Ed.), The New Cognitive Neurosciences (2nd ed.,p p. 765-779). Cambridge, MA: The MIT Press.
  • Matheson et.al.(1970) Experimental Psychology (Holt),
  • Squire, L.R. (1992). Memory and the hippocampus: a synthesis from findings with rats, monkeys and humans. Psychological Review, 99, 195-231.
  • Campbell D.T & Stanley, J.C (1963). Experimental and Quasi-Experimental Designs for Research. New York: Russell Sage Foundation.
  • http://www.corteidh.or.cr/index.cfm?CFID=25331&CFTOKEN=36922058. Retrieved 2008-01-03.
  • Solomon, B K (1949). An Extension of Control Group Design. Psychological Bulletin, 46,137-50 .
  • Staddon, J.E.R. & Cerutti, D. T. (2003). Operant conditioning, Annual Review of Psychology, 54, 115-144.
  • Kerlinger: Research Methods in Behaviour Research, New Age International, New Delhi.
  • Sterling, J. (2002). Introducing Neuropsychology. New York: Taylor & Francis Inc.
  • Shadish, William, R. (2010). Experimental and Quasi-Experimental Designs for Field Research. Routledge, NY.
  • Sternberg, R J. (1981b). Toward a unified componential theory of human intelligence, I. Fluid abilities. In M. Friedman, J. Das, & N. O'Connor (Eds.), Intelligence and learning. New York: Plenum.
  • Broota, K.D.(2003). Experimental Designs in Behvaioural Research, New Age International, New Delhi.
  • Sternberg, R. J. (1977). Intelligence, information processing, and analogical reasoning: The componential analysis of human abilities. Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum.
  • Gay, L. R., and Airasian, P. (2003). Educational Research: Competencies for Analysis and Applications. Merrill Prentice Hall: Columbus, OH.
  • Strakowski, S. M., DelBello, M. P, Sax, K.W. (1999). Brain magnetic resonance imaging of structural abnormalities in bipolar disorder. Archives of General Psychiatry, 56, 254–260.
  • Nelson, M & Martella, M (1999). Description of single subject design. www.press.net/updatenov05/singlesubject.html
  • Strauss, A. (1987). Qualitative analysis for social scientists. Cambridge, England: Cambridge University Press.
  • Dwivedi, R.S. (1997). Research Methods in Behavioural Sciences. Macmillan India Limited, New Delhi.
  • Sue Jennings (1997): Drama therapy: Theory and Practice 3, Volume 3 Publisher: Routledge.
  • Igmade (Stephan Trüby et al., eds.), 5 Codes: Architecture, Paranoia and Risk in Times of Terror, Birkhäuser 2006.
  • Sumukadas, N., and R. Sawhney. “Workforce Agility through Employee Involvement.” IIE Transactions 36, no. 10 (2004): 1011–1021.
  • Bassey, M. (1999). Case Study Research in Educational Settings. Buckingham: Open University.
  • Sundberg, N.D., Tyler, L.E. (1962). Clinical Psychology. New York: AppletonCentury-Crofts.
  • Institute for Personality and Ability Testing Inc. (!PAT).
  • Swiss Commission for Research Partnerships with Developing Countries (KFPE). 1998. Guidelines for research in partnership with developing countries. (www.kfpe.ch/ key_activities/publications/guidelines/guidelines_e.html).
  • Iowa Department of Education. (2008). Iowa School Counselling - A Program Framework: One Vision} One Voice. Des Moines.
  • swww.creativityandcognition.com/content/view/129/131/
  • Howell, D. C. (2002). Statistical Method for Psychology. Pacific Grove, CA.
  • T.G Cummings and C.G .Worley. (1993). Organisational Development and Change, St. Paul, MN: West Publishing Co.
  • Drew, B., & Waters, J.(1985).Video games :utilization of a novel strategy to improve perceptual –motor skills in non-institutionalized elderly . Proceeding and Abstract of the Eastern Psychological Association 5,56.
  • Taschereau, S. 1998. Evaluating the impact of training and institutional development programs: A collaborative approach. Washington DC: The International Bank for Reconstruction and Development - The World Bank.
  • Pagano, R. (2004). Understanding Statistics in the Behavioural Sciences (7th edition). Pacific grove, ca: brooks/cole publishing co.
  • http://www.eamonfulcher.com/discourse_analysis.html
  • Hopkins, K.D.,& Glass, G.V.(1978). Basic Statistics for the Behavioral Science. Englewood Cliffs, N.J.Prentice Hall.
  • Terman, L.M. (1916). The Measurement of Intelligence. Boston, MA: Houghton-Mifflin.
  • Iveson, C. Solution-focused brief therapy (2002). Advances in Psychiatric Treatment, 8:149-156. URL: http: //apt.rcpsych.org/cgi/reprint/8/2/149
  • The ICD-10 Classification of Mental and Behavioural Disorders. Clinical descriptions and diagnostic guidelines. World Health Organisation: Geneva, 1992.
  • Levin, J. & Fox, J.A. (2006) Elementary Statistics in Social Research (10th ed.) India, Pearson Education.
  • The Social And Historical Context of Counseling Psychology. recruited on 11/1/ 2011 from www.uk.sagepub.com/upm...orlans.
  • Robert B. Ewen (1998). An Introduction to Theories of Personality (5 th edition) Lawrence Erlbaum Associates, Publishers , New Jersey.
  • Thomas, J. Harden A, Oakley Am Oliver S, Sutcliffe K, Rees R, Brunton G, Kavanagh J. Integrating qualitative research with trials in systematic reviews. BMJ 2004; 328: 1010-1012.
  • Bradberry, T. (2007). “The Personality Code”. New York, New York: Putnam.
  • Thurstone, L L., &Thurstone, T. G. (1943). The Chicago Tests of Primary Mental Abilities. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.
  • Homans, G. C. Social Behaviour: Its Elementary Forms. New York: Harcourt, Brace and World, 1961.
  • Tien AY, Anthony JC (August 1990). “Epidemiological analysis of alcohol and drug use as risk factors for psychotic experiences”. J. Nerv. Ment. Dis. 178 (8): 473–80
  • Jacobson, N.S. (1992). Behavioural couple therapy: a new beginning. Behaviour Therapy, 23, 493-506.
  • Tohen, M., Zarate, C. A. Jr., Hennen, J., Khalsa, H. M., Strakowski, S. M., GebreMedhin, P., Salvatore, P., & Baldessarini, R. J. (2003). The McLean-Harvard firstepisode mania study: Prediction of recovery and first recurrence. American Journal of Psychiatry. 160, 2099-20107.
  • Sarason, Irwin, G. (1967). Personality: An Objective Approach. John Wiley and Sons, New York.
  • Torgersen S (March 2000). “Genetics of patients with borderline personality disorder”. Psychiatr Clin North Am 23 (1): 1–9.
  • Phares, E. J., & Chaplin, W. F. (1997). Introduction to Personality (4th ed.). New York: Longman
  • Torgersen S, Lygren S, Oien PA, et al. (2000). “A twin study of personality disorders”. Compr Psychiatry 41 (6): 416–25.
  • Maslow, Abraham H.(1968). Toward a Psychology of Being, New York: D. Van Nostrand Company .
  • Torrance, E. P. (1962). Guiding creative talent. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice- Hall.
  • Janson, P., & Martin, J. K. (1982). Job satisfaction and age: A test of two views. Social Forces, 60(4), 1089-1102.
  • Torrance, E. P. (1974). Torrance Tests of Creative Thinking-Directions manual and scoring guide. Verbal test booklet A. Bensenville, IL: Scholastic Testing Service.
  • Friedman, M. (1996). Type A Behaviour: Its Diagnosis and Treatment. New York, Plenum Press (Kluwer Academic Press)
  • Torrance, E. P., & Ball, 0. E. (1984). Torrance Tests of Creative Thinking:Streamlined administration and scoring manual (Rev. ed.). Hensonville, IL: Scholastic Testing Service.
  • Williams, R. B. (2001). Hostility: Effects on health and the potential for successful behavioural approaches to prevention and treatment. In A. Baum, T. A. Revenson & J. E. Singer (Eds.) Handbook of Health Psychology. Mahwah, NJ: Erlbaum.
  • Toth, J.P. (2000). Nonconscious forms of human memory. In Tulving, E. &Craik, F.I.M. (Eds.), The Oxford Handbook of Memory (pp. 245-261). New York: Oxford University Press.
  • Jauch DA, Carpenter WT Jr. Reactive psychosis. II. Does DSM-III-R define a third psychosis?. J Nerv Ment Dis. Feb 1988;176(2):82-6. 
  • Tukat, I. D. & Maisto, S. A. (1985). Personality disorders: Applications of the experimental method to the formulation and modification of personality disorders. In D. H. Barlow (Ed.), Clinical handbook of psychological disorders. New York: Guilford Press.
  • John McLeod (2003). An Ethical Framework for Research Practice. Doing Counselling Research. Sage Publication, New Delhi, 167-177.
  • Tulving, E. &Schacter, D.L. (1992). Priming and memory systems. In Smith, B. & Adelman, G. (Eds.), Neuroscience Year. Supplement 2 to the Encyclopedia of Neuroscience (pp. 130-133). Boston: Birkhauser.
  • John McLeod (2003). Doing Counselling Research. Sage Publication, New Delhi, 1-9.
  • Tulving, E. (1984). Multiple learning and memory systems. In Lagerspetz, K.M.J. &Niemi, P. (Eds.), Psychology in the 1990's (pp. 163-184). Amsterdam: North-Holland.
  • John McLeod (2003). Systematic Inquiry in to Individual Cases. Doing Counselling Research. Sage Publication, New Delhi, 99-116
  • Tulving, E. (1985a). How many memory systems are there? American Psychologist, 40, 385-398.
  • Adorno and Colleagues quoted in Crisp, R.J, Rhianomon N Turner (2007) Essential Social Psychology, Sage Publications, New Delhi.
  • Tulving, E. (1985b). Memory and consciousness. Canadian Psychology, 26, 1-26.
  • Ajzen 1996 quoted in Crisp, R.J, Rhianomon N Turner (2007) Essential Social Psychology, Sage Publications, New Delhi.
  • Tulving, E. (2000). Introduction (Section VI: Memory). In Gazzaniga, M.S. (Ed.), The New Cognitive Neurosciences (2nd ed., pp. 727-732). Cambridge, MA: The MIT Press.
  • Bond and Atoum 2000 quoted in Baron, R.A Donn Byrne (2006) Social Psychology (10 th edition.) Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi.
  • Tumer, S. M., DeMers, S. T., Fox, H. R., & Reed, G. M. (2001). APA's guidelines for test user qualifications. American PsychOlogist, 56(12), 10991113.
  • Caroll 1996 quoted in Baron, R.A Donn Byrne (2006) Social Psychology (10 th edition.) Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi.
  • Turner, J. C., & Onorato, R.S. (1999). Social identity, personality, and the selfconcept: A self-categorisation perspective. In T. R. Tyler, R. M. Kramer, & O.P. John (Eds.), The psychology of the social self. NJ: Erlbaum.
  • Coffman 1967 quoted in Crisp, R.J, Rhianomon N Turner (2007) Essential Social Psychology, Sage Publications, New Delhi.
  • Turner, S. M., DeMers, S. T., Fox, H. R., & Reed, G. M. (2001). APA's guidelines for test user qualifications: An executive summary. American Psychologist, 56(12), 1099-1113.
  • Cross and John 2003 quoted in Taylor, E.S, Letitia Anne Peplau, David O.Sears (2006) Social Psychology (12 th edition), Pearson Education, India.
  • UNDP Evaluation Office. 2002. Partnership for local governance. United Nations Development Program Evaluation Office Essentials No. 7. August 2002.
  • Ekman and Friesen 1975 quoted in Baron, R.A Donn Byrne (2006) Social Psychology (10 th edition) Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi.
  • UNDP. 1998. Capacity assessment and development in systems and strategic management context. New York, NY: United Nations Development Program.
  • Gray 2009 quoted in Taylor, E.S, Letitia Anne Peplau, David O.Sears (2006), Social Psychology (12 th edition), Pearson Education, India.
  • UNDP. 2000. Capacity for sustainable development. www.undp.org/wssd/docs/ BDP Policy Journal Vol 1.pdf.
  • Harding, Kunter, Proshanky & Chein 1954, quoted in Crisp, R.J, Rhianomon N Turner (2007) Essential Social Psychology, Sage Publications, New Delhi.
  • Hinshaw, S.P. (2002) The Years of Silence are Past: My Father’s Life with Bipolar Disorder. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
  • John Bargh & Assou 1996 quoted in Taylor, E.S, Letitia Anne Peplau, David O.Sears (2006), Social Psychology (12 th edition), Pearson Education, India.
  • Uphoff, N. 1994.Puzzles of productivity in public organisations. Oakland, CA: Institute of Contemporary Studies Press.
  • Jones and Pillman 1982 quoted in Crisp, R.J, Rhianomon N Turner (2007) Essential Social Psychology, Sage Publications, New Delhi.
  • Uphoff, N. and C.M. Wijayaratna. 2000. Demonstrated Benefits from Social Capital: The Productivity of Farmer Organisations in Gal Oya, Sri Lanka. World Development. 28 (11): 1875–1890.
  • Kelley 1967quoted in Crisp, R.J, Rhianomon N Turner (2007) Essential Social Psychology, Sage Publications, New Delhi.
  • Valdimarsdottir U, Hultman CM, Harlow B, Cnattingius S, Sparen P. Psychotic illness in first-time mothers with no previous psychiatric hospitalisations: a population-based study. PLoS Med. Feb 10 2009;6(2):e13.
  • Mead 1934 quoted in Crisp, R.J, Rhianomon N Turner (2007) Essential Social Psychology, Sage Publications, New Delhi.
  • Vanderburg, D. “The Story of Semco: The Company that Humanized Work.” Bulletin of Science, Technology & Society 24, no. 5 (2004): 430–34.
  • Neuerg 1989 quoted in Taylor, E.S, Letitia Anne Peplau, David O.Sears (2006), Social Psychology (12 th edition.), Pearson Education, India.
  • Vernon, P. E. (1965). Ability factors and environmental influences. American Psychologist, 20, 723-733.
  • Robert Rosenthal and Leonore Jacobson 1968 quoted in Crisp, R.J, Rhianomon N Turner (2007) Essential Social Psychology, Sage Publications, New Delhi.
  • W.K. Kellogg Foundation. 2001. Logic model development guide. Battle Creek, MI:
  • Ruseel 1994 quoted in Baron, R.A Donn Byrne (2006) Social Psychology (10 th edition.) Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi.
  • Wade, T. C., & Baker, T. B. (1977). Opinions and use of psychological tests. American Psychologist, 32, 874-882.
  • Scheier and Carver 1977 quoted in Crisp, R.J, Rhianomon N Turner (2007) Essential Social Psychology, Sage Publications, New Delhi.
  • Wagner, R., Torgesen, J., & Rashotte, C. (1999). Comprehensive Test of Phonological Processes. Austin, TX: Pro-Ed, Inc.
  • Sherif & Sherif 1953, quoted in Crisp, R.J, Rhianomon N Turner (2007) Essential Social Psychology, Sage Publications, New Delhi.
  • Wakefield, Jerome C., Schmitz, Mark F., First, Michael B., & Horwitz, Allan V. (2007). Extending the Bereavement Exclusion for Major Depression to Other Losses: Evidence from the National Comorbidity Survey. Arch Gen Psychiatry, 64, 433440.
  • Solomon Asch 1956 quoted in Crisp, R.J, Rhianomon N Turner (2007) Essential Social Psychology, Sage Publications, New Delhi.
  • Walker, R (ed) (1985) Applied Qualitative Research. Hants, UK: Gower Publishing Company Ltd.
  • Tay Wegner 1994 quoted in Taylor, E.S, Letitia Anne Peplau, David O.Sears (2006), Social Psychology (12 th edition), Pearson Education, India.
  • Wallach, M. A., &Kogan, N. (1965). Modes of thinking in young children: A study of the creativity- intelligence distinction. New York: Holt, Rinehart and Winston.
  • Franzoi, S.L. (2008). Social Psychology, 5 th Ed. New York: McGraw-Hill.
  • Wang, P.L. (1983). Modified Vygotsky Concept Formation Test: Instruction manual. Wood Dale, IL: Stoelting.
  • Vincent van Veen, Marie K Krug, Jonathan W Schooler & Cameron S Carter (2009). Neural activity predicts attitude change in cognitive dissonance. Nature Neuroscience 12, 1469 - 1474 (2009) . Published online: 16 September 2009 | doi:10.1038/nn.2413
  • Watson, J.B. & Rayner, R. (1920). Conditioned emotional reactions. Journal of Experimental Psychology, 3, 1, 1–14.
  • Ajzen, I. & Fishbein, M. (1977), Attitude-behavior relations: A theoretical analysis and review of empirical research. Psychological Bulletin, 84, 888-918.
  • Watts, R. E., & Carlson, J. (Eds.). (1999). Interventions and Strategies in Counseling and Psychotherapy. Philadelphia, PA: Accelerated Development/Taylor & Francis Group.
  • Ajzen, I., & Fishbein, M. (1974). Factors influencing intentions and the intention- behavior relation. Human Relations, 27, 1-15.
  • Watts, R.E. (1999). The vision of Adler: An introduction. In R. E. Watts, & J. Carlson (Eds.), Interventions and Strategies in Counseling and Psychotherapy (pp. 1-13). Philadelphia, PA: Accelerated Development/Taylor & Francis Group.
  • Allport, G.W. (1935). Attitudes. In C. Murchison (Ed.), Handbook of Social Psychology,
  • Wechsler, D. (1958). The Measurement and Appraisal of Adult Intelligence. Baltimore, lviD: Williams & Wilkens.
  • Arvey, R. D., Bouchard, T., Segal, N. L., & Abraham, L. M. (1989). Job satisfaction: Environmental and genetic components. Journal of Applied Psychology, 74, 187-192.
  • Wechsler, D. (1974). Manual for the Wechsler Intelligence Scale for Children Revised (WISC-R). San Antonio, TX: The Psychological Corporation.
  • Breckler, S.J. (1984). Empirical validation of affect, behaviour, and cognition as distinct components of attitude. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 52, 384-389.
  • Wechsler, D. (1981). Wechsler Adult Intelligence Scale-Revised. San Antonio, TX: Psychological Corporation.
  • Conner, M., Povey, R., Sparks, P., James, R., Shepherd, R. (2003). Moderating the role of attitude ambivalence within the theory of planned behaviour. British Journal of Social Psychology, 42, 75-94.
  • Wechsler, D. (1997). Wechsler Adult Intelligence Scale (3rd ed.). San Antonio, TX: Psychological Corporation.
  • Duclos, S.E., Laird, J.D., Schneider, E., Sexter, M., Stern, L., & Van Lighten, O. (1989). Emotion-specific effects of facial expressions and postures on emotional experience. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 57, 100-108.
  • Wechsler, D. (1999). Wechsler Abbreviated Scale of Intelligence. San Antonio, TX: Psychological Corporation.
  • Fazio, R. H. (1995). Attitudes as object-evaluation associations: Determinants, consequences, and correlates of attitude accessibility. In R. E. Petty J. A. Krosnick (Eds.), Attitude strength: Antecedents and consequences (pp. 247-282). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum.
  • Wechsler, D. (2002). Wechsler Preschool and Primmy Scales of Intelligence, 3rd Edition (WPPSI-III). San Antonio, TX: Psychological Corporation.
  • Fazio, R.H. & Zanna, M.P. (1978). Attitudinal qualities relating to the strength of the attitude-behavior relationship. Journal of Experimental Psychology, 14(4), 398-408.
  • Wechsler, D. (2003). Wechsler Intelligence Scale for Children, Fourth Edition (WISC-IV). San Antonio, TX: Psychological Corporation.
  • Fazio, R.H., Zanna, M.P. & Cooper, J. (1977). Dissonance and self-perception: An integrative view of each theory’s proper domain of application. Journal of Experimental Social Psychology, 13, 464-479.
  • Wechsler, D., & Stone, C. P. (1974). Wechsler Memory Scale II Manual. New York: Psychological Corporation.
  • Festinger, L. (1957). A theory of cognitive dissonance. Stanford, CA: Stanford University Press.
  • Amir, T. (1984). The Asch Conformity Effect: A study in Kuwait. Social Behaviour and Personality, 12(2), 187 – 190.
  • Goffman, E. (1959). The Presentation of Self in Everyday Life. Garden City, NY: Doubleday Anchor.
  • Higgins, S. T., Budney, A. J., Bickel, W. K., Hughes, J. R., Foerg, F., & Badger, G. (1993). Achieving cocaine substance with a behavioural approach. American Journal of Psychiatry, 150, 763-769.
  • Harris, P. R., Mayle, K., Mabbott, L., & Napper, L. (2007). Self-affirmation reduces smokers’ defensiveness to graphic on-pack cigarette warning labels. Health Psychology, 26(4), 437-446.
  • Weisbord, Marvin. (1987). Productive Workplace: Organising and managing for dignity, meaning and community. Jossey-Bass Publishers, San Francisco.
  • Holland, R.W., Meertens, R.M., & Van Vugt, M. (2002). Dissonance on the road: Self esteem as a moderator of internal and external self-justification strategies. Personality and Social Psychology Bulletin, 28, 1712-1724.
  • Weisktantz, L. (1990). Problems of learning and memory: one or multiple. memory systems? Philosophical Transactions of the Royal Society of London (B), 329, 99-108.
  • Katz, D. & Stotland, E. (1959). A preliminary statement to a theory of attitude structure and change. In S. Koch (Ed.). Psychology: A study of a science. New York: McGraw Hill.
  • Weismann, M. M. (1993). “The epidemiology of personality disorders. A 1990 update.”. Journal of Personality Disorders (Spring issue, Suppl.): 44–62.
  • Keller, L.M., Bouchard, T.J., Jr., Arvey, R.D., Segal, N.L., & Dawis, R.V. (1992). Work values: Genetic and environmental influences. Journal of Applied Psychology, 77, 79-88.
  • Weiss, C.H. 1999. The interface between evaluation and public policy.Evaluation. 5(4): 468–486.
  • Laird, J.D. (1974). Self-attribution of emotion: The effects of expressive behavior on the quality of emotional experience. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 29(4), 475-486.
  • Weiss, W.H. “Improving Employee Performance: Major Supervisory Responsibility.” Supervision, October 1998, 6–8.
  • Pettigrew, T.F. & Tropp, L.R. (2006). A meta-analytic test of intergroup contact theory. Journal of Personality & Social Psychology, 90, 751-783.
  • Welfel, E. R (1998). Ethics in Counseling and Psychotherapy. Pacific Grove, CA: Brooks/Cole Publishing.
  • Rokeach, M. (1973). The nature of human values. New York: Free Press.
  • Whalley, L. J., Perini, T., Shering, A., & Bennie, J. ( 1991). Melatonin response to bright light in recovered, drug-free, bipolar patients. Psychiatry Res. 38, 13–9.
  • Shavitt, S. (1989). Operationalizing functional theories of attitude. In A. R. Pratkanis, S. J. Breckler, & A. G. Greenwald (Eds.), Attitude structure and function (pp. 311-337). Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum.
  • White M, Epston D.( 1990.) Narrative Means to Therapeutic Ends. New York: WW Norton and Company.
  • Sherman, D. K., & Cohen, G. L. (2006). The psychology of self-defense: Self- affirmation theory. In M. P. Zanna (Ed.), Advances in Experimental Social Psychology (Vol. 38, pp. 183-242). San Diego, CA: Academic Press.
  • Widiger, T. A. & Rogers, J. S. (1989). Prevalence and comor bidity of personality disorders. Psychiatry Annual, 19, 132.
  • Staats, A.W., & Staats, C.K. (1958). Attitudes established by classical conditioning. Journal of Abnormal and Social Psychology, 57, 37-40.
  • Widiger, T. A. & Weissman, M. M. (1991). Epidemiology of borderline personality disorder. Hospital and Community Psychology, 42, 1015-1021.
  • Stone, J., Weigand, A.W., Cooper, J., & Aronson, E. (1997). When exemplification fails: Hypocrisy and the motive for self-integrity. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 72, 54-65.
  • Williams, D.G. and Johnson, N.A. (1996). Essentials in Qualitative Research: A Notebook for the Field. Hamilton, Canada: Mc Master University.
  • Thorndike, E.L. (1911). Animal intelligence: Experimental studies. New York: Macmillan.
  • Williams, M.A. & Boll, T.J. (2000). ]$.eport writing in clinical neuropsychology. In Groth-Mamat, G. (Ed.), Neuropsychological Assessment in Clinical Practice: A Guide to Test Interpretation and Integration. New York: John Wiley & Sons.
  • Wicker, A.W. (1969). Attitude versus actins: The relationship of verbal and overt behavioural responses to attitude objects. Journal of Social Issues, 25(4), 41-78.
  • Willingham, D.B. (1997). Systems of memory in the human brain. Neuron, 18, 5-8.
  • Zajonc, R.B. (1968). Attitudinal effects of mere exposure. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology Monograph Supplement, 9(2 Part 2), 1-27.
  • Willms, DG and Johnson NA (1996) Essentials in Qualitative Research: A Notebook for the Field. Hamilton, Canada: Mc Master University.
  • Hogg, M.A. & Vaughan, G.M. (2002). Social Psychology (3 rd ed. ) London: Prentice Hall.
  • Wilson, B.A., Alderman, N., Burgess, P.W., Emslie, H., & Evans, J.J. (1996). Be.havioural assessment of dysexecutive syndrome. Bury St. Edmunds, England (1996).
  • Joint Committee on Standards for Educational Evaluation. 1994. The program evaluation standards. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage.
  • Wodak, R. (1989 Language Power and Ideology: Studies in Political Discourse (London: Benjamins Publishing Company, ).
  • Jorgensen P, Bennedsen B, Christensen J, Hyllested A. Acute and transient psychotic disorder: comorbidity with personality disorder. Acta Psychiatr Scand. Dec 1996;94(6):460-4. 
  • Wolraich, M., Milich, R., Stumbo, P., & Schultz, F. (1985). The effects of sucrose ingestion on the behavior of hyperactive boys. Pediatrics, 106, 657-682.
  • Cialdini, R. B., Reno, R. R. and Kallgren, C. A. (1990). A focus theory of normative conduct: Recycling the concept of norms to reduce littering in public places. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 58, 1015 - 1026.
  • Woodcock, R. W., McGrew, K. S., & Mather, N. (2005). Woodcock-Johnson Tests of Cognitive Abilities, Third Edition/Nonnative Update. Itasca, IL: Riverside Publishing.
  • Joy, L. 1999. Capacity development: An analysis and synthesis of its current conceptualisation and implications for practice. New York, NY: United Nations Development Program and United Nations Children’s Fund.
  • Woodcock, R.W & Johnson, M.B. (1977). Woodcock-Johnson Psycho. Educational Battery. Allen, TX: DLM!reaching Resources.
  • Fehr, E. and Fischbacher, U. (2004). Social norms and human cooperation. TRENDS in Cognitive Sciences, 8(4), 185 – 190.
  • Woodcock, R.W., McGrew, K.S. & Mather, N. (2000). Woodcock-Johnson Psycho-Educational Battery- Third Edition (WJ III). Chicago, IL: Riverside.
  • Hindustan Times (March 30, 2010). Five ‘honour killers’ get death. Retrieved from http://hindustantimes.com/StoryPage/Print/525002.aspx, on October 25, 2010
  • www.apihealthcare.com
  • Legal Era (2010). Anti-Khap bill: Death penalty to dis-honour killing. Retrieved from http://legalera.in/newsdetails.asp?id=1516/, on October 25, 2010.
  • www.betterworldcampaign.org
  • Paluck, E. L. (2009). What’s in a Norm? Sources and Processes of Norm Change. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 96(3), 594 – 600.
  • www.censere.com
  • The Hindu (February 20, 2010). Child marriage rampant in India, finds study . Retrieved from http://beta.thehindu.com/news/national/article110333.ece?css= print, on October 25, 2010.
  • www.cochrane-handbook.org.
  • Zaman, A. An appraisal to the marriage system of the Karbis of Assam. Student Tribes Tribals, 6(2), 93 – 97.
  • www.Copyright.in/CopyrightOffice
  • Ullmann-Margalit, Edna. 1977. The Emergence of Norms. Oxford: Oxford University Press.
  • www.csa.com/discoveryguides/linglaw/gloss.php
  • Fehr, E. and Gächter, S. (2000). Fairness and retaliation: The economics of reciprocity. Journal of economic perspectives, 14(3), 159 – 181.
  • www.explorehr.org
  • Herfeld, C. (2008). Role of Normativity for the Explanation of Norm-Conformity. Retrieved from http://www.illc.uva.nl/Publications/ResearchReports/X-2009- 02.text.pdf on Nov. 01, 2010.
  • www.gulf-ip.com
  • Leone, T. (2010). Does conformity make us more liked? Perceptions of conformist and non-conformist behaviour. Retrieved from https://tspace.library.utoronto.ca/ bitstream/1807/24809/1/Leone_Tullia_201006_PhD_thesis.pdf, on Oct. 14, 2010
  • www.Headhonchos.com
  • Nugent, M. (2010). Pam’s silver lining. Retrieved from http:// www.inmycommunity.com.au/news-and-views/local-sport/Pams-silver-lining/ 7573249/ on Oct. 31, 2010.
  • www.help-finance.com/download/SampleBusinessPlan.pdf
  • Piaget, J. (1932). The moral judgment of the child. London: Kegan Paul, Trench, Trubner.
  • www.mcmaster.ca/conted
  • Sherif, M. and Sherif, C. W. (1956). An Outline of Social Psychology (2 nd ed.). New York: Harper and Raw.
  • www.memsic.com
  • Adams, H..F. (1912). Autokinetic sensations. Psychlogical Monographs, 14, 1 – 45.
  • www.mitsde.com
  • Bamberger, P. and Biron, M. (2007). Group norms and excessive absenteeism: The role of peer referent others. Organisational Behaviour and Human Decision Processes, 103, 179 – 196.
  • www.myownbusiness.org/s2/
  • Donsbach, W. (2004). Psychology of news decisions. Journalism, 5(2), 131 – 157
  • www.rambus.com
  • Goldstein, N. J., Griskevicius, V. and Cialdini, R. B. (2007). Invoking social norms: A social psychology perspective on improving hotels’ linen-reuse programs. Cornell Hospitality Quarterly, 48(2), 145 – 150.
  • www.rapidsoutheast.ie
  • Heine, S. J., Lehman, D. R., Peng, K., and Greenholtz, J. (2002). What’s wrong with cross-cultural comparisons of subjective Likert scales?: The reference-group effect. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 82(6), 903 – 918.
  • www.refunite.org
  • Jeong, H. and Chi, M. T. H. (2007). Knowledge convergence and collaborative learning. Instructional Science, 35, 287 – 315.
  • www.traintracksoftware.com
  • Judge, T. A., Locke, E. A., Durham, C. C., & Kluger, A. N. (1998). Dispositional effects on job and life satisfaction: The role of core evaluations. Journal of Applied Psychology, 83, 17–34.
  • www.VeracityLegal.com
  • Lewis, M. A. and Neighbors, C. (2004). Gender specific misperceptions of college student drinking norms. Psychology of Addictive Behaviors, 18, 334 – 339.
  • www.wildy.com
  • Neighbors, C., Dillard, A. J., Lewis, M. A., Bergstrom, R. L., and Neil, T. A. (2006). Normative misperceptions and temporal precedence of perceived norms and drinking. Journal of Studies on Alcohol, 67(2), 290 – 299.
  • http://www.fhwa.dot.gov/policy/2002cpr/pdf/ch21.pdf
  • Sherif, M. (1935). An experimental study of stereotypes. Journal of Abnormal and Social Psychology, 29, 371 – 375.
  • Zanarini MC, Gunderson JG, Marino MF, Schwartz EO, Frankenburg FR ( 1989). “Childhood experiences of borderline patients”. Comprehensive Psychiatry 30 (1): 18–25.
  • Sherif, M. and Sherif, C. W. (1969). Social Psychology. New York: Harper and Row.
  • http://www.iimb.ernet.in/~rishi/Linking%20Corporate%20Strategy%20 and%20HR%20Strategy.pdf
  • Smith, J. R., Hogg, M. A., Martin, R., and Terry, D. J. (2007). Uncertainty and the influence of group norms in the attitude-behaviour relationship. British Journal of Social Psychology, 46, 769 – 792.
  • http://www.ischool.utexas.edu/~palmquis/courses/content.html
  • Turner, R. and Killian, L. (1987). Collective Behaviour (3 rd edition). Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice Hall.
  • http://www.joannabriggs.edu.au/cqrmg/tools_3.html.
  • Judge, T. A., Thoresen, C. J., Bono, J. E., & Patton, G. K. (2001). The job satisfaction-job performance relationship: A qualitative and quantitative review. Psychological Bulletin, 127, 376-407.
  • http://www.joannabriggs.edu.au/pdf/sumari_user_guide.pdf
  • Wechsler, D., &Naglieri, J. A. (2006). Wechsler Nonverbal Scales of Intelligence (WNV). San Antonio, TX: Psychological Corporation.
  • Weigl, E. (1927). Zurpsychologiesogenannterabstraktionsprozess. Zeitschriftfu .. rpsychologie, I03, 1-45.
  • Bryman, A. (2008). Social Research Methods. New York: Oxford University Press.
  • Zimbardo, P.G. & Weber, A.L. (1994). Psychology: Harper Collins
  • Everstine, L., Everstine, D. S., Heymann, G. M., True, R. H., Frey, D. H., Johnson, H. G, et al. (1980). Privacy and confidentiality in psychotherapy. American Psychologist, 35, 828-840.
  • Ossorio, P. G. and K. E. Davis. “The self, intentionality, and reactions to evaluations of the self,” in C. Gordon and K. J. Gergen (Eds.), Self in Society. New York: Wiley, 1966. Psych., 1959, 59, 77-82.
  • Baird, L. and J. Henderson. 2001. The knowledge engine. San Francisco, CA: Berrett-Koehler.
  • Outhwaite, W. (ed.) (2006) Blackwell Dictionary of Modern Social Thought. Blackwell Publishing
  • Counseling courses in India. recruited on 9th January 2011 from www.indiaedu.com/ career-courses/
  • Mowday, R., Steers, R., & Porter, L. (1979). The measurement of organisational commitment. Journal of Vocational Behaviour, 14, 224–227.
  • Gorham, D.R. (1956). A Proverbs Test for clinical and experimental use. Psychological Reports, 2, 1-12.
  • P.J. Whitehouse and G.C.Gilmore (eds) (1989). Memory, Ageing and Dementia. New York, Springer
  • American Educational Research Association. (1999). Standards for Educational and Psychological Testing. Washington, DC: Author.
  • Painter, J., & Akroyd, D. (1998). Predictors of organisational commitment among occupational therapists. Occupational Therapy in Health Care, 11(2), 1-15.
  • Birchwood, M; P. Todd, C. Jackson (1998). “Early Intervention in Psychosis: The Critical Period Hypothesis”. British Journal of Psychiatry 172 (33): 53–59.
  • Palmer, Stephan. (2000). Introduction to Counseling and Psychotherapy. New Delhi: Sage Publications.
  • Cerimele JM, Stern AP, Jutras-Aswad D (March 2010). “Psychosis following excessive ingestion of energy drinks in a patient with schizophrenia”. The American Journal of Psychiatry 167 (3): 353.
  • McKitrick, D. (1981-62). Counseling dying patients. Omega, 12(2), 165-167.
  • Nunnally, J. C. Jr. (1959).Tests and Measurements: Assessment and Prediction. New York:Mcgraw -Hill Book Co.
  • Park, J.H. & Schaller, M. (2005). Does attitude similarity serve as a heuristic cue for kinship? Evidence of an implicit cognitive association. Evolution and Human Behaviour, , 26 (2), 158-170.
  • Gabbard, G.O. Beck, J.S. Holmes. (2005). Psychodynamic Couple Therapy. Oxford University Press, New York.
  • Patri, V R. (2001). Counselling Psychology. Authorspress New Delhi.
  • Yalom, I. D., & Lesczc, M. (2005). The theory and practice of group psychotherapy. New York, NY: Basic Books
  • Pattanavak, D.P. (Ed.) (1990). Multilingualism in India. Clevedon: Multilingual Matters.
  • Ahles , Scott , R.(2004) Our Inner World: A Guide To Psychodynamics and Psychotherapy. John Hopkins University Press, London.
  • Pavlenko, A., Blackledge, A., Piller, I., & Teutsch-Dwyer, M. (Eds.)(2001). Multilingualism, second language learning, and gender. NY: Walter de Gruyter
  • Apt, C. & Farley Hurlbert, D. (1994). The sexual attitude, behaviour, and relationships of women with histrionic personality disorder. Journal of Sexual and Marital Therapy, 20, 125-133.
  • Pavlov, I. P. (1927). Conditioned reflexes (G. V. Anrep, Trans.). London: Oxford University Press.
  • Bennis, W. (1989).On becoming a leader. Reading, MA: Addison-Wesley.
  • Penner, L. A., Dovidio, J. F., Piliavin, J. A., & Schroeder, D. A. (2005). Prosocial behaviour: multilevel perspectives. Annual Reviews of Psychology, 56, 365–392.
  • Bourne. L.E. Jr. (1966). Human conceptual behavior. Boston: Allyn& Bacon.
  • Perelman, Michael. Steal This Idea: Intellectual Property and The Corporate Confiscation of Creativity. Palgrave Macmillan, 2004.
  • Byrne, D. (a) “The influence of propinquity and opportunities for interaction on classroom relationships,” Hum. Rel. 1961, 14, 63-70.
  • Perrow, C. (1986). Complex organisations: A critical essay (3rd ed.). New York: McGraw-Hill.
  • Commonwealth Youth Programme Secretariat (1995) . Working with Young People: A Guide Topreventing HIV/AIDS and STDs. London, Commonwealth Youth Programme, United Nations Children’s Educational Fund.
  • Perry, J. (1997). Antecedents of public service motivation. Journal of Public Administration Research and Theory, 7, 181-197.
  • David R. Johnson, Renée E. (2009): Current Approaches in Drama Therapy. Charles E. Thomas –Publisher Ltd.
  • Perugini, M., & Richetin, J. (2007). In the land of the blind, the one-eyed man is king. European Journal of Personality, 21, 977-981.
  • Edvardsen, J., Torgersen, S., Røysamb, E., Lygren, S., Skre, I., Onstad, S., & Oien, P. A. (2008) Heritability of bipolar spectrum disorders. Unity or heterogeneity? Journal of Affective Disorder, 106, 229–40
  • Pervin, L. (1996). The Science of Personality. New York: Wiley
  • Fischer, J. & Corcoran, K. (1994). Measures for Clinical Practice: A Sourcebook (2 vols., 2nd ed.). New York: Macmillan.
  • Mead, G. H. (1934) Mind, Self and Society, University of Chicago Press
  • Getzels, J. W., & Jackson, P. W. (1962). Creativity and intelligence: . Explorations with gifted students. New York: Wiley.
  • Pessemier, Edgar A., Albert C. Bemmaor, and Dominique Hanssens, M. (1977), “Willingness to supply human body parts: Some empirical results,” The Journal of Consumer Research, 4(3), 131-40.
  • Omwake, Katherine. “The relationship between acceptance of self and acceptance of others shown by three personality inventories,” J. Cons. Psych., 1954, 18,443446.
  • Peterson, R.A. (1978). Review of the Rorschach. In O.K.Buros(ed.).Eighth mental measurements yearbook (pp. 1042-1045). Highland Park, NJ: Gryphon.
  • Nickel, James (2009). “Human Rights”. In trse, Edward N.. The Stanford Encyclopedia of Philosophy. http://plato.stanford.edu/archives/spr2009/entries/ rights-human/.
  • Pett M.A. (1997) Non-parametric Statistics for Health Care Research. London, Thousand Oaks, New Delhi: Sage Publications.
  • Ossification: the process of replacing cartilage with bony tissue.
  • Pétursson H (November 1994). “The benzodiazepine withdrawal syndrome”. Addiction 89 (11): 1455–9.
  • Al-Hawamdeh, Suliman.( 2003). Knowledge Management. Oxford. Chandos Publishing Limited.
  • Phil Hughes and Ed Ferrett (2007). Introduction to Health and Safety in Construction Oxford, Elsevier / Butterworth Heinemann, London
  • Amir Levy and Uri Merry, Organisational Transformation (New York:Praeger Publishers, 1986).
  • Phillips-Howard PA, ter Kuile FO (June 1995). “CNS adverse events associated with antimalarial agents. Fact or fiction?”. Drug Saf 12 (6): 370–83.
  • Asay, T. P., & Lambert, M. J. (1999). The empirical case for the common factors in therapy: Quantitative findings. In M. A.
  • Pichot, T., & Dolan, Y. (2003). Solution-focused brief therapy: Its effective use in agency settings. New York: Haworth.
  • Beck, A. T., Freeman, A., Davis, D., & Associates. (2004). Cognitive therapy of personality disorders (2nd ed.). New York: Guilford Press.
  • Piedmont, R. L., Bain, E., McCrae, R. R., & Costa, P. T., Jr. (2002). The applicability of the Five-Factor Model in a Sub-Saharan culture: The NEO-PI-R in Shona. In R. R. McCrae & J. Allik (Eds.), The Five-Factor Model of personality across cultures (pp. 155-173). New York: Kluwer Academic/Plenum Publishers.
  • Berrios G E (1987). “Historical Aspects of Psychoses: 19th Century Issues”. British Medical Bulletin 43 (3): 484–498.
  • Pierce J.L & Gardner. D.G.(2002) Management and Organisation Behaviour, U.K., Thompson.
  • Block, P. (2002). The answer to how is yes. San Francisco, CA: Berrett-Koehler.
  • Pietrofesa, John J., Bernstein, B., Minor, J. and Stanford, S. (1980). Guidance:
  • North, A.C., Tarrant, M., & Hargreaves, D.J. (2004). The effects of music on helping behaviour: a field study. Environment and Behaviour, 36 (2), 266-275.
  • Piliavin, I.M., Rodin, J.A. & Piliavin, J. (1969) Good Samaritanism: An underground phenomenon? Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 13, 289 -299.
  • Burns, David, M.D. (1992). Feeling Good: The New Mood Therapy. New York :Avon Books.
  • Piliavin, J.A. and Charng, H.-W. (1990). Altruism: a review of recent theory and research. Annual Review of Sociology, 16, 27–65.
  • Carroll, T. 2002. Construyendocapacidadescolectivas. Quito: ImprentaRispergraf.
  • Pinder, C.C. (1998). Work motivation in organisational behaviour. N.J.: PrenticeHall.
  • CIP–UPWARD. 2002. Capacity development for participatory research. Los Baños, Philippines: International Potato Center and Users’ Perspectives with Agricultural Research and Development.
  • Pinker, S. (1994). The Language Instinct. London: Penguin Books.
  • Corey, G. (2004). Theory and Practice of Group Counseling (6th ed.). Belmont, CA: Brooks/Cole-Thomson Learning.
  • Plomin, R., DeFries, J. C., McClearn, G. E. & McGuffin, P. 2001 Behavioural genetics, 4th edn. New York, NY: W. H. Freeman.
  • Cummings and Worley (1977) Organisational development and Change, Sixth Edition, South-Western Publishing, p.2.
  • Poortinga, Y. H., Van de Vijver, F., & Van Hemert, D. A. (2002). Cross-cultural equivalence of the Big Five: A tentative interpretation of the evidence. In R. R. McCrae & J. Allik (Eds.), The Five-Factor Model across cultures (pp. 273-294). New York: Kluwer Academic/Plenum Publishers.
  • Delis, D. C., Kramer, J., Kaplan, E., &Ober, B. A. (1987). California Verbal Learning Test. San Antonio, TX: Psychological Corporation.
  • Moyer KE. Kinds of aggression and their physiological basis. Communication in Behaviour Biology 1968;2:65–87.
  • Mischel W. (1999). Personality coherence and dispositions in a cognitive-affective personality (CAPS) approach. In D. Cervone & Y. Shoda (Eds.), The Coherence of Personality: Social-Cognitive Bases of Consistency, Variability, and Organization (pp. 37–60). New York: Guilford
  • Morgan, G. (1986). Images of organisations. Beverly Hills, CA: Sage.
  • Ellis, A. (1962). Reason and Emotion in Psychotherapy. New York:Lyle Stuart press.
  • Porter, L. W., & Lawler, E. E. (1968). Managerial Attitudes and Performance. Homewood, IL: Irwin.
  • Exner, J. E., Jr., & Exner, D. E. (1972). How clinicians use the Rorschach. Journal of Personality Assessment, 36, 402--408.
  • Porter, L.W., Steers, R.M., Mowday, R.T., & Boulian, P.V. (1974). Organisational commitment,
  • Frasure-Smith N, Lesperance F, Talajic M (1995). Depression and 18-month prognosis after myocardial infarction. Circulation,  91(4), 999-1005.
  • Prochaska, J. O., & DiClemente, C. C. (1984). The transtheoretical approach: Crossing the traditional boundaries of therapy. Homewood, IL: Dow JonesIrwin.
  • Gardner, R.W. & Schoen, R.A. (1962). Differentiation of abstraction in concept formation. Psychological Monographs, 76, No. 41 (While No. 560).
  • Prochaska, J. O., & DiClemente, C. C. (2005). The transtheoretical approach. In J. C. Norcross & M. R. Goldfried (Eds.), Handbook of psychotherapy integration (2nd ed., pp. 147–171). New York: Oxford.
  • Gogtay, N., Ordonez, A., Herman, D. H., Hayashi, K. M., Greenstein, D., Vaituzis, C., Lenane, M., Clasen, L., Sharp, W., Giedd, J. N., Jung, D., Nugent Iii, T. F., Toga, A. W., Leibenluft, E., Thompson, P. M., & Rapoport, J. L. (2007). Dynamic mapping of cortical development before and after the onset of pediatric bipolar illness. J. Child Psychol. Psychiatry. 48, 852-862.
  • Property as a common descriptor of the field probably traces to the foundation of the World Intellectual Property Organisation (WIPO) by the United Nations.” in Mark A. Lemley, Property, Intellectual Property, and Free Riding, Texas Law Review, 2005, Vol. 83:1031, page 1033, footnote 4.
  • Graham, J. R. (1990). MMPI-2: Assessing Personality and Psychopathology. New York: Oxford University Press.
  • Provost, René (2002). International human rights and humanitarian law. Cambridge, UK: Cambridge University Press. p. 8. ISBN 0-511-04186-1.
  • Wyatt, J. M., & Carlo, G. (2002). What will my parents think? Relations among adolescents’ expected parental reactions, prosocial moral reasoning and prosocial and antisocial behaviours. Journal of Adolescent Research, 17, 646-666.
  • Psychotic Disorders: A Practical Guide (Practical Guides in Psychiatry) pub Lippincott Williams and Wilkins
  • Ybarra, M., & Eaton, W. (2005). Internet-based mental health interventions. Mental Health Services Research, 7(2), 75-86.
  • Puente, Manuel de la (2000). Ethnographic research at the U.S. Census Bureau the enumeration of border communities along the US/Mexico border during Census 2000. Chapel Hill, NC: UNC-CH, School of Public Health. Minority Health Project. Discusses ethnographic research at the U.S. Census Bureau dating back to 1971 and illustrates how ethnographic techniques are used at the Census Bureau, using the example of ethnographic research on border communities during Census 2000. See http://www.census.gov/srd/papers/pdf/mdp9501.pdf.
  • Zanarini M.C.; F.R. Frankenburg (1997). “Pathways to the development of borderline personality disorder”. Journal of Personality Disorders 11 (1): 93-104.
  • Pugh, D.S. (Ed.). (1971). Organisation theory: Selected readings. Harmondsworth: Penguin.
  • Engelhorn R. (1988). EMG and motor performance changes with practice of a forearm movement by children. Percetual and Motor Skills, 67(2), 523-529.
  • Pull CB, Chaillet G. The nosological views of French-speaking psychiatry. In: Mezzich JE, Honda Y, Kastrup MC, eds. Psychiatric Diagnosis: A World Perspective. New York, NY: Springer Verlag; 1994.
  • Abbott, J., Klein, B., & Ciechomski, L. (2008). Best practices in online therapy. Journal of Technology in Human Services, 26 (2/4), 360- 375.
  • Qyen, E. (ed.) (1990), Comparative Methodology : Theory and Practice in International Social Research, London sage.
  • Alderfer, C. P. (1977.b) Improving organisational communication through longterm intergroup intervention.Journal of Applied Behavioural Science, 13, 193210.
  • Racker, H. (1957). The meanings and uses of countertransference. Psychoanalytic Quarterly, 26, 303–357.
  • Alter, C. and J. Hage. 1993. Organisations working together. London: Sage.
  • Raine A, Reynolds C, Venables PH, Mednick SA, Farrington DP. Fearlessness, stimulation-seeking, and large body size at age 3 years as early predispositions to childhood aggression at age 11 years. Archives of General Psychiatry 1998; 55:745–751.
  • American Psychological Association Committee on Psychological Tests and Assessment. (1996). Statemerit on the disclosure of test data. American Psychologist, 51(6), 644-648.
  • Ramnani, V. (2010). Please don’t go. p. 1, Shine, Hindustan Times Weekly Supplement, New Delhi.
  • Andreas,C. , & Andreas, S. (1989). Heart of the Mind.Moab, UT: Real People Press
  • Rand, Ayn. “Patents and Copyrights” in Ayn Rand, ed. ‘Capitalism: The Unknown Ideal,’ New York: New American Library, 1966, pp. 126–128
  • Armstrong J. and A. Whyte. 1998. Learning partnerships: A review of IDRC secretariats. Ottawa: International Development Research Centre.
  • Randall, Peter Bullying in Adulthood: Assessing the bullies and their victims (2001)
  • Azar S, Ramjiani A, Van Gerpen JA (April 2005). “Ciprofloxacin-induced chorea”. Mov. Disord. 20 (4): 513–4; author reply 514..
  • Randle, Jacqueline (Editor) Workplace Bullying in the NHS (2006)
  • Barney, J.B. and W. Hesterly. 1996. Organisational economics: Understanding the relationship between organisations and economic analysis. In Handbook of organisational studies, edited by S. Clegg, C. Hardy, and W. Nord. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage.
  • Rao P.S. (2009). Personnel and Human Resource Management and Industrial Relations. New Delhi. Himalaya Publishing House.
  • Beer, M D (1995). “Psychosis: from mental disorder to disease concept”. Hist Psychiatry 6 (22(II)): 177–200.
  • Rao P.S. (2010). Essentials of Human Resource Management and Industrial Relations. New Delhi. Himalaya Publishing House.
  • Bergman, K. R.; C. Pearson, G. W. Waltz, and R. Evans III month=December (1980). “Atropine-induced psychosis. An unusual complication of therapy with inhaled atropine sulfate”. Chest 78 (6): 891–893.
  • Mukunda, Kamala, V. (2009). What did you ask at school today? A handbook of child learning, Harper Collins Publishers India.
  • Bhatnagar, R. P., & Seema, R. (2003). Guidance and Counselling in Education and Psychology. Meerut: R.Lal Book Depot.
  • Mullins, L. J. (2005). Management and organisational behaviour, 7th Ed. New Delhi: Prentice Hall.
  • Blatner, A. (1996). Acting-in: Practical Applications of Psychodramatic Methods (3rd ed.). New York: Springer.
  • Meade, R.D. (1967). An experimental study of leadership in India. Journal of Social Psychology, 72, 35-43.
  • Bolman, L. G. and Deal, T. E. (1997).Reframing organisations: Artistry, choice, and leadership. (2nd ed.). San Francisco: Jossey-Bass.
  • Reber, A. J. & Reber, A. (2001) The Penguin Dictionary Psychology (3 rd ed.). Penguin Group: England
  • Bowlby, J. (I980). Attachment and loss, Vol. 3: Loss, sadness and depression, New York: Basic Books.
  • Reber, A. S. & Reber, E. (2001). The Penguin Dictionary of Psychology. Third Edition. Penguin Books
  • Brammer, L.M, & Shostrum, E.L. (1982) Therapeutic Psychology: Fundamentals of Counseling and Psychotherapy (4th Ed.) Englewood Cliffs, NJ Prentice Hall
  • Mullins,L.J.,(1989) Management and Organisational Behaviour. 2nd edi, Allahabad, Wheeler Publishing Com.
  • Bugental, J.F.T., & Bracke, P.E. (1992). The future of existential humanistic psychotherapy. Psychotherapy, 29(1), 28-33.
  • Regier DA, Narrow WE, Rae DS (1993). The de facto mental and addictive disorders service system. Epidemiologic Catchment Area prospective 1-year prevalence rates of disorders and services. Archives of General Psychiatry, 50(2), 85-94.
  • Butcher, J. N., Dahlstrom, W. G., Graham, J. R., Tellegen, A., &Kraemmer, B. (1989). Minnesota Multiphasic Personality Inventory (MMPI-2): Manual for administration and scoring. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press.
  • Reid, D., Parsons, M., & Green, C. (1989). Staff management in human services: Behavioural research and application. Springfield, IL: Charles C. Thomas.
  • Campbell, J. P., & Pritchard, R. D. (1976). Motivation theory in industrial and organisational psychology. In M. D. Dunnette (Ed.), Handbook of industrial and organisational psychology. Chicago: Rand McNally
  • Reisman, George. ‘Capitalism: A Complete & Integrated Understanding of the Nature & Value of Human Economic Life,’] Ottawa, Illinois: 1996, pp. 388–389
  • Castells, M. 1997. The power of identity, the information age: economy, society and culture. Cambridge and Oxford: Blackwell.
  • Reitan, H. T. & Shaw, M. E. (1964). Group membership, sex-composition of the group, and conformity behaviour. The Journal of Social Psychology, 64, 45-51.
  • Chris Argyris, Overcoming Organisational Defensive Routines (Boston:Allyn and Bacon, 1990).
  • Renik, O. (1993). Analytic interaction: conceptualising technique in light of the analyst’s irreducible subjectivity. Psychoanalytic Quarterly, 62, 553-71.
  • Miller, G. A. (1956). The magical number seven, plus or minus two: Some limits on our capacity for processing information. Psychological Review, 63, 81-97. [Available online from Classics in the History of Psychology:
  • Rescorla, R. A. (1973). Pavlovlian conditioning: It’s not what you think it is. American Psychologist, 43, 151-160.
  • Constantino, G., Malgady, R. G., Colon-Ma!gady, G., & Bailey, J. (1992). Clinical utility of the TEMAS with nonminority children. Journal of Personality Assessment, 59(3), 433-438.
  • Reynolds, C. F., Frank, E. &Perel, J. M. (1999) Nortriptyline and interpersonal psychotherapy on maintenance therapies for recurrent major depression: a randomized controlled trial in patients older than 59 years. JAMA, 281, 39–44.
  • Cormier, W. H., & Cormier, L. S. (1991). Interviewing strategies for helpers. Pacific Grove, CA: Brooks/ Cole.
  • Rice, A. K. Individual, group and intergroup processes. Human Relations, 1969, 22, 562- 584.
  • Cramer, P., & Blatt, S. J. (1990). Use of the TAT to measure change in defense mechanisms following intensive psychotherapy. Journal of Personality Assessment, 54, 236-251.
  • Riketta, M. (2002). Attitudinal organisational commitment and job performance: A meta-analysis. Journal of Organisational Behaviour, 23, 257-266.
  • Curzon SC. Managing change: a how to do it manual for planning, implementing, and evaluating change in libraries. New York, NY: Neal-Schuman Publishers, 1989.
  • Riley, Stephen Barsteadworth College - How Workplace Bullies Get Away with It London, Chipmunka Publishing ISBN: 9781849911825 (2010)
  • Deas D, Brown ES. Adolescent substance abuse and psychiatric comorbidities. J Clin Psychiatry. Jul 2006; 67(7):e02. 
  • Murray HA. Uses of the Thematic Apperception Test. American Journal of Psychiatry 1951;107:577– 581. [PubMed: 14819343]
  • Dependent personality disorder- Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorder-Fourth Edition- Text Revised (DSM-IV- TR) American Psychiatric Association (2000).
  • Murray, H. A. & Kluckhohn, C. (1953). Personality in Nature, Society, and Culture. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.
  • O’Reilly, C.A., & Chatman, J. (1986). Organisational commitment and psychological attachment: The effects of compliance, identification and internalisation on prosocial behaviour. Journal of Applied Psychology, 71 (3), 492-499.
  • May, R., & Yalom, I. (2000). Existential psychotherapy. In R. J. Corsini & D. Wedding (Eds.), Current Psychotherapies (6th ed., pp. 273-302). Itasca, IL: F. E. Peacock.
  • E-counseling online counseling E-therapy Patricia Roles. Retrieved from www.emailtherapy.com on 12 Jan 2011.
  • Robert J. Landy (1994): Drama Therapy: Concepts, Theories, and Practices.
  • Eldredge and Merrill, Culture and Society, p. 483.
  • Robinson L. & Spilsbury K. Systematic review of the perceptions and experiences of accessing health services by adult victims of domestic violence. Health Soc Care Community 2008; 16(1): 16-30.
  • Eric J.Mash and Russel A.Barkley (2007). Assessment of Childhood Disorders. The Guilford Press, London.
  • Murray,H.A., Barrett,W.G., & Homburger,E. (1938).Explorations in Personality. New York: Oxford University Press.
  • Omer, H. (1993). The integrative focus: co-ordinating symptom- and personoriented perspectives in therapy. American Journal of Psychotherapy, 47, 28395.
  • Roe, A. (1956). The Psychology of Occupations. New York: John Wiley Sons,
  • Feldman, R. S., &Rim'e, B. (Eds.). (1991). Fundamentals of Nmiverbal Behavior. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
  • Rogers, C. R. (1942). Counseling and psychotherapy: Newer concepts in practice. Boston: Houghton Mifflin.
  • Forer, B. R. (1957). The Forer Structured Sentence Completion Test. Los Angeles: Western Psychological Service.
  • Mayer, R.C. & Schoorman, F. D. (1998). Differentiating antecedents of organisational commitment: A test of March and Simon’s model. Journal of Organisational Behaviour, 19, 15-28.
  • French, J. W., Ekstrom, R. B. & Price, L. A (1963). Manual and Kit of Reference Tests for Cognitive Factors. Princeton, NJ: Educational Testing Service.
  • Murstein, Bernard I.; Patricia Christy (October 1976). “Physical attractiveness and marriage adjustment in middle-aged couples”. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology.
  • Garb, H. N. (1984). The incremental validity of information used in personality assessment. Clinical Psychology Review, 4, 641-655.
  • Mearns, D and Thorne, B (2000): Person-Centred Therapy Today.Sage Publications.
  • Gelder, Michael (2005). “Psychiatry”, P. 12. Oxford University Press Inc., New York.
  • Roid, G.H. (2003). Stanford-Binet Intelligence Scales, Technical Manual. (5 th Ed.). Itasca, IL: Riverside Publishing.
  • Gioia, G. A., Espy, K. A., &Isquith, P. K. (2003). Behavior Rating Inventory of Executive Function-Pre-School version. Lutz, FL: Psychological Assessment· Resources, Inc.
  • Mathieu, J., & Zajac, D. (1990). A review of meta-analysis of the antecedents, correlates, and consequences of organisational commitment. Psychological Bulletin, 108, 171–194.
  • Goldstein, K. &Scheerer, M. (1941). Abstract and concrete behavior: An experimental study with special tests. Psychological Monographs, 53, (2, Whole No. 239).
  • Romi S, Itskowitz R. The relationship between locus of control and type of aggression in middle-class and culturally deprived children. Personality & Individual Differences 1990;11:327–333.
  • Gough, H. G. (1989). The California Psychological Inventory. In C. S. Newmark (Ed.), Major Psychological Assessment Instruments (Vol. 2, pp. 67-98). Boston, MA: Allyn& Bacon.
  • Ronning, M. E. (2004). Core profile types for the Cognitive Assessment System and Woofcock-Johnson Achievement Tests of Achievement: Their development and description for low performing students. Unpublished Doctoral Dissertation, Ohio State University, Ohio
  • Grant, R.M. 1995. Analysing resources and capabilities. In Contemporary strategy analysis: Concepts, techniques, applications. Malden, MA: Blackwell.
  • Rosemary A. Thompson, Ed.D., NCC, LPC, NCSC. Counseling Technique Improving Relationships with others, ourselves, our families and our environment (2nd ed) Brunner Routledge, New York and Hove.
  • www.fundedplans.com/business.gov.in › Starting a Business
  • Rosenthal, T. L., & Zimmerman, B. J. (1978). Social learning and cognition. New York:
  • Y.P. Aggarwal. Statistical Methods Concepts, Application & Computation Sterling homosedasity publishers Pvt. Ltd.
  • Rozanski, Felix. “Developing Countries and Pharmaceutical Intellectual Property Rights: Myths and Reality” [9]
  • Yang, J., Dai, X., Yao, S., Cai, T., Gao, B., McCrae, R. R., & Costa, P. T., Jr. (2002). Personality disorders and the Five-Factor Model of personality in Chinese psychiatric patients. In P. T. Costa, Jr. & T. A. Widiger (Eds.), Personality disorders and the Five-Factor Model of personality (2nd ed., pp. 215-221). Washington, DC: American Psychological Association.
  • Runco, M. A. (2007). Creativity. Theories and Themes: Research, Development and Practice. Amsterdam: Elsevier.
  • Young, PV (1992). Scientific Social Survey and Research,New Delhi: Prenticehall of India.
  • Runyan,W.M. (1982).Life histories and psychobiography: Explanations in theory and method. New York: Oxford University Press.
  • Yule, M, & Rutter, M. (Eds.)(1987). Language Development and Disorders. London: McKeith Press.
  • Rushton, J. P. (2004), Genetic and environmental contributions to prosocial attitudes: a twin study of social responsibility. Proc. R. Soc. B 271, 2583–2585.
  • Zastrow, C. (2009). The practice of social work: A comprehensive work text, 9th Ed. California: Brooks/Cole.
  • Rushton, J. P., Fulker, D. W., Neale, M. C., Nias, D. K. B. & Eysenck, H. J. (1986) Altruism and aggression: the heritability of individual differences. J. Pers. Soc. Psychol. 50, 1192–1198.
  • Bairstow, P. J. (1989). Development of planning and Control of hand movement to moving targets. British Journal of Developmental Psychology, 7(1), 29-42.
  • Russell, B (1926). On Education: Especially in Early Childhood. London: Unwin Paperbacks
  • Lambert, N. K., Mihira, K., & Leland, H. (1993). Adaptive Behaviour Scale-School (2 nd ed.). Austin, TX: PRO-ED.
  • Ryckman, R.M (1993). Theories of Personality: Brooks / Cole Publishing Company.
  • Nielsen, Linda,(1996). Adolescence: A Contemporary View, (3rd edition) Harcourt Brace College Publishers.
  • Ryle, A. (1990). Cognitive analytic therapy: active participation in change. Chichester: Wiley.
  • Ader, H.J., Mellenbergh, G.J., & Hand, D.J. (2008). Advising on Research Methods: A Consultant’s Companion. Huizen, The Netherlands: Johannes van kessel Publishing.
  • Ryle, A. (1997). Cognitive analytic therapy and borderline personality disorder: the model and the method. Chichester: Wiley.
  • Alderfer, C. P. (1968). Comparison of questionnaire responses with and without preceding interviews. Journal of Applied Psychology, 1968, 52, 335-340.
  • Ryle, A. and Kerr, I. B. (2002). Introducing cognitive analytic therapy. Chichester: Wiley.
  • Aldrich, H. 1999. Organisations evolving. London: Sage.
  • S.L.Willis and J.D.Reid (Eds) (1999). Life In the Middle . San Diego, CA, Academic Press.
  • Allen, Thomas E., Liebman, Mayer C., Park, Lee Crandall, and Wimmer, William C. (2001). A Primer on Metal Disorders. Lanham, Scarecrow Press, Maryland.
  • S.Worchel and W.G. Austin (eds), Psychology of intergroup relations (pp. 7–24). Chicago: Nelson–Hall.
  • Ambelas, A. (1987). Life events and mania: A special relationship. British Journal of Psychiatry, 150, 235-240.
  • Safran, J. D. and Muran, J. C. (2000). Negotiating the therapeutic alliance: a relational treatment guide. New York: Guilford Press.
  • Morrow, P. C. & McElroy, J. C. (1986). On assessing measures of work commitment. Journal of Occupational Behaviour, 7(2), 139-145.
  • Safran, J., & Segal, Z. (1990). Interpersonal processes in cognitive therapy. New York: Basic Books.
  • Norcross, J. C. (2005). A primer on psychotherapy integration. In J. C. Norcross & M. R. Goldfried (Eds.), Handbook of psychotherapy integration (2nd ed., pp. 3–23). New York: Oxford.
  • Mearns, D. & Thorne, B. (1998): Person-Centered Counselling in Action. Sage Publications
  • Anderson RJ, Lustman PJ, Clouse RE, (2000). Prevalence of depression in adults with diabetes: a systematic review. Diabetes,  49(Suppl 1),  A64.
  • Sanday, Peggy R. (1979). The ethnographic paradigm(s). Administrative Science Quarterly, 24: 527-38.
  • Anthony Bateman, Dennis Brown and Jonathan Pedder (2010): Introduction to Psychotherapy: An Outline of Psychodynamic Principles and Practice. Publisher: Routledge
  • Morgan, H. (1996). An analysis of Gardner’s theory of multiple intelligence. Roeper Review, 18, 263-270.
  • Argyris, C (1992). On organisational learning. Cambridge, MA: Blackwell Business.
  • Satir, Virginia. Conjoint Family Therapy. Palo Alto, CA: Science and Behaviour Books, 1983.
  • Aronson, T. A. & Shukla, S. (1987). Life events and relapse in bipolar disorder: The impact of a catastrophic event. Acta Psychiatrica Scandinavica , 57, 571-576.
  • Saunders, B.E., Berliner, L., & Hanson, R.F. (Eds.). (2004). Child Physical and Sexual Abuse: Guidelines for Treatment (Revised Report: April 26, 2004). Charleston, SC: National Crime Victims Research and Treatment Center.
  • Morry, M. M. (2007). Relationship satisfaction as a predictor of perceived similarity among cross-sex friends: A test of the attraction-similarity model. Journal of Social and Personal Relationships, 24, 117-138.
  • Saussure, de F. (1960) Course in General Linguistics, London: Owen
  • McCrae, R. R., Terracciano, A., & 78 Members of the Personality Profiles of Cultures Project. (2005a). Universal features of personality traits from the observer’s perspective: Data from 50 cultures. Journal of Persoanlity and Social Psychology, 88, 547-561.
  • Scales, P. C. (2005). Developmental assets and the middle school counselor. Professional School Counselling. 9(2), 104-110.0
  • Bandura, A. (2001). Social cognitive theory and clinical psychology. In N. J. Smelser & P. B. Baltes (Eds.), International encyclopedia of the social and behavioral sciences. Oxford: Elsevier Science.
  • Scarpa A, Raine A. Psychophysiology of anger and violent behaviour. Psychiatric Clinics of North America 1997;20:375–394. [PubMed: 9196920]
  • Baumrind, D. (1975). Early socialisation and the discipline controversy. Morristown, NJ: General Learning Press.
  • Schachter, S. The Psychology of Affiliation. Stanford, California: Stanford University Press, 1959.
  • Becker, T. E., Billings, R. S., Eveleth, D. M., & Gilbert, N. W. (1996). Foci and bases of commitment: Implications for performance. Academy of Management Journal, 39, 464-482.
  • Schact, T. E., Binder, J. L., and Strupp, H. H. (1984). Psychotherapy in a new key. New York: HarperCollins.
  • Benefits and challenges. Retrieved from www.aifs.gov.au/afrc/pubs/brefng on 11 Jan 2011.
  • Schappe, S. P., (1998). The influence of job satisfaction, organisational commitment, and fairness perceptions on organisational citizenship behaviour. The Journal of Psychology, 132(3), 277-290.
  • Berg, D. (1977). Failure at entry. In P. Mirvis & D. Berg (Eds.), Failures in organisation development. New York: Wiley.
  • Schechter, Roger E., and John R. Thomas. Intellectual Property: The Law of Copyrights, Patents and Trademarks. New York: West/Wadsworth, 2003, ISBN 0-314-06599-7.
  • Bernstein, D. P., Useda, D. & Siever, L. J. (1993). Paranoid personality disorder: Review of the literature and recommendations for DSM-IV. Journal of Personality disorders, 7, 53-62.
  • Schein, E. H. (1996). Culture: The missing concept in organisational studies. Administrative Science Quarterly, 41, 229–240.
  • Best, S. and D. Kellner. 2001. The postmodern adventure: Science, technology, and cultural studies at the third millennium. New York, NY: Guilford Press.
  • Schiff, M. (1977), “Hazard Adjustment, Locus of Control, and Sensation Seeking - Some Null Findings,“ Environment and Behaviour, 9 (2), 233-54.
  • Binet, A., & Henri, V. (1896). Psychologieindividuelle. AnneePsychologie, 3, 296-332.
  • Schizoid personality disorder, Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental DisordersFourth edition-Text Revision (DSM-IV-TR), American Psychiatric Association, (2000).
  • Blackerby, P. and R.F. Blackerby. 1994. Strategic planning. Armed Forces Comptroller. 39(2): 21–26.
  • Meese, Judith L. (2004). Child and Adolescent Development for Educators. (3 rd edition). McGraw Hill College, USA.
  • Bleular, E. (1924). Textbook of psychiatry. A. A. Brill, Trans. New York: Macmillan.
  • Schmidt, Greg and Bernard Weiner (1988), “An Attribution-Affect-Action Theory of Behaviour. Replications of Judgments of Help-Giving,” Personality and Social Psychology Bulletin, 14 (3), 610-21.
  • Boccaccini, M.T., & Brodsky, S.L. (1999). Diagnostic test usage by forensic psychologists in emotional injury cases. Professional Psychology, 30, 253-259.
  • Schneider, Patricia H. “International Trade, Economic Growth and Intellectual Property Rights: A Panel Data Study of Developed and Developing Countries”. July 2004. [10]
  • Borum, R., &Grisso, T. (1995). Psychological test use in criminal forensic evaluations. Professional Psychology, 26, 465-473.
  • Schostak, J. F. (1993 ) Dirty Marks: The Education of Self, Media and Popular Culture, Pluto Press, London
  • Bowers, D. G., & Franklin, J. L. (1972). Survey-guided development: Using human resources measurement in organisational change. Journal of Contemporary Business, 7, 43-55.
  • Schostak, J.F. (2002) Understanding, Designing and Conducting Qualitative Research in Education. Framing the Project. Open University Press
  • Bracken, B. A., & McCallum, R. S. (1998). Universal Nonverbal Intelligence Test. Itasca, IL: Riverside Publishers ..
  • Schroeder, D.A., Dovidio, J.F., Sibicky, M.E., Matthews, L.L. & Allen, J.L. (1988). Empathic concern and helping behaviour: Egoism or altruism? Journal of Experimental Social Psychology, 24, 333-353.
  • Bradley, R., Jenei, J., & Westen, D. (2005). Etiology of borderline personality disorder: Disentangling the contributions of intercorrelated antecedents. The Journal of Nervous and Mental Disease, 193(1), 24-31.
  • Schroffel, A. (1999). How does clinical supervision affect job satisfaction? The Clinical Supervisor, 18, 91-105.
  • Brook S, Lucey JV, Gunn KP. Intramuscular ziprasidone compared with intramuscular haloperidol in the treatment of acute psychosis. Ziprasidone I.M. Study Group. J Clin Psychiatry. Dec 2000;61(12):933-41. 
  • Maynard, M. (1986). Measuring work and support network satisfaction. Journal of Employment Counseling, March, 9-19.
  • Buck, J. N. (1948). The H-T-P technique: A qualitative and quantitative scoring manual. Journal of Clinical Psychology, 4, 319-396.
  • Myers, Anne, & Hansen, Christine. (2006). Experimental Psychology. Thomson Wadsworth: Belmont,CA.
  • Burke, W. W. (2007). Organisation Change: Theory and practice (2nd ed.). Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage.
  • Schultz, P. W. (1999). Changing behaviour with normative feedback interventions: A field experiment on curbside recycling. Basic and Applied Social Psychology, 21, 25-36.
  • Buros, O.K. (Ed.) (1974). Tests in print II. Highland Park, NJ: Gryphon Press.
  • Schutz, A. (1976) The Phenomenology of the Social World, tr. G. Walsh and F. Lehnert, London: Heineman
  • Norton, B (1997). “Language, identity, and the ownership of English”. TESOL Quarterly (Teachers of English to Speakers of Other Languages, Inc. (TESOL)) 31(3): 409–429. doi:10.2307/3587831. http://jstor.org/stable/3587831.
  • Schwartz, B., & Lacey, H. (1982). Behaviourism, science, and human nature. New York: Norton.
  • Cadoret, R.J., Troughton, E., & Bagford, J. (1995). Adoption study demonstrating two genetic pathways to drug abuse. Archives of General Psychiatry, 52, 42–52.
  • Meichenbaum, D. (1985). Stress Inoculation Training. New York: Pergamon Press.
  • Cargiulo T (March 2007). “Understanding the health impact of alcohol dependence”. Am J Health Syst Pharm 64 (5 Suppl 3): S5–11.
  • Seealso C. Nelson and L. Grossberg, eds., Marxism and the interpretation of culture. Urbana, IL: University of Illinois Press, 1988.
  • Caspi, A., Sugden, K., Moffitt, T. E., Taylor, A., Craig, I. W., & Harrington, H. L. (2003). Influence of life stress on depression: Moderation by a polymorphism in the 5-HTT gene. Science, 301, 386-389.
  • Seigal, A. W. (1881) The externalization of cognitive maps by children and adults: in search of ways to ask better questions. In Leiben, L.S., Patterson, A.H. & Newcombe, N. (Eds.), Spatial representation across the life span. New York: Academic Press.
  • Cattell, R. B., & Warburton, F. W. (1965). Principles of Personality Measurement and A Compendium of Objective Tests. Champaign, IL: University of Tilinois Press.
  • Seligman, M. (1975). Helplessness: On depression, development and death. San Francisco, CA, USA: WH Freeman
  • Chassin, L., Rogosch, R., & Barrera, M. (1991). Substance use and symptomatology among adolescent children of alcoholics. Journal of Abnormal Psychology, 100, 449-463.
  • Seligman, M. E. P. (1972). On the generality of the laws of learning. Psychological Review, 77, 406-418.
  • Christopher Butler and Victoria Joyce (2001) Counselling Couples in Relationships (An Introduction to RELATE Approach), John Wiley & Sons, New York.
  • Selman, R. L. (1980) The growth of interpersonal understanding. New York: Academic Press.
  • Clinton, J. J. (1993). From the Agency for Health Care Policy and Research. Journal of American Medical Association, 270, 172
  • Seriven Michael (1967). The Methodology of Evaluation. AERA Monograph series on curriculum evaluation (Book 1) Chicago: Rand McNally.
  • Coleman, P.T. “Implicit Theories of Organisational Power and Priming Effects on Managerial Power-Sharing Decisions: An Experimental Study.” Journal of Applied Social Psychology 34, no. 2 (2004): 297–321.
  • Meier, Stephen. 2004. “An Economic Analysis of Pro-Social Behaviour.” Dissertation.
  • Cone, J.D. (1978). The behavioural assessment grid (BAG): a conceptual framework and a taxonomy. Behaviour Therapy, 9, 882-888.
  • Shapiro, Robert and Nam Pham. “Economic Effects of Intellectual PropertyIntensive Manufacturing in the United States”. July 2007. [11]
  • Corey, G. (1986): “Theory and Practice of Counseling and Psychology”, California Books / Cole Publishing
  • Sharma, A. (1999). Evaluation of Guidance Programme, in Bhatnagar, A. and Gupta, N. (Eds. 1999). Guidance and counselling: A practical approach (Vol. II). Vikas Publishing House, New Delhi.
  • Corey, Gerald (2009). The Art of Integrative Counseling, 2nd edition. USA: Thomson Brooks/Cole.
  • Sharma, R. N. (2008). Vocational Guidance and Counseling. Delhi: Surjeet Publications.
  • Costa, P., & McCrae, R. (1989). NED-PIINED-FFI manual supplement. Odessa, FL: Psychological Assessment Resources.
  • Sharma, R.A. (2004). Development of Learner and Teaching-Learning Process. Surya Publication: Meerut.
  • Coye, R.W., and J.A. Belohlav. “An Exploratory Analysis of Employee Participation.” Group and Organisation Management 20, no. 1 (1995): 4–17.
  • Sharma, V.K. (2005). Administration and Training of Educational and Vocational Guidance. Saujanya books, New Delhi
  • Cronbach, L. J. (1949). Essential of Psychological Testing {3rd ed.). New York: Harper & Row.
  • Sharma. A.M, (2003) Personnel and Human Resource Management, 4th Edition Himalaya Publishing House, Hyderabad.
  • Cummings, T. G. & Worley, C. G. (2005). Organisation development & change. (8th ed.). Cincinnati: South-Western College Publishing.
  • Shavelson, R.S. (3rd edition) Prentice Hall New York.
  • Dalal PK, & Sivakumar T. (2009). Moving towards ICD-11 and DSM-5: Concept and evolution of psychiatric classification. Indian Journal of Psychiatry, 51, 310319.
  • Shaw, M.C. (1973). School Guidance: Objectives, Functions, Evaluation and Change, Boston: Honghton Miffin.
  • Dawes, R. M. (1999). Two methods for studying the incremental validity of a Rorschach variable. Psychological Assessment, 11, 297-302.
  • Sheard, T., et al. (2000). A CAT-derived one to three session intervention for repeated deliberate self-harm: a description of the model and initial experience of trainee psychiatrists in using it. British Journal of Medical Psychology, 73, 179-96.
  • Nunnally, J. C. (1978) Psychometric theory.(2 nd . Ed.) New York: McGraw-Hill
  • Sherif, M.(1956). Outlines of Social Psychology, Harper, New York.
  • Department of Mental Health and Social Psychology, Recruited on 9th January 2011 from www.nimhans.kar.nic.in
  • Shermerhorn, J. R., Hunt, J. G., Osborn, R. N. (2005). Organisational Behaviour. 9th Ed. New Delhi. John Wiley and Sons Inc.
  • Dervitsiotis, K. N. (1998). The challenge of managing organisational change: Exploring the relationship of re-engineering, developing learning organisations, and total quality management. Total Quality Management, 9(1), 109-123.
  • Shertzer, B. & Linden, J.D. (1979). Fundamentals of Individual Appraisal. Houghton Miffin Company: Boston.
  • Digman, J. M. (1990). Personality structure: Emergence of the five-factor model. Annual Review of Psychology, 41, 417-470.
  • Shertzer, B. and Stone, S.C. (1966). Fundamentals of Guidance. Boston: Houghton Mifflin.
  • DSM-IV-TR Official Site. http://psych.org/MainMenu/Research/DSMIV.aspx: American Psychiatric Association.
  • Myrick, R.D. (1987). Developmental Guidance and Counseling: A Practical Approach. Minneapolis MN: Educational Media Corporation.
  • Earl, S., F. Carden, and T. Smutylo. 2001. Outcome mapping. Building learning and reflection into development programs. Ottawa: International Development Research Centre.
  • Shirley, L.L. & Reynolds, R. E. (1988). Effects of interest on attention and learning. Journal of Educational Psychology, 80(2), 159-166
  • E-counselling. www.aifs.gov.au/afrc/pubs/briefing/b15pdf/bp15.pdf Retrieved on 11 Jan 2011
  • Shrivastava, K. K. (2003). Principles of Guidance & Counselling, Kanishka Publishers & Distributors, New Delhi
  • Edwards, A. L. (1957). The social desirability variable in personality assessment and research. New York: Dryden.
  • Mayo, E. (1933). The human problems of an industrial civilisation. New York: Macmillan.
  • Elliott, C.D. (1990). Difefrential Ability Scales (DAS) Administration and Scoring Manual. San Antonio, TX: Psychological Corporation.
  • NACO Facts and figures: HIV estimates – 2003. Available at: www.nacoonline.org/facts_hivestimates.htm
  • Emery, R.E. & Kitzmann, K.M. (1995). The child in the family: Disruptions in family functions. In D. Cicchetti & D. Cohen, (Eds) Manual of Developmental Psychopathology. (Vol. 2, pp. 3-31) New York: Wiley.
  • Sifneos, P. (1979) Short-Term Dynamic Psychotherapy. New York: Plenum Press.
  • Eron, L. D., Terry, D., & Callahan, R. (1950). The use of rating scales for emotional tone of TAT stories. Journal of Consulting Psychology, 14, 473478.
  • Sifneos, P. E. (1971). Two different kinds of psychotherapy of short duration. In: H. H. Barton, ed. Brief therapies, pp. 82-90 New York: Plenum.
  • Oaks, CA: Sage Publications. Her interests are in poststructural cultural criticism (ex., feminist theory, postcolonial theory, Marxist cultural studies, impacts of telecommunications technology on culture, and critical theory regarding race, ethnicity, and class).
  • Sifneos, P. E. (1972). Short-term psychotherapy and emotional crisis. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.
  • Exner, J. E. (2003). The Rorschach: A comprehensive system: Vol. 1. Basic foundations (4th ed.). New York: Wiley.
  • Sigelman, Carol K. & Rider Elizabeth A. (2009). Lifespan Human Development. Wardworth, NY
  • Faraone, S. V., Perlis, R. H., Doyle, A. E., Smoller, J. W., Goralnick. J. J., Holmgren, M. A., & Sklar, P. (2005). Molecular genetics of attention-deficit/ hyperactivity disorder. Biological Psychiatry, 57, 1313-1323.
  • Sigmund Freud (2007): The Origin and Development of Psychoanalysis.
  • Findling , Robert, S.Charles Schulz, Javad, H.Kashani and Elena Harlan (Eds) (2001). Psychotic Disorders in Children and Adolescents. Sage publications, California.
  • Meloy, JR. The psychopathic mind: Origins, dynamics, and treatment. Jason Aronson; Northvale, NJ: 1988.
  • Fisher, R., W. Ury, and B. Patton (eds.). 1991. Getting to yes: Negotiating agreement without giving in. New York, NY: Penguin Books.
  • Simons, H. W., Berkowitz, N. N., & Moyer, R. J. (1970). Similarity, credibility, and attitude change: A review and a theory. Psychological Bulletin, 73(1), 1-16.
  • Francesco, A.M. and B.A. Gold. (1998). International organisational behaviour: Text, readings, cases, and skills. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice Hall.
  • Singer, J.L., & Kolligian, J.R., Jr.(1987).Personality: Developments in the study of private experience. Annual review of Psychology, 38, 533-574.
  • Freeman, Arthur; Pretzer, James; Fleming, Barbara & Simon, Karen M. (2004). Clinical Applications of Cognitive Therapy, 2nd edition. New York: Kluwer Academic/Plenum Publishers.
  • Singh, P. (2005). Handbook of Measurement and Evaluation. Doaba House Booksellers and Publishers: New Delhi.
  • Friendrich William N. Psychological Assessment of Sexually Abused Children and Their Families (Interpersonal Violence: The Practice Series) Thousand Oaks CA Sage Publications 2001
  • Singh, R., & Ho, S. Y. (2000). Attitudes and attraction: A new test of the attraction, repulsion and similarity-dissimilarity asymmetry hypotheses. British Journal of Social Psychology, 39(2), 197-211.
  • Galton, F. (1879). Psychometric experiments. Brain, 2, 149-162.
  • Sinha, D., & Sinha, M. (1990). Dissonance in work culture in India. In A. Moddie (Ed.), The concept of work in Indian society. Shimla: Indian Institute of Advanced Study.
  • Garb, H. N. (2003). Incremental validity and the assessment of psychopathology in adults. Psychological Assessment, 15, 508-520.
  • Sinha, J.B.P. (1985). The psychic relevance of work in Indian culture. Dynamic Psychiatry, 18, 134-141.
  • Money R.L. and Gordon L.V. 1950. Problem Checklist. Psychological Corporation. New York.
  • NACO Monthly updates on AIDS (31st July, 2005). Available at: http:// www.nacoonline.org/facts_reportjuly.htm
  • Gerald Corey (2001) Theory and Practice of Counseling and Psychotherapy, Wadsworth, Brooks/Cole Thomson Learning, United States.
  • Skarlicki, D. P., Folger, R., & Tesluk, P. (1999). Personality as a moderator in the relationship between fairness and retaliation. Academy of Management Journal, 42(1), 100-108.
  • Gibson Robert L. & Mitchell Mariance H. (2008) Introduction to Counselling And Guidance, Pearson Prentice Hall Inc., New Delhi, India.
  • Messer, S. B. (2001). What makes brief psychodynamic therapy time efficient? Clinical Psychology: Science and Practice, 8, 15-22.
  • Glasser, W. (1998). Choice theory: A new Psychology of Personal Freedom. New York: HarperCollins
  • Meyer, J. & Allen, N. (1991). A three-component conceptualisation of organisational commitment. Human Resource Management Review, 1(1), 61-89.
  • Mook, B. 2001.Evaluating information: A letter to a project manager.Wageningen: Technical Centre for Agricultural and Rural Cooperation ACP-EU (CTA).
  • Skinner, B. F. (1953b). Some contributions of an experimental analysis of behaviour to psychology as a whole. American Psychologist, 8, 69–78.
  • Mook, D. C. (2001) Psychological Research: The Ideas Behind the Methods. W. W. Norton & Company: New York, London
  • Skinner, B. F. (1966). What is the experimental analysis of behaviour? Journal of the Experimental Analysis of Behaviour, 9, 213–218.
  • Gough, H. G. (1985). A Work Orientation scale for the California Psychological Inventory. Journal of Applied Psychology, 70, 505-513.
  • Skinner, B. F. (1974). About behaviourism. New York: Knopf.
  • Gough, H.G. (1979). A creative Personality Scale for the Adjective Check List. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 37(8), 1398-1405.
  • Skinner, C.E. (ed.) (2001). Educational Psychology. Fourth Edition. New Delhi: Prentice Hall of India.
  • Grant, D. A., & Berg, E. A. (1993). Wisconsin Card Sorting Tesi. Odessa, FL: Psychological Assessment Resources.
  • Sklare, Gerald B. (2004). Brief Counseling That Works: A Solution-Focused Approach for School Counselors and Administrators (Paperback), 2nd edition. USA: Corwin Press.
  • Groth-Marnat, G. (1999). Handbook of Psychological Assessment (3rd ed.). New York: John Wiley & Sons.
  • Small, Deborah A. and George Loewenstein (2003), “Helping a victim or helping the victim: Altruism and identifiability,” Journal of Risk and Uncertainty, 26 (1), 5- 16
  • On patents - Daniel B. Ravicher (August 6, 2008). “Protecting Freedom In The Patent System: The Public Patent Foundation’s Missi...”. http:// www.youtube.com/watch?v=d0chez_Jf5A.
  • Smith, E.R. & Mackie,D.M. (2000). Social Psychology (2 nd ed.). New York: Worth.
  • www.morphius.com/manufacturing/pdf/ipr_form.pdf
  • Smith, K.D., Keating, J.P., and Stotland, E. (1989). Altruism reconsidered: The effect of denying feedback on a victim?s status to empathic witnesses. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 57(4), 641-650.
  • Wyatt, Judith & Hare, Chauncey Work Abuse: How to Recognise and Survive It (1997)
  • Smith, P.C., Kendall, L.M., & C.L. Hulin, C.L. (1969). The Measurement of Satisfaction in Work and Retirement: A Strategy for the Study of Attitudes. Chicago: Rand McNally.
  • McCrae, R. R. (2001). Trait psychology and culture: Exploring intercultural comparisons. Journal of Personality, 69, 819-846.
  • Smith, S. M., Ward, T. B., and Finke, R. A. (1995). The creative cognition approach. Cambridge University Press.
  • Nezu, A. M., Nezu, C. M., and Perri, M. G. (1989). Problem-solving therapy for depression: theory, research, and clinical guidelines. New York: Wiley.
  • Smither, R.D. (1988). The psychology of human and work performance. New York: Haper & Row.
  • Yang, K. S., & Lee, P. H. (1971). Likeability, meaningfulness and familiarity of 557 Chinese adjectives for personality trait description. Acta Psychologica Taiwanica, 13, 36-37. (in Chinese)
  • Snyderman, M. & Rothman, S. (1987), Survey of expert opinion on intelligence and aptitude testin., American Psychologist42: 137–144
  • Nichols, Michael P., and Richard C. Schwartz. Family Therapy: Concepts and Methods. Boston: Allyn and Bacon, 1991.
  • Soldz, S. Budman, S., Davis, M. and Demby, A. (1993). Beyond the interpersonal circumplex in group psychotherapy : The structure and relationship to overcome of the Individual Group Member Interpersonal Process Scale, Journal of Clinical Psychology, 49, 551-563.
  • Yousef, D. A. (1998). Satisfaction with job security as a predictor of organisational commitment and job performance in a multicultural environment. International Journal of Manpower, 19(3), 184-194.
  • Soloman, L.Z, Solomon, H., & Stone, R. (1978). Helping as a function of number of bystanders and ambiguity of emergency. Personality and Social Psychology Bulletin, 4, 318-321. .
  • Yudofsky SC. The Overt Aggression Scale for the objective rating of verbal and physical aggression. American Journal of Psychiatry 1986;143:35–39. [PubMed: 3942284]
  • Mazzone, Jason. “Copyfraud”. Brooklyn Law School, Legal Studies Paper No. 40. New York University Law Review 81 (2006): 1026. (Abstract.)
  • Zaccaria, J .S. (1965). Developmental tasks: Implications for the goals of guidance. Personnel and Guidance Journal, 44, 372-375.
  • Some portion has taken from Mamta Sharma (B.A. course 2, block 1, unit 1.) and Varsha Godbole (B.A. course 9, group I, block 2, unit 1), IGNOU course materials (2010) New Delhi.
  • Zander, A. and A. Havelin. “Social comparison and interpersonal attraction,” Hum. Rel., 1960, 13, 21-32.
  • Somer, O., & Goldberg, L. R. (1999). The structure of Turkish trait-descriptive adjectives. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 76, 431-450.
  • Zelli A, Dodge KA, Lochman JE, Laird RD, Conduct Problems Prevention Research Group. (1999). The distinction between beliefs legitimizing aggression and deviant processing of social cues: Testing measurement validity and the hypothesis that biased processing mediates the effects of beliefs on aggression. J Pers Soc Psychol 77:150–166.
  • Maslow, A.H. (1970). Motivation and personality (2 nd Ed.). New York: Harper & Row.
  • Zuckerman,m.(1994).Behavioural expressions and biosocial bases of sensation seeking.NY:Cambridge University Press.
  • Spates, J.L (1993) The sociology of values, Annual Review of Sociology, 9, 27-49. Steven Kerr (Ed.), Organisational behaviour, pp. 355-378.
  • Brigance, A. (1983). Brigance Diagnostic Inventory of Basic Skills. North Billerica, MA: Curriculum Associates.
  • Spearman, C. (1923).The nature of intelligence and the principles of cognition. London: Macmillan
  • Jenkins D D., Shacter, H. S. & Bower W. B. (1966) These are your Children. Glenview, Ill: Scott, Foresman, 1966.
  • Spearman, C. (1927).The abilities of man. London: Macmillan
  • Mullaly, R. (1997). Structural social work: Ideology, theory, and practice (2nd edition). New York: Oxford University Press.
  • Nadeau, K.G., Quinn, P.,& Littman, E.(2001).AD\HD Self-rating for girls. Springfield, MD: Advantage books.
  • Schwartz M. W. et al. (1990) Pediatric Primary Care. New York: York Book Med.
  • Spector, P. E. (1997). Job satisfaction: Application, assessment, causes, and consequences. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage.
  • Thorndike, R. L., Hagen, E. P., Sattler, J. M. (1986). Technical Manual: The Standford-Binet Intelligence Scale (4 th ed.). Chicago: Riverside.
  • Spencer L, Ritchie J, Lewis J et al. et al. Quality in Qualitative Evaluation: a framework for assessing research evidence: a framework for assessing research evidence. Government chief social researcher’s office 2003.
  • Abeles, N. (1990). Rediscovering psychological assessment Clinical Psychologist, 10, 3-4.
  • Meyer, J. P., & Allen, N. J. (1984). Testing the ‘‘side-bet theory’’ of organisational commitment: Some methodological considerations. Journal of Applied Psychology, 69, 372–378.
  • McCrae, R. R. (2002). NEO-PI-R data from 36 cultures: Further intercultural comparisons. In R. R. McCrae & J. Allik (Eds.), The Five-Factor Model of Personality Across Cultures (pp. 105-126). New York: Kluwer Academic/Plenum Publishers.
  • Namie, Gary & Namie, Ruth: The Bully at Work’ Second Edition’ (2009)
  • Alberto, P.A. & Troutman, A.C. (2006). Applied Behaviour Analysis for Teachers (7th ed). Columbus: OH: Merill.
  • Meyer, J. P., Allen, N. J., & Smith, C. A. (1993). Commitment to Organisations and Occupations: Extension and Test of a Three-Component Conceptualisation. Journal of Applied Psychology, 78 (4), 538-552.
  • Alderfer, C. P. (1976) Boundary relations and organisational diagnosis. In H. Meltzer & F. R.Wickert (Eds.), Humanizing organisational behaviour. Springfield, 111.: Charles C Thomas
  • Spitzer, R. L, & Wakefield, J. C. (1999). DSM-IV diagnostic criterion for clinical significance: does it help solve the false positives problem? American Journal of Psychiatry. 156(12), 1856-64.
  • Alderfer, C. P., & Holbrook, J. (1973). A new design for survey feedback. Education and Urban Society, 5, 437- 464.
  • Srivastava, Sushil Kumar (2007). Career Counselling. Saujanya Publications, New Delhi
  • Alford, B. A., & Beck, A. T. (1997). The Integrative Power of Cognitive Therapy. New York: Guilford Press.
  • Staub, E. (1971). The use of role playing and induction in children?s learning of helping and sharing behaviour. Child Development, 42, 805-816.
  • Allen , DM (1998) Unifying Individual and Family Therapies. San Francisco: Jossey-Bass
  • Staub, E. (1979). Positive social behaviour and morality:Vol. 2. Socialization and development. New York: Academic Press.
  • Alloy L.B., Abramson L.Y., Urosevic S., Walshaw P.D., Nusslock R., Neeren A.M. (2005) The psychosocial context of bipolar disorder: environmental, cognitive, and developmental risk factors. Clinical Psychology Review. 25, 1043–1075.
  • Stebbins, Robert A. (2001) Exploratory Research in the Social Sciences. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage.
  • Amabile, T.M. (1982). Social psychology of creativity: a consensual assessment technique. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 43(5), 997-1013.
  • Steers, R. M. (1977). Antecedents and outcomes of organisational commitment. Administrative Science Quarterly, 22, 46–56.
  • American Association on Mental Retardation (AAMR). 444 North Capitol St., NW, Suite 846, Washington, D.C.
  • Stern, W. (1912). The Psychological Methods of Intelligence Testing (G. Whipple, Trans.). Baltimore: Warwick and York.
  • American Psychiatric Association (1980). Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders. 3rd edition. Washington, DC: American Psychiatric Association.
  • Stern, W. (1914).The psychological methods of testing intelligence.(Tr. By G. M. Whipple) Baltimore: Barwick&York
  • American Psychiatric Association, Herold and Velora, Press release April 15, 2010.
  • Sternberg R, &Detterman DK. (1986).What is Intelligence? : Contemporary Viewpoints on its Nature and Definition.Ablex Publishing
  • American Psychological Association. (1992). Ethical principles of psychologists and code of conduct. American Psychologist, 47, 1597-1611.
  • NCERT (2009). Guidance in Action (Module 8), Course material developed for IDGC. NCERT, New Delhi
  • American Psychological Association. (2003). Guidelines on multicultural education, training, research, practice, and organizational change for psychologists. American Psychologist, 58, 377-402.
  • Sternberg, R. J. (1988). The triarchic mind: A new theory of human intelligence. New York: Viking. Image courtesy of Robert J. Sternberg, taken by Michael Marsland, Yale University, Office of Public Affairs.
  • Andersen, E.M., and Lambert, M.J (1995) Short-Term Dynamically Oriented Psychotherapy: A Review and Meta-Analysis. Clinical Psychology Review.9, 503514.
  • Sternberg, R. J. (1996). Successful intelligence. New York: Simon & Schuster. (Paperback edition: New York: Dutton, 1997).
  • Anderson, B. L. (1992). Psychological intervention for cancer patients to enhance quality of life. Journal of Consulting and Clinical Psychology, 60, 552-568.
  • Sternberg, R. J. (1997). The concept of intelligence and its role in lifelong learning and success. American Psychologist, 52(10), 1030-1037.
  • Andriopoulus, Constantine and Patrick Dawson.(2009). Managing Change, Creativity and Innovation. New Delhi. Sage Publication.
  • Sternberg, R. J. (1997). Thinking styles. New York: Cambridge University Press.
  • Antoni. M.H. & Goodkin, K. (1991). The interaction of viral and psychological factors in the promotion of cervical neoplasia. In H. Balner and J. Have (Eds.) Coping with cancer and beyond: Cancer treatment and mental health. Amsterdam: Sweets and Zeilnger
  • Sternberg, R. J. (1999). The theory of successful intelligence. Review of General Psychology, 3, 292–316.
  • Archer, J. (2003, November 19). Survey: Administrators vexed by mandates. Education Week, 23(12), pp. 3-6.
  • Sternberg, R. J. (2006). The nature of creativity. Creativity Research Journal, 18 (1), 87-98.
  • Argyris, C., &Schon, D. (1978). Organisational learning: A theory of action perspective. Reading, MA: Addison-Wesley.
  • Sternberg, R. J. and Lubart, T. I. (1999). The concept of creativity: Prospects and Paradigms. In R.J. Sternberg (ed.). Handbook of Creativity. London: Cambridge University Press.
  • McCrae, R. R., & John, O. P. (1992). An introduction to the Five-Factor Model and its applications. Journal of Personality, 60, 175-215.
  • Sternberg, R. J. R. J. &Frensch, P. A. (1990) Intelligence and cognition. In M. W. Eysenck (Ed.) International review of cognitive psychology. Chichester: Wiley
  • Arulmani (2007); Leong & Savickas (2007); Leach,Akhurst & Basson (2003 ); Watson & Fouche (2007); Wolf (1998). The Social And Historical Context of Counseling Psychology. recruited on 11/1/2011 from www.uk.sagepub.com/ upm...orlans.
  • McCall, G.J., & Simmons, J.L. (1966). Identities and Interactions. New York: Free Press.
  • Milgram, Stanley. (1963). “Behavioural Study of Obedience”. [1] Journal of Abnormal and Social Psychology 67, 371-378
  • Stillings, N, Feinstein, M., Garfield, J., Rissland, E., Rosenbaum, D., Weisler, S., & Baker-Ward, L. (1987). Cognitive Science: An Introduction. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.
  • Norcross, J. S., & Goldfried, M. R. (Eds.), (2005). Handbook of psychotherapy integration (2nd ed.). New York: Oxford University Press.
  • Stith, S. M., Rosen, K. H., McCollum, E. E., Coleman, J. U., and Herman, S. A. (1996). The voices of children: pre-adolescent children’s experiences in family therapy. Journal of Marital and Family Therapy, 22, 69-86.
  • B. F. Skinner (1938). The Behavior of Organisms: An Experimental Analysis. Cambridge, Massachusetts: B. F. Skinner Foundation.
  • Stodola, Q. and Stordahl, K. (1972). Basic Educational Tests and Measurement. New Delhi: Thomson (India).
  • Baddeley, A.D., Wilson, B.A. & Watts, F.N. (1995). Handbook of Memory Disorders. Chichester: Wiley.
  • Stone, A.A., Kesseler,R.C.,& Haythornthwaite, J.A.(1991). Measuring daily events and experiences: Decisions for the researchers. Journal of Personality, 59, 575 – 607.
  • Balster RL. Neural basis of inhalant abuse. Drug Alcohol Depend. Jun-Jul 1998;51(12):207-14. 
  • Stoner, A.F.J., Freeman, R.E., and Gilbert, Jr.D.R. (2000) Management, 6th edi, New Delhi, Prentice Hall of India.
  • McCrae, R., & Allik, K. (2002). The Five Factor Model of Perosnality Across Cultures. New York, Springer.
  • Storr, A. (1980). The art of psychotherapy. New York: Methuen
  • Baruth & Robinson (1987): An Introduction to the Counseling Profession. Prentice-Hall
  • Strain, E. C., Mum,ford, G. K., Silverman, K., & Griffiths, R. R. (1994). Caffeine dependence syndrome: Evidence from case histories and experimental evaluations. Journal of the American Medical Association, 272, 1043-1048.
  • Beck, A. T. (1976). Cognitive Therapy and Emotional Disorders. New York: International Universities Press.
  • Strauss A, Corbin J. Basics of Qualitative Research: Grounded Theory Procedures and Techniques. Sage, 1990.
  • Beck, Richard & Fernandez, Ephrem (1998). Cognitive-Behavioural Therapy in the Treatment of Anger: A Meta-Analysis. Cogn itive Therapy and Research ‚ Vol. 22‚ No. 1‚ 1998‚ pp. 63-74
  • Strega S. (2005). The view from the poststructural margins: Epistemology and methodology reconsidered. In L. Brown, & S. Strega (Eds.), Research as resistance (pp. 199–235). Toronto: Canadian Scholars’ Press.
  • Morse JM, Barett M, Mayan M, Olson K, Spiers J. Verification strategies for establishing reliability and validity in qualitative research. Int J of Qual Meth 2002; 1 (2):spring. Mays N, Pope C. Qualitative research in health care Assessing quality in qualitative research. BMJ 2000;320:50-52. 15
  • Stricker, G., and J. Gold. (Eds.) Comprehensive handbook of psychotherapy integration. New York: Plenum, 1993.
  • Beighley PS, Brown GR, Thompson JW Jr. DSM-III-R brief reactive psychosis among Air Force recruits. J Clin Psychiatry. Aug 1992;53(8):283-8. [Medline].
  • NCERT (2009). Introduction to Guidance (Module 1), Course material developed for IDGC. NCERT, New Delhi
  • Bennett, G K., Seashore, H. G, &Wesman, A. G. (1981). Differential Aptitude Tests (DAT) (5th ed.). New York: Psychological Corporation
  • Sugarman.L. (2004). Counselling and the Life Course. London: Sage.
  • Bentall, R. (2006). Madness explained: Why we must reject the Kraepelinian paradigm and replace it with a ‘complaint-orientated’ approach to understanding mental illness. Medical hypotheses, 66(2), 220-233.
  • Sunderland, J. (2004) Gendered discourses. New York: PalgraveMacmillan.
  • Bergman JI. Managing change in the nonprofit sector: lessons from the evolution of five independent research libraries. San Francisco, CA: Jossey-Bass, 1996.
  • Super, D.E., Crites, J.O., Humel, R.C., Moser, H.P. Overstreet, P.L., and Warnath, C.F. (1957). Vocational Development: A Framework for Research, New York: Teachers’ College, Bureau of Publications.
  • Berne, E. (1964). Transactional Analysis in Psychotherapy: The Classic Handbook to its Principles. London: Souvenir Press.
  • Sutherland, Woodward and Maxwell, Introductory Sociology.
  • Bernstein, D. P., Useda, D. & Siever, L. J. (1995). Paranoid personality disorder. In W. J. Livesley (Ed). The DSM-IV personality disorders. Diagnosis and treatment of mental disorders, New York: Guilford.
  • Tagiuri, R. “Social preference and its perception,” in R. Tagiuri and L. Petrullo (Eds.), Person Perception and Interpersonal Behaviour. Stanford: Stanford University Press, 1958, 316-336.
  • Berrios G E, Beer D (1994). “The notion of Unitary Psychosis: a conceptual history”. History of Psychiatry 5 (17 Pt 1): 13–36.
  • Tajfel, H. and Israel J. (ed.) (1972) The Context of Social Psychology. Academic Press: London and New York.
  • Beutler, L.E. & Harwood, T.M. (1995). How to assess clients in pre-treatment planning. In Butcher, J.N. (Ed.), Clinical Personality Assessment (pp. 59-77). New York: Oxford.
  • Neil M. Orr, David Patient (2007). Positive Health: Empowerment Concepts, London.
  • Binet, A. & Henri, V. (1895). La psychologieindividuelle. L'AnneePsychologique, 2, 411-465.
  • Tamil Nadu State AIDS Control Society: Activities of TANSACS. Chennai: TANSACS, 2005.
  • Bing EG, Burnam MA, Longshore D, (2010). The estimated prevalence of psychiatric disorders, drug use and drug dependence among people with HIV disease in the United States: results from the HIV Cost and Services Utilization Study. Archives of General Psychiatry, in Press.
  • Taylor, F. (1911). Principles of scientific management. New York: Harper.
  • Birchwood, M; Trower P (2006). “The future of cognitive-behavioural therapy for psychosis: not a quasi-neuroleptic”. British Journal of Psychiatry 188: 108–108.
  • Taylor, F. (1911). Scientific management. New York: Harper.
  • Blalock, HM (1960), Social Statistics, NY: McGraw-Hill.
  • Nelson, D.L. & Quick, J. (2003). Organisational Behaviour: Foundations, realities & challenges, 4th Ed. Ohio: South-Western, Thomson.
  • Blatner, A. (1997). Psychodrama: The state of the art .The Arts inPsychotherapy, 24(1), 23-30.
  • Tedeschi JT, Felson RB. 1994. Violence, Aggression, & Coercive Actions. Washington, DC: Am. Psychol. Assoc.
  • Block, P. (2000). Flawless consulting: A Guide to Getting Your Expertise Used (2nd ed.). San Francisco: Jossey-Bass.
  • Nelson, T.D. (1999).Motivational bases of prosocial and altruistic behaviour: a critical reappraisal. Journal of Research, 4(1), 23–31.
  • Bloon, B.L. (1981) Focused Single-Session Therapy: Initial Development and Evaluation. In S.H Budman (Ed1) Forms of Brief Therapy (pg 66-82) New York: Gulford
  • Tennant, M. and Pogson, P. (1995) Learning and Change in the Adult Years, San Fransisco: Jossey-Bass. Provides a very helpful overview of life course development for those concerned with lifelong learning.
  • Boll, T. (1981). The Halstead-Reitan Neuropsychological Battery. InS. B. Fisher & T. J. Boll (Eds.), Handbook of clinical neuropsychology (Vol. I, pp. 577607). New York: Wiley.
  • Teri, L., Curtis, J., Gallagher-Thompson, D., et al (1994) Cognitive/behaviour therapy with depressed older adults. In Diagnosis and Treatment of Depression in the Elderly: Proceedings of the NIH Consensus Development Conference (eds L. S. Schneider, C. F. Reynolds, B. Lebowitz, et al). Washington, DC: American Psychiatric Press.
  • Bornstein, R. E. (1997). Dependent personality disorder in the DSM-IV and beyond. Clinical Psychology: Science and Practice, 4, 175-187.
  • Terman, L. M. (1921). In Intelligence and its measurement: A symposium. Journal of Educational Psychology, 12
  • Bourne, L.E., Ekstrand, B., & Dominowski, R. 1971. The Psychology of Thinking. Englewood Cliffs, N.J.: Prentice-Hall.
  • Terman, L. M. (1925). Genetic studies of genius (Vol. I) Mental and physical traits of a thousand gifted children. Stanford: University Press.
  • Bowden, C.L. (1993). The clinical approach to differential diagnosis of bipolar disorder. Psychiatric Annals, 23, 57-63.
  • Terracciano, A., Abdel-Khalak, A. M., Adam, N., Adamovova, L., Ahn, C.-k., Ahn, H.-n., et al. (2005). National character does not reflect mean personality trait levels in 49 cultures. Science, 310, 96-100.
  • Bowlby, J. (1973). Attachment and loss, Vol. 2: Separation, New York: Basic Books.
  • Teun Van Dijk, Racism and the Press, in Robert Miles, ed., Critical Studies in Racism and Migration, (New York: Routledge, 1991).
  • Boyle, R. and D. Lemaire (eds.). 1999. Building effective evaluation capacity. New Brunswick, NJ: Transaction Publishers.
  • The National Council of Educational Research and Training (NCERT) recruited on 19th January 2011 from www.ncert.nic.in/announcements
  • Bradford, D. L. & Burke, W. W. (Eds.) (2005).Reinventing organisation development: New approaches to change in organisations.Wiley & Sons.
  • Thibaut, J. W. and H. H. Kelley. The Social Psychology of Groups. New York: Wiley and Sons, 1959, 89-99.
  • Bradford, D.L. & Burke, W.W. (Editors), 2005, Reinventing Organisation Development. San Francisco: Pfeiffer.
  • Thomas, G. and James, D. (2006). Reinventing grounded theory: some questions about theory, ground and discovery, British Educational Research Journal, 32, 6, 767–795.
  • Brady, K. T.; R. B. Lydiard, R. Malcolm, and J. C. Ballenger (December 1991). “Cocaine-induced psychosis”. Journal of Clinical Psychiatry 52 (12): 509–512. 117–9. 
  • Thomas, K.W., & Tymon,W. G., Jr. (1997). Bridging the motivation gap in total quality management. Quality Management Journal, 4(2), 80-96.
  • Braun, J., Kahn, R. S., Froehlich, T., Auinger, P., & Lanphear, B. P. (2006). Exposures to environmental toxicants and attention-deficit/hyperactivity disorder in U.S. children. Environmental Health Perspectives, 114, 1904-1909.
  • Thomas, L. T., & Ganster, D. C. (1995). Impact of family-supportive work variables on work-family conflict and strain: A control perspective. Journal of Applied Psychology, 80, 6-15.
  • Brown G.W., Harris T.O. (2001). Social Origins of Depression: A Study of Psychiatric Disorder in Women. Routledge
  • Thomas, R.M. (1990). Counseling and Life-span Development. London: Sage.
  • Bryson, J. 1995. Strategic planning for public and nonprofit organisations: A guide to strengthening and sustaining organisational achievement. San Francisco, CA: Jossey-Bass.
  • Thompson, L., Gallagher, D. & Breckenridge, J. S. (1987) Comparative effectiveness of psychotherapies for depressed elders. Journal of Consultant and Clinical Psychology, 55, 385–390.
  • Budd, J.W., & Bhave, D. (2010). The Employment Relationship. In A.Wilkinson et al., (Eds.), Sage Handbook of Human Resource Management. London: Sage.
  • Thompson, P., & Newsome, K. (2004). Labor process theory, work, and the employment relation. In B. E. Kaufman, (Ed.), Theoretical perspectives on work and the employment relationship. Champaign, IL: Industrial Relations Research Association.
  • Bunker, B. B. & Alban, B. T. (1997). Large group interventions: Engaging the whole system for rapid change. San Francisco, CA: Jossey-Bass.
  • Thomson, G. H. (1939). The factorial analysis of human ability. Boston: Houghton Mifflin
  • Burmeister, M., Melvin G. M., & Sebastian, Z. (2008). Psychiatric genetics: Progress and controversy. Nature Reviews Genetics 9, 527–540.
  • Thorndike, E. L. (1911). Animal intelligence. New York: Macmillan.
  • Burns, N. Standards for Qualitative Research. Nurs Sci Q 1989; 2(44): 44-52.
  • Thorndike, E. L. (1926). The measurement of intelligence. New York: Teachers College, Columbia University.
  • Burton, John W. and Frank Dukes.(1990). Conflict: Readings in Management and Resolution. St. Martin’s Press. NY
  • Thorne, Brian. (1992). Carl Rogers - Key Figures in Counselling and Psychotherapy Series. Sage publications.
  • Butcher, J. N., Williams, C. L., Graham, J. R., Archer, R. P., Tellegen, A., BenPorath, Y. S., et a!. (1992). Minnesota Multiphasic Personality InventoryAdolescent (MMPI-A): Manual for administration and scoring. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press.
  • Thornton, S. &Brotchie, J. (1987) Reminiscence: a critical review of the literature. British Journal of Clinical Psychology, 26, 93–111.—
  • Bycio, P. Hackett, R.D. & Allen, J. (1995). Further assessments of Bass’s (1985) conceptualisation of transactional and transformational leadership. Journal of Applied Psychology, 80(4), 468-478.
  • Thurstone, L. L. (1935). The vectors of mind: Multiple factor analysis for the isolation of primary traits. Chicago: University of Chicago Press
  • Caccioppo, J. T., &Tassinary, L. G. (Eds.). (1990). Principles of Psychophysiology- Physical Social and lntervential Elements. New York: Cambridge University Press.
  • Nemeth, C. & Kwan, J. (1987) Minority Influence, Divergent Thinking and the Detection of Correct Solutions. Journal of Applied Social Psychology 17: 788– 99
  • Camera, W. J., Nathan, J. S., & Puente, A. E. (2000). Psychological test usage: Implications in professional psychology. Professional Psychology: Research and Practice, 31(2) 141-154.
  • Tim Bond (2000): Standards and Ethics for Counselling in Action. SAGE Publication
  • Careers in clinical and counseling psychology in India recruited on 19th January 2011 from www.winentrance.com/career_courses.
  • Toi, M., & Batson, C. D. (1982). More evidence that empathy is a source of altruistic motivation. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 43, 281-292.
  • Novick, M.R., & Lewis, C. (1967). Coefficient Alpha and the Reliability of Composite Measurements. Psychometrika, 32, 1-13.
  • Neugebauer R, Hoek HW, Susser E. Prenatal exposure to wartime famine and development of antisocial personality disorder in early adulthood. Journal of the American Medical Association 1999;4:479–481
  • Carskadon, M. A., (1990). Patterns of sleep and sleepiness in adolescents. Pediatrician, 17, 5-12.
  • Torrance, E. P. (1977). Discovery and nurturance of giftedness in the culturally different. Reston, VA: Council on Exceptional Children.
  • Castells, M. 1996. The rise of the network society, the information age: Economy, society and culture. Cambridge and Oxford: Blackwell.
  • Meyer, J. P., Paunonen, V., Gellatly, I. R., Goffin, R. D., & Jackson, D. N. (1989). Organisational commitment and job performance: It’s the nature of the commitment that counts. Journal of Applied Psychology, 74(1), 152-156.
  • Cattell, R. B. (1963). Theory of fluid and crystallized intelligence: A critical experiment. Journal of Educational Psychology, 54, 1-22.
  • Toseland, R.W. and Rivas, R. F. (2001). An introduction to group work practice (4th edition.) Allyn and Bacon.
  • Morgan, 2006. Images of organisations, Upgraded Ed. New Delhi: Sage.
  • Tosi, LH, Mrero, NP & Rizzo, John R: Managing Organisational Behaviour, Blackwell: Oxford
  • Chaplin, J. P. (1985). Dictionary of psychology (2"cted.). New York: Dell.
  • Meyer, J.P. & Allen, N.J. (1997). Commitment in the Workplace: Theory, Research, and Application. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage Publications.
  • Miller, Arthur Raphael, and Michael H. Davis. Intellectual Property: Patents, Trademarks, and Copyright. 3rd ed. New York: West/Wadsworth, 2000. ISBN 0-314-23519-1.
  • Triandis, H.C., Dunnette, M.D. and Hough, L.M. (Eds) (1998). Handbook of Industrial and Organizational Psychology, Vol.1-4, Jaico Publishing House.
  • Christian Reformed World Relief Committee. 1997. Partnering to build and measure organisational capacity. Lessons from NGOs around the world. Grand Rapids, MI: Christian Reformed World Relief Committee.
  • Troll, L.E. (1989). Myths of midlife intergenerational relationships. In S. Hunter and M. Sundel (eds), Midlife Myths: Issues, Findings and Practice Implications. Newbury Park, CA: Sage.
  • Cicchetti D, & Toth SL. (1995). Developmental psychopathology and disorders of affect. In: Cicchetti D, Cohen DJ, editors. Developmental Psychopathology: Risk, disorder, and adaptation. Vol. 2. Wiley; New York, 369–420.
  • Trompenaars, F. & Hampden-Turner, C. (1999). Riding the waves of culture, 2nd Ed. London: Nicholas Brealey.
  • Clemence, A., & Handler, L. (2001). Psychological assessment on internship: A survey of training directors and their expectations for students. Journal of Personality Assessment, 76, 18-47.
  • McCann, D., Barrett, A., Cooper, A., Crumpler, D., Dalen, L., Grimshaw, K., Kitchin, E., Lok, E., Porteous, L., Prince, E., Sonuga-Barke, E., Warner, J. O. & Stevenson J. (2007). Food additives and hyperactive behaviour in 3-year-old and 8/9-year-old children in the community: a randomised, double-blinded, placebocontrolled trial. Lancet, 370, 1560-1567.
  • Clutterbuck, David., & Kernanghan, Susan. (1995). The Power of Empowerment: Release the Hidden Talents of your Employees. London. Kogan Page Limited.
  • Tsui, K., Leung, T., Cheung, Y., Mok, H., & Ho, W. (1994). The relationship of teacher’s organisational commitment to their perceived organisational health and personal characteristics in primary schools. Journal of Primary Education, 4(2), 27-41.
  • Cognitive and emotional aspects of Parkinson’s disease. National Institute of Neurological Disorders and Stroke, National Institute on Aging, and National Institute of Mental Health working group meeting, January 24-25, 2001. Unpublished summary.
  • Tuckman, B. (1963). Developmental sequence in small groups. Psychological Bulletin, 63, 384-399.
  • Collison, C. and G. Parcell. 2001. Learning to fly. Oxford: Capstone.
  • Tupes, E. C., & Christal, R. E. (1992). Recurrent personality factors based on trait ratings. Journal of Personality, 60, 225-251. (Original work published 1961)
  • Compton, D. W., M. Baizerman, and S. HueftleStockdill (eds.). 2002. The art, craft, and science of evaluating capacity building. New directions for program evaluation.Number 93.Spring 2002.
  • Turkheimer, E., Haley, A., Waldron, M., D’Onofrio, B., & Gottesman, I. I. (2003). Socioeconomic status modifies heritability of IQ in young children. Psychological Science, 14, 623-628.
  • Conley Tyler, M., & Raines, S. (2006). The human face of on-line dispute resolution [Colloquy]. Conflict Resolution Quarterly, 23 (3), 333-342.
  • Turner, J.C. (1964). Social identification and psychological group formation. In H. Tajfel (Ed.) The social dimensions: European developments in social psychology, Vol.2, London: Cambridge University Press (pp.10, 318).
  • Cooper, A.M. & Ronningstam, E. (1992). Narcissistic personality disorder. In A. Tasman & M. B. Riba (Eds.) Review of Psychiatry (Vol.11, pp. 80-97). Washington, DC: Psychiatric Press.
  • Turner, J.C.,Hogg, M.A., Oakes, P.J., Reicher, S.D., and Wetherell, M.S. (1987). Rediscovering the social group: a self-categorization theory. Oxford, UK: Basil Blackwell.
  • Corey, G. (2001b). Case Approach to Counseling and Psychotherapy (5th ed). Pacific Grove, CA: Brooks/Cole.
  • Turner, N., Barling, J., & Zacharatos, A. (2002). Positive psychology at work. In C. R. Snyder & S. J. Lopez (Eds.), Handbook of positive psychology. New York: Oxford University Press.
  • Corey, Gerald (2001a). The Art of Integrative Counseling. Pacific Grove, CA: Brooks Cole.
  • Tyler, T.R. (1999).Why people cooperate with organizations: an identity-based perspective. Research in Organizational Behaviour, 21, 201–46.
  • Corey, Gerald (2009). Theory and Practice of Counseling and Psychotherapy. Belmont, CA: Thomson Brooks/Cole.
  • Neukrug, E.S., Barr, Carol, G., Hoffman, Libby R., and Kaplan, Leslie, S. (1993). Developmental counseling and guidance: A model for use in your school. The School Counselor, May, Vol. 10, pp. 356-361 ..
  • Costa, P., & McCrae, R. (1985). NED-Personality Inventory manual. Odessa, FL: Psychological Assessment Resources.
  • Micceri T. (1989) The Unicorn, The Normal Curve, and Other Improbable Creatures. Psychological Bulletin, 156-66.
  • Costa, P., & McCrae, R. (1992). Revised NED-Personality Inventory (NEDPI-R) and NED Five Factor Inventory (NED-FFI): Professional manual. Odessa, FL: Psychological Assessment Resources.
  • Michalko, M. (1998). Thinking like a genius: Eight strategies used by the supercreative, from Aristotle and Leonardo to Einstein and Edison. The Futurist, 32(4), 21.
  • Counsellling psychology in India. from The Social and Historical Context of Counselling PSYCHOLOGY PDF file www.uk.sagepub.com/upm-data On 19th January 2011
  • Update (Fourth ed.). Upper Saddle River, N.J.: Pearson Education.
  • Craik, F.I.M., Anderson, N.D., Kerr, S.A. & Li, K. (1995). Memory changes in normal ageing. In Baddeley, A.D., Wilson, B.A. & Watts, F.N. (Eds.), Handbook of Memory Disorders (pp. 211-241). Chichester: Wiley.
  • Ursano, Robert J., Sonnenberg,Stephen M., Lazar, Susan G. (2004). Concise Guide to Psychodynamic Psychotherapy. London: American Psychiatric Publishing, Inc.
  • Cranunond, Bonnie (1994). The Torrance tests of creative thinking: from design through establishment of predictive validity. In Subotnik, R.F. & Arnold, K.D. (Eds.), Beyond Terman: Contemporary Longitudinal Studies of Giftedness and Talent (pp. 229-254). Norwood, NJ: Ablex.
  • Vaidhyanathan, Siva. The Anarchist in the Library: How the Clash Between Freedom and Control Is Hacking the Real World and Crashing the System. New York: Basic Books, 2004.
  • Cronbach, L.(1951). Coefficient Alpha and the Internal Structure of Tests. Psychometrika, 16, 297-334.
  • Van der Velde, M.E.G., Bossink, C.J.H., & Jansen, P.G.W. (2003). Gender differences in the influence of professional tenure on work attitudes. Sex Roles, 49 (3-4), 153-162.
  • Cummings and Worley, “Organization Development and Change”, Sixth Edition, South-Western Publishing, 1997, p.2.
  • Van Houten, R., & Axelrod, S. (Eds.). (1993). Behaviour analysis and treatment. New York: Plenum.
  • Noyes J, Popay J, Pearson A, Hannes K, Booth A. Chapter 20: Qualitative research and Cochrane reviews. In: Higgins JPT, Green S (editors). Cochrane Handbook for Systematic Reviews of Interventions. Version 5.0.1 [updated September 2008]. The Cochrane Collaboration, 2008.
  • VanTatenhove, G. M. (2005).Normal Language Development, Generative Language and AAC.
  • Miller, W. R. and Rollnick, S. (1991). Motivational interviewing: preparing people to change addictive behaviour. New York: Guilford Press.
  • Vashist, S.R. (1995). Evaluation of Guidance, Anmol Publications Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi
  • Daryl Fujii and Iqbal Ahmed (Eds)(2007). The Spectrum of Psychotic Disorders: Neurobiology, Etiology & Pathogenesis, Cambridge University Press, London.
  • Veeraraghavan, V and Singh, Shalinig (2000) Treatment of Anxiety Disorders. Sage Publications.
  • Davis, G.A. (1975). In frumious pursuit of the creative person. Journal of Creative Behaviour, 9(2), 75-87.
  • Viollis, Paul. “Most Workplace Violence Avoidable.” Business Insurance. 11 April 2005.
  • Miltenberger, R. G. (2004). Behaviour Modification Principles and Procedures (3rd ed.). California: Wadsworth/Thompson.
  • vonDran GM, Cargill J. eds. Catalysts for change: managing libraries in the 1990s. New York, NY: Haworth Press, 1993.
  • DeCotis, T.A., & Summers, T. P. 1987. The path analysis of a model of the antecedents and consequences of organisational commitment. Human Relations. 40(7), 445-470.
  • McGuire, K. D., & Weisz, J. R. (1982). Social cognition and behaviour correlates of preadolescent chumship. Child Development, 53, 1478-1484.
  • Delis, D. C., Kaplan, E., & Kramer, J. H. (2001). Manual for the Delis-Kaplan executive function system (D-KEFS). San Antonio, TX: Psychological Corporation.
  • W.K. Kellogg Foundation. Weiss, C.H. 1998. Evaluation. Upper Saddle River, NJ: Prentice-Hall, Inc.
  • Delis; D. C., Kramer, J. H., Kaplan, E., &Ober, B. A. (2000). Manual for the California verbal learning test (3rd ed.). San Antonio, TX: Psychological Corporation.
  • Wachowiak, D. G. Model-reinforcement counseling with college males. Journal of Counseling Psychology, 1972, 19, 3 87—392.
  • Dependent personality disorder – International Statistical Classification of Diseases and Related Health Problems 10th Revision (ICD- 10).
  • Wachtel. P. L. (1977). Psychoanalysis and behaviour therapy: Toward an integration. New York: Basic.
  • Depression Guideline Panel. Clinical practice guideline, number 5. Depression in primary care: volume 1. Detection and diagnosis. AHCPR Pub. No. 93-0551. Rockville, MD: U.S. Department of Health and Human Services, Agency for Health Care Policy and Research, 1993.
  • Wade, G. & Tavris, C. Psychology: Pearson Education.
  • Minuchin, S. (1974). Families and family therapy. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.
  • Waldron, V. R., & Applegate, J. L. (1998). Similarity in the use of personcentered tactics: Effects on social attraction and persuasiveness in dyadic verbal disagreements. Communication Reports, 11(2), 155-165.
  • DiCicco-Bloom, E., Lord, C., Zwaigenbaum, L., Courchesne, E. Dager, S. R., Schmitz, C., Schultz, R. T., Crawley, J., & Young, L. J. (2006). The Developmental Neurobiology of Autism Spectrum Disorder, The Journal of Neuroscience, 26, 6897-6906.
  • Newcomb, T. M. (1963). Stabilities underlying changes in interpersonal attraction. Journal of Abnormal and Social Psychology, 66(4), 376-386.
  • Dobbert, D. (2007) Understanding Personality Disorders: An Introduction. Greenwood Press.
  • Wallas, G. (1926). The art of thought. New York: Harcourt, Brace.
  • Minuchin, S., Montalvo, B., Guerney, B., Rosman, B., and Schumer, F. (1967). Families of the slums. New York: Basic Books.
  • Walsh W.Bruce (1990). Career Counselling: Contemporary Topics in Vocational Psychology. Lawrence Erlbaum Associates, Publishers. Hillsdale, New Jersey and London
  • Minuchin, Salvador. Family Therapy Techniques. Cambridge: Harvard University Press, 1981.
  • Walter, J.L. and Peller, J.E. (1992) Becoming Solution Focussed in Brief Therapy. New York: Brunner/Mazel.
  • Eade, D. 1997. Capacity building. Oxford: Oxfam.
  • Hansson O, Tonnby B. [Serious Psychological Symptoms Caused by Clonazepam.] Läkartidningen.
  • Easterby-Smith, M., J. Burgoyne, and L. Araujo. 1999. Organisational learning and the learning organisation: Development in theory and practice. London: Sage.
  • Harper, Douglas (November 2001). “hallucinate”. Online Etymology Dictionary.
  • E-counseling. how2.ecounselling@hud.ac.uk Retrieved on 11 January 2011.
  • Guilford, J. P. (1959). Personality. New York: McGraw-Hill.
  • Edgar H. Schein, Organisational Culture and Leadership (San Francisco:JosseyBasss Publishers, 1985).
  • Midlarsky, E. (1968). Aiding responses: An analysis and review. Merrill-Palmer Quarterly, 14, 229-269.
  • Morgan, C.D.,& Murray, H. A. (1935).A method for investigating fantasies: The thematic Apperception Test. Archives of Neurology and Psychiatry,34,289-306.
  • Gunderson, J. G., and Ronningstam, E. (2001). Differentiating narcissistic and Antisocial Personality Disorders. Journal of Personality Disorders, 15, 103-109.
  • Edwards, A. L. (1959). The Edwards Personal Preference Schedule (Rev. ed.). New York: Psychological Corporation.
  • Guy, S. C., Isquith, P. K., &Gioia, G. A. (2005). Behavior Rating Inventory of Executive Function®-Self-Report Version. Lutz, FL: Psychological Assessment Resowces, Inc.
  • Elliott, C. D. (2007). Difefrential Ability Scales, Second Edition. San Antonio, TX: Psychological Corporation.
  • Hackett, R.D. and Guion, R.M. (1985). A re-evaluation of the absenteeism -job satisfaction relationship. Organisational Behaviour and Human Decision Processes, 35, 340-381.
  • Ellis, A. (1960). The Art and Science of Love. New York:Bantam.
  • Haddock, G; Lewis S (2005). “Psychological interventions in early psychosis”. Schizophrenia Bulletin 31 (3): 697–704.
  • Ellis, A. (1970). Rational Emotive Therapy and its Application to Emotional Education. Institute of Rational Living, New York.
  • Hall, A. 2002. Innovation systems: Agenda for North-South research collaboration and capacity development. Special issue of International Journal of Technology Management and Sustainable Development. December (2002): 1–82.
  • en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Human_rights
  • Hallam, K. T., Olver, J. S., Horgan, J. E., McGrath, C., & Norman, T. R. ( 2005). “Low doses of lithium carbonate reduce melatonin light sensitivity in healthy volunteers”. Int. J. Neuropsychopharmacol. 8, 255–9.
  • Eron, L. D. (1955). Some problems in the research application of the Thematic Apperception Test. Journal of Projective Techniques, 19, 125-129.
  • Hamilton, M. (1960). Hamilton Rating Scale for depression. Journal of Neurology, Neurosurgery, and Psychiatry, 23, 56-61.
  • ESRC Research Methods Festival, St. Catherine’s College Oxford, 30th June3rd July, 2008.
  • Hammill, D. D., Pearson, N., &Wiederholt, J. L. (1997). Comprehensive Test of Nonverbal Intelligence. Austin, TX: Pro-Ed.
  • Exner, J .. E., & Weiner, I. (1995). The Rorschach: A comprehensive system: Assessment of children and adolescents (Vol. 3, 2nd ed.). New York: Wiley.
  • Hanfmann, E., &Kasanin, J. (1937). A method for the study of concept formation. Journal of Psychology, 3, 521-540.
  • Exner, J. E. (1976). Projective techniques. In I. B. Weiner (Ed.), Clinical methods in psychology (pp. 61.:..121). New York: Wiley.
  • McFarlin, D. & Sweeney, P. (1992). Distributive and procedural justice as predictors of satisfaction with personal and organisational outcomes. Academy of Management Journal, 35, 626-637.
  • Mischel, Walter, and Yuichi Shoda. 1995. A Cognitive-Affective System Theory of Personality: Reconceptualising Situations, Dispositions, Dynamics, and
  • Weisman, A. D. (1985). Thanatology. In H. I. Kaplan & B. J. Sadock (Eds.), Comprehensive textbook of psychiatry/IV,vol. 2, Baltimore: Williams & Wilkins.
  • Exner, J. E., Jr. (1991). The Rorschach: A Comprehensive System: Vol. 2. Interpretation (2nd ed.). New York: Wiley.
  • Weiss D. J., Dawis, R. V., England, G. W., & Lofquist, L. H. (1967). Manual for the Minnesota satisfaction questionnaire. Minneapolis, MN.
  • Eysenck, H. J., & Eysenck, S. B. G. (1975). The Eysenck Personality Questionnaire Manual. London: Hodder& Stoughton.
  • Welfel & Peterson (2004): The Counseling Process: a Multi-theoretical Integrative Approach. Thomson/Brooks/Cole.
  • Farrell, John (2006). Paranoia and Modernity: Cervantes to Rousseau. Cornell University Press.
  • Wentzel, K. R., & Caldwell, K. (1997). Friendships, peer acceptance, and group membership: Relations to academic achievement in middle school. Child Development, 68, 1198-1209.
  • Mathes, E. W., & Moore, C. L. (1985). Reik’s complementarily theory of romantic love. The Journal of Social Psychology, 125, 321-327.
  • Wentzel, K. R., Barry, C. M., & Caldwell, K. (2004). Friendships in middle school: Influences on motivation and school adjustment. Journal of Educational Psychology, 96, 195-203.
  • First, M. B., Gibbon, M., Spitzer, R. L., Williams, J. B., & Benjamin, L. (1997). Stmctured Clinical Interview for DSM-IV Axis I disorders (SCID-1), clinical _ version. Washington, DC: American Psychiatric Press.
  • Whaley, L. F. & Wrong, D.L. (1988) Essentials of Pediatric Nursing (3 rd ed.). St. Louis: C. V. Moseby.
  • Omoto, A.M. and Snyder,M. (1995). Sustained helping without obligation: motivation, longevity of service, and perceived attitude change among AIDS volunteers. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 68(4), 671–86.
  • White, K.M. & Spiesman, J.C. (1982). Research approaches to personality. Monterey, C.A.: Brookes/Cole.
  • Fordyce, J. & Weil, R. (1979).Managing with people, A manager’s handbook of organisation development methods (2nd ed.). Reading, MA: Addison-Wesley.
  • Newell, A., Shaw, J. C. & Simon, H. A. (1963). The process of creative thinking. In H. E. Gruber, G. Terrel & M. Wertheimer (Eds.), Contemporary approaches to creative thinking. New York: Atherton.
  • Fox, S., Spector, P. E. & Miles, D. (2001). Counterproductive work behaviour (CWB) in response to job stresssors and organisational justice: Some mediator and moderator tests for autonomy and emotions. Journal of Vocational Behaviour, 59(3), 291-309.
  • White, R.W. (1975). Lives in progress: A study of the natural growth of personality (3 rd .). New York: Holt, Rinehart and Winston.
  • Francis, A. & Widiger, T. A. (1986). Methodological issues in personality disorder diagnosis. In T. Millon & G. Klerman (Eds.) Contemporary directions in psychopathology. New York: Guilford Press.
  • Whybrow, P. C. (1997). A mood apart. New York: Basic Books.
  • Freeman, A., Pretzer, J., Fleming, B. & Simon, K. M. (1990). Clinical applications of cognitive therapy. New York: Plenum Press.
  • Widiger, T. A. & Frances, A. J. (1994). Toward a dimensional model for the personality disorders. In P. T. Costa, Jr., & Widiger (Eds.), Personality Disorders and the Five-Factor Model of Personality. Washington: American Psychological Association
  • Freeman, D. & Garety, P. A. (2004). Paranoia: The Psychology of Persecutory Delusions. Hove: Psychology Press.
  • Widiger, T. A. & Sankis, L. M. (2000). Adult psychopathology: issues and controversies. Annual Review of Psychology, 51, 377–404.
  • French, Paul; Anthony Morrison (2004). Early Detection and cognitive therapy for people at high risk of developing psychosis. Chichester: John Wiley and Sons.
  • Wiener, I.B. (1997).Current status of the Rorschach Inkblot Method. Journal of Personality Assessment,68,5-19.
  • Fukuda-Parr, S., C. Lopes, and K. Malik (eds.). 2002. Capacity for development. New solutions to old problems. London and Sterling, VA: Earthscan and United Nations Development Program.
  • Wiener, Y., & Gechman, A. S. (1977). Commitment: A behavioural approach to job involvement. Journal of Vocational Behaviour, 10, 47-52.
  • Gabriele, S., Leverich, A., Robert, M. (2006). Post course of bipolar disorder after history of childhood trauma. The Lancet, 367, 1040–1042.
  • Wigfield, A., Lutz, S. L. and Wagner, A. L. (2005). Early adolescents’ development across the middle school years: Implications for school counselors. Professional School Counseling. 9 (2), 112-119.
  • Galton, Francis (1869). Hereditary Genius: An Inquiry into its Laws and Consequences. London: Macmillan.
  • Williams R.M. (1951). American Society: A sociological Interpretation, Alferd A.knopf Inc. New York, p. 445
  • Garb, H. N. (1998). Studying the Clinician: Judgment Research and Psychological Assessment. Washington, DC: American Psychological Association.
  • Wilson, M. Foina.,(2004) Organisational Behaviour and Work- A Critical Introduction, 2nd edi, Oxford, Oxford University Press, Inc.
  • Gardiner, J.M. & Richardson-Klavehn, A. (2000). Remembering and knowing. In Tulving, E. &Craik, F.I.M. (Eds.), The Oxford Handbook of Memory (pp. 229-244). New York: Oxford University Press.
  • Wilson,G.(1978).Introversion/extroversion.In H.London & J.E. Exner (Eds.). Dimensions of personality(pp. 217-261).New York:Wiley.
  • Mitchell, P., Mackinnon, A., & waters, B. (1993). The genetics of bipolar disorder. Australia and New Zealand Journal of Psychiatry, 27, 560-580.
  • Winnicott, D. W. (1965). The maturational processes and the facilitating environment: studies in the theory of emotional development. London: Hogarth Press.
  • Gazzaniga, M.S. (1995). The Cognitive Neurosciences. Cambridge, MA: The MIT Press.
  • Winston, A. and Winston, B. (2002). Handbook of integrated short-term psychotherapy. Washington, DC: American Psychiatric Publishing.
  • Gelso Charles J. and Fretz Bruce R (1995). Couselling Psychology, Prism Book Pvt. Ltd., India.
  • Winston, A., et al. (1991). Brief psychotherapy of personality disorders. Journal of Nervous and Mental Disease, 179, 188-93.
  • Gerald Corey (2009). The Art of Integrative Counseling, 2nd edition. USA: Thomson Brooks/Cole.
  • Withey, S.B. (1962). Reaction to uncertain threat. In Y. Baker and D.W. Chapman (Eds.) Man and Society in Disaster. New York: Basic
  • Gibbons, M., H. Limoges, S. Nowotny, P. Schwartzman, P. Scott, and M. Trow. 1994. The new production of knowledge: The dynamics of science and research in contemporary societies. London: Sage.
  • Witkin, H.A., Oltman, P. K., Raskin, E. & Karp, S. A. (1971) A manual for imbedded figures test. Palo Alto, CA: Consulting Psychologists Press
  • Money, J (1995). Gender Maps: Social Constructionism, Feminism, and Sexophical History. New York, The Continuum Publishing Company.
  • Witmer, J. M. (1968). A Rationale for Guidance in the Elementary School, Paper presented at an Elementary Guidance Workshop (Myrtle Beach, S.C.), Department of Guidance, Counselling and Student Personnel, Ohio University
  • Gioia, G. A., Isquith, P. K., Guy, S. C., &Kenworthy, L. (2000). Behavior Rating Inventory of Executive Function. Lutz, FL: Psychological Assessment Resources, Inc.
  • Witmer, J.M. (1967). The use, value, and improvement of certain guidance principles and practices as perceived by teachers in the elementary schools of Florida, Unpublished doctoral dissertation, Florida State Univ.
  • Glasser, W. (2000). Counseling with Choice theory: The New Reality Therapy. New York: HarperCollins.
  • Wodrich DL, Thull LM. Childhood Tourette’s syndrome and the Thematic Apperception Test: Is there a recognizable pattern? Perceptual & Motor Skills 1997;85:635–641. [PubMed: 9347553]
  • Goldberg, P. A. (1965). A review of sentence completion methods in personality assessment. Journal of Projective Techniques and Personality Assessment, 29, 12--45.
  • Wolberg, L. R. (1965). Short-term psychotherapy. New York: Grune and Stratton.
  • Goldfried, M.R., & Castonguay, L.G. (1992). The future of psychotherapy integration. Psychotherapy, 29 (l), 4-10.
  • Wood, S.E. & Wood, E.G. (1996). The World of Psychology: Allyn & Bacon
  • Goodglass, H. (1986). The flexible battery in neuropsychological assessment. In T. Incagnoli, G. Goldstein, & C. J. Golden (Eds.), Clinical Applications of Neuropsychological Test Batteries (pp. 121-134). New York: Plenum Press.
  • Miles, MB and Huberman AM (1984) Qualitative Data Analysis, A Sourcebook of New Methods. Beverley Hills, CA, USA.: Sage Publications.
  • Goodwin, F. K. & Jamison, K. R. (1990). Manic depressive illness. New York: Oxford University Press.
  • Woodcock, R. W. & Mather, N. (1989). The Woodcock-Johnson psycho-educational Battery- revised. Allen, TX: DLM Teaching Resources.
  • Gottesman, I. I., & Prescott, C. A. (1989). Abuses of the MacAndrew MMPI Alcoholism Scale: A critical review. Clinical Psychology Review, 9, 223-242.
  • Wooden, H. F. The use of negative practice to eliminate nocturnal head banging. Journal of Behaviour Therapy and Experimental Psychiatry, 1974, 5, 81-82.
  • Gough, H. G. (1987). CPJ Administrator's Guide. Palo Alto, CA: Consulting Psychologists Press.
  • Newman, J. P., Schmitt, W. A., and Voss, W. D. (1997). The impact of motivationally neutral cues on psychopathic individuals: assessing the generality of the response modulation hypothesis. Journal of Abnormal Psychology, 106, 563-75.
  • Gough, H. G. (1992). Assessment of creative potential in psychology and the development of a Creative Temperament Scale for the CPl. In J. C. Rosen & P. McReynolds (Eds.), Advances in Psychological Assessment (Vol. 8, pp. 225257). New York: Plenum.
  • Woolfolk, A. E. (1993). Educational Psychology, 5th ed., Allyn and Bacon.
  • Graf, P. &Schacter, D.L. (1985). Implicit and explicit memory for new associations in normal subjects and amnesic patients. Journal of Experimental Psychology: Learning, Memory and Cognition, 11, 501-518.
  • Worchel, S., Lee, J., & Adewole, A. (1975). Effects of supply and demand on rating of object value. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 32, 906- 914
  • Granath J, Ingvarsson S, von Thiele U, Lundberg U (2006).. Stress management: a randomized study of cognitive behavioural therapy and yoga. Cognitive Behavioural Therapy,35(1), 3-10
  • Matsukawa, L. A. (2001). Group therapy with multiethnic members. In T. WenSheng and J. Streltzer (Eds.), Culture and psychotherapy: A guide to clinical practice (243-261), Washington, DC : American Psychiatric.
  • Grant, D.A., & Berg, E.A. (1948). A behavioral analysis of the degree of reinforcement and ease of shifting to new responses in a Weigl-type card sorting problem. Journal of Experimental Psychology, 38, 404-411.
  • Wright JH, Basco MR, Thase ME (2006): Learning Cognitive-Behaviour Therapy: An Illustrated Guide. Washington, DC, American Psychiatric Press
  • Greenfield, W.M. “Decision Making and Employee Engagement.” Employment Relations Today 31, no. 2 (2004): 13–24.
  • Wright, J. D., & Hamilton, R.F. (1978). Work satisfaction and age: some evidence for the ‘job change’ hypothesis. Social Forces, 56, 1140-58.
  • McDougall, W. (1920). Introduction to social Psychology, London, Methuen.
  • www. psychology.about.com
  • Gubbels, P. and C. Koss. 2000. From the roots up: Strengthening organisational capacity through guided self-assessment. Oklahoma City, OK: World Neighbors.
  • www.bplans.com/sample_business_plans.cfm
  • www.encyclopedia.com
  • Harrison, M.I. 1994. Diagnosing organisations: Models, methods, and processes. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage.
  • Gunderson, J. G., and Ronningstam, E. & Smith, L. E. (195) Narcissistic personality disorder. In W. J. Livesley (Ed.), The DSM-IV personality disorders (pp. 201212). New York : Guilford Press.
  • Harvey, D. & Brown, D. R. (2005). An experiential approach to organisation development (6th ed.). Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall.
  • Gutman, D. A., & Nemeroff, C. B. (2003). Persistent central nervous system effects of an adverse early environment: Clinical and preclinical studies. Physiology & Behavior, 79, 471-478.
  • Hayes, S.C., Nelson, R.O. & Jarrett, R.B. (1987). The treatment utility of assessment. American Psychologist, 42, 963-974.
  • Gysbers, N. C., & Henderson, P. (1994). Developing and Managing your School Guidance Program (2 nd ed.). Alexandria, VA: American Association for Counseling and Development.
  • Healy, D. (2006). The latest mania: Selling bipolar disorder. PLoS Med, 3(4), 185.
  • Hackney, H. & Cormier, S. (2005). The Professional Counsellor: A Process Guide to Helping (5th ed.). Boston: Allyn & Bacon.
  • Hebban, N., Milberg, W. (2002). Essentials of Neuropsychological Assessment. New York: John Wiley & Sons, Inc.
  • Hage, J. and K. Finsterbusch. 1987. Organisational change as a development strategy. Boulder: Lynne Rienner.
  • Heider, F. (1958). The Psychology of Interpersonal Relations. Wiley,
  • Hall, RC; Popkin, MK; Stickney, SK; Gardner, ER (1979). “Presentation of the steroid psychoses”. The Journal of nervous and mental disease 167 (4): 229–36.
  • Herman, Judith Lewis; Judith Herman (1992). Trauma and recovery. New York: Basic Books.
  • Halstead, W.C. (1947). Brain and intelligence. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1947.
  • Hersen, Michel. (2005). Encyclopedia of Behaviour Modification and Cognitive Behaviour Therapy Volume I: Adult Clinical Applications Volume II: Child Clinical Applications Volume III: Educational Applications . USA: Sage publications.
  • Hammill, D. D. (1998). Detroit Tests of Learning Aptitude, Fourth Edition. Austin, TX: Pro-Ed.
  • Maskus, Keith E. “Intellectual Property Rights and Economic Development”. Case Western Reserve Journal of International Law, Vol. 32, 471. journals/jil/ 32-3/maskusarticle.pdf
  • Handelsman, M. M. (1990). Do written consent forms influence clients' first impressions of therapists? Professional Psychology: Research and Practice, 21(6), 451-454.
  • Weiner, B. (1980), “A Cognitive (Attribution) - Emotion - Action Model of Motivated Behaviour- an Analysis of Judgments of Help-Giving,” Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 39 (2), 186-200.
  • Hanna Leverson (et al) Concise Guide to Brief Dynamic and interpersonal therapy (2nd ed) American Psychiatric Publishing. Inc. Wahington
  • Weiner, Y. (1982). Commitment in organisation: A normative view. Academy of Management Review, 7, 418-428.
  • Weisbord, M. R. (2004). Productive workplaces revisited: Dignity, meaning, and community in the 21st century. New York: John Wiley & Sons.
  • Harrison, I. M., & Shirom, A. (1999). Organisational Diagnosis and Assessment: Bridging Theory and Practice. Thousand Oaks: Sage Publications.
  • Wampold, B. E. (2001). The great psychotherapy debate: Models, methods, and findings. Mahwah, NJ: Erlbaum.
  • Hart, P. M., Griffin, M. A., Wearing, A. J., & Cooper, C. L. (1996). Manual for the QPASS Survey. Brisbane: Public Sector Management Commission.
  • Warwick, D.P. & Osherson, S. (1973). Comparative Research Methods. Englewood Cliffs Prentice Hall.
  • Hatch, M.J. 1997.Organisation theory. New York, NY: Oxford University Press.
  • Wason, P. (1982). “Realism and Rationality in the Selection Task,” In Thinking and Reasoning: Psychological Approaches, J. Evans, ed., Routledge and Kegan Paul.
  • Haynes, S. N., & O'Brien, W. H. (2000). Principles and practice of behavioral assessment. New York: Kluwer.
  • Watson, J. B. (1913). Psychology as the behaviourist views it. Psychological Review, 20, 158–177.
  • Heaton, R.K., Chelune, C.J., Talley, J.L., Kay, G.G., & Curtiss, G. (1993). Wisconsin Card Sorting Test manual, revised and expanded. Odessa, FL: Psychological Assessment Resources.
  • Watson, J. B. (1924). Behaviourism. New York: W.W. Norton.
  • Heflin, L.J., & Simpson, R.L. (1998). Interventions for children and youth with autism: Prudent choices in a world of exaggerated claims and empty promises. Part I: Intervention and treatment option review. Focus on Autism and Other Developmental Disabilities, 13, 194-211.
  • Webster-Stratton, C. and Herbert, M. (1993). What really happens in parent training? Behaviour Modification, 17, 407-56.
  • Heller, D. J. (2002). The confounding role of personality and trait affectivity in the relationship between job and life satisfaction. Journal of Organisational Behaviour, 815- 835.
  • Wechsler, D. (1944). The measurement of adult intelligence (3rd ed.). Baltimore: Williams & Wilkins.
  • Herrnstein, R. J., & Murray, C. (1994). The bell curve: Intelligence and class structure in American life. New York: Free Press.
  • Wechsler, D. (1975). Intelligence defined and undefined: A relativistic reappraisal. American Psychologist, 30, 135-139
  • Herzberg, F., Mausner, B., & Snyderman, B. B. (1959). The motivation to work (2nd ed.). New York: John Wiley & Sons.
  • Wechsler, D. (1993). The Wechsler Intelligence Scale for Children-III. San Antonio, TX: Psychological Corporation.
  • Wechsler,D. (1944). The measurement of adult intelligence.(Revised Ed.) Baltimore: Williams & Wilkins
  • http://www.achpr.org/english/_info/court_en.html. Retrieved 2008-01-03.
  • Glassman, W. E. & Hadad, M. Approaches to Psychology (4th ed.). Open University Press.
  • Kimura, D. (1992). “The Mind and the Brain,” Scientific American, September.
  • Berkowitz, L. (1993). Aggression: Its Causes, Consequences, and Control. New York: McGraw-Hill.
  • Hartshorne, H., May, M. A., & Shuttleworth, F.K. (1930). Studies in organisation and character. New York: Macmillan.
  • Bernard H.R. (1995). Research Methods in Anthropology, Second Edition. London: Sage Publications
  • Hughes, Everett C. (1971). The Sociological Eye: Selected Papers. Chicago: Aldine Atherton.
  • Berscheid, E., Walster, E., & Bohrnstedt, G. (1973). The happy American body: A survey report. Psychology Today, 7, 119-131.
  • Lind, E. A., & Tyler, T. R. (1988). The social psychology of procedural justice. New York: Plenum.
  • Berscheid, Ellen; Walster, Elaine H. (1969). Interpersonal Attraction. AddisonWesley Publishing Co.
  • Guilford, J. P. (1967). The Nature of Human Intelligence. New York: McGraw- Hill.
  • Best, J.W. & Kahn,J.V.(1992). Research in Education, New Delhi: Prentice Hall of India Private Limited (eighth Indian print).
  • Hogg, M.A. and Abrams, D. (1988). Social identifications: a social psychology of intergroup relations and group processes. London: Routledge.
  • Beutel, A. M., & Johnson, M. K. (2004). Gender and prosocial values during adolescence: A research note. Sociological Quarterly, 45, 379-393.
  • http://www.lboro.ac.uk/departments/ls/disresearch/romeo/index.html
  • Bhagat, R.S. & Chassie, M.B. (1981). Determinants of organisational commitment in working women: Some implications for organisational integration. Journal of Occupational Behaviour, 2(1), 17–30.
  • Johnson, Allan G. (2000). The Blackwell Dictionary of Sociology, Second ed. Oxford, UK: Blackwell.
  • Bhatia, S.K. (1999). Principles and Techniques of Personnel Management/ Human Resource Management. New Delhi. Deep and Deep Publications Pvt. Ltd. 2nd Edition
  • L. Berkowitz (Ed.), Advances in Experimental Social Psychology, 20 (p. 65- 122), New York: Academic Press
  • Bhatia, S.K. (2005) Training and Development Concepts and Practices, New Delhi, Deep & Deep Publication.
  • Gibson, R.L. and Mitchell, M.H. (1986). Introduction to Guidance, New York: Macmillan Publishing Co.
  • Aggarwal, J.C. (1988). Educational and Vocational Guidance and Counselling Doaba House, Booksellers and publishers, Nai sadak, Delhi - 06.
  • Gottman, J. M. (1977). Towards a definition of social isolation in children. Child Development, 48, 513-517.
  • Baldwin, John and Janice Baldwin. Behaviour Principles in Everyday Life. Upper Saddle River, NJ: Prentice-Hall
  • Halim, M. S. (2001). Coping and quality of life in Indonesian breast cancer patients. Unpublished doctoral dissertation, Catholic University of Nijmegen.
  • Bhatnagar, A. and Gupta, N. (Eds.) 1999. Guidance and Counselling : A Theoretical Approach (Vol. I). Vikas Publishing House, New Delhi.
  • Hilgard, E.R. (1999). Introduction to Psychology (6 th Edition). Oxford and IBH Publishing Co, Pvt Ltd.: New Delhi.
  • Bhatnagar, A. and Gupta, N. (Eds.) 1999. Guidance and Counselling: A Practical Approach (Vol. II). Vikas Publishing House, New Delhi.
  • http://chiron.valdosta.edu/whuitt/col/cogsys/infoproc.html
  • Bierhoff, H.W. (2002). Prosocial behaviour. Hove, UK: Psychology Press.
  • http://www.dagensps.se/artiklar/2009/04/28/62219293/index.xml
  • Biggs, S. (2003). Counselling psychology and midlife issues. In R. Woolfe, W. Dryden and S. Strawbridge (eds), Handbook of Counselling Psychology (2nd edn). London: Sage.
  • http://www.squidoo.com/corporatecounselling
  • Bijou, S. W. (1957). Patterns of reinforcement and resistance to extinction in young children. Child Development, 28, 47–54.
  • Jackson, M., & Tisak, M. S. (2001). Is prosocial behaviour a good thing? Developmental changes in children’s evaluations of helping, sharing, cooperating, and comforting. British Journal of Developmental Psychology, 19, 349-367.
  • Binder, J. L. and Strupp, H. H. (1991). The Vanderbilt approach to time limited dynamic psychotherapy. In: P. Critis-Christoph and J. P. Barber, ed. Handbook of Short-term Dynamic Psychotherapy. New York: Basic Books.
  • Katzell, R. & Thompson, D. (1990). An integrative model of work attitudes, motivation, and performance. Human Performance, 3, 63-85.
  • Binet, A. & Simon T. (1916). The development of intelligence in children (E.S. Kit, Translator). Baltimore: Williams & Wilkins.
  • Kohlberg, L. & Gilligan, C. (1971). The adolescent as philosopher: The discovery of the self in a postconventional world. Daedalus, 100, 1051-1086.
  • Binet, A. & Simon, T. (1905).L‘Application des methods nouvelles au diagnostic du niveau intellectual chez des enfantsnormouxaranormauxd ‘hospiceetd‘ ecoleprimatre. Anne‘ePsychologique, 11, 245-366
  • Berg, I. K. (1994). Family-based services: A solution-focused approach. New York: Norton.
  • Binet, A. (1890).Cited in Sattler, J. M. (1988).Assessment of children.Third Edition. San Diego, CA: Jerome, Sattler.
  • Berger, J., Rosenholtz, S. J., & Zelditch, M. Jr. (1980). Status Organizing Processes. Annual Review of Sociology 6: 479–508
  • Birdwell,I. and Holden,L. (1994) Human Resource Management, A Contemporary Perspective, New Delhi, Macmillan.
  • Glaser BG (ed). More Grounded Theory Methodology: A Reader. Sociology Press [8], 1994.
  • Black, J. (2000). Personality testing and police selection: Utility of the ‘Big Five’. New Zealand Journal of Psychology, 29, 2-9.
  • Goldfried, M. R. (2003). Cognitive-behaviour therapy: reflections on the evolution of a therapeutic orientation. Cognitive Therapy and Research, 27, 53-69.
  • Blake, R.P., and J.S. Mouton. (1976) Consultation, Reading MA: AddisonWesley.
  • Green, A.W., Sociology, (5th edition) p. 60.
  • Blau, G. (1989). Testing the generalisability of a career commitment measure and its impact on employee turnover. Journal of Vocational Behaviours, 35(1), 88-103.
  • Gupta, Sarla (Ed) (2001). Career and Counseling Education . Saujanya Books, New Delhi
  • Agich, G (2009). Dependence and Autonomy in Old Age. Cambridge university Press, Cleveland
  • Hare, RD. The Hare Psychopathy Checklist-Revised. Multi-Health Systems; Toronto, Ontario, Canada: 1991.
  • Blickle, G. (1996). Personality traits, learning strategies, and performance. European Journal of Personality, 10, 337-352.
  • Hayes, J. R. (1989). The complete problem solver (2nd ed.). Mahwah, NJ: Erlbaum.
  • Block,J.H.(1995).A contrarian view of the five- factor approach to personality description.Psychological Bulletin,117,187-215.
  • Hoffman, I. Z. (1998). Ritual and spontaneity in the psychoanalytic process: a dialectical-constructivist view. Hillsdale, NJ: Analytic Press.
  • Bloom, P.1994). Language Acquisition: Core Readings. Cambridge: The MIT Press
  • Hornstein, Harvey A.Brutal Bosses and their Prey: How to Identify and Overcome Abuse in the Workplace (1996)
  • Blustein, J. Intervention with excessively aggressive children: Conceptual and ethical issues. In: Ferris, CF.; Grisso, T., editors. Understanding aggressive behaviour in children. New York Academy of Sciences; New York: 1996. p. 308-317.
  • http://ezinearticles.com/?Law-on-Sexual-Harassment-in-India&id=1669634
  • Balint, M., Ornstein, P. H., and Balint, E. (1972). Focal psychotherapy: an example of applied psychoanalysis. London: Tavistock Publications.
  • Baer, D. M., Wolf, M. M., & Risley, T. R. (1968). Some current dimensions of applied behaviour analysis. Journal of Applied Behaviour Analysis, 1, 91–97.
  • Bochner, S., & Insko, C. A. (1966). Communicator discrepancy, source credibility, and opinion change. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 4, 614-621.
  • http://www.gouvernement.lu/salle_presse/actualite/2006/04/11conseil_europe/ english_mod.pdf. Retrieved 2008-01-04.
  • Boenke, Mary (1999). Trans Forming Families: Real Stories About Transgendered Loved Ones. Imperial Beach, CA: Walter Trook Publishing.
  • http://www.openarchives.org/OAI/openarchivesprotocol.html
  • Bohnet, Iris and Bruno S. Frey (1999), “Social Distance and other-regarding Behaviour in Dictator Games: Comment,” The American Economic Review, 89 (1), 335-39.
  • http://www.wcd.nic.in/childabuse.pdf
  • Boldrin, Michele and David K. Levine. “Against Intellectual Monopoly”, 2008. [2]
  • Huyuk, M., and Guttman, D. (1999). Developmental issues in psychotherapy with older men. In M. Duffy (ed.), Handbook of Counselling and Psychotherapy with Older Adults. New York: John Wiley.
  • Aiken, L. R. (1984). Psychological Testing and Assessment (4 th edition). Boston: Allyn & Bacon.
  • Jang, K. L., McCrae, R. R., Angleitner, A., Riemann, R., & Livesley, W. J. (1998). Heritability of facet-level traits in a cross-cultural twin sample: Support for a hierarchical model of personality. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 74, 1556-1565.
  • Boring, E.G. (1923). Intelligence as the test test it. New Republic, 34, 35-57.
  • Just, M.A., & Carpenter, P.A. (1987). The Psychology of Reading and Language Comprehension. Boston: Allyn and Bacon.
  • Boulding, K. E. (1984). B. F. Skinner: A dissident view. Behavioural and Brain Sciences, 7, 483-484.
  • Kendall, P. C. (2000). Child and adolescent therapy: cognitive-behavioural procedures. New York: Guilford Press.
  • Bovard, E. W. “The effects of social stimuli on the response to stress,” Psych. Rev., 1959, 66, 267-277.
  • Klohnen, E. C., & Luo, S. (2003) Interpersonal attraction and personality: What is attractive – self similarity, ideal similarity, complementarity, or attachment security? Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 85, 709-722.
  • Bowers, M., Jackson, E., Knight, J., &LeShan, L. (1964). Counseling the dying. New York: Nelson.
  • Bell, J. (1999) Doing Your Research Project (3rd edition) Milton Keynes: Open University Press.
  • Bowlby, J. (1988). A secure base: clinical applications of attachment theory. London: Routledge.
  • Bendix, R. (1956). Work and authority in industry. New York: Wiley.
  • Baltes, P. B., Reese, H. and Lipsett, L. (1980) ‘Lifespan developmental psychology’, Annual Review of Pyschology 31: 65 - 110.
  • Levine, F. M. & Fasnacht, C. Token rewards may lead to token learning. American Psychologist, 1974, 29, 816-820.
  • Boyd, H.W. Jr. and Westfall, R. (1972) Marketing Research: Text and Cases, Irwin, p. 80.
  • Lo, S-T. (2004). “Stregthening (sic) Intellectual Property Rights: Experience from the 1986 Taiwanese Patent Reforms”. UCLA, Dept. of Economics.. http:// www.international.ucla.edu/article.asp?parentid=10985.
  • Brad, Sherman; Lionel Bently (1999). The Making of Modern Intellectual Property Law: the British Experience, 1760-1911. Cambridge University Press. pp. 207.
  • Gelso, c. & Fretz, B, (1992). Counselling Psychology. New York: Harcourt College Publishers.
  • Bandura, A. & Walters, R.H. (1963). Social Learning and Personality Development. New York :Holt, Rinehart, & Winston
  • Gish, N.P., Fundamentals of Sociology, p. 63.
  • Branstetter, Lee, Raymond Fishman and C. Fritz Foley. “Do Stronger Intellectual Property Rights Increase International Technology Transfer? Empirical Evidence from US Firm-Level Data”. NBER Working Paper 11516. July 2005. [3]
  • Glaser BG. The Grounded Theory Perspective III: Theoretical coding. Sociology Press, 2005.
  • Bratton, J and Gold, J. (2003). Human Resource Management Theory and Practice. New York. Plagrave Macmillan, 3rd Edition
  • Gold, J. R. (1996). Key concepts in psychotherapy integration. New York: Plenum.
  • Brayfield, A. H., & Rothe, H. F. (1951). An index of job satisfaction. Journal of Applied Psychology, 35, 307–311.
  • Goldman, L., (1978). Introduction and Point of View. In L. Goldman (ed) Research Methods for Counselors: Practical Applications in Field Settings. New York. John Wiley.
  • Brenner, C. (1973). An Elementary Textbook of Psychoanalysis. New York: International Universities Press.
  • Gowers, Andrew. “Gowers Review of Intellectual Property”. Her Majesty’s Treasury, November 2006. [5] ISBN 9-780118-4083-9.
  • Brockner, J., Siegel, P. A., Daly, J. P., Tyler, T. & Martin, C. (1997). When trust matter: the moderating effect of outcome favorability. Administrative Science Quarterly, 42,558-583.
  • Greydanus D.E., Pratt H.D., Greydanus S.E. & Hoffman A.D. (1992). Corporal punishment in schools: A position paper of the Society for Adolescent Medicine. Journal of Adolescent Health 13, 240–246.
  • Brodsky, Carroll M. The Harassed Worker (1976)
  • Arai, Hisamitsu. “Intellectual Property Policies for the Twenty-First Century: The Japanese Experience in Wealth Creation”, WIPO Publication Number 834 (E). 2000. [1]
  • Bronfenbrenner, U. (1970). Two worlds of Childhood: U.S. and U.S.S.R. New York: Russell Sage Foundation.
  • Guthrie, G. M., & Bennett, A. B. (1971). Cultural differences in implicit personality theory. International Journal of Psychology, 6, 305-312.
  • Bronfenbrenner, U. (1979). The Ecology of Human Development. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.
  • Hall, L. (1999). A comprehensive survey of social behaviours in O.J. Simpson case, from A to Z. Wales, United Kindom: The Edwin Meller Press.
  • Brooks-Harris, J. (2008). Integrative multitheoretical psychotherapy. Boston: Houghton-Mifflin.
  • Harris,J.A., Rushton, J.P.,Hampson, E.,& Jackson, D.N.(1996). Salivary testosterone and self-report aggressive and pro-social personality characteristics in men and women. Aggressive Behaviour, 22,321-331.
  • Broota, K.D. (1992) Experimental Design in Behavioural Research, Wiley Eastern Limited.
  • Havighurst, R.J. (1953), Human Development and Education. New York: lOngmans, Green.
  • Broota, K.D. (2008), Experimental Design in Behavioural Research, New Delhi, New age international (P) Limited, Publishers.
  • Herskovits, M.J. (1955). Cultural anthropology. New York, NY: Knopf.
  • Brown, A. L., Bransford, J. D., Ferrara, R. A. & Campione, J. C. (1983). Learning, remembering and understanding. In P. H. Mussen (Ed.) Handbook of Child Psychology (4 th ed. ), Vol-3. New York: Wiley.
  • Hobson, R. F. (1985). Forms of feeling: the heart of psychotherapy. London: Tavistock Publications.
  • Brown, R. (1973). A First Language: The Early Stages. Cambridge: Harvard University Press.
  • Baumrind, D. (1971). Harmonious parents and their preschool children. Developmental Psychology, 4, 99-102.
  • Bruce, W.M., Blackburn, J.W. (1992), Balancing Job Satisfaction and Performance: A Guide for Human Resource Professionals, Connecticut, CT: Quorum Books.
  • Holmgren, R. A., Eisenberg, N., & Fabes, R. A. (1998). The relations of children’s situational empathy-related emotions to dispositional prosocial behaviour. International Journal of Behavioural Development, 22, 169-193.
  • Bruner, J. (1966). Studies in Cognitive Growth : A Collaboration at the Center for Cognitive Studies. New York: Wiley & Sons.
  • Howard J. (1995). Psychoactive Substance Use and Community Involvement in Health. Draft. Geneva,World Health Organisation.
  • Buchanan, B. (1974). “Building organisational commitment: The socialisation of managers in work organisations”. Administrative Science Quarterly, 19, 533546.
  • http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Grounded Theory
  • Buchanan, D. and Huzynnski, A. (1997) Organization Behaviour: An Introductory Text, 3rd Edition, Prentice Hall, London.
  • http://peoplefriendlypolice.wordpress.com/supreme-court-guidelines-againstsexual-harassment/
  • Budman, S. H. and Gurman, A. S. (1988). Theory and practice of brief psychotherapy. New York: Guilford Press.
  • http://www.africa-union.org/root/au/memberstates/map.htm. Retrieved 2008-01-03.
  • Budman, S., Soldz, S., Demby, A. Davis, M. and Merry, J. (1993). What is cohesiveness? An empirical examination. Small Group Research, 24, 199-214.
  • http://www.cidh.oas.org/what.htm. Retrieved 2008-01-03.
  • Bulla. D.N & Scott. P.M. (1987); Manpower Requirements forecasting. A Case Example in Strategic Human Resource Planning applications, Edition Richard, J. Nichaus, New York; Plenum Press.
  • http://www.ehow.com/about_6670311_labour-law-act-india.html
  • Burford, H. C., Foley, L. A., Rollins, P. G., & Rosario, K. S. (1996). Gender differences in preschoolers’ sharing behaviour. Journal of Social Behaviour and Personality, 11, 17-25.
  • http://www.ielrc.org/content/w0103.pdf
  • Burger, J. M. (1993). Personality (3rd ed.) Pacific Grove, CA: Brooks/Cole.
  • http://www.oas.org/key_issues/eng/default.asp. Retrieved 2008-01-03.
  • Burgess, eds., Methods of Qualitative Research, Vol. III. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage Publications
  • http://www.scribd.com/doc/2602053/HUMAN-RESOURCE-PLANNING
  • Burk, Dan L. and Mark A. Lemley (2009). The Patent Crisis and How the Courts Can Solve It. University of Chicago Press. ISBN 9780226080611.
  • Becker, W. C., & Carnine, D. C. (1981). Direct instruction: A behaviour theory model for comprehensive educational intervention with the disadvantaged. In S. W.Bijou & R. Ruiz (Eds.), Behaviour modification: Contributions to education (pp. 145–210). Mahwah, NJ: Erlbaum.
  • Burke, A., Crenshaw, D., Green, J., Schlosser, M. & Strocchia-rivera, L. (1989). Influence of verbal ability on the expression of aggression in physically abused children. Journal of the American Academy of Child & Adolescent Psychiatry, 28, 215-218.
  • http://www.worldbank.org.in/WBSITE/EXTERNAL/COUNTRIES/SOUTHASIAEXT/INDIAEXTN/0,,contentMDK:20195738~menuPK:295591~pagePK:141137~piPK:141127~theSitePK:295584,00.html
  • Burnett, John J. (1981), “Psychographic and demographic characteristics of blood donors,” Journal of Consumer Research, 8 (1), 62-66.
  • Hunt, E. (2001). Multiple view of multiple intelligence. Contemporary Psychology, 46, 5-7.
  • Burns N. Standards for Qualitative Research. Nurs Sci Q 1989; 2(44): 44-52.
  • Intellectual Property Licensing: Forms and Analysis, by Richard Raysman, Edward A. Pisacreta and Kenneth A. Adler. Law Journal Press, 1999-2008. ISBN 973-58852-086-9
  • Burns, David M. (1980). Feeling Good: The New Mood Therapy. New York: Signet, New American Library.
  • James, A. and A. J. Lott, “Reward frequency and the formation of positive attitudes toward group members,” J. Soc. Psych., 1964, 62, 111-115.
  • Burns, R. B. (1979). “The self-concept in theory, measurement, development and behaviour.” London:
  • Atkinson, J. W. (1964). An introduction to motivation. Princeton, N.J.: Van Nostrand.
  • Bushman B.J. & Anderson C.A. (2001). Is it time to pull the plug on the hostile versus instrumental aggression dichotomy? Psychological Review, 108, 273–79.
  • Joseph Stiglitz (October 13, 2006). “Authors@Google: Joseph Stiglitz - Making Globalisation Work.”. http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=UzhD7KVsR4#t=16m05s.
  • Buss, A. H., & Durkee, A. (1957). An inventory for assessing different kinds of hostility. Journal of Consulting Psychology, 21, 343–349.
  • Kanfer, R. (1990). Motivation theory and industrial and organisational psychology. In M. D. Dunnette & L. D. Hough (Eds.), Handbook of industrial and organisational psychology. Palo Alto, CA: Consulting Psychologists Press.
  • Butcher, J. N., Graham, J.R., Ben-Poarth, Y.S., Tellegen, A., Dahlstorm, W.G.,& Kaemmer, B.(2001). Minnesota Multiphasic Personality Inventory 2. Manual for administration, scoring and interpretation (revised edition). Minneapolis, MN: University of Minnesota Press.
  • Kazdin, A. E. (1994). Behaviour modification in applied settings (4th ed.). Pacific Grove, CA: Brooks/Cole.
  • Butcher, J. N., Rouse, S. V., & Perry, J. N.(2000).Empirical description of psychopathology in therapy clients: Correlates of MMPI-2 scales. In J. N. Butcher (ed.), Basic sources in MMPI-2 (pp. 487-500). Minneapolis, MN: University of Minnesota Press.
  • Kim, J. & Franklin (1997). Solution-focused brief therapy in schools: A review of the literature. (manuscript submitted for publication).
  • Butcher, J.N. & Keller, L.S.(1984).Objective personality assessment. In G.Goldstein & M.Hersen (eds.),Handbook of psychological assessment. New York: Pergamon Press.
  • Kirk, S. A. (1972). Educating Special Children (2 nd Ed.). Boston: Houghton Mifflin.
  • Butcher, J.N. (1984). Current developments in MMPI use: An international perspective .In J.N. Butcher & C. D. Speilberger (Eds.) Advances in personality assessment (vol.4).Hillsdale, NJ: Earlbaum.
  • Ayllon, T. & Azrin, N. H. Reinforcer sampling: A technique for increasing the behaviour of mental patients. Journal of Applied Behaviour Analysis, 1 968a, 1, 1 3-20.
  • Butler, R. N. (1963). The life review. An interpretation of reminiscence in the aged. Psychiatry, 26, 65-76.
  • Bell, Arthur H. You Can’t Talk to Me That Way: Stopping Toxic Language in the Workplace (2005)
  • Byrne, D. (1971). The Attraction Paradigm. New York: Academic Press.
  • Ayllon, T., & Azrin, N. H. (1964). Reinforcement and instructions with mental patients. Journal of the ExperimentalAnalysis of Behaviour, 7, 327–331.
  • Byrne, D., Clore, G. L. J. & Worchel, P. (1966). Effect of economic similaritydissimilarity on interpersonal attraction. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 4(2), 220-224.
  • Lakshmi, K.S. (2000). Encyclopaedia of Guidance and Counseling. Mittal Publications, New Delhi.
  • Cacioppo, J. T., Petty, R. E., & Stoltenberg, C. D. (1985) Processes of Social Influence: The Elaboration Likelihood Model of Persuasion. In: Kendall, P. C. (Ed.), Advances in Cognitive-Behavioural Research and Therapy. Academic Press, San Diego, pp. 215–74.
  • Latane, B., & Darley, J. 1970. The unresponsive bystander: Why doesn’t he help? New York: Appleton-Century-Crofts.
  • Bandura, A. (1964). The stormy decade: Fact or fiction? Psychology in the Schools, 1, 224-231.
  • LeShan, L. (1969). Psychotherapy and the dying patient. In L. Pearson (Ed.), Death and dying: Current issues in the treatment of the dying person. Cleveland: Case Western Reserve University.
  • Cambell, D.T. and Slanley, J.C. (1966), Experimenal and Quasi Experimental Design for Research, Chicago : Rand McNally College Pub. Co.
  • Lewis, G., et al. (2003). Self-help interventions for mental health problems. Report to the Department of Health R&D Programme. Summary at: http:// www.nimhe.org.uk/expertbriefings
  • Campbell, D.T. & Fiske, D.W. (1959). Convergent and discriminate validation by the multi trait multi method matrix. Psychological Bulletin, 56, 81-105.
  • Littman, David G. (January 19, 2003). “Human Rights and Human Wrongs”. National Review (New York. “The Durham, H. (2004). “”We the People: The Position of NGOs in Gathering Evidence and Giving Witness in International Criminal Trials”. In Thakur, R, Malcontent, P. From Sovereign Impunity to International Accountability. New York: United Nations University Press
  • Cantwell, D.P., & Baker, L. (1987). Developmental Speech and Language Disorders. NY: The Guilford Press.
  • Lodahl, T., & Kejner, M. (1965). The definition and measurement of job involvement. Journal of Applied Psychology, 49, 24-33.
  • Caplan, G. (1961). An approach to community mental health. New York: Grune and Stratton.
  • Agarwal, R.D. (1994). Organization and management, New Delhi, Tata McGraw Hill.
  • Cappelli, P. (2000). A market driven approach to retaining talent. Harvard Business Review, 78(1), 103-111.
  • Batson, C. D. (1998). Altruism and prosocial behaviour. In D.T. Gilbert, S.T. Fiske, and G. Lindzey (eds), Handbook of social psychology (4th edn) (Vol. II, pp. 282–316). New York:McGraw-Hill.
  • Cappuzzi, D. & Gross, D. R. (2008). Counseling and Psychotherapy. New Delhi: Pearson Prentice Hall.
  • Gillin and Gillin, Cultural Sociology, p. 488.
  • Capuzzi, D. &Gross,D.R.(1999). Counselling and Psychotherapy: Theories and Interventions. Second edition. Merrill, Columbus, Ohio.
  • Glaser BG (ed). Gerund Grounded Theory: The Basic Social Process Dissertation. Sociology Press [10], 1996.
  • Carlson, N. Physiology of behaviour. 6th ed.. Allyn and Bacon; Needham Heights, MA: 1998.
  • Glaser BG. The Grounded Theory Perspective I: Conceptualisation Contrasted with Description. Sociology Press [12], 2001.
  • Carroll, J. B. (1993). Human cognitive abilities: Their survey of factor analytic studies. Cambridge, England: Cambridge University Press
  • Glaser, B. G. and Strauss, A. L. (1967) The Discovery of Grounded Theory: Strategies for Qualitative Research, Aldine: Atherton
  • Carroll, J.B. (1997). The three-stratum theory of cognitive abilities. Contemporary Intellectual Assessment: Theories, Tests and Issues. New York: Guilford.
  • Goffman, E. (1961) Asylums, New York, Anchor
  • A Teacher’s Handbook on IED (1988), NCERT, New Delhi.
  • Batson, C. D., Early, S. and Salvarani, G. (1997), “Perspective taking: Imagining how another feels versus imagining how you would feel,” Personality and Social Psychology Bulletin, 23 (7), 751-58.
  • Alcock, J. E., Carment, D. W., & Sadava, S. W. (2005). A Textbook of Social Psychology (6th ed). Scarborough, Ontario: Prentice-Hall Canada.
  • Goldfried, M.R., Stricker, G., & Weiner, I.B.(1971). Rorschach handbook of clinical and research applications. Engelwood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice Hall.
  • Alderfer, C. P. (1972). Existence, relatedness, and growth. New York: Free Press.
  • Goldstein, K. (1939). The organism. New York: American Book.
  • Cartwright and Zander (1968). Group Dynamics, Harper and Row, New York.
  • Gough,H.G.(1995).California Psychological Inventory(3 rd ed.). Palo Alto, CA: Consulting Psychologist –Press.
  • Carver, C. S., & Scheier, M. F. (2000). Perspectives on Personality (4th ed.) Needham Heights, MA: Simon & Schuster.
  • Graziano, W. G., Habashi, M. M., Sheese, B. E., & Tobin, R. M. (2007). Agreeableness, empathy, and helping: A person X situation perspective. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 93(4), 583–59.
  • Cascio. W,F.,and Agunis. H., (2008) Applied Psychology in Human Resource Management, 6th edition New Delhi, Prentice Hall.
  • Greenfield, P. M. (1984) Mind and Media: the effects of television, video games and computers. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.
  • Cassano, G. B., Musetti, L., Perugi, G., Mignani, V., Soriani, A., McNair, D. M., & Akiskal, H. S. (1998). Major depression subcategories: Their potentiality for clinical research. In: diagnosis and treatment of depression. “Qou Vadis” Symposium, Sanofi Group, May 11-12, Montpellier, France.
  • Grolnick, W. S. & Ryan, R. M. (1989). Parent styles associated with children’s self-regulation and competence in school. Journal of Educational Psychology, 81(2), 143-154
  • Castells, M. 1998. End of millennium. Oxford and Malden: Blackwell.
  • Guilford, J. P. (1986). Creative talents: Their nature, uses and development. Buffalo, NY: Bearly Ltd.
  • Castonguay, L. G., Newman, M. G., Borkovec, T. D., Holtforth, M. G. & Maramba, G. G. (2004). Cognitive-behavioural assimilative integration. In J. C. Norcross & M. R. Goldfried (Eds.), Handbook of psychotherapy integration (2nd ed., pp. 241–260). New York: Oxford.
  • Gunderson, J. G. and Gabbard, G. O. (1999). Making the case for psychoanalytic therapies in the current psychiatric environment. Journal of the American Psychoanalytic Association, 47, 679-703.
  • Catania, A. C. (Ed.). (1968). Contemporary research in operant behaviour. Glenview, IL: Scott Foresman.
  • Gurman, A. S., Kniskern, D. P., and Pinsof, W. M. (1986). Research on the process and outcome of marital and family therapy. In: S. L. Garfield and A. E. Bergin, ed. Handbook of psychotherapy and behaviour change, pp. 565-624. New York: John Wiley.
  • Alderfer, C. P. (1977.a). Groups and intergroups. In J. R. Hackman & J. L. Suttle (Eds.), Improving life at work. Santa Monica, Calif.: Goodyear,
  • Batson, C.D. (1991). The altruism question: toward a social psychological answer. Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum.
  • Bandura, A. (1969). Principles of Behaviour Modification. New York :Holt, Rinehart, & Winston
  • Aronson, E., Wilson, T., & Akert, R. (2004). Social Psychology, Media and Research
  • Cattell, R. B. (1949). The dimensions of culture patterns by factorisation of national character. Journal of Abnormal and Social Psychology 44,443-469.
  • Hamberg, M. (1957) Case Studies in Elementary School Administration, Bureau of Publications, Teachers College Columbia University, New York.
  • Cattell, R. B. (1995). Personality structure and the new fifth edition of the 16PF. Educational and Psychological Measurement, 55 (6), 926-937.
  • Harrell, W.A. (1978). Physical Attractiveness, Self-Disclosure, and Helping Behaviour. The Journal of Social Psychology, 104 (1), 15-17.
  • Cattell, R. B., & Kline, P.(1977). The scientific analysis of personality and motivation. New York: Academic Press.
  • Hartshorn, h. & May, M.S. (1928-1930) Moral studies in the nature of character, Vol. 1. Studies in deceit, Vol. 2. Studies in self-control, Vol. 3. Studies in the organisation of character, New York: Mcmillan
  • Cattell,R. B. (1960).The multiple abstract variance analysis equations and solutions:for nature nurture research on continuous variables. Psychological Review , 67, 353-372.
  • Hathaway, S.R.& McKinley, J.C.(1943).Manual for the Minnesota Multiphase Personality Inventory. New York: The Psychological Corporation.
  • Cattell,R. B. (1965).The scientific analysis of personality. Baltimore, Penguin Books.
  • Havighurst, R.S. (1980). More thoughts on developmental tasks. “Personnel and Guidance Journal”, 58, pp. 330-335.
  • Cattell,R. B. (1978). The Scientific Use of Factor Analysis. New York: Plenum.
  • Heller, Robert. (1998). Essential Managers: Managing Change. New York. D.K Publishing. Inc.
  • Cattell,R. B. (1979). Personality and Learning Theory: The Structure of Personality in its Environment (vol.1).New York: Springer .
  • Hewstone, M., Stroebe, W. & Jonas, K. (Eds.). (2007) Introduction to Social Psychology: A European Perspective (4th ed.). London: Blackwell.
  • Cattell,R. B., Bruel, H.,&Hartman, H.P.(1952).An attempt at a more refined definition of the cultural dimensions of syntality in modern nations.American Sociological Review,17,408-421.
  • Hitcheock, G. and Hughes, D. (1989), Research and the Teacher: A Qualitative “Introduction to School based Research, MA: Allyn and Bacon.
  • Cavior, N., & Dokecki, P. (1973). “Physical Attractiveness, Perceived Attitude Similarity, and Academic Achievement as Contributors to Interpersonal Attraction among Adolescents.” Developmental Psychology 9 (1): 44-54.
  • Hodges, B. H. and A. L. Geyer (2006). A Nonconformist Account of the Asch Experiments: Values, Pragmatics, and Moral Dilemmas. In:Personality and Social Psychology Review 10(1), 2–19.
  • Cenoz, J., & Genesee, F. (Eds.) (1998). Beyond Bilingualism: Multilingualism and Multilingual Education. Clevedon: Multilingual Matters.
  • Hofling CK et al. (1966) “An Experimental Study of Nurse-Physician Relationships”. Journal of Nervous and Mental Disease 141:171-180.
  • Bandura, A. (1973). Aggression: A Social Learning Analysis. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall.
  • Hogan,R.,Hogan,J.,& Roberts,B.W.(1996)Personality measurement employment decisions:Question and Answers.American Psychologist,51,469-477.
  • Chakraborty, S.K. (1991). Management by values: Towards cultural congruence. Oxford: Oxford University Press.
  • Holmes, J. (2000). Object relations, attachment theory, self-psychology, and interpersonal psychoanalysis. In: M. G. Gelder, J. J. Lapez-Ibor Jr, and N. C. Andreasen, ed. New Oxford textbook of psychiatry. Oxford: Oxford University Press.
  • Charmaz, K. (2006). Constructing Grounded Theory: A Practical Guide Through Qualitative Analysis. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage Publications.
  • Arundhati Roy (2002) Development Nationalism, in conversation with David Barsamian, Nov 2002. In The Shape of the Beast 2009, Penguin India
  • Alderfer, C. P. Organisational diagnosis from initial client reactions to a researcher. Human Organisations, 27, 260-265.
  • Ashforth, B.E. and Mael, F. (1989). Social identity theory and the organization. Academy of Management Review, 14(1), 20–39.
  • Cheong R, Wilson RK, Cortese IC, Newman-Toker DE. Mothball withdrawal encephalopathy: case report and review of paradichlorobenzene neurotoxicity. Subst Abus. Dec 2006;27(4):63-7. 
  • http://allpsych.com/researchme thods/singlesubject.html.
  • Cherulnik P.D. (2001) Methods for Behavioural Research. A Systematic Approach. London, Sage publication.
  • http://economictimes.indiatimes.com/news/news-by-industry/jobs/India-mayboast-of-25-of-worlds-workforce-by-2025-Survey/articleshow/6075470.cms
  • Chesbrough, H. W., & Teece, D. J. (1996). When is Virtual Virtuous? Organising for Innovation. Harvard Business Review, 74, 65-73.
  • http://europa.eu/legislation_summaries/customs/l11018c_en.htm
  • Cheung, F. M., & Leung, K. (1998). Indigenous personality measures: Chinese examples. Journal of Cross-Cultural Psychology, 29, 233-248.
  • http://news.bbc.co.uk/2/hi/south_asia/4103554.stm
  • Chris Argyris and Donald Schon, Organisational Learning (Reading MA: AddisonWesley, 1976).
  • http://web.archive.org/web/20080109045152/
  • Christy, C.A. and H Voigt (1994), “Bystander responses to public episodes of child abuse,” Journal of Applied Social Psychology, 24 (9), 824-47.
  • http://www.acs.ucalgary.ca/~newsted/tutor.htm http:/ /trochim.human.cornell.edu/kb/survey.htm.
  • Church, A. T. (2009). Prospects for an integrated trait and cultural psychology. European Journal of Personality, 23, 153-182.
  • http://www.allbusiness.com/business-planning-structures/business-plans/25241.html
  • Cialdini, R. B., Schaller, M., Houlihan, D., Arps, K., Fultz, J., & Beaman, A. L. (1987). Empathy-based helping: is it selflessly or selfishly motivated? Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 52, 749-758.
  • Baer, D. M., Wolf, M. M., & Risley, T. R. (1987). Some still current dimensions of applied behaviour analysis. Journal of Applied Behaviour Analysis, 20, 313– 327.
  • Cialdini, R., Kenrick, D., & Bauman, D. (1976). Effects of mood on prosocial behaviour in children and adults. In N. Eisenberg (Ed.), The development of prosocial behaviour (pp. 339-356). New York: Academic Press.
  • http://www.coe.int/T/e/Com/ about_coe/. Retrieved 2008-01-04.
  • Cialdini, Robert B. (2001). ‘‘Influence: Science and practice (4th ed.)’’. Boston: Allyn & Bacon.
  • http://www.economist.com/specialreports/displayStory.cfm?story_id=12749735
  • Cianciolo, A. T., & Sternberg, R. J. (2004). Intelligence: A Brief History. Malden, MA: Blackwell Publishing.
  • http://www.foreignaffairs.org/20060701faessay85401-p0/gurcharan-das/theindia-model.html
  • Alexander, F. and French, T. M. (1946). Psychoanalytic therapy: principles and applications. New York: Ronald Press.
  • http://www.hindu.com/2005/12/10/stories/2005121011760100.htm
  • Clark, E. V. (2003). First Language Acquisition. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press
  • http://www.indiaserver.com/betas/vshiva
  • Clark, H. H. (1996). Using Language. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press
  • http://www.niscair.res.in/aboutus/AnnRep07/ETTD.pdf
  • Bandura, A. (1973). Aggression: A Social Learning Analysis. Prentice-Hall; Oxford, England:
  • http://www.onlinelegaltips.com/human-rights/index.html
  • Clark, R. E. (1998). Motivating performance: Part 1 - Diagnosing and solving motivation problems. Performance Improvement, 37(8), 39-46.
  • http://www.rdn.ac.uk/projects/eprints-uk/docs/simpledc-guidelines/
  • Clarke, A. (2005). Situational Analysis: Grounded Theory After the Postmodern Turn. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage Publications.
  • http://www.socialresearchmethods.net/kb/qualapp.php
  • Bandura, A. (1977). Social Learning Theory. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice- Hall
  • Becker, H. S. (1960). Notes on the concept of commitment. American Journal of Sociology, 66, 32-40.
  • Clough, Patricia Ticineto (1998). The end(s) of ethnography: Now and then. Qualitative Inquiry, Vol. 4, No. 1 (March): 3-14. A concise recent summary by the author of The end(s) of ethnography: From realism to social criticism (1992; 2nd ed., 1998). Thousand
  • http://www.un.org/en/documents/udhr/index.shtml#a1.
  • Coffey, A.(1999). The ethnographic self: Fieldwork and the representation of identity. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage Publications. Treats “locating the self,” the interaction of the researcher and the field, and the sexualisation of the field and the self.
  • http://www.wisegeek.com/what-are-the-different-types-of-corporate-socialresponsibility-jobs.
  • Alexander, J. and Parsons, B. (1982). Functional family therapy: principles and procedures. Monterey, CA: Brooks Cole.
  • Huesmann LR. (1998). The role of social information processing and cognitive schema in the acquisition and maintenance of habitual aggressive behaviour. See Geen & Donnerstein 1998, pp. 73–109.
  • Cohen J. (1988) Statistical Power Analysis for the Behavioural Sciences. Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum.
  • Hull, C. L. (1943). Principles of behaviour. New York: Appleton-Century-Crofts.
  • Cohen-Kettenis,P.T.& Pfäfflin,F(2003). Transgenderism and Intersexuality in Childhood and Adolescence. Sage Publications.
  • Huseman, R.C.., Hatfield, J. D., & Miles, E. W. (1987). A new perspective on equity theory: The equity sensitivity construct. Academy of Management Review, 12(2), 222-234.
  • Allan, G. (2003). A critique of using grounded theory as a research method, Electronic Journal of Business Research Methods. 2(1) pp 1-10.
  • India-Canada Collaborative HIV/AIDS Project (ICHAP): ‘Community-based HIV prevalence study in ICHAP demonstration project area, key findings’, Bangalore: ICHAP, 2004.
  • Collins A.M., Loftus E.F. (1975). A spreading activation theory of semantic processing. Psychol. Rev. 82:407–28
  • Isen, A. M., & Levin, P. F. (1972). Effect of feeling good on helping: Cookies and kindness. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 21, 384-388.
  • Collins, R. (1981a). On the microfoundations of macrosociology. American Journal of Sociology 86(5), 984-1014.
  • Jackson. E. 11977. Counseling the dying. Death Education, 1. 27-39.
  • Collins, R. (1981b). Micro-translation as a theory building strategy. Pp. 81-108 in Knorr-Cetina, K. & Cicourel, A. V., eds. Advances in social theory and methodology: Toward an integration of micro- and macro- sociologies. Boston: Routledge & Kegan Paul.
  • Jamieson, D. W. Lydon, J. E., & Zanna, M. P. (1987). Attitude and activity preference similarity: Differential bases of interpersonal attraction for low and high self-monitors. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 53(6), 1052–1060.
  • Adler, A. The Neurotic Constitution. New York: Dodd, Mead, 1926.
  • Jeffrey A. Kottler & David S. Shepard (2008): Introduction to Counseling: Voices from the Field. Publisher: Thompson Brooks.
  • Baer, D. M. (1960). Escape and avoidance responses of preschool children to two schedules of reinforcement withdrawal. Journal of the Experimental Analysis of Behaviour, 3, 155–159.
  • John P. Foreyt, Diana P. Rathjen(1978): Cognitive Behaviour Therapy: Research and Application. Publisher: Plenum Press.
  • Compeau, D.R. and Higgins, C.A. (1995). Application of social cognitive theory to training for computer skills. Information Systems Research, 6(2), 118–43.
  • Aurelio Lopez-Tarruella Martinez (ed.), El comercio con China. Oportunidades empresariales, incertidumbres jurídicas, Tirant lo Blanch, Valencia (Spain) 2010, pp. 85-121. ISBN: 978-84-8456-981-7. Available at SSRN: http://ssrn.com/ abstract=1527992
  • Connell, Shaun. “Intellectual Ownership”. October 2007. [4] Farah, Paolo and Cima, Elena. “China’s Participation in the World Trade Organisation: Trade in Goods, Services, Intellectual Property Rights and Transparency Issues” in
  • Jung, C. J. (1976). The portable Jung. (J. Campbell, Ed.) New York, NY: Penguin Books.
  • Connoly, C. (1978). Counseling parents of school age children with special needs. Journal of School Health, 48,115-117.
  • Kakar, S. (1978). The inner world: A psychoanalytic study of childhood and society in India. New Delhi: Oxford University Press.
  • Cook, J. D., Hepworth, S. J., Wall, T.D., & Warr, P.B. (1981) Experience of Work: A Compendium and Review of 249 Measures and Their Use. San Francisco: Academic Press
  • Katz, D. & Kahn, R.L. (1966). The social psychology of organisations. New York: John Wiley.
  • Cook, Rebecca J.; Mahmoud F. Fathalla (September 1996). “Advancing Reproductive Rights Beyond Cairo and Beijing”. International Family Planning Perspectives (Guttmacher Institute) 22 (3): 115–121.
  • Kavussanu, M., Seal, A. R., & Phillips, D. R. (2006). Observed prosocial and antisocial behaviours in male soccer teams: Age differences across adolescence and the role of motivational variables. Journal of Applied Sport Psychology, 18, 326-344.
  • Bandura, A. (2004). Modeling. In E. W. Craighead & C. B. Nemeroff (Eds.). The concise Corsini Encyclopedia of psychology and behavioral sciences. New York: Wiley.
  • Kellett, M. and Nind, M. (2003). Implementing Intensive Interaction in Schools: Guidance for Practitioners, Managers and Coordinators. London, David Fulton UK
  • Cooley, C. H. (1956) Social Organisation, Free Press
  • Khandelwal, K.A. (2009). In search of Indianness: Cultures of Multinationals. New Delhi: Kanishka.
  • Coon, D. (2007). Introduction to Psychology: Thompson.
  • Kim, K. H. (2006). Can we trust creativity tests? A review of the Torrance Tests of creative thinking (TTCT). Creativity Research Journal, 18 (1), 3-14.
  • Cooper, C. (2003). Psychological counselling with young adults. In R. Woolfe, W. Dryden and S. Strawbridge (eds), Handbook of Counselling Psychology (2nd edn). London: Sage.
  • Kinsella, Stephan. “Against Intellectual Property”. Journal of Libertarian Studies 15.2 (Spring 2001): 1-53. [6]
  • Cooper, C., & Locke, E. A. (Eds.) (2000). Industrial & organisational psychology: Linking theory with practice. Oxford, UK: Blackwell.
  • Klein, M. Watch out for that last variable. In: Medinick, SA.; Moffitt, TE.; Stack, SA., editors. The causes of crime: New biological approach. Cambridge University Press; Cambridge: 1987.
  • Cooper, C.L. (1991). Industrial and Organisational Psychology, Vols 1 & 2. Aldershot, Hampshire: Edward Elgar Publishing; New York: New York University Press.
  • Knight, B. G. and Satre, D. D. (1999). Cognitive behavioural psychotherapy with older adults. Clinical Psychology: Science and Practice, 6, 188-203.
  • Cooper-Hakim, A., & Viswesvaran, C. (2005). The construct of work commitment: Testing an integrative framework. Psychological Bulletin, 131(2), 241-259.
  • Kogut, T. and I. Ritov (2005a), “The Identified victim effect: An identified group, or just a single individual?,” Journal of Behavioural Decision Making, 18 (3), 157-67.
  • Corcoran,D.W.(1964). The relation between introversion and salivation.American Journal of Psychology,77,298-300.
  • Koul, L. (1984), Methodology of Educational Research, Vikas Publishing House Pvt. Ltd. (II revised edition)
  • Bandura, A. (Ed.) (1995). Self-efficacy in changing societies. New York: Cambridge University Press
  • Kress, G, “Critical Discourse Analysis,” Robert Kaplan, ed., Annual Review of Applied Linguistics, II, 1990.
  • Corey, G. (1985). Theory and practice of group counseling (2nd ed.). Monterey, Calif.:Brooks/Cole Pub. Co.
  • Kunce, J. T . & Anderson, W. P.(1984).Perspectives on uses of the MMPI in non-psychiatric settings . In P. McReynolds & G.J.Chelune (eds.), Advances in psychological assessment (vol. 6,pp. 41-76).San Francisco: Jossey-Bass.
  • Allen, N. J., & Meyer, J. P. (1990). The measurement and antecedents of affective, continuance, and normative commitment to the organisation. Journal of Occupational Psychology, 63, 1–18.
  • Kurfiss J. (1988). Critical Thinking: Theory, Research, Practice, and Possibilities, ASHE-ERIC Higher Education Reports #2.
  • Corey, Gerald (2008). Theory and Practice of Group Counseling. Thomson Books, Belmont, CA
  • Lai, Edwin. “The Economics of Intellectual Property Protection in the Global Economy”. Princeton University. April 2001. [7]
  • Correll CU, Smith CW, Auther AM, McLaughlin D, Shah M, Foley C, et al. Predictors of remission, schizophrenia, and bipolar disorder in adolescents with brief psychotic disorder or psychotic disorder not otherwise specified considered at very high risk for schizophrenia. J Child Adolesc Psychopharmacol. Oct 2008;18(5):475-90.
  • Bell, R.Q., G. M. Weller, and M.F. Waldrop (1971) Newborn and preschooler: organisation of behaviour and relations between periods. Monographs of the Society for Research in Child Development, 36 (1& 2).
  • Bandura, A. (ed.). Psychological modeling: Conflicting theories. New York: Aldine Atherton, 1971a.
  • Latane, B. (1981) The Psychology of Social Impact. American Psychologist 36: 343–56.
  • Costa, P. T., Jr., & McCrae, R. R. (1992). Revised NEO Personality Inventory (NEO-PI-R) and NEO Five-Factor Inventory (NEO-FFI) professional manual. Odessa, FL: Psychological Assessment Resources.
  • Leach, C. (1979). Introduction to statistics: A non-parametric approach for the social sciences. Chichester: John Wiley & Sons
  • Costa, P. T., Jr., Terracciano, A., & McCrae, R. R. (2001). Gender differences in personality traits across cultures: Robust and surprising findings. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 81, 322-331.
  • Leider, Stephen, Markus Mobius, Tanya Rosenblat and Quoc-Anh Do. 2009. \Directed Altruism and Enforced Reciprocity in Social Networks.“ Forthcoming in Quarterly Journal of Economics (previously part of NBER Working Paper W13135, earlier version circulated under the title Social Capital in Social Networks).
  • Costa,P.T.,Jr.,& McCrae,R.R.(1994).The NEO PI/NEO-FFI Manual supplement.Odessa,FL:Psychological Assessment Research.
  • Lessig, Lawrence. “Free Culture: How Big Media Uses Technology and the Law to Lock Down Culture and Control Creativity”. New York: Penguin Press, 2004. [8].
  • Counselling and HIV/AIDS: UNAIDS Technical Update (UNAIDS Best Practice Collection: Technical Update). Geneva: UNAIDS, November, 1997.
  • Levine, R. V., Norenzayan, A., & Philbrick, K. (2001). Cross-cultural differences in helping strangers. Journal of Cross-Cultural Psychology, 32, 543–560
  • Crick, N. R., & Dodge, K. A. (1994). A review and reformulation of social information processing mechanisms in children’s social adjustment. Psychological Bulletin, 115, 74-101.
  • Lieberman, A. F. and Pawl, J. (1993). Infant-parent psychotherapy. In: C. H. Zeanah, ed. Handbook of infant mental health, pp. 427-42. New York: Guilford Press.
  • Bandura, A. and McDonald, F.J. (1963). Influence of social-reinforcement and behaviour of models in shaping children’s moral judgments. Journal of Abnormal and Social Psychology, 67(3), 274–81.
  • Lio, K. (1995). Professional orientation and organisational commitment among public employees: an empirical study of detention workers. Journal of Public Administration Research and Theory, 5, 231-246.
  • Croake, J. W. (1969). Fears of children, Human Development, 12, 239-247
  • Liu JH. Prenatal & perinatal complications as predispositions to externalizing behaviour. Journal of Prenatal & Perinatal Psychology & Health 2004a;18:301– 311.
  • Allen, N. J., & Meyer, J. P. (1996). Affective, continuance, and normative commitment: An examination of construct validity. Journal of Vocational Behaviour, 49, 252-276.
  • Berg, I. K. and de Shazer, S. (1993). Making numbers talk: language in therapy. In: S. Friedman, ed. The New Language of Change: Constructive Collaboration in Psychotherapy, pp. 5-24. New York: Guilford Press.
  • Crowne, D. P., & Marlowe, D. (1964). The approval motive: Studies in evaluative dependence. New York: Wiley.
  • Lok, P., & Crawford, J. (2001). Antecedents of organisational commitment and the mediating role of job satisfaction. Journal of Managerial Psychology, 16, 594–613.
  • Csíkszentmihályi, M. (1975). Beyond boredom and anxiety, San Francisco, CA: Jossey-Bass
  • Azrin, N. H. & Nunn, R. G. Habit-reversal: A method of eliminating nervous habits and tics. Behaviour Research and Therapy, 1 973, 11, 619-628.
  • Cunia, E. (2005). Cognitive learning theory. Principles of Instruction and Learning: A Web Quest. Retrieved April 2006, from http://suedstudent.syr.edu/ ~ebarrett/ide621/cognitive.htm
  • Gelade, G. A., & Young, S. (2005). Test of a service profit chain model in the retail banking sector. Journal of Occupational and Organisational Psychology, 78, 1-22.
  • Curry, J. and Reinecke, M. (2003). Modular therapy for adolescents with major depression. In: M. Reinecke, F. Dattilio, and A. Freeman, ed. Cognitive Therapy with Children and Adolescents, 2nd edn, pp. 95-127. New York: Guilford Press.
  • George, C., Kaplan, N., & Main, M. (1984). Adult Attachment Interview. Unpublished manuscript, University of California, Berkeley.
  • D’Zurilla, T. J. and Goldfried, M. R. (1971). Problem solving and behaviour modification. Journal of Abnormal Psychology, 78, 107-26.
  • Gerard, E. O. “Medieval Psychology: Dogmatic Aristotelianism or Observational Empiricism?,”J. Hist. Behav. Sci., 1966, 2, 315-329.
  • Dahlstorm,W.G.,Welsh,G.S.& Dahlstorm,L.E.(1975).An MMPI handbook(vol.2). Research applications. Minneapolis:University of of Minnesota Press.
  • Gick S. and G. Holyoak (1983). “Schema Induction and Analogical Transfer,” Cognitive Psychology 15: 1-38.
  • Dalal, R. S. (2005). A meta-analysis of the relationship between organisational citizenship behaviour and counterproductive work behaviour. Journal of Applied Psychology, 90(6), 1241-1255.
  • Ackerman, N.W. (1970). Family Process. Basic Books: New York.
  • Damico, J.S., Miller, N., & Ball, M.J. (2010). The Handbook of Language and Speech Disorders. Singapore: Blackwell.
  • Glaser BG (ed). Examples of Grounded Theory: A Reader. Sociology Press [7], 1993.
  • Allik, J., & McCrae, R. R. (2004). Toward a geography of personality traits: Patterns of profiles across 36 cultures. Journal of Cross-Cultural Psychology, 35, 13-28.
  • Glaser BG (ed). Grounded Theory 1984-1994. A Reader (two volumes). Sociology Press [9], 1995.
  • Darley, J. M. & Latané, B. (1969). Bystander “apathy.” American Scientist, 57, 244-268.
  • Glaser BG. Doing Grounded Theory - Issues and Discussions. Sociology Press [11], 1998.
  • Darley, J. M. and E. Aronson, “Self-evaluation vs. direct anxiety reduction as determinants of the fear-affiliation relationship,” J. Exp. Soc. Psych. Suppl, 1966, 1,66-79.
  • Glaser BG. The Grounded Theory Perspective II: Description’s Remodeling of Grounded Theory. Sociology Press [13], 2003.
  • Darley, J. M. and E. Berscheid, “Increased liking as a result of the anticipation of personal contact,” Hum. Rel., 1967, 20, 29-40.
  • Glaser, B. (1992). Basics of grounded theory analysis. Mill Valley, CA: Sociology Press.
  • Darley, J.M. & Batson, C.D. (1973). From Jerusalem to Jericho: A study of situational and dispositional variables in helping behaviour. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 27, 100-108.
  • Glaser, S. R., Zamanou, S., & Hacker, K. (1987). Measuring and interpreting organisational culture. Management Communication Quarterly, 1,173–198.
  • Darley, J.M., Glucksberg, S., & Kinchla, R.A. (1991). Psychology. New Jersey: Prentice Hall.
  • Godden A., Baddeley A. (1980), When does context influence recognition memory ? British Journal of Psychology, 71, 99-104.
  • Darlinton, R. B., & Macker, C. E. (1966). Displacement of guilt-produced altuistic behaviour. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 4(4), 442-443.
  • Goffman, E. (1970) Strategic Interaction, Oxford, Basil Blackwell.
  • Bandura, A. Principles of behaviour modification. New York: Holt, Rinehart & Winston, 1969.
  • Gold, R. (1983). Inappropriate conservation judgements in the concrete operations period. Genetic Psychology Monograhs, 107(2), 189-210.
  • Das, J. P. (2004). Theories of intelligence: Issues and applications. In M. Hersen (Ed.) Comprehensive handbook of psychological assessment.Vol. 1 Intellectual and neuropsychological assessment. G. Goldstein,& S. R. Beers (Volume Eds.) New York: John Wiley & Sons, Inc. (pp. 5-23)
  • Goldberg, L. R. (1992). The development of markers for the Big-Five factor structure Psychological Assessment, 4, 26-42.
  • Bandura, A., & Walters, R. H. (1959). Adolescent Aggression. New York: Ronald Press
  • Goldfried, M.R., Pachankis, J.E., & Bell, A.C. (2005). A history of psychotherapy integration. In J.C. Norcross & M.R. Goldfried (Eds.), Handbook of Psychotherapy Integration (2nd ed.). New York: Oxford University Press.
  • Dash, M. (2005). Education of Exceptional Children. New Delhi: Atlantic Publishers & Distributors.
  • Goldman, J. A., Rosenzweig, C. M. & Lutter, A. D. (1980). Effect of similarity of ego identity status on interpersonal attraction. Journal of Youth and Adolescence, 9(2), 153-162.
  • Davanloo, H. D. (1978). Basic principles and techniques in short-term dynamic psychotherapy. New York: Spectrum.
  • Anselm L. Strauss; Leonard Schatzman; Rue Bucher; Danuta Ehrlich & Melvin Sabshin: Psychiatric ideologies and institutions (1964)
  • Davanloo, H. D. (1990). Selected papers. New York: Wiley.
  • Gottfredson, L. (2003). Dissecting practical intelligence theory: Its claims and its evidence. Intelligence, 31, 343-397.
  • Davenport, Noa, Distler Schwartz, Ruth, Pursell Elliott, Gail Mobbing: Emotional Abuse in the American Workplace (1999, 2005 Third Edition) http:// www.mobbing-usa.com
  • Gough, H.G. (1987). The California Psychological Inventory administrator’s guide. Palo Alto,CA: Consulting Psychological Press.
  • Banister P, Burman E, Parker I, Taylor M & Tindall carol (1994) Qualitative Methods in Psychology: A Research Guide. Buckingham: Open University Press
  • Goulding, C. Grounded Theory: A Practical Guide for Management, Business and Market Researchers. London: Sage Publications, 2002.
  • David W., Helen K., Joan K. (2007): An Introduction to Cognitive Behaviour Therapy: Skills and Applications. SAGE Publishers
  • Gracia, J., McGrown, B. K., & Green, K. F. (1972) Biological constraints on conditioning. In A. H. Black and W. F. Prokasy (Eds) Classical Conditioning II: Current Research and Theory. New York: Appleton-Century-Crofts.
  • David, H. (1968). Social Psychology, Harper and Row, New York.
  • Green Arnold, Sociology, p. 71.
  • Davis, K. & Newstorm, J.W. (1989). Human behaviour at work, 8th Ed. New York: McGraw Hill.
  • Green, P.E., Tull, D.S. and Albaum, G. (1993), Research For Marketing Decisions, 5th edition, Prentice-Hall, pp. 105-107.
  • Barki, B. G. and Mukhopadhyay, B. (1995). Guidance and Counselling: A Manual, Sterling Publishers Private limited, New Delhi
  • Greeno, J. G. (1977). Process of understanding in problem solving. In N. J. Castellan, Jr., D. B. Pisoni & G. R. Potts (Eds.), Cognitive theory. Hillsdale, N.J.: Elrbaum.
  • Davis, L. E., Galinsky, M.J. and Schopler, J. H. (1995). RAP : A framework for leading multiracial groups, Social Work, 40 (2), 155-165.
  • Griffith, R. & Tengnah, C. (2007). Protecting Children: The role of the law 1. Principles and key concepts. British Journal of Community Nursing, 12, 122-4, 126-8.
  • Dawson and Gettys, Introduction to Sociology.
  • Guilford, J. P. (1956). The structure of intellect. Psychological Bulletin, 53, 267-293
  • De Raad, B., & Perugini, M. (Eds.). (in press). Big Five assessment. Gottingen, Germany: Hogrefe & Huber Publishers.
  • Guilford, J. P. (1977). Ways beyond the IQ: Guide to improving intelligence and creativity. Buffalo, N.Y.: Creative Educational Foundation
  • de Shazer, S. (1988) Clues: Investigating Solutions in Brief Therapy. New York: W.W.Norton.
  • Batson, C. D., Lishner, L. Dulin, S. Harjusola-Webb, E.L. Stocks, S. Gale, O. Hassan, and B. Samput (2003), “...As you would have them do unto you”: Does imagining yourself in the other’s place stimulate moral action?,” Personality and Social Psychology Bulletin, 29 (4), 1190-201.
  • de Shazer, S. (1992). Patterns of brief family therapy. New York: Guilford.
  • Guimond, S., Brunot, S., Chatard, A., Garcia, D. M., Martinot, D., Branscombe, N. R., et al. (2007). Culture, gender, and the self: Variations and impact of social comparison processes. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 92, 1118- 1134
  • Deci, E. L. (1975). Intrinsic motivation. New York: Plenum.
  • Gupta P. Frustration in socially disadvantaged adolescents. Child Psychiatry Quarterly 1983;16:34–38.
  • Deci, E.L., & Ryan, R.M. (1985). Intrinsic motivation and self-determination in human behaviour. New York: Plenum.
  • Batson, C. D., S. C. Sympson, J. L. Hindman, P. Decruz, R. M. Todd, J. L. Weeks, G. Jennings, and C. T. Burris (1996), “‘’I’ve been there, too’’: Effect on empathy of prior experience with a need,” Personality and Social Psychology Bulletin, 22 (5), 474-82.
  • Dennis, M. R. (2006). Compliance and Intimacy: Young Adults’ Attempts to Motivate Health-Promoting Behaviours by Romantic Partners. Health Communication, 19 (3), 259-267.
  • Guthrie, E., et al. (1999). Cost-effectiveness of brief psychodynamic-interpersonal therapy in high utilisers of psychiatric services. Archives of General Psychiatry, 56, 519-26.
  • Denzin, N. K. and Y. S. Lincoln (1994). Handbook of qualitative research. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage Publications.
  • Adams, G. R., & Cohen, A. S.(1976). An examination of cumulative folder information used by teachers in making differential judgements of children’s abilities. The Alberta Journal of Educational Research, 22, 216-224.
  • Department of Health. (2001). Treatment choice in psychological therapies and counselling: evidence-based clinical guideline. London: Department of Health.
  • Hahn, Robert W., Intellectual Property Rights in Frontier Industries: Software and Biotechnology, AEI Press, March 2005.
  • DEP-SSA, IGNOU (2008). A Document of Action Research, IGNOU, New Delhi.
  • Adams, S. J. (1963). Towards an understanding of inequity. Journal of Abnormal and Social Psychology, 67, 422–436.
  • Deputy, P. (2008). Human Communication Disorders. Disability Info: Speech and Language Disorders Fact Sheet (FS11). National Dissemination Center for Children with Disabilities.
  • Hall, D. T., B. Schneider & Nygren, H. T. (1970). Personal factors in organisational identification. Administrative Science Quarterly, 15, 176-190.
  • Deutsch, M. and M. E. Collins, “The effect of public policy in housing projects upon interracial attitudes,” in Eleanor Maccoby, T. M. Newcomb, and E. L. Hartley (Eds.), Readings in Social Psychology (3rd ed.). New York: Holt, 1958,612-623.
  • Hallahan, D. P., Kaufman, J. M. & Lloyd, J. W. (1985). Introduction to Learning Disabilities. Second Edition. Englewood Cliffs NJ: Prentice Hall, Inc.
  • Barling, J., Kelloway, E.K., & Iverson, R.D. (2003). High-quality work, job satisfaction, and occupational injuries. Journal of Applied Psychology, 88(2), 276-283.
  • Aronson, E., Wilson, T.D., & Akert, A.M. (2007). Social Psychology (6th Ed.). Upper Saddle River, NJ: Pearson Prentice Hall.
  • DeVito, J. A. (1976). The interpersonal communication book. New York, New York: Harper and Row.
  • Aronson, R.B., Macintyre, I.G., Precht, W.F., Wapnick, C.M., Murdoch, T.J.T., 2002. The expanding scale of species turnover events on coral reefs in Belize. Ecol. Monogr. 72, 233–249.
  • Barnett, M. A., P. A. Tetreault, J. A. Esper, and A. R. Bristow (1986), “Similarity and Empathy -the Experience of Rape,” Journal of Social Psychology, 126 (1), 47-49.
  • Batson, C.D., Chang, J., Orr, R., Rowland, J., 2002. Empathy, attitudes, and action: Can feeling for a member of a stigmatised group motivate one to help the group? Personality and Social Psychology Bulletin, 28(12), pp. 1656-1666.
  • Dewey, John (2008). The School and Society (first published in 1900). New Delhi: Aakar Books
  • Hartley, J. (1982) Understanding News, London and New York, Methuen.
  • Diana Sanders (2003). Counselling for Anxiety Problems. Sage Publications NY
  • Hartshorne, H. & May, M. A. (1929). Studies in the nature of character: Studies in service and self-control (Vol. 2). New York: Macmillan.
  • Barney G. Glaser; Anselm L. Strauss: The Discovery of Grounded Theory. Strategies for Qualitative Research (1967)
  • Hartup, W.W. (1983). Peer relations. In p. H. Mussen (Ed.) Handbook of child psychology (4 th ed. Vol. 4): Socialisation, personality, and social development. New York: John Wiley, 103- 106
  • DiBella, A. J. & Nevis, E. C. (1998). How Organisations Learn. San Francisco, Jossey-Bass
  • Hatton, C., Rivers, M., Mason, H., Emerson, L., Kiernan, C., Reeves, D., et al. (1999). Organisational culture and staff outcomes in services for people with intellectual disabilities. Journal of Intellectual Disability Research, 43, 206– 218.
  • Dickerson, S. S., & Kemeny, M. E. (2004). Acute stressors and cortisol responses: A theoretical integration and synthesis of laboratory research. Psychological Bulletin, 130(3), 355-391.
  • Havighurst, R.S. (1972). Developmental Tasks and Education (3rd Ed.), New York: David Mckay.
  • Dillon, W.R., Madden, T.J. and Firtle, N.H. (1994), Marketing Research In A Research Environment, 3rd edition, Irwin, p. 175.
  • Hawton, K. and Kirk, J. (1989). Problem-solving. In: K. Hawton, P. M. Salkovskis, J. Kirk, and D. M. Clark, ed. Cognitive behaviour therapy for psychiatric problems: a practical guide, pp. 406-26 Oxford: Oxford University Press.
  • Dirks, K. T. & Ferrin, D. L. (2002). Trust in leadership: meta-analytic findings and implications for research and practice. Journal of Applied Psychology, 84(4), 611-628.
  • Heine, S. J., Buchtel, E. E., & Norenzayan, A. (2008). What do cross-national comparisons of personality traits tell us?: The case of conscientiousness. Psychological Science, 19, 309-313.
  • Dittes, J. E. “Attractiveness of group as function of self-esteem and acceptance by group,” J. Abn. Soc.
  • Arrow, Kenneth J.(1995). Barriers to Conflict Resolution. W.W. Norton. NY
  • Allport, G. W. (1954). The historical background of modern psychology. In G. Lindzey (Ed.), Handbook of Social Psychology. Cambridge, MA: AddisonWesley.
  • Herzberg, F. (1966). Work and the nature of man. Cleveland: World Publishing.
  • Allport, G. W., & Odbert, H. S. (1936). Trait names: A psycho-lexical study. Psychological Monographs, 47, (1 Whole No. 211).
  • Hildebrand, H. P. (1990) Towards a psychodynamic understanding of later life. In Clinical and Scientific Psychogeriatrics(eds M. Bergener& S. I. Finkel). New York: Springer.
  • Barocas, R., & Karoly, P. (1972). “Effects of physical appearance on social responsiveness.” Psychology Reports 31:772-781.
  • Hill, C. E. (2004). Helping skills: Facilitating exploration, insight, and action (2nd ed.). Washington, DC: American Psychological Association.
  • Dodge, KA.; Schwartz, D. Social information processing mechanisms in aggressive behaviour. In: Breiling, JE., et al., editors. Handbook of antisocial behaviour. John Wiley; New York: 1997. p. 171-180.
  • Arsenault L, Tremblay RE, Boulerice B, Saucier JF. Obstetrical complications and violent delinquency: Testing two developmental pathways. Child Development 2002;73:496–508. [PubMed: 11949905]
  • Dollard J, Doob L, Miller N, Mowrer O, Sears R. (1939). Frustration and Aggression. New Haven, CT: Yale Univ. Press
  • Hocevar, D. (1980). Intelligence, divergent thinking, and creativity. Intelligence, 4, 25-40.
  • Dollard, J. (1939). Frustration and Aggression, Yale University Press.
  • Hodson, Randy (1999). Analysing documentary accounts. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage Publications. Quantitative Applications in the Social Sciences Series No. 128. Describes random sampling of ethnographic field studies as a basis for applying a meta-analytic schedule. Hodson covers both coding issues and subsequent use of statistical techniques.
  • Dollard, J., & Miller, N. E. (1950). Personality and psychotherapy. New York: McGraw-Hill.
  • Hoffman, M. (2000). Empathy and Moral Development: The Implications for Caring and Justice. Cambridge, UK: Cambridge University Press.
  • Dorothy M. Langley (2006): An Introduction to Drama Therapy. SAGE Publications Ltd.
  • Baumeister R.F. (1989). Masochism and the Self. Hillsdale, NJ. Erlbaum.
  • Douglas, S. C. & Martinko, M. J. (2001). Exploring the role of individual differences in the prediction of workplace aggression. Journal of Applied Psychology, 86(4), 547-559.
  • Hofstede, G., & McCrae, R. R. (2004). Personality and culture revisited: Linking traits and dimensions of culture. Cross-Cultural Research, 38, 52-88.
  • Dovidio, J. F., S. L. Gaertner, A. Validzic, K. Matoka, B. Johnson, and S. Frazier (1997), Extending the benefits of recategorization: Evaluations, self- disclosure, and helping,“ Journal of Experimental Social Psychology, 33 (4), 401-20.
  • Hogg, M. A. (2006). Social Identity Theory. In P. J. Burke (Ed.), Contemporary Social Psychological Theories. Stanford, CA: Stanford University Press.
  • Dozier,M., Lindheim,O. and Ackerman, J., P. ‘Attachment and Biobehavioural Catch-Up: An intervention targeting empirically identified needs of foster infants’. In “Enhancing Early Attachments; Theory, research, intervention, and policy”. Edited by Berlin, L.J., Ziv, Y., Amaya-Jackson, L. and Greenberg, M.T. The Guilford press. Duke series in Child Development and Public Policy. pp 178 – 194.
  • Hogg, M.A. and Terry, D.J. (2000). Social identity and self-categorization processes in organizational contexts. Academy of Management Review, 25(1), 121–40.
  • Allport,G.W.(1937). Personality: A Psychological Interpretation. New York: Holt, Rinehart and Winston.
  • Holmes, J. (2001). The search for the secure base: attachment theory and psychotherapy. London: Brunner-Routledge.
  • Draguns, J. R., Krylova, A. V., Oryol, V. E., Rukavishnikov, A. A., & Martin, T. A. (2000). Personality characteristics of the Nentsy in the Russian Arctic. American Behavioral Scientist, 44, 126-140.
  • Holtzman, W.H., Thorpe, J.S. ,(1961). Inkblot perception and personality- Holtzman Inkblot technique. Austin: University of Texas Press
  • Drayer, D. C. & H, L. M. (1997). When do opposites attract? Interpersonal complementarity versus similarity. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 72, 592-603
  • Hopps, J.G. and Pinderhughes, E.B. (1999). Group work with overwhelmed clients, New York : Free Press.
  • Dryden, W. (Ed.) (1992). Integrative and eclectic therapy. Philadelphia: Open University Press.
  • Horton, D., V. Galleno, and R. Mackay. 2003. Evaluation, learning, and change in research and development organisations. Discussion paper No. 03-2. The Hague: International Service for National Agricultural Research.
  • Baron, R. S., Vandello, J. A., & Brunsman, B. (1996). The forgotten variable in conformity research: Impact of task importance on social influence. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 71, 915-927.
  • Hough, M. (2006). Counselling Skills and Theory. Second edition. Hodder Arnold, Great Britain.
  • Barrett, R. P. (Ed.). (1986). Severe behaviour disorders in the mentally retarded: Nondrug approaches to treatment. New York: Plenum.
  • Hrebiniak, L. G., & Alutto, J. A. (1972). Personal and role related factors in the development of organisational commitment. Administrative Science Quarterly, 17, 555-572.
  • Dulany, D. E., Jr. “Hypotheses and habits in verbal ‘operant conditioning’ “J. Abn. Soc. Psych., 1961, 63, 251-263.
  • http://atlmri.googlepages.com/RCD_MILI.pdf
  • Dulit, R. A., Marin, D. B., & Francis, A. J. (1993). Cluster B personality disorders. In D. L. Dunner (Ed.) Current Psychiatric Therapy. Philadelphia: W. B. Saunders
  • Baver, R.C. (1955) Cases in College Administration: Bureau of Publications: Teacher College, Columbia University, New York.
  • Allport,G.W.(1960). Personality and Social Encounter: Selected Essays. Boston: Beacon Press.
  • http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Fundamental_Rights_in_India
  • E- counselling. www.aifs.gov.au/afrc/pubs/briefing/b15pdf/bp15.pdf on 11 Jan 2011
  • http://eppi.ioe.ac.uk/cms/default.aspx?tabid=2370&language=en-US.
  • Eagly, A. H., & Crowley, M. (1986). Gender and helping behaviour: A meta- analytic view of the social psychological literature. Psychological Bulletin, 100, 283-308.
  • http://EzineArticles.com/?expert=Joseph_Devine
  • Economic Effects of Intellectual Property-Intensive Manufacturing in the United States, Robert Shapiro and Nam Pham, July 2007 (archived on archive.org). Measuring the Economic Impact of IP Systems, WIPO, 2007.
  • http://hrw.org/doc/?t=africa. Retrieved 2008-01-03.
  • Edward T. Hall, The Silent Language, New York: Doubleday, 1959.
  • http://news.indiainfo.com/2006/04/20/2004imf-labour-laws.html
  • Edwards A.L. (1980) Experimental Design in Psychological Research, Holt, Richart and Winston, New York
  • http://qualitativeresearch.ratcliffs.net/examples.pdf
  • Edwards, J. & Edwards, J.R. (Eds.) (1994). Multilingualism. London: Routledge.
  • http://wps.prenhall.com/chet_airasian_edresearch_8/38/9871/2527218.cw/ index.html
  • Eisenberg, N., & Fabes, R.A.(1998). Prosocial Development. In W. Damon, (Ed.), Handbook of child psychology: Social, emotional, and personality development (Vol. 3, pp. 701–778). New York: Wiley.
  • http://www.achpr.org/english/_info/mandate_en.html. Retrieved 2008-01-03.
  • Eisenberg, N., & Mussen, P. (1989). The roots of prosocial behaviour in children. New York: Cambridge University Press.
  • http://www.africa-union.org/root/au/AboutAu/au_in_a_nutshell_en.htm. Retrieved 2008-01-03
  • Eisenberg, N., Cumberland, A., Guthrie, I. K., Murphy, B. C., & Shepard, S. A. (2005). Age changes in prosocial responding and moral reasoning in adolescence and early adulthood. Journal of Research on Adolescence, 15, 235-260.
  • http://www.aict-ctia.org/courts_conti/acj/acj_home.html. Retrieved 2008-01-03.
  • Barrowclough, C., King, P., Colville, J., et al (2001) A randomized trial of effectiveness of cognitive–behavioural therapy and supportive counselling for anxiety symptoms in older adults. Journal of Consulting and Clinical Psychology, 69, 756–762.
  • http://www.audiencedialogue.net/kya16a.html
  • Eisenberger, R., Fasolo, P., & Davis-LaMastro, V. (1990). Perceived organisational support and employee diligence, commitment and innovation. Journal of Applied Psychology, 75, 51-59.
  • http://www.blurtit.com/q528407.html http://indiacode.nic.in/fullact1.asp?tfnm=200046
  • Eisenson, J. (1986). Language and Speech Disorders in Children. London: Elsevier.
  • http://www.ccsindia.org/interns2006/How%20Wrong%20is%20left% 20about%20 ecoonimic%20reforms%20in%20India%20-%20Aditya.pdf
  • Elbing, Carol & Elbing, Alvar Militant Managers: How to Spot ... How to Work with ... How to Manage ... Your Highly Aggressive Boss (1994)
  • http://www.citehr.com/1864-aligning-hr-business-strategy-yahoo-groups.html
  • Barry, C. M., & Wentzel, K. R. (2006). Friend influence on prosocial behaviour: The role of motivational factors and friendship characteristics. Developmental Psychology, 42, 153-163.
  • http://www.coe.int/T/E/Human_Rights/Esc/. Retrieved 2008-01-04.
  • Elliot D. Cohen and Gale Spieler Cohen, (1999). The Virtuous Therapist: Ethical Practice of Counseling and Psychotherapy (Belmont, CA: Brooks/Cole.
  • http://www.dlib.org/dlib/september03/gadd/09gadd.html
  • Elliott, DS.; Ageton, S.; Huizinga, D.; Knowles, B.; Canter, R. The prevalence and incidence of delinquent behaviour: 1976–1980. Behaviour Research Institute; Boulder, Colorado: 1983. National Youth Survey. Report No. 26
  • http://www.education.com/reference/article/prosocial-behaviour/
  • Ellis A. Healthy and unhealthy aggression. Humanitas 1976;12:239–254.
  • http://www.ehow.com/info_8117691_four-types-corporate-socialresponsibility.html
  • en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Business_plan
  • http://www.franceonu.org/spip.php?article4092
  • en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Corporate_social_responsibility
  • http://www.gsr.gov.uk/downloads/evaluating_policy/a_quality_framework.pd
  • en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Human_rights_ in_ India
  • Beck, A. T., Rush, A. J., Shaw, B. F., and Emery, G. (1979). Cognitive Therapy of Depression. New York: Guilford Press.
  • Engleberg, Isa N.; Wynn, Dianna R. (2007).(In English). Working in groups. p,175-193(4th edition).
  • http://www.ilo.org/public/english/protection/safework/violence/costof.htm
  • Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall.
  • http://www.indiatogether.org/combatlaw/vol2/issue3/harass.htm
  • Epstein, Seymour. 1979. The Stability of Behavior: I. On Predicting Most of the People Much of the Time. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology 37: 1097–1126.
  • http://www.mallenbaker.net/csr/definition.php
  • Erickson, E. (1959). Identity and the Life Cycle. New York: Norton.
  • http://www.oas.org/documents/eng/biographies.asp?group=hhrr. Retrieved 200801-03.
  • Erikson, E. (1966) Eight ages of man. International Journal of Psychoanalysis, 2, 281–300.
  • http://www.oecd.org/dataoecd/17/52/39452196.pdf
  • Etscheidt, S. (1991). Reducing aggressive behaviour and increasing self control. A cognitive-behavioural training program for behaviourally disordered adolescents. Behavioural Disorders, 16, 107-115.
  • http://www.openarchives.org/OAI/2.0/guidelines-eprints.htm
  • Everett, J.B. Downing, Ms. S. Leaviet, H. (1960) Case Studies in School Supervision, Rincehart & Company, Inc. New York.
  • http://www.qualres.org/HomeGuid-3868.html
  • Ewen, R. B. (2003). An Introduction to Theories of Personality. New York: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates.
  • http://www.sae.org/about/intelproperty/ippolicy.pdf
  • Exner, J.E.Jr.(1966). The Rorschach systems.New York: Grune & Statton.
  • http://www.siliconindia.com/shownews/World_Bank_criticizes_India%E2% 80%99s_labour_laws_-nid-29498.html
  • Barry, H. III and A. Schlegel, eds. (1980). Cross-cultural Samples and Codes. Pittsburgh, PA: University of Pittsburgh Press.
  • http://www.southasiaexperts.se/pdf/Indian%20Labour%20Law%20 PDF.pdf
  • Eysenck, H.J.,& Eysenck, S.B.G.(1993). Eysenck Personality Questionnaire [Revised]. London: Hodder & Stoughton.
  • http://www.state.gov/g/drl/rls/77593.htm#4
  • Bartlett, K. R. (2001). The relationship between training and organisational commitment: A study in the health care field. Human Resource Development Quarterly, 12(4), 333-352.
  • http://www.thehindubusinessline.in/2004/09/17/stories/2004091700091100.htm
  • Eysenck,H.J.(1976).Sex and Personality. Austin: University of Texas Press.
  • http://www.transitionaljustice.org.za/index.php?option=com_content&task= view&id=2677&Itemid=49
  • Eysenck,H.J.(1982). Personality, Genetics, and Behaviour. New York: Praeger.
  • http://www.un.org/esa/socdev/enable/comp210.htm#10.2
  • Eysenck,H.J.(1994).The Big-five or Giant three:Criteria for a paradigm. In C.F.Halverson,Jr.,G.A.Honhnstamm &R.P.Martin(Eds.).The developing structure of temperament & personality from infancy to childhood(pp 37-51). Hillsdale, NJ:Earlbaum.
  • http://www.well.com/user/smalin/miller.html]
  • Eysenck,S.B.,& Eysenck,H.J.(1973).Test –retest reliabilities of a new personality questionnaire for children.British Journal of Psychology,43,26-130.
  • http://www.wisegeek.com/what-is-workplace-harassment.htm
  • Eysenck,S.B.,& Eysenck,H.J.(1975).Manual of the Eysenck Personality Questionnaire. San Diego,CA:EdITS.
  • http://www.worldbank.org/html/prdph/downsize/docs/india.pdf
  • Fabes, R. A., Carlo, G., Kupanoff, K., & Laible, D. (1999). Early adolescence and prosocial/moral behaviour I: The role of individual processes. Journal of Early Adolescence, 19, 5-16.
  • Hughes, D. (2004). An attachment-based treatment of maltreated children and young people. Attachment & Human Development, 3, 263–278.
  • Farber, Barry A.(1998). The psychotherapy of Carl Rogers: Cases and Commentary. Guilford Press.
  • Huitt, W. (2000). The Information Processing Approach. Educational Psychology Interactive. Valdosta, GA: Valdosta State University.
  • Farrel, D., & Stamm, C. L. (1988). Meta-analysis of the correlates of employee absence. Human Relations, 41, 211-227.
  • Aswathappa.K., (2003) Human Resource and Personnel Management Text and Cases, 4th Edition, New Delhi, Tata McGraw Hill.
  • Faulkner, A. and Maguire, P. (1994). Talking to cancer patients and their relatives. New York: Oxford University Press.
  • Atkins MS, Stoff DM, Osborne ML, Brown K. Distinguishing instrumental and hostile aggression: Does it make a difference? Journal of Abnormal Child Psychology 1993;21:355–365. [PubMed: 8408984]
  • Feigenberg, L. (1975.). Care and understanding of the dying: patient-centered approach.Omega, 6. 81-94.
  • Huston, T. & Levinger, G. (1978). “Interpersonal Attraction and Relationships.” Annual Reviews 29:115-56.
  • Feil, N. (1982) Validation. The Feil Method. Cleveland, OH: Edward Feil Productions.
  • Iman, R. L., and W. J. Conover (1981), Rank transformations as a bridge between parametric and non-parametric statistics, The American Statistician, 35, 124–129.
  • Feindler, E. (1991). Cognitive strategies in anger control: interventions for children and adolescents. In: P. Kendall, ed. Child and adolescent therapy: cognitive behavioural procedures, pp. 66-87. New York: Guilford Press.
  • Ingram, D. (1989). First Language Acquisition: Method, Description, and Explanation. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
  • Allport,G.W.(1961). Pattern and Gowth in Personality. New York:Holt,Rinehart and Winston.
  • Interpersonal psychotherapy for depression. New York: Basic Books.
  • Amabile, T. M. (1983). Social psychology of creativity. New York: Springer- Verlag.
  • Jackson, D. N. (1974).Jackson Personality Inventory Manual.Port Huron, MI: Research Psychologists Press.
  • Ferenczi, S. (1920). The future development of an active therapy in psychoanalysis. In: J. Suttie, ed. Further contributions to the theory and technique of psychoanalysis. London: Hogarth Press and the Institute of Psychoanalysis.
  • Jackson, Susan E and Sehuler, Randall,S., Human Resource Planning, Challenges for Industries and Organisation Psychologists. American Psychologists, Feb. 1990 PP. 223-239.
  • Ferris, C.F. & Grisso, T. (1996). Understanding aggressive behaviour in children. Annals of the New York Academy of Sciences; New York, p. 426-794.
  • Jacobson, G. F. (1980). Crisis theory. In: G. F. Jacobson, ed. New directions for mental health services: crisis intervention in the 1980s. San Francisco, CA: Jossey Bass.
  • Agar, Michael (1996). Professional Stranger: An Informal Introduction to Ethnography, Second edition. Academic Press, ISBN 0120444704 .
  • James, W. (1892) Psychology: the briefer course. New York: Henry Holt.
  • Ferster, C. B. (1961). Positive reinforcement and behavioural deficits in autistic children. Child Development, 32,347–356.
  • Jane Milton, Caroline Polmear and Julia Fabricius (2004): A Short Introduction to Psychoanalysis. SAGE Publishing Ltd.
  • Feshbach, S. Aggression. In: Mussen, P., editor. Carmichael’s manual of child psychology. Wiley; New York: 1970. p. 159-259.
  • Jarvis T, Tebbutt J, et.al (1995). Treatment Approaches for Alcohol and Drug Dependence. An Introductory Guide. Chichester, West Sussex: John Wiley & Sons.
  • Festinger, L. “Architecture and group membership,”J. Soc. Iss., 1951, 1, 152163.
  • Beghetto, R. A. & Kaufman, J. C. (2007). Toward a Broader Conception of Creativity: A Case for “mini-c” Creativity. Psychology of Aesthetics, Creativity, and the Arts, 1, 73–79.
  • Festinger, L., S. Schachter, and K. Back. Social Pressures in Informal Groups: A Study of Human Factors in Housing. New York: Harper, 1950.
  • Job satisfaction and turnover among psychiatric technicians. Journal of Applied Psychology, 59(5), 603–609.
  • Fetterman, David M. (1998). Ethnography step-by-step, second edition. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage Publications. Treats interviewing by “chatting,” use of the Internet, research ethics, report-writing, and more.
  • John, M. C., & Taylor, W. T (1999). Leadership style, school climate and the institutional commitment of teachers. International Forum (InFo), 2(1), 25- 57.
  • Field, Tim Bully In Sight: How to Predict, Resist, Challenge and Combat Workplace Bullying (1996) ISBN 0-9529121-0-4
  • Belkin, G.S (1988) Contemporary Psychotherapies (2nd ed) Montery, CA: Brooks/ Cole
  • Field,D. and Johnson, I. (1993). Satisfaction and change: a survey of volunteers in a hospice organisation. Social Science & Medicine, 36(12), 1625–33.
  • Joneja, G.K. (1997). Occupational Information in Guidance. National Council of Educational Research and Training, NewDelhi.
  • Fisher, R.J. and Ackerman, D. (1998). The effects of recognition and group need on volunteerism: a social norm perspective. Journal of Consumer Research, 25(3), 262–75.
  • Judgments - Johnson (A.P.) v. Unisys Limited, Uk Parliament - Publications
  • Fleeson, William. 2001. Towards a Structure- and Process-Integrated View of Personality: Traits as Density Distributions of States. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology 80: 1011–1027.
  • Jurafsky, D., & Martin, J.H. (2009). Speech and Language Processing: An Introduction to Natural Language Processing, Computational Linguistics, and Speech Recognition. NJ: Prentice Hall.
  • Fleeson, William. 2004. Moving Personality Beyond the Person-Situation Debate: The Challenge and Opportunity of Within-Person Variability. Current Directions in Psychological Science 13: 83–87.
  • Kaiser, H.F., & Michael, W.B. (1975). Domain Validity and Gernalisability. Educational and Psychological Measurement, 35, 31-35
  • Fletcher, P., & MacWhinney, B. (Eds.) (1995). The Handbook of Child Language. Oxford: Blackwell.
  • Kalenthaler, E., Parry, G., and Beverley, C. (2003). Computerised cognitive behaviour therapy: a systematic review. Behavioural and Cognitive Psychotherapy, 32, 31-55.
  • Flippen, A.R., H.A Hornstein, W.E. Siegal, and E.A. Weitman (1996), „A comparison of similarity and interdependence as triggers for ingroup formation,“ Personality and Social Psychology Bulletin, 76, 338-402.
  • Kaplan, R. “Concluding Essay: On Applied Linguistics and Discourse Analysis,” ed Robert Kaplan, Annual Review of Applied Linguistics, Vol. II, 1990.
  • Bassman, Emily S. Abuse in the Workplace: Management Remedies and Bottom Line Impact (1992)
  • Katz, D. & Kahn, R.L. (1978). The social psychology of organisations, 2nd Ed. New York: Wiley.
  • Flyvbjerg , Bent (2006). “Five Misunderstandings about Case Study Research” Qualitative Inquiry, vol. 12, (2) pp. 219-245.
  • Backman, C. W. and P. F. Secord. “The effect of perceived liking on interpersonal attraction,” Hum. Rel., 1959, 12, 379-384.
  • Baston, C.D. (1987). Prosocial motivation: Is it ever truly altruistic? In L. Berkowitz (Ed.), Advances in experimental social psychology, 20 (p. 65-122), New York: Academic Press, p. 65-122.
  • Kazdin, A. E. (1982).The token economy: A decade later. Journal of Applied Behaviour Analysis, 15, 431-445.
  • Martin, L. J. (1944) A Handbook for Old Age Counsellors. San Francisco, CA: Geertz.
  • Kelle, U. (2005). “Emergence” vs. “Forcing” of Empirical Data? A Crucial Problem of “Grounded Theory” Reconsidered. Forum Qualitative Sozialforschung / Forum: Qualitative Social Research [On-line Journal], 6(2), Art. 27, paragraphs 49 & 50. [1]
  • Baston, C.D., Bolen, M.H., Cross, J.A., and Neuringer-Benefiel, H.E. (1986). Where is the altruism in the altruistic personality? Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 50(1), 212-220.
  • Kellogg, R.T. (2007). Cognitive Psychology. London: Sage Publications.
  • Bateman, A. and Holmes, J. (1995). Introduction to Psychoanalysis: Contemporary Theory and Practice. London: Routledge.
  • Kernberg, O. F. (1965). Countertransference. Journal of the American Psychoanalytic Association, 13, 38–56.
  • Fraiberg, S. (1980). Clinical studies in infant mental health. New York: Basic Books.
  • Khandwalla, P.N. (1988). Organisational effectiveness. In J. Pandey (Ed.). Psychology in India: The state of the art, Vol. 3, pp. 97-216. New Delhi: Sage.
  • Framo, J.L. (1970). Symptoms from a Family Transactional Viewpoint. In Family Therapy in Transition. Edited by Ackerman. NW. Boston, MA, Little, Brown, 1970, pp 125–171.
  • Kim, J. (in press). Examining the effectiveness of solution-focused brief therapy: A metaanalysis. Research on Social Work Practice.
  • Frank, J. D. (1973). Persuasion and healing: A comparative study of psychotherapy (Rev.ed.). Baltimore: Johns Hopkins University Press.
  • Kim, U., & Hakkoe, H. (1994). Individualism and Collectivism: Theory, Method and Applications. Berkeley, CA: SAGE Publications.
  • Frank, J. D. (1974). Psychotherapy: The restoration of morale. American Journal of Psychiatry,131, 271–274.
  • King, S., Engi, S., & Poulos, S. (1998). Using the Internet to assist family therapy. British Journal of Guidance and Counselling, 26(1), 43-52.
  • Frank, L. K. (1939). Projective methods for the study of personality. Journal of personality, 8, 389-413.
  • Kirchmeyer, C. (1995). Managing the work-nonwork boundary: An assessment of organisational responses. Human Relations, 48, 515-536.
  • Abbot, B. (2002). Human Memory. Fort Wayne: Indiana University-Purdue University at Fort Wayne, Psychology Department., from http://users.ipfw.edu/ abbot/120/LongTermMemory.html
  • Kissane, D. W., et al. (1997). Cognitive-existential group therapy for patients with primary breast cancer-techniques and themes. Psycho-Oncology, 6, 25-33.
  • Freedman, Lynn P.; Stephen L. Isaacs (Jan. – Feb. 1993). “Human Rights and Reproductive Choice”. Studies in Family Planning (Population Council) 24 (1): 18–30.
  • Kleinmuntz, B.(1982).Personality and psychological assessment. New York: St. Martin’s Press.
  • Freeman, F. S. (1971). Theory and Practice of Psychological Testing. New Delhi: Oxford (India).
  • Knafo, A., & Plomin, R. (2006). Parental discipline and affection and children’s prosocial behaviour: Genetic and environmental links. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 90, 147–164.
  • American Psychological Association (1923). Intelligence and its measurement: A symposium. Journal of Educational Psychology, 12 (Author)
  • Knights, D. & Willmott, H. (1989). Power and subjectivity at work. Sociology , 23(4), 535-558 .
  • Freeman, Michael (2002). Human Rights: an Interdisciplinary Approach. WileyBlackwell. pp. 15–17. ISBN 9780745623559.
  • Koestenbaum, P. (19"6). Here’s an answer to death? Englewood Cliffs. N.J.: Prentice-Hall.
  • French, J. R. P., Jr. & Raven, B. (1959) The Bases of Social Power. In: Cartwright, D. (Ed.), Studies in Social Power. Institute for Social Research, Ann Arbor, MI, pp. 150–67.
  • Kogut, T. and I. Ritov (2005b), “The singularity effect of identified victims in separate and joint evaluations,” Organizational Behaviour and Human Decision Processes, 97 (2), 106-16.
  • Bateman, T.S., & Strasser, S. (1984). A longitudinal analysis of the antecedents of organisational commitment. Academy of Management Journal, 27(1), 95– 112.
  • Kohn, A. (1990). The Brighter Side of Human Nature: altruism and empathy in everyday life. N.Y.: BasicBooks.
  • French, W.L., Kast, F. E., & Rosenzweig, J.E. (1985). Understanding human behaviour in organisations. New York: Harper & Row.
  • Kramer, R.M. (1993). Cooperation and organizational identification. In J.K.Murnighan (ed), Social psychology in organizations: advances in theory and research (pp. 244–268).
  • Luthans, F. & Kreitner, R. Organisational behaviour modification. Glenview, Ill.: Scott, Foresman, 1975.
  • Krehbiel James P. Cognitive Therapy’s Application to Anorexia Nervosa, www. Krehbielcounseling.com
  • Luthans, F. and Kreitner, R. (1985). Organizational behaviour modification, Illi. Scott Foresman.
  • Krumboltz, J. D. & Schroeder, W. W. Promoting career planning through reinforcement. Personnel and Guidance Journal, 1965, 44, 1 9—26.
  • Lykken, D. T. (1995). The antisocial personalities. Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum.
  • Kubler-Ross, E. (Ed.) (1981). Living with death and dying. New York: Macmillan.
  • M. Foucault (1970). The order of things. Pantheon.
  • Ayllon, T. D., & Michael, J. (1959). The psychiatric nurse as a behavioural engineer. Journal of the ExperimentalAnalysis of Behaviour, 2, 323–334.
  • M. Foucault (1977). Discipline and Punish. New York: Pantheon.
  • Kurdek, L. A., & Schnopp-Wyatt, D. (1997). Predicting relationship commitment and relationship stability from both partners’ relationship values: Evidence from heterosexual dating couples. Personality and Social Psychology Bulletin, 23(10), 1111-1119.
  • M. Foucault (2003). Society Must Be Defended. New York: Picador.
  • Kvale, Steinar (1996). Interviews: An introduction to qualitative research interviewing. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage Publications. Not specifically ethnographic, but treats approaches to interviews and surveys from the concerns of phenomenology, hermeneutics, and postmodernism.
  • MacIntyre,A. (1967). Egoism and altruism. In P. Edwards (ed), The encyclopedia of philosophy (Vol. 2, pp. 462–6).New York:Macmillan.
  • Lachman, M.E.(Ed). (2001). Handbook of Midlife Development. New York, Wiley.
  • MacKenzie, K.R. (1983). The clinical application of a group climate measure. In R. Dies and K.R. MacKenzie (Eds.) Advances in group psychotherapy: Integrating research and practice (155-170). New York: International Universities Press.
  • Laing, R. D. (1976 edition) The Politics of the Family, and other essays, Harmondsworth, Penguin.
  • Azrin, N. H., & Lindsley, O. R. (1956). The reinforcement of cooperation between children. Journal of Abnormal and Social Psychology, 52, 100–102.
  • Lambert, E., Barton, S., & Hogan, N. (1999). The missing link between job satisfaction and correctional staff behaviour: The issue of organisational commitment. American Journal of Criminal Justice, 24, 95-116.
  • Madsen, C. H., Becker, W. C., & Thomas, D. R. (1968). Rules, praise, and ignoring: Elements of elementary classroom control. Journal of Applied Behaviour Analysis,1, 139–150.
  • Lanyon, R. I. & Goodstein, L.D.(1997).Personality Assessment.3 rd edition. John Wiley & Sons.
  • Mager, R. F. & Pipe, P. Analysing performance problems or ‘You really oughta wanna.’ Belmont, Calif.: Fearon, 1970.
  • Laschinger, H. K. S., Shamian, J., & Thomson, D. (2001). Impact of magnet hospital characteristics on nurses’ perceptions of trust, burnout, quality of care, and work satisfaction. Nursing Economics, 19, 209–219.
  • Malan, D. H. (1976). The frontier of brief psychotherapy. New York: Plenum.
  • Latane, B. (1996) Dynamic Social Impact: The Creation of Culture by Communication. Journal of Communication 4: 13–25.
  • Manheimer, D.I., G.D. Mellinger, and H.M. Crossley (1966), “A follow-up study of seat belt usage,” Traffic Safety Research Review, 10, 2-13.
  • Lazarus, A.A. (1989). The Practice of Multimodal Therapy: Systematic, Comprehensive, and Effective Psychotherapy. Baltimore: Johns Hopkins University Press.
  • Mann, J. Vicarious desensitisation of test anxiety through observation of videotaped treatment. Journal of Counseling Psychology, 1 972, 19, 1-7.
  • Lee, Richmond. Scope and Interplay of IP Rights ACCRALAW offices.
  • Mark A. Lemley, “Property, Intellectual Property, and Free Riding” (Abstract); see Table 1: 4-5.
  • Lehman, E. L. (1975). Non-parametric statistical methods based on ranks. San Francisco: Holden-Day.
  • Markey, P.M.& Markey, C. N.(2007) Romantic ideals, romantic obtainment, and relationship experiences: The complementarity of interpersonal traits among romantic partners. Journal of social and Personal Relationships, 24(4), 517-533.
  • Leonard, L.B. (2000). Children with Specific Language Impairment. NY: MIT Press.
  • Back, K. W. and M. D. Bogdonoff. “Plasma lipid responses to leadership, conformity, and deviation.” In P. H. Leiderman and D. Shapiro (Eds.) Psychobiological Approaches to Social Behaviour. Stanford, Calif.: Stanford Univer. Press, 1964, 36-39.
  • LeShan. L. &LeShan, E. (1961). Psychotherapy and the patient with a limited life span. Psychiatry. 24(4), 318-323.
  • Aber, J., Slade, A., Berger, B., Bresgi, I., & Kaplan, M. (1985). The Parent Development Interview. Unpublished manuscript, City University, New York.
  • Levine, David; Michele Boldrin (2008-09-07). Against Intellectual Monopoly. Cambridge University Press..
  • Gaertner, K. N., & Nollen, S. D. (1989). Career experiences, perceptions of employment practice and psychological commitment to the organisation. Human Relations, 42, 975-91
  • Levine, M., C. Cassidy, G. Brazier, and S Reicher (2002), “Self-categorization and bystander non-intervention: Two experimental studies,” Journal of Applied Social Psychology, 32 (7), 1452-63.
  • Gage, N. L. and D. C. Berliner (1992). Educational Psychology, 5th ed., Houghton Mifflin Co..
  • Levinson, H. (1972). Organisational Diagnosis. Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press
  • Achenbach, T.M. Child Behaviour Checklist and related instruments. In: Maruish, ME., editor. The use of psychological testing for treatment planning and outcome assessment. Lawrence Erlbaum Associates; Hillsdale, NJ: 1994. p. 517-549.
  • Libert, R.M; Nelson, R.W; & Kail, R.V (1986) Developmental Psychology, Prentice-Hall, Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey 07632
  • Anderson, C. A., & Bushman, B. J. (2002). Human aggression. Annual Review of Psychology, 53, 27–51.
  • Lim, K.H.,Ward, L.M., and Benbasat, I. (1997). An empirical study of computer system learning: comparison of co-discovery and self-discovery methods. Information Systems Research, 8(3), 254–72.
  • Gankar, S.V; Mamoria, C. B and Pareek, U (2004). Personnel Management. Delhi. Himalaya Publishing House.
  • Lindberg, Van. Intellectual Property and Open Source: A Practical Guide to Protecting Code. O’Reilly Books, 2008. ISBN 0-596-51796-3 | ISBN 9780596517960
  • GAO (2003). Federal programs: Ethnographic studies can inform agencies’ actions GAO-03-455, March 2003. Available at http://www.gao.gov/cgi-bin/ getrpt?GAO-03-455. Numerous case examples of federal agencies’ use of ethnographic research.
  • Lippitt, R. & White, R.K. (1943). The social climate in children’s groups. In R.G. Baker, J.S. Koumin, & H.F. Wright (Eds.). Child behaviour and development. New York: Mc-Graw-Hill.
  • Gardner, H. (1975) .The shattered mind, New York: Knopf.
  • Liu JH, Raine A, Venables P, Dalais C, Mednick SA. Malnutrition at age 3 years predisposes to externalizing behaviour problems at ages 8, 11 and 17 years. American Journal of Psychiatry. 2004
  • Anderson, S.B. & Ball, S. (1978). The Profession and Practices of Program Evaluation. San Francisco. Jossey-Bass.
  • Lleó, C. (Ed.)(2006). Interfaces in multilingualism: Acquisition and representation. PA: John Benjamins Publishing Co.
  • Gardner, H. (1998). Are there additional intelligences? The case for naturalist, spiritual, and existential intelligences. In J. Kane (Ed.), Education, information, and transformation. Upper Saddle River, NJ: Merrill-Prentice Hall.
  • Lochman, J. E., White, K. J., and Wayland, K. K. (1991). Cognitive-behavioural assessment and treatment with aggressive children. In: P. C. Kendall, ed. Child and adolescent therapy: cognitive and behavioural procedures, pp. 25-66. New York: Guilford Press.
  • Gardner, H. (1999). Intelligence reframed: Multiple Intelligences for the 21st Century. New York: Basic Books.
  • Locke, E. A., & Latham, G. P. (1990). A Theory of Goal Setting and Task Performance. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall.
  • Garfield, S. L. (1989). The practice of brief psychotherapy. Elmsford, NJ: Pergamon.
  • Lofquist, L. H., & Dawis, R. V. (1969). Adjustment to work. New York: AppletonCentury-Crofts.
  • Garfield, S. L. (1995). Psychotherapy: an eclectic-integrative approach. New York: Wiley.
  • Lott, A. J. and B. E. Lott. “Group cohesiveness, communication level, and conformity,” J. Abn. Soc. Psych., 1961, 62, 408-412.
  • Garfinkel, H. (1967) Studies in Ethno Methodology, Prentice-Hall
  • Luria, A. R. (1966). Human brain and psychological processes. New York: Harper & Row
  • Garrod, S. & Pickering, M.J. (2001). Language Processing. East Sussex: Psychology Press.
  • Luria, A.R. (1980). Higher cortical functions in man (2nd Ed.). New York, NY: Basic Books.
  • Gazzaniga, M.S., Ivry, R., & Mangun, G.R. (2002). Cognitive Neuroscience: The Biology of the Mind. New York: W.W. Norton.
  • Geen R.G. (2001). Human Aggression. Taylor & Francis. 2nd Ed.
  • Lydon, J. E., Jamieson, D. W., & Zanna, M. P. (1988). Interpersonal similarity and the social and intellectual dimensions of first impressions. Social Cognition, 6(4), 269-286.
  • Freud, S. (1905). On psychotherapy. Reprinted (1953–1974) in the Standard Edition of the Complete Works of Sigmund Freud (trans. & ed. J. Strachey), vol. 7. London: Hogarth Press.
  • M. Foucault (1969). L’Archéologie du savoir. Paris: Éditions Gallimard.
  • Friedberg, R. D. and McClure, J. M. (2002). Clinical Practice of Cognitive Therapy with Children and Adolescents: the Muts and Bolts. New York: Guilford Press.
  • M. Foucault (1972). Archaeology of knowledge. New York: Pantheon.
  • Friedkin, N. (1998) A Structural Theory of Social Influence. Cambridge University Press, Cambridge.
  • M. Foucault (1980). “Two Lectures,” in Colin Gordon, ed., Power/Knowledge: Selected Interviews. New York: Pantheon.
  • Froggatt, W. (2003). FearLess: Your guide to overcoming anxiety. Auckland. HarperCollins.
  • Macgowan, M.J. (2000). Evaluation of a measure of engagement for group work, Research on Social Work Practice, 10(3), 348-361.
  • Fromm, E., “Selfishness and self-love,” Psychiatry, 1939, 2, 507-523.
  • MacIver, R. M., Society, p. 521.
  • Frone, M.R., Russell, M., & Cooper, M.L. (1992). Antecedents and consequents of work-family conflict: Testing a model of the work-family interface. Journal of Applied Psychology, 77, 65-78.
  • Maclver, R.M.(1953). An Introductory Analysis, Mcmillian co. London, p 213.
  • Fuller, P. R. (1949). Operant conditioning of a vegetative organism. American Journal of Psychology, 62, 587–590.
  • Madison, D. Soyini (2005) Critical ethnography: Method, Ethics, and Performance. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage Publications.
  • Funder, D. C. (2001). The Personality Puzzle (2nd ed.). New York: W. W. Norton.
  • Mael, F.A. and Ashforth, B.E. (1995). Loyal from day one: biodata, organizational identification, and turnover among newcomers. Personnel Psychology, 48(2), 309–33.
  • Funder, David C. 2005. Toward a Resolution of the Personality Triad: Persons, Situations, and Behaviors. Journal of Research in Personality 40: 21–34.
  • Malan, D. H. (1963). A study of brief psychotherapy. London: Tavistock Publications.
  • Funder,D.C., & Colvin,C.R.(1991).Exploration in behavioural consistency: Properties of persons ,situation and behaviour. Journal of Personality &Social Psychology,60,773-794.
  • Malan, D. H. (1979). Individual psychotherapy and the science of psychodynamics. London: Butterworths.
  • Furnham, A. (1990).Faking personality questionnaires: Fabricating different profiles for different purposes. Current Psychology: Research and Reviews, 9, 46-55.
  • Mann, J. (1978). Time-limited psychotherapy. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.
  • Futterman, Susan When You Work for a Bully: Assessing Your Options and Taking Action
  • Manstead, A.S.R. & Gun R. S. (2007) Methodology in Social Psychology in Hewstone, M., Stroebe, W. & Jonas, K. (Eds.). Introduction to Social Psychology (4th ed.). London: Blackwell.
  • Gabbard, G. O. (1995). Countertransference: the emerging common ground. International Journal of Psycho-Analysis, 76, 475-85.
  • Markey, P. M. (2000). Bystander intervention in computer-mediated communication. Computers in Human Behaviour, 16, 183-188.
  • Gabbard, G. O. (2000a). Psychodynamic psychiatry in clinical practice, 3rd edn. Washington, DC: American Psychiatric Press.
  • Markowitz, J. C., et al. (1998). Treatment of depressive symptoms in human immunodeficiency virus-positive patients. Archives of General Psychiatry. 55(5), 452-7.
  • Gabbard, G. O., Gunderson, J. G., and Fonagy, P. (2002). The place of psychoanalytic treatments within psychiatry. Archives of General Psychiatry, 59, 505-10.
  • An Introduction, Chicago, Rand McNally College Publishing Company.
  • Martin, Patricia Yancey, Turner, Barry A. (1986) Grounded Theory and Organisational Research. The Journal of Applied Behavioral Science, 22(2),141. Retrieved June 21, 2009, from ABI/INFORM Global database. (Document ID: 1155984).
  • Folger, R. & Konovsky, M. 1989. Effect of procedural and distributive justice on reactions to pay raise decisions. Academy of Management Journal, 32, 115130
  • Marvin, R., Cooper, G., Hoffman. K, & Powell, B. (2002). The circle of security project: attachment-based intervention with caregiver-preschool child dyads. Attachment and Human Development, 4 (1), 107-124.
  • Folstein, M. F., Folstein, S. E., and McHugh, P. R. (1975). Mini-Mental State: a practical method for grading the cognitive state of patients for the clinician. Journal of Psychiatric Research, 12, 189-98.
  • Fonagy, P., Gergely, G., Jurist, E. L., & Target, M. (2002). Affect Regulation, Mentalisation and the Development of the Self. New York: Other Press.


Comments

People also read...

IGNOU Corner >> Exams >> Results >> Final Score Calculator

Solved IGNOU Assignment >> MPC003 >> Q4